GRE - EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02 TS-PV Power Plant

CODICE – CODE
GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02
Global Power Generation
PAGINA - PAGE
Engineering & Construction
1 of 287
Technical Specification
PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER PLANT

Engineering, Equipment’s manufacturing, Civil and
Electromechanical Works for the Execution Phase
M. Scarfogliero, O. Privitera, M. Basili, C. Borgonovi A. Sabene

02 07.08.2020 Major changes, see Revision Table V. Rapisarda, A. Mir , A.
Miniello, B. Cirillo M. Risita, A. Lombardo
B. Cirillo, A. Miniello, A. Mir, C. Borgonovi, G. Favata A. Sabene
E. Tosi, G. Monopoli,
01 28.02.2020 Major changes, see Revision Table
L. Pellegrino, A. Lombardo,
L. Freddo, A. Marconi
M. Scarfogliero
B. Cirillo, A. Miniello, A. Mir, C. Borgonovi, G. Favata A. Sabene
E. Tosi, G. Monopoli,
00 02.12.2019 Technical Specification Photovoltaic Power Plant
L. Pellegrino, A. Lombardo,
L. Freddo, A. Marconi
M. Scarfogliero
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED VALIDATED
CODE
ISSUED BY COUNTRY TEC. PLANT SYSTEM SERIAL N. REV.
G R E E E C S 2 7 X X A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 5 6 0 2
CLASSIFICATION PUBLIC COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL RESTRICTED ARCHIVE ID
This document is property of Enel Green Power S.p.A. It is strictly forbidden to reproduce this document, in whole or in part, and to provide to others
any related information without the previous written consent by Enel Green Power S.p.A.
CODICE – CODE
Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02
Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

2 of 287
CONTENTS
0. GENERAL .......................................................................................................11
0.1. APPLICABLE REGULATION ............................................................................11
1. PV POWER PLANT ...........................................................................................11
1.1. EQUIPMENT ...............................................................................................11
1.1.1. PV MODULES ....................................................................................... 11
1.1.1.1. MAIN COMPONENTS ...............................................................................13
1.1.1.1.1. Solar Cells .....................................................................................13
1.1.1.1.2. Backsheet – Monofacial .....................................................................14
1.1.1.1.3. Backsheet – Bifacial .........................................................................14
1.1.1.1.4. Encapsulant ...................................................................................14
1.1.1.1.5. Front Glass ....................................................................................15
1.1.1.1.6. Back Glass – Bifacial ........................................................................15
1.1.1.2. MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................15
1.1.1.2.1. Frame ..........................................................................................15
1.1.1.3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................................15
1.1.1.3.1. Junction Box ..................................................................................15
1.1.1.3.2. Connectors ....................................................................................16
1.1.1.3.3. Cables..........................................................................................16
1.1.1.4. OTHERS ............................................................................................16
1.1.1.4.1. Pre-Sorting ....................................................................................16
1.1.1.4.2. Packaging .....................................................................................16
1.2. PV PARK ....................................................................................................18
1.2.1. FIELD PARALLEL ................................................................................. 18
1.2.1.1. DC PARALLEL ......................................................................................19
1.2.1.1.1. DC Pre-Parallel Boxes ......................................................................19
1.2.1.1.2. String Boxes ..................................................................................20
1.2.1.1.2.1. Active String Boxes (with monitoring) .................................................22
1.2.1.1.3. Harness ........................................................................................22
1.2.1.1.3.1. T Junction .................................................................................23
1.2.1.1.3.2. Trunk Cable ...............................................................................24
1.2.1.1.4. Electrical Components ......................................................................25
1.2.1.1.4.1. Cables ......................................................................................25
1.2.1.1.4.2. Fuses .......................................................................................26
1.2.1.1.4.3. SPD.........................................................................................26
1.2.1.1.4.4. Switch Disconnector .....................................................................26
1.2.1.1.4.5. DC Y/X Connector .......................................................................26
1.2.1.1.5. DC Fast Connectors .........................................................................26
CODICE – CODE

3 of 287
1.2.1.2. AC PARALLEL ......................................................................................27

1.2.1.2.1. AC Field Boxes ...............................................................................27
1.2.1.2.2. Electrical Components ......................................................................29
1.2.1.2.2.1. Cables ......................................................................................29
1.2.1.2.2.2. Fuses .......................................................................................30
1.2.1.2.2.3. SPD.........................................................................................30
1.2.1.2.2.4. Switch Disconnector .....................................................................30
1.2.1.3. COMMON EQUIPMENT .............................................................................30
1.2.1.3.1. Cable Gland ...................................................................................30
1.2.1.3.2. Boxes ..........................................................................................30
1.2.2. INVERTER ........................................................................................... 31
1.2.2.1. STRING INVERTER .................................................................................33
1.2.2.2. CENTRALIZED INVERTER ..........................................................................41
1.2.3. MV CABINS ......................................................................................... 49
1.2.3.1. CONFIGURATION FIELDS CABINS .................................................................52
1.2.3.1.1. Conversion Cabin ............................................................................53
1.2.3.1.2. LV/MV Transformation Cabin ..............................................................54
1.2.3.1.3. LV Busbar Connection ......................................................................56
1.2.3.2. CONFIGURATION CONNECTION CABINS ..........................................................56
1.2.3.2.1. Delivery Cabin ................................................................................57
1.2.3.2.2. Parallel Cabin .................................................................................58
1.2.3.3. BUILDING ...........................................................................................59
1.2.3.3.1. Structure .......................................................................................59
1.2.3.3.2. Safety Equipment ............................................................................59
1.2.3.3.3. Cableway ......................................................................................60
1.2.3.3.4. Interlocks ......................................................................................61
1.2.3.3.5. Signing .........................................................................................64
1.2.3.4. MAIN EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................64
1.2.3.4.1. AC Parallel Box ...............................................................................64
1.2.3.4.2. MV Switchboard ..............................................................................66
1.2.3.4.2.1. MV Switchboard for Conversion/Transformation Cabins ..........................66
1.2.3.4.2.2. MV Switchgear for Delivery Cabin .....................................................74
1.2.3.4.3. MV/LV Transformer ..........................................................................79
1.2.3.4.3.1. Oil-Sealed .................................................................................79
1.2.3.4.3.2. Dry Type ...................................................................................85
1.2.3.4.3.3. Pre-Casted and Metal Oil Retention Tank ...........................................90
1.2.3.5. OTHER EQUIPMENT ................................................................................90
1.2.3.5.1. Auxiliary Services Electrical Panel ........................................................90
CODICE – CODE

4 of 287
1.2.3.5.2. LV/LV Transformer for auxiliary Services ................................................94

1.2.3.5.3. Power Analyzer (Metering) .................................................................94
1.2.3.5.4. UPS ............................................................................................95
1.2.3.6. SERVICE EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ 100
1.2.3.6.1. Equipotential System ...................................................................... 100
1.2.3.6.2. Normal & Emergency Lighting ........................................................... 101
1.2.3.6.3. Ventilation System ......................................................................... 101
1.2.3.6.4. Smoke Detection System ................................................................. 102
1.2.3.6.5. Anti-Intrusion System ...................................................................... 103
1.2.3.6.6. Anti-Rodent device ......................................................................... 104
1.2.3.6.7. Insulation Monitoring System ............................................................ 104
1.2.4. PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES ................................................................. 106
1.2.4.1. FOUNDATION ..................................................................................... 106
1.2.4.1.1. Ramming Pole .............................................................................. 106
1.2.4.1.2. Pre-Drilled and Ramming ................................................................. 106
1.2.4.1.3. Pre-Drilling and Screwing ................................................................. 107
1.2.4.1.4. Screws ....................................................................................... 107
1.2.4.1.5. Screwing ..................................................................................... 108
1.2.4.1.6. Drilling and Concreting .................................................................... 108
1.2.4.1.7. Shallow Foundations ...................................................................... 108
1.2.4.2. STRUCTURES IN ELEVATION .................................................................... 109
1.2.4.2.1. Welding ...................................................................................... 109
1.2.4.2.2. Bolts .......................................................................................... 109
1.2.4.3. PROTECTIVE TREATMENT ....................................................................... 109
1.2.4.3.1. Galvanization ............................................................................... 110
1.2.4.3.1.1. Pre-Galvanization ...................................................................... 115
1.2.4.3.1.2. Hot Dip Galvanization ................................................................. 115
1.2.4.3.2. Other ......................................................................................... 115
1.2.4.4. MONO-AXIAL TRACKER.......................................................................... 116
1.2.4.4.1. Mechanical .................................................................................. 116
1.2.4.4.1.1. Defense System ........................................................................ 117
1.2.4.4.1.2. Motor and Actuator ..................................................................... 117
1.2.4.4.1.3. Rotation Head .......................................................................... 118
1.2.4.4.1.4. Drive and Control System ............................................................. 119
1.2.4.4.2. Electronic Control Board .................................................................. 119
1.2.4.4.3. Communication ............................................................................. 119
1.2.4.4.3.1. Wireless.................................................................................. 120
1.2.4.4.3.2. Wired ..................................................................................... 120
CODICE – CODE

5 of 287
1.2.4.4.4. Tracker Power Supply ..................................................................... 120

1.2.4.4.5. Back-Tracking .............................................................................. 121
1.2.4.4.6. Monitoring ................................................................................... 122
1.2.4.4.6.1. Inclinometer ............................................................................. 122
1.2.4.4.6.2. Integrated Encoder ..................................................................... 122
1.2.4.5. SEASONAL ........................................................................................ 122
1.2.4.6. FIXED STRUCTURES ............................................................................. 123
1.2.5. CABLES ............................................................................................ 126
1.2.5.1. POWER MV....................................................................................... 126
1.2.5.1.1. AC Cable .................................................................................... 126
1.2.5.1.2. Associated Equipment..................................................................... 128
1.2.5.1.2.1. Terminal ................................................................................. 128
1.2.5.1.2.2. Cable Joint .............................................................................. 128
1.2.5.2. POWER LV ....................................................................................... 129
1.2.5.2.1. DC Cable .................................................................................... 129
1.2.5.2.2. AC Cable .................................................................................... 130
1.2.5.2.3. Solar Cables ................................................................................ 130
1.2.5.2.4.1. Solar Connectors ....................................................................... 131
1.2.5.2.4.2. Terminal ................................................................................. 131
1.2.5.2.4.3. Cable Joint .............................................................................. 132
1.2.5.3. SIGNAL/DATA CABLE ............................................................................ 132
1.2.5.3.1. Fiber Optic ................................................................................... 132
1.2.5.3.2. Copper Cable ............................................................................... 138
1.2.5.3.3.1. Ethernet Switches ...................................................................... 144
1.2.5.3.3.2. Opto-electronic converters ............................................................ 147
1.2.5.3.3.3. Fiber Connectors ....................................................................... 147
1.2.6. AUXILIARY SCADA ............................................................................. 148
1.2.6.1. TRACKER SCADA ............................................................................... 150
1.2.6.1.1. Tracker SCADA (Server/HMI) ............................................................ 151
1.2.6.2. INVERTER SCADA............................................................................... 154
1.2.6.2.1. Configuration ................................................................................ 154
1.2.6.2.1.1. String Inverter ........................................................................... 154
1.2.6.2.1.2. Centralized Inverter .................................................................... 155
1.2.6.2.2. Power Plant Controller .................................................................... 157
1.2.6.2.3. Master Power Plant Controller ........................................................... 162
1.2.6.2.4. Inverter Controller-PLC-RTU ............................................................. 165
CODICE – CODE

6 of 287
1.2.6.2.5. Local SCADA (Server/HMI) .............................................................. 168

1.2.7. METEOROLOGICAL MONITORING SYSTEM ............................................. 181
1.2.7.1. SYSTEM........................................................................................... 182
1.2.7.1.1. Meteorological Tower ...................................................................... 182
1.2.7.1.2. Field monitoring system ................................................................... 184
1.2.7.2. INSTRUMENTS .................................................................................... 186
1.2.7.2.1. Sensors ...................................................................................... 186
1.2.7.2.1.1. Pyranometers ........................................................................... 186
1.2.7.2.1.2. SPN1 ..................................................................................... 186
1.2.7.2.1.3. All-in-one weather ...................................................................... 186
1.2.7.2.1.4. Soiling device ........................................................................... 187
1.2.7.2.1.5. Module temperature sensors ......................................................... 188
1.2.7.2.1.6. Anemometer ............................................................................ 188
1.2.7.2.1.7. UV Radiometer ......................................................................... 188
1.2.7.2.2. Data Logger ................................................................................. 189
1.2.7.2.3. Wiring and Power Supply ................................................................. 191
1.2.8. TEMPORARY FACILITIES ..................................................................... 191
1.2.8.1. STORAGE AREAS ................................................................................ 191
1.2.9. DEFINITIVE INFRASTRUCTURES............................................................ 192
1.2.9.1. ROADS ............................................................................................ 192
1.2.9.2. PLATFORM/FOUNDATION ........................................................................ 193
1.2.9.2.1. Platform ...................................................................................... 193
1.2.9.2.2. Foundation .................................................................................. 194
1.2.9.2.2.1. Shallow Foundation .................................................................... 194
1.2.9.2.2.2. Deep Foundation ....................................................................... 195
1.2.9.2.3. Concrete Structure Sealing ............................................................... 195
1.2.9.2.4. Transformer Foundation-Tank ........................................................... 195
1.2.9.3. SECURITY SYSTEM .............................................................................. 195
1.2.9.3.1. Fence ........................................................................................ 196
1.2.9.3.2. Gate .......................................................................................... 198
1.2.9.3.3. Intrusion System ........................................................................... 198
1.2.9.3.3.1. Detectors ................................................................................ 198
1.2.9.3.3.2. Control Unit and Alarms ............................................................... 200
1.2.9.3.3.3. Video Surveillance and Recording .................................................. 201
1.2.9.4. DRAINAGE SYSTEM .............................................................................. 203
1.2.9.5. TRENCHES AND W ORKS ON CABLES ........................................................... 205
1.2.9.5.1. Trench........................................................................................ 205
1.2.9.5.1.1. Civil Execution .......................................................................... 205
CODICE – CODE

7 of 287
1.2.9.5.1.2. Backfilling ................................................................................ 205

1.2.9.5.2. Cableway .................................................................................... 206
1.2.9.5.2.1. Ducts ..................................................................................... 206
1.2.9.5.2.2. Change Direction & External-Grounded Cables Manholes ...................... 207
1.2.9.5.2.3. Joint Inspection Manhole ............................................................. 207
1.2.9.5.2.4. Cables Mechanical Protection ....................................................... 208
1.2.9.5.2.5. Warning Tape ........................................................................... 208
1.2.9.5.2.6. Underground Cable Laying ........................................................... 208
1.2.9.5.2.7. Termination-Joints Execution ........................................................ 209
1.2.9.5.3. Hanger Structures Cableway ............................................................. 209
1.2.9.5.3.1. Requirements on Cables installed on air ........................................... 210
1.2.9.6. MV OVERHEAD LINE............................................................................. 210
1.2.9.6.1. Mechanical Sizing .......................................................................... 212
1.2.9.6.1.1. Pole Foundation ........................................................................ 212
1.2.9.6.2. Electrical Sizing of Conductors .......................................................... 212
1.2.9.6.3. Electromechanical Equipment ........................................................... 213
1.2.9.6.3.1. Conductors .............................................................................. 213
1.2.9.6.3.2. Insulator .................................................................................. 217
1.2.9.6.3.3. Poles ..................................................................................... 217
1.2.9.6.3.4. Cross Bar and Steel Bracing ......................................................... 217
1.2.9.6.3.5. Clamps and Joints ..................................................................... 217
1.2.9.6.3.6. Surge Arrester and Horn Gap ........................................................ 217
1.2.9.6.3.7. Disconnectors ........................................................................... 218
1.2.9.6.3.8. Ground Rods and Conductor for Earthing .......................................... 218
1.2.9.6.3.9. Optical Cable for Signal ............................................................... 218
1.2.9.6.3.10. MV Cable for End of Line Connection .............................................. 218
1.2.9.7. EARTHING SYSTEM .............................................................................. 219
1.2.9.7.1. PV Park Network and Grid ................................................................ 219
1.2.9.7.2. Interconnection with Substation System................................................ 221
1.2.9.7.3. Fence ........................................................................................ 221
1.2.9.7.4. Perimetrical CCTV System ............................................................... 222
1.2.9.7.5. Cabin (External) ............................................................................ 222
1.2.9.7.6. Boxes/SPD .................................................................................. 223
1.2.9.7.7. Grounding Method MV Cables ........................................................... 223
1.2.10. WORKS ............................................................................................ 233
1.2.10.1. SITE PREPARATION .............................................................................. 233
1.2.10.1.1. Cleaning ..................................................................................... 233
1.2.10.1.2. Topsoil Removal ........................................................................... 233
CODICE – CODE

8 of 287
1.2.10.1.3. Heavy Earth Movement ................................................................... 234

1.2.10.2. PV MODULES ACTIVITY ......................................................................... 234
1.2.10.2.1. PV Modules Installation ................................................................... 234
1.2.10.2.2. PV Modules Cabling ....................................................................... 234
1.2.10.2.3. PV Modules Cleaning ..................................................................... 235
1.2.10.2.4. Serial Number Database .................................................................. 235
1.2.10.3. CABINS ACTIVITY ................................................................................ 236
1.2.10.3.1. Equipment Interconnection ............................................................... 236
1.2.11. OTHER ACTIVITIES ............................................................................. 238
1.2.11.1. FINISHING......................................................................................... 238
1.2.11.1.1. Cables and Equipment Labeling ......................................................... 238
1.2.11.1.2. Equipment Sealing ......................................................................... 239
1.2.11.1.3. Solar Cable Fixing ......................................................................... 239
1.2.11.2. TRAINING ......................................................................................... 239
1.2.11.2.1. PCU .......................................................................................... 239
1.2.11.2.2. Auxiliary SCADA ........................................................................... 241
1.3. PROCESSES ............................................................................................. 242
1.3.1. ENGINEERING .................................................................................... 242
1.3.1.1. GENERAL ......................................................................................... 242
1.3.1.2. SPECIFIC STUDIES ............................................................................... 242
1.3.1.2.1. Earthing System ............................................................................ 242
1.3.1.2.2. Risk Assessment for Lightning Protection System ................................... 244
1.3.1.2.3. Cable Sizing................................................................................. 245
1.3.1.2.3.1. LV Cables ............................................................................... 246
1.3.1.2.3.2. MV Cables ............................................................................... 248
1.3.1.2.3.3. Voltage Drop & Power Losses ....................................................... 252
1.3.1.2.4. Fuses Sizing ................................................................................ 255
1.3.1.2.4.1. DC parallel boxes (pre-parallel box, string box, and DC switch box) .......... 255
1.3.1.2.4.2. QPP/inverter DC input panel ......................................................... 256
1.3.1.2.4.3. String Inverter ........................................................................... 256
1.3.1.2.4.4. AC Fuse Sizing ......................................................................... 256
1.3.1.2.5. Hydrological, Hydraulic Studies and Erosion Control Plan .......................... 257
1.3.1.2.5.1. Hydrological Study ..................................................................... 257
1.3.1.2.5.2. Hydraulic Study ......................................................................... 258
1.3.1.2.5.3. Erosion Control Plan ................................................................... 259
1.3.1.2.6. Structural design requirements for supporting structures ............................ 260
1.3.1.2.7. Foundation design requirements for supporting structures .......................... 268
1.3.1.3. ON-SITE ACTIVITIES ............................................................................. 269
CODICE – CODE

9 of 287
1.3.1.3.1. Topography ................................................................................. 269

1.3.1.3.2. Geotechnical Studies ...................................................................... 280
1.3.1.3.3. Pull-Out Test ................................................................................ 281
CODICE – CODE

10 of 287
REVISION TABLE
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION
00 02.12.2019 Issued
 1.1.1. PV modules; 1.1.1.1.1 Solar cells; 1.1.1.1.3 Backsheet - Bifacial; 1.1.1.2.1 Frame;
1.1.1.3.3 Cables;
 1.2.1. Field Parallel; 1.2.1.1.1. DC Pre-Parallel Boxes; 1.2.1.1.2. String Boxes; 1.2.1.1.3.
Harness; 1.2.1.1.4.1 Cables; 1.2.1.1.4.2. Fuses; 1.2.1.2.1. AC Pre-Parallel Boxes; 1.2.1.3.2.
Boxes; 1.2.2. Inverter; 1.2.2.1. String Inverter; 1.2.3.4.1. DC Parallel Box; 1.2.3.4.3.1. MV
Switchboard for Conversion/Transformation Cabins; 1.2.3.4.3.2. MV Switchgear for Delivery
Cabin; 1.2.3.4.4.1. Oil-sealed;
 1.2.4.3.1 Galvanization; 1.2.4.3.2 Other; 1.2.4.4.1.1. Defense System; 1.2.4.4.1.4 Drive and
Control System;
 1.2.6.2.4 Local SCADA Server/HMI; 1.2.7.1.1 Meteorological Tower;
01 28.02.2020  1.2.9.3 Security System; 1.2.9.3.1 Fence; 1.2.9.3.2 Gate; 1.2.9.3.3 Intrusion System;
1.2.9.3.3.1 Detectors; 1.2.9.3.3.2. Control Unit and Alarms; 1.2.9.3.3.3.Video Surveillance and
Recording;
 1.2.9.5.1 Trench; 1.2.9.5.1.2 Backfilling; 1.2.9.5.2 Cableway; 1.2.9.5.2.1. Ducts; 1.2.9.6 MV
Overhead Line; 1.2.9.6.1. Mechanical Sizing; 1.2.9.6.1.1. Pole Foundation; 1.2.9.6.2. Electrical
Sizing of Conductors; 1.2.9.6.3. Electromechanical Equipment; 1.2.9.6.3.1. Conductors;
1.2.9.6.3.2. Insulator; 1.2.9.6.3.3. Poles; 1.2.9.6.3.4. Cross Bar and Steel Bracing; 1.2.9.6.3.5.
Clamps and Joints; 1.2.9.6.3.6. Surge Arrester and Horn Gap; 1.2.9.6.3.7. Disconnectors;
1.2.9.6.3.8. Ground Rods and Conductor for Earthing; 1.2.9.6.3.9. Optical Cable for Signal;
1.2.9.6.3.10. MV Cable for End of Line Connection; 1.2.10.2.2. PV Modules cabling; 1.2.11.1.3.
Solar Cable Fixing; 1.2.11.2.2.Auxiliary SCADA; 1.3.1.2.3.3. Voltage Drop and Power Losses;
 1.1.1. PV modules; 1.1.1.1.1 Solar cells; 1.1.1.1.5 Front Glass; 1.1.1.1.1.6. Back Glass-
Bifacial; 1.1.1.3.1. Junction Box; 1.1.1.3.2 Connectors
 1.2.1. Field Parallel; 1.2.1.1.1. DC Pre-Parallel Boxes; 1.2.1.1.2. String Boxes; 1.2.1.1.3.1. T
Junction; 1.2.1.1.4.5. DC Y/X Connector; 1.2.1.1.5 DC Fast Connectors; 1.2.1.2.1. AC Field
Boxes; 1.2.1.3.1. Cable Gland
 1.2.2.1. String Inverter; 1.2.2.2. Centralized Inverter
 1.2.3.1.2. LV/MV Transformation Cabin; 1.2.3.3.4. Interlocks; 1.2.3.4.1. DC Parallel Box
(deleted); 1.2.3.4.2. AC Parallel Box; 1.2.3.5.1. Auxiliary Services Panel; 1.2.3.6.4. Smoke
Detection System; 1.2.3.6.6. Anti-rodent system; 1.2.3.6.7. Insulation Monitoring System;
 1.2.4.4.4. Tracker Power Supply; 1.2.4.4.5. Backtracking;
02 28.07.2020  1.2.5.2. Power LV; 1.2.5.2.1. DC Cable; 1.2.5.2.2. AC Cable; 1.2.5.2.3. Solar Cables;
1.2.5.2.4.1. Solar Connectors; 1.2.5.2.4.2. Terminal;
 1.2.5.3.1 Fiber Optic; 1.2.5.3.2. Copper Cable;
 1.2.6. Auxiliary SCADA; 1.2.6.1. Tracker SCADA; 1.2.6.1.1. Tracker SCADA (Server/HMI);
1.2.6.2. Inverter SCADA; 1.2.6.2.2. Power Plant Controller; 1.2.6.2.3. Master Power Plant
Controller; 1.2.6.2.4 Inverter Controller- PLC-RTU; 1.2.6.2.5. Local SCADA (Server/HMI);
 1.2.7.1.1. Meteorological Tower; 1.2.7.2.1.7. UV Radiometer; 1.2.7.2.2. Data Logger; 1.2.7.2.3.
Wiring and Power Supply;
 1.2.9.4. Drainage System; 1.2.9.5.2. Cableway; 1.2.9.6.1.1. Pole Foundation;
 1.3.1.2.3. Cable Sizing; 1.3.1.2.3.3. Voltage Drop and Power Losees; 1.3.1.2.5.3. Erosion
Control Plan; 1.3.1.2.6. Structural design requirement for supporting structures
CODICE – CODE

11 of 287
0. GENERAL
The aim of this Technical Specification is to define the design, manufacturing and constructive criteria for the
equipment’s supply, civil and electromechanical works for the execution of a Photovoltaic Power Plant.
The Contractor shall follow the guidelines and specifications defined in this document to assure an
acceptable quality of work.
The Contractor is responsible to implement the highest professional standards and good practices during the
execution phase of the Power Plant.
0.1. APPLICABLE REGULATION
Supplier responsibility is to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the requirements of the referenced Codes,
Standards and regulations at international and local level.
All equipment, materials, instrumentation and works incorporated into this technical specification, shall be
designed, manufactured, and tested according to each applicable normative. All required normative test
certificates and test reports shall be available for inspection by the Client.
Where no specific regulations exist, the Contractor shall refer to the international norms and the Technical
Specifications provided by the Client.
All equipment and components shall bear the EC mark in conformity with EEC Directives or the equivalent
marks if supplied in countries other than Europe (e.g. UL, NEC, CSA, ETL, etc.).
1. PV POWER PLANT
1.1. EQUIPMENT
1.1.1. PV MODULES
REFERENCE CODES AND CERTIFICATIONS

The following certifications shall be considered mandatory for the final contract awarding. In particular,
PV modules shall be either in application Class A according to IEC 61730 or in safety Class II according to
IEC 61140.
It shall be ensured and proven that all existing product certifications refer to the proposed modules taking
into account all designs, power classes and material combinations.
If some certification processes are underway, the supplier shall indicate the expected delivery dates within
these documents will be available.
Furthermore, the supplier has to demonstrate to adhere to an end of life recycling consortium internationally
recognized and valid for the Country where the modules will be installed. In case of a Country without specific
regulatory framework about PV modules recycling, EGP in agreement with the manufacturer will evaluate
how to proceed case by case.
CODICE – CODE

12 of 287
Code Description
(Bifacial only) IEC 60904- Photovoltaic devices - Part 3: Measurement principles for terrestrial
3:2019 photovoltaic (PV) solar devices with reference spectral irradiance data
(Bifacial only) IEC TS 60904- Photovoltaic devices - Part 1-2: Measurement of current-voltage
1-2:2019 characteristics of bifacial photovoltaic (PV) devices
Standard Practice for Calculating Yellowness and Whiteness Indices from
ASTM-E313
Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
Plastics. Methods For Determining The Density Of Non-Cellular Plastics.
GB/T 1033.1-2008 Part 1:Immersion Method, Liquid Pyknometer Method And Titration
Method
GB/T 13542.2-2009 Film for electrical insulation. Part 2: Methods of test
Adhesives, 180ø Peel Strength Test Method For A Flexible-Bonded-To-
GB/T 2790-1995
Rigid Test Specimen Assembly
Adhesives, T Peel Strength Test Method For a Flexible-to-Flexible Test
GB/T 2791-1995
Specimen Assembly
Wrought aluminium alloy extruded profiles for architecture. Part 2:
GB/T 5237.2-2008
Anodized profiles
IEC 60068-2-68:1996 Environmental testing - Part 2-68: Tests - Test L: Dust and sand
Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and
IEC 61140
equipment
Terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design qualification and type
approval (Part 1: Test requirements, Part 1-1: Special requirements for
IEC 61215:2016
testing of crystalline silicon Photovoltaic (PV) modules, Part 2: Test
procedures).
IEC 61701:2011 Salt mist corrosion testing of photovoltaic (PV) modules
Photovoltaic (PV) module safety qualification (Part 1: Requirements for
IEC 61730:2016
construction, Part 2: Requirements for testing).
IEC 62716:2013 Photovoltaic (PV) modules - Ammonia corrosion testing
PV modules - Transportation testing Part 1: Transportation and shipping of
IEC 62759-1:2015 or ISTA 3
module package units
IEC 62782: 2016 Photovoltaic (PV) modules - Cyclic (dynamic) mechanical load testing
IEC 62790:2014 Junction boxes for photovoltaic modules - Safety requirements and tests
Connectors for DC-application in photovoltaic systems - Safety
IEC 62852:2014
requirements and tests
IEC 62930:2017 Electric cables for photovoltaic systems with a voltage rating of 1,5 kV DC
Photovoltaic (PV) modules - Test methods for the detection of potential-
IEC TS 62804-1:2015
induced degradation - Part 1: Crystalline silicon
Environmental management systems - Requirements with guidance for
ISO 14001:2015
use
ISO 15184:2012 Paints and varnishes - Determination of film hardness by pencil test
ISO 9001:2015 Quality management systems - Requirements
Glass in building - Determination of light transmittance, solar direct
ISO 9050:2003 transmittance, total solar energy transmittance, ultraviolet transmittance
and related glazing factors
Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels: only for North
UL 1703 – UL 61730
America market
DATASHEET
Datasheet of the photovoltaic module is always mandatory.
The datasheet of the module shall contain the following information:
CODICE – CODE

13 of 287
 Nominal power greater or equal than the Pmin specified in the PV Modules SoW;
 Positive Power Tolerance between 0÷5W or in alternative 0÷3%;
 Module efficiency, greater or equal than 18,5%;
 Bifaciality Factor where:
o Minimum Bifaciality factor for p-type bifacial module is 70%±5%;
o Minimum Bifaciality factor for n-type bifacial module is 85%±5%;
 Minimum cell temperature of -40°C;
 Operating temperature between -40 °C and 85 °C;
 System voltage greater or equal than 1500 V;
 Static mechanical load greater or equal than 2400 Pa;
 Module design lifetime greater or equal to 30 years for glass-glass solutions and greater or equal
than 25 years for glass-backsheet ones;
 Nominal Module Operation Temperature (NMOT) lower or equal than 44 °C ± 2 °C (NMOT @800
W/m2 , 20 °C, AM 1.5, Wind speed 1 m/s)
 Temperature coefficient greater or equal to -0.37%/°C
 Number of cells and typology
 Dimensions and weight of the module
 Performance warranty with a maximum annual degradation lower than 0.6%/year and a designed
lifetime greater or equal to 25 years for PV module (mono or poly) with glass/backsheet solution.
 Performance warranty with a maximum annual degradation lower than 0.5%/year and a
designed lifetime greater or equal to 30 years for PV module (mono or poly) with glass/glass solution.
 Guaranteed light induced degradation (LID) lower or equal to 2.5%/year for polycrystalline modules
 Guaranteed light induced degradation (LID) lower or equal to 3%/year for monocrystalline modules
 Maximum Power (at STC and NMOT conditions, including manufacturing tolerances)
 Maximum power Voltage (Vmpp) (at STC and NMOT conditions, including manufacturing
tolerances)
 Maximum power current (Impp) (at STC and NMOT conditions, including manufacturing tolerances)
 Open-circuit voltage (Voc) (at STC and NMOT conditions, including manufacturing tolerances)
 Short-circuit current (Isc) (at STC and NMOT conditions, including manufacturing tolerances)
 Temperature coefficient for the open circuit voltage Voc;
 Temperature coefficient for the short circuit current Isc;
 I-V curves for different irradiation intensities.
1.1.1.1. MAIN COMPONENTS
1.1.1.1.1. Solar Cells
Datasheet of the solar cells is mandatory.

Solar Cells shall be made with Crystalline Silicon (Mono, Polycrystalline, PERx, Heterojunction), with either
50, 60, 72 or 78 cells per module in case of full cell, or 120-144-156 cells per module in case of half-cells, or
CODICE – CODE

14 of 287
150 in case of triple-cut cells. Techniques for the reduction of reflection losses are preferable, like
texturization of the cell and anti-reflective coating. Back contact cells are allowed.
1.1.1.1.2. Backsheet – Monofacial
Datasheet of the backsheet is mandatory.

The photovoltaic module backsheet shall have:
 A Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR) lower or equal to 2g/m 2∙day
 A Tensile Strength greater or equal to 100 Mpa in the Machine Direction (MD) and greater or equal
than 100 Mpa in the Transverse Direction (TD), according to GB/T 13542.2-2009
 Elongation of Break greater or equal to 100 % in the Machine Direction (MD) and greater or equal
than 100 % in the Transverse Direction (TD), according to GB/T 13542.2-2009
 Peel Strength for the PET film primer greater or equal than 4 N/cm according to GB/T 2791-1995
 EVA adhesion value greater or equal than 40 N/cm according to GB/T 2790-1995
 Yellow index ΔYI lower than 4.0 with an UV radiation of 60 KWh/m 2
1.1.1.1.3. Backsheet – Bifacial
Datasheet of the backsheet is mandatory.

The backsheet based on Tedlar is the preferred material and fully compliant with this technical specification.
In any case, all the following requirement shall be respected:
 A Water Vapor Transmission Rate (WVTR) lower or equal to 2g/m 2∙day
 A Tensile Strength greater or equal to 100 Mpa in the Machine Direction (MD) and greater or equal
than 100 Mpa in the Transverse Direction (TD), according to GB/T 13542.2-2009
 Elongation of Break greater or equal to 100 % in the Machine Direction (MD) and greater or equal
than 100 % in the Transverse Direction (TD), according to GB/T 13542.2-2009
 Peel Strength for the PET film primer greater or equal than 4 N/cm according to GB/T 2791-1995
 EVA adhesion value greater or equal than 40 N/cm according to GB/T 2790-1995
 Yellow index ΔYI lower than 4.0 with an UV radiation of 60 KWh/m 2
1.1.1.1.4. Encapsulant
The datasheet of the encapsulant is always mandatory.

The encapsulant shall be made by two Polyolefin (POE) sheets, which is the preferred material and it is fully
compliant with this technical specification.
Encapsulant based on two Ethylene Vinyl Acetate (EVA) sheets is also accepted.
All the following requirement should be respected:
 Content of VA ≥ 28-33%;
 Yellowness index < 10 according to ASTM-E313;
 Encapsulant Gel Content = 75% - 95% ( EVA ) & 50% - 95% ( POE );
 Glass peel strength (N/cm) ≥ 60 according to GB/T 2790-1995;
 Density (g/cm3) = 0,95 - 0,96 (EVA) & 0,86 - 0,87 (POE) according to GB/T 1033.1-2008.
CODICE – CODE

15 of 287
1.1.1.1.5. Front Glass
The datasheet of the front glass is always mandatory.

The glass shall be resistant to moisture penetration. Low iron clear float glasses are accepted annealed or
tempered. Self-cleaning glass is appreciated.
It is possible to use techniques for the reduction of the reflection losses like antireflective coating and textured
surface. In case one coating technique is applied, hardness test shall be > 3H as per ISO 15184:2012.
Light transmittance shall be grater or equal to 91.5%, according to ISO 9050 (from 380 nm to 1100 nm).
The manufacturer shall provide, with a third-part certification, the curve of IAM (Incident angle modifier)
versus AOI (angle of incidence).
The curve IAM vs AOI has to be defined according to one of the two following methods:
1
 ASHRAE model equation: 𝐼𝐴𝑀 = 1 − 𝑏0 ∙ ( − 1). In this case, the manufacturer has to declare
𝑐𝑜𝑠(𝐴𝑂𝐼)
the coefficient b0;

 Points of the curve, with an IAM sample at least each 10° of the AOI.
In case of absence of this curve, the first method will be applied, considering a default value of b 0=0.05.
1.1.1.1.6. Back Glass – Bifacial
Datasheet of the back glass is mandatory

Light transmittance shall be grater or equal to 91.5%, according to ISO 9050 (from 380 nm to 1100 nm).
1.1.1.2. MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1.1.1.2.1. Frame
Modules frameless are accepted but their implementation shall be evaluated project by project.
In case of frame, this has to be a reinforced anodized aluminum frame (preferably) h=25÷40 mm with hole
for water draining and with grounding connection terminal.
Salt spray corrosion shall be ≥ grade 9 according to GB/T 5237.2-2008.
The correct symbol to be used for equipotential bonding is
Grounding connection shall be through the clamps in case of frameless module.
1.1.1.3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.1.1.3.1. Junction Box
Junction box datasheet is mandatory.

It shall be class IP 67 or higher, equipped with at least 3 bypass diodes to handle partial/total shading of the
module.
CODICE – CODE

16 of 287
1.1.1.3.2. Connectors
PV Modules connectors shall be DC Fast Connectors in accordance with the requirements of this Technical
Specification.
1.1.1.3.3. Cables
Solar cables for PV Modules shall have a section ≥ 4 mm 2 with double isolation.
Module supplier shall propose cable length for positive and negative terminals. However, customized length
cables might be requested by EGP depending on project specific constraints.
1.1.1.4. OTHERS
1.1.1.4.1. Pre-Sorting
In order to reduce the array mismatch losses, PV modules shall be sorted in different classes according to
their Impp.
There shall be between 2 and 4 different Impp sorting classes. Impp tolerance ≤ 5%, for each class.
The sorting class shall be applied at the pallets level, with a clear indication written on them. Note that only
one Impp class per pallet can be accepted.
1.1.1.4.2. Packaging
WOODEN PALLET
It shall follow the requirement in the table.
Item Standards Remarks
Ratio A/H ≤ 0.25

Squareness
(A and H values provided by supplier in mm)
Wooden Middle
components #15 block…..….…(mm) 78 x 78 x 78
Heat Treatment – HT to 56°C for 30 minutes according to the
Wooden International Standards ISPM-15.
Treatment
Certified with IPPC/FAO.
Stamp Logo IPPC FAO ISPM-15 on the lateral block
For the beam:

 Fir, without cracks, no clefts, clean, no wormholes. Max
Wooden type number of node: 1/3 of the beam width.
Blocks composition:
 solid wood
CODICE – CODE

17 of 287
Item Standards Remarks
 wormholes;
 Max number of node: 1/3 of the beam width;
 Cracks and clefts;
 Resin bags and beam bending;
Defects not  The presence of cortex is prohibited as a vehicle for the
acceptable dissemination of plant pests.
 Chemical treatments for the preservation of chemical
treatments of wood for fumigation of wood itself (methyl
bromide)
 Mold due to poor storage conditions
The following Storage and Transportation conditions shall apply:
Humidity : 20/30 %
Additional storage conditions: Do not store near sources of heat or flames, do not store in fully
closed deposits.
In addition, it shall have the following handling instructions.
Do not shock or swing the pallet Do not place the pallet on uneven surface
Use forklift which is longer then the pallet Do not put additional load on the pallet
PACKAGING REQUIREMENT
 Packaging design in order to guarantee its reuse for the same purpose for which it was designed.
 The choice of materials to be used in packaging shall take into consideration the following order of
decreasing preference:
o Charter;
o Wood;
o Steel;
o Glass;
CODICE – CODE

18 of 287
o Aluminium;
o Plastic.
 Containment of the consumption of raw materials used in the creation of packaging and consequent
weight reduction, with particular attention to the density of plastic polymers.
 Replacement of a quota or totality of virgin raw material with recycled / recovered material to
contribute to a reduction in the withdrawal of resources.
 Improvement of storage operations, optimization of loads on pallets and means of transport.
1.2. PV PARK
1.2.1. FIELD PARALLEL

Code Description
EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
Low-voltage surge protective devices - surge protective
EN 50539-11 devices for specific application including d.c. - part 11:
requirements and tests for spds in photovoltaic applications
Low-voltage surge protective devices - Part 11: Surge
EN 61643-11 protective devices connected to low-voltage power systems -
Requirements and test methods
General requirements for the competence of testing and
IEC 17025
calibration laboratories 
IEC 60068-2 Environmental testing
Electrical insulating materials - Thermal endurance
IEC 60216
properties
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for
IEC 60269-2 fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for
industrial application)
Low-voltage fuses - Part 6: Supplementary requirements for
IEC 60269-6
fuse-links for the protection of solar photovoltaic energy
(DIN EN 60269-6 – VDE 0636-6)
systems
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire
IEC 60332
conditions
IEC 60364 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
IEC 60502-1 for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um =
36 kV)
IEC 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Fire hazard testing - Part 2: Test methods - Section 1: Glow-
IEC 60695-2-1
wire test and guidance
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - ALL PARTS
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic
IEC 61000-6-2
standards - Immunity for industrial environments
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-4: Generic
IEC 61000-6-4
standards - Emission standard for industrial environments
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – ALL
IEC 61439
PARTS
CODICE – CODE

19 of 287
Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear

IEC 62208
and controlgear assemblies - General requirements
Outline of Investigation for Low-Voltage Fuses - Fuses for
UL 2579
Photovoltaic Systems
Parallel boxes to be supplied, are boxes assembled for paralleling PV production (both for DC or AC), with
the main added functions of isolation and protection. Such boxes shall be installed on the field, close (or
attached) to the tracker structures in order to minimize the total cable length (DC or AC).
The boxes shall be appropriately sized to fit all necessary protective equipment, cabling and internal
connectors.
The installation of the connectors and/or terminals (and cable glands) shall not reduce the overall protection
degree of the boxes (minimum IP65). Furthermore, in case of connection of different conductor materials,
pre-parallel boxes connectors (if included inside the scope of supply) shall be tin-plated aluminum or copper
type (tin-plated copper for copper conductors, and tin-plated aluminium for aluminium cables). Minimum
15µ tin-plated layer is required. The use of bimetallic connectors must be avoided.
The boxes shall be designed to guarantee proper heat dissipation and limit the equipment derating. The
installation of the boxes must be positioned under the shadow, thus avoiding the exposure to direct sunlight.
1.2.1.1. DC PARALLEL
1.2.1.1.1. DC Pre-Parallel Boxes
The DC pre-parallel boxes, if requested, shall be adopted for the pre-parallel of maximum 3 inputs string/solar
cables.
The configuration of DC pre-parallel boxes shall foresee, at least, a quick fuse DC 10x38 type gPV for each
of the DC string input poles (positive and negative) when the electrical system is isolated from the ground.
In the case in which the electrical system has a pole in contact with the ground the protection fuse may be
provided only on the pole insulated from the ground.
X/Y connectors could be used as an alternative to the DC pre-parallel box.
PRE-PARALLEL BOX
PARAMETERS VALUES MES. UNIT
DC input
Number of input channels (1) 2÷4
Maximum DC voltage 1500 V
DC maximum current for each channel 12 A
DC connection for each channel 2 (+/-)
Max string cable section 6 mm2
DC Connection type DC Fast Connectors
DC output
CODICE – CODE

20 of 287
PRE-PARALLEL BOX
Max. DC current (1) (see GTS) A
type and size of cable terminal shall
Output cable connection be in accordance to cable section
required
Environmental parameters
Max. Ambient temperature (1) (see GTS) °C
Environment humidity 100 %
Operating altitude (1) (see GTS) m
Protection degree (1) 65 IP
Degree of safety insulation II -
(1) Value/size to be defined referring to the General Technical Specifications (GTS)
1.2.1.1.2. String Boxes
The string boxes (SB) shall be adopted for paralleling up to 24 PV strings.

The configuration of string boxes shall foresee, at least:
- A quick fuse DC 10x38 type gPV
o In insolated PV fields, a gPV fuse it is necessary for each of the DC string input poles
(positive and negative)
o In grounded PV fields (1 pole to ground), a gPV fuse it is necessary only on the pole insulated
from the ground.
- A load switch disconnector at the output of the SB
- A Surge Protection Device (SPD) at the output of the SB, in order to prevent any damage due to
overvoltages.
The arrangement of the fuses (heating elements) and the terminals shall be vertically arranged, so as to
allow a direct vertical connection from the bottom plate of the string box to the internal elements
(fuses/terminals). While vertically arranged, the fuses shall be placed creating several rows, sufficiently
spaced between them to have better natural ventilation between the various components, improving the
dissipation of the Joule effect, thus limiting the temperature increase of the component itself.
The SB shall follow the layout disposition requirement shown in Figure 1.
CODICE – CODE

21 of 287
Figure 1 –String Boxes Layout
All electrical components shall be sized and shall comply with the maximum temperature inside the box under
the most severe meteorological conditions as stated in EGP General Technical Specification).
The string box shall be subjected to heat tests in a special climate chamber, with the full load of the nominal
current and in the declared maximum external temperature conditions (according to EGP General Technical
Specification). The heat test must be performed by an accredited laboratory according to DIN, EN ISO/IEC
17025 for low voltage devices, and must also be supported by thermal-visual images.
STRING BOX
DC input
Number of input channels (1) 16÷24
String DC voltage range min/Max 250 ÷ 1500 V
DC maximum current for each channel 30 A
DC connection for each channel 2 (+/-)
CODICE – CODE

22 of 287
STRING BOX
DC output
Max. DC current (1) (see GTS) A
number/size of cable gland and terminal shall be in accordance
Output cable connection
to cable section required (maximum 400mm 2 cable)
Grounding connection cable 35x1xM8 mm2
Surrounding temperature (1) (see GTS) °C
Environment humidity 100 %
Operating temperature (1) (see GTS) °C
Operating altitude (1) (see GTS) m
Protection level 65 IP
Protection internal level with open door 20 IP
Degree of safety insulation II -
(1) Value/size to be defined referring to the General Technical Specifications (GTS)
1.2.1.1.2.1. Active String Boxes (with monitoring)
In the case that monitoring and measurement of the string's electrical parameters is required, a correct sizing
as described in Chapter 1.2.1.1.2 shall be provided in order to house the correct installation of all electronic
components of the data acquisition and signal transmission towards the RTU. The String Box (SB / DC Switch
Box (DCSB) shall be sized appropriately for the components' heat dissipation.
STRING BOX (SBM) / DC SWITCH BOX (DCSB) WITH MONITORING

Communication
User interface 2xRS485
Monitoring
General voltage YES
String current YES
On-off main switch state YES
Overvoltage intervention state (cumulative) YES
Internal box temperature YES
1.2.1.1.3. Harness
PV strings are traditionally distributed in a radial way. During tender phase, in order to optimize BOP costs,
the Contractor can propose as OPTION a pre-assembled cables harness solution, with the pre-parallel of 2
or 3 strings of the same supporting structure.
CODICE – CODE

23 of 287
The main goal of the solution is to reduce the quantity of solar/string cables (generally in copper), through
the substitution of the string cables with a chain of pre-assembled aluminium trunk cables, from the string
terminals to the string boxes. Each pre-parallel of strings is connected to a common chain of pre-assembled
aluminium trunk cables.
In the example shown below, 24 PV strings are pre-paralled in groups of 3 strings of the same supporting
structure.
Figure 2 –Harness Solution
The DC switch boxes present in Figure 2, have identical requirements as the String boxes, but comprise a
lower amount of paralleled inputs. Therefore it shall contain fuse protection of each input, and an SPD and
switch disconnector at the DC switch box output.
All the equipment involved from PV modules to DC switch boxes (PV modules, solar string cables, pre-
parallel fuse boxes (or connectors), pre-assembled trunk cables, “T” junctions, etc.) must be protected by
fuse or at least properly sized to withstand the maximum short-circuit current in the specific point.
The scope of supply of the solution is according to following list of items:
 Solar string cables
 DC pre-parallel boxes or DC Y/X connectors
 DC switch boxes with proper protection fuses, SPDs and switch disconnector
 “T” junctions for connection of pre-parallel fuse boxes, or connectors, to trunk cables
 Aluminium pre-assembled trunk cables
1.2.1.1.3.1. T Junction
With reference to the pre-assembled cable Harness configuration, the T-junction connector shall be adopted
for the joint of:
 DC pre-parallel box/connector related to supporting structure i
 Pre-assembled trunk cable related to supporting structure i-1
 Pre-assembled trunk cable related to supporting structure i+1 or related to the DC Switch Box
The technical solution consists on DC Fast Connectors. The complete system (joints) shall be suitable for
CODICE – CODE

24 of 287
the maximum DC voltage and current (nominal and short-circuit) and in compliance with applicable
International and Local Standards
All T-junctions appear depicted in green in the following picture
Figure 3 –T-Junction in Harness Solution
1.2.1.1.3.2. Trunk Cable
With reference to the pre-assembled cable Harness configuration, the aluminium pre-assembled trunk cable
shall be adopted to connect the DC pre-parallel box related to supporting structure i-1 with the DC pre-parallel
box related to the supporting structure i (or the DC switch box).
The length of trunk cable shall be pre-defined according to the supporting structure length. The trunk cable
shall be finalized mounting connectors/terminations at both ends of the cable.
The trunk cable shall be installed under supporting structure, in particular along and inside the torque tube
(if possible). The trunk cable can be buried underground to connect a DC switch box mounted on another
parallel supporting structure.
The trunk cable is identified in green in the following picture
Figure 4 –Trunk Cable in Harness Solution

CODICE – CODE

25 of 287
1.2.1.1.4. Electrical Components
1.2.1.1.4.1. Cables
The DC cable design shall be performed according to the applicable cable sizing rules and norms, for carrying
the maximum applicable current (IEC 60364).
The size of the cables and minimum safety distances shall take into account all applicable derating factors,
according to the applicable Norms and Standards, due to internal operating conditions of the box (Site
conditions specified in the General Technical Specification).
The cables and all their connections shall ensure proper insulation, avoiding in any case possible short-circuit
or ground faults.
The internal wiring power cables of the field ac pre-parallel box shall be PV1-F cable type, and shall comply
with the following characteristics:
 Conductor: Tinned wired copper, class 5.
 Insulation: Halogen-free cross-linked compound.
 Outer Sheath: Halogen-free cross-linked, flame retardant compound.
 Rated voltage (DC) 900/1800V.
 Insulation tests voltage 6.5kV AC according to BS EN 50395
 Temperature range: -40ºC to +90ºC.
 Maximum operating temperature: +120ºC.
 Maximum temperature at short circuit (5s.): 250ºC
 Weather UV resistant.
 Flame retardant and no flame propagation according IEC 60332.
Properly sized DC busbars could be also used to perform the internal wiring.
The busbars and conductors shall be sized to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses corresponding to the
rated current values and the required short-circuit current values, and must be design so as to comply with
the applicable ampacity and derating factor requirements (from applicable codes and standards). The
busbars shall ensure the necessary ampacity even with the maximum temperature inside the box (maximum
load and onsite environmental operating conditions – EGP GTS).
All cables for each electrical component must be labeled according to the nomenclature shown on the
electrical diagrams (approved by EGP). Cables shall be identified by using clear legible labels arranged
before their entry into the panel connectors/terminal (inside the box). These labels shall last for the entire
lifetime of the plant declared in EGP general technical specification.
The Contractor shall consider the figure below as examples of correct execution of cable labeling.
CODICE – CODE

26 of 287
1.2.1.1.4.2. Fuses
In general all PV strings shall be individually insulated according to IEC 60296-1 and protected with quick
fuse 10x38 gPV type according to IEC 60296-6 and/or UL2579. Protection on both poles (positive and
negative) for IT systems isolated from the ground; or protection on a single pole for TN systems with one
pole connected to the ground (fuse on positive pole if negative pole grounded, and vice versa).
All the equipment involved must be protected by fuse or at least properly sized to withstand the maximum
short-circuit current in the specific point.
1.2.1.1.4.3. SPD
All electrical components shall be sized and comply with the maximum temperature inside the box enclosure
under the most severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature as stated in the General
Technical Specification “GTS”).
Protection from DC side power surges according to EN 50539-11, based on varistor arresters class II with
protection level Up ≤ 4.5 kV for voltages up to 1500V.
Surge arrester protection type2.
1.2.1.1.4.4. Switch Disconnector
All electrical components shall be sized in correspondence to the applicable system ratings, and to comply
with the maximum temperature inside the box (String Box, QPPI, String Inverter) under the most severe
conditions (maximum load and operating temperature as stated in the General Technical Specification
“GTS”).
General switch disconnector shall be in accordance with EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2, EN 60947-3.
1.2.1.1.4.5. DC Y/X Connector
The DC “Y”/“X” connectors or joints, if requested, shall be adopted for the pre-parallel of 2 (in case of “Y”
connector/joint) or 3 (in case of “X” connector/joint) input string/solar cables. The technical solution consists
on factory pre-wired cable joints with MC4 quick coupling (or similar) connectors and external in-line quick
coupling fuses connected in series. The complete system (joints) shall be suitable for the maximum DC
voltage and current.
LV cables connectors body shall be high strength aluminum alloy with tin-plated surface, in case of aluminum
core cables, or copper tin-plated surface material in case of copper core cables. The use of bimetallic (CU/AL)
connectors shall be avoided.
Fast connectors shall be used for the DC “Y”/“X” connectors or joints.
1.2.1.1.5. DC Fast Connectors
REFERENCE CODES
Code Description
IEC 62852:2020 Connectors for DC-application in photovoltaic systems - Safety
requirements and tests
CODICE – CODE

27 of 287
UL 6703 Standard for Connectors for Use in Photovoltaic Systems
Fast connectors refer to the equipment that shall be used within the DC section of the Photovoltaic Field as:
 Connectors of the PV modules + and – terminals;
 Connectors for the solar string cables (used to electrically arrange the PV module string);
 Y/X connectors for pre-paralleling of PV module strings;
 Connectors for the T junctions;
 Connectors as inputs to the String Boxes or String Inverter DC side;
 Connectors for the tracker control boxes.
Fast connectors’ datasheet shall be always provided, including the following items:
 Ambient temperature range
 Upper limiting temperature
 Type of termination, which shall be crimp
Fast connectors are mandatory. STAUBLI Multi-Contact MC4 Original are preferable. MC4 compatible
are not accepted. Connectors cross-mating (e.g. two different brands) is strictly prohibited.
In any case, alternative connectors are allowed if they are in line with the upper characteristics.
All Contractors providing fast connectors shall verify with Enel their acceptance.
Connectors shall not reduce the overall protection degree of the boxes (minimum IP65).
Connectors shall be guaranteed for a period at least equal to the warranty period of the PV modules.
The installation of the connectors shall follow the following prescriptions:
 Use the assembly tools specified by the fast connector manufacturer
 Check the related assembly instructions and follow them
 Double check the correct and complete connection of fast connectors
1.2.1.2. AC PARALLEL
1.2.1.2.1. AC Field Boxes
The AC-Field Box (PPB) is an electrical enclosure located on the field, typically attached to a string inverter
and with the following functionalities:
 In case the string inverter does not integrate any AC circuit breaker or switch disconnector onboard,
an AC-field box shall be installed between the string inverter terminals and the AC Parallel Box terminals
(LV parallel panel inside the MV cabin or transformation center), in order to ensure a safe isolation of the
inverter from the AC side (IEC 60364-7-712), during O&M activities on the string inverter.
This AC-field box will contain a properly sized switch disconnector, to manually perform the required
isolation function, provided with a throw switch on the outside of the housing and a removable key
lock in the open position.
If necessary suitable key interlocks shall be provided between the LV parallel panel input and the
corresponding inverter to which it is connected, so it is avoided at any time the access to live voltage
parts.
CODICE – CODE

28 of 287
In case that the string inverter has any lack of internal hardwire protections, they shall be integrated
inside this box.
 In case it is necessary a pre-parallel connection of 2/3 string inverters on the PV field to minimize the
amount of power lines from the field to the transformation cabins.
The Pre-Parallel box shall have a limited number of inputs, in order to guarantee that the outgoing
cable to the transformation center is ≤ 400mm 2, while also fulfilling the maximum voltage drop and
losses specified in EGP Technical Specifications. The number and size of the inputs (in terms of
protection) will be adapted to the amount and maximum current generated by the proposed String
Inverter.
The elements that compose this Field AC Pre-Parallel box are:
 General three-phase circuit breaker protection in accordance with IEC 60947-3 with a
suitable breaking capacity.
 Three-phase isolation/protection of the inputs (string inverters) according to IEC 60269-1
and protection with quick fuse type NH according to IEC 60269-2 and/or UL2579.
 Surge protection device from AC side according to EN 61643-11, based on
varistor arresters class II with protection level Up ≤ 4.5 kV for voltages up to 1000 V.
Visual light signaling the presence of voltage on the output and on the bus bar.
Cable entry/exit shall pass through cable gland of appropriate dimensions in order to ensure a minimum
degree of protection IP65.
All electrical components shall be sized and shall comply with the maximum temperature inside the box under
the most severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature according to EGP GTS). The box with
the electrical components shall be subjected to heat thermal tests in a special climate chamber, at full load
(nominal current) and at the maximum external temperature conditions declared. The heat tests shall be
performed by an accredited laboratory according to DIN, EN ISO/IEC 17025 for low voltage devices, and
must be supported by thermal-visual images (by thermocamera)
The Contractor shall consider the following minimum requirements:
FIELD AC-BOX
PARAMETERS VALUES UNIT
General parameters
Nominal network system Three-phase L1-L2-L3
Maximum AC voltage Max. 1000 V
Operation frequency 50/60 Hz
Degree of protection IP 65
Degree of protection with doors open IP 20
Degree of safety insulation II-󠄀
Surge protection Type II

CODICE – CODE

29 of 287
Environmental temperature (1) See GTS ºC
Environmental humidity 100 %
Operating temperature (1) See GTS ºC
Operating altitude (1) See GTS m a.s.l.
1. Value/size to be defined referring to the General Technical Specification (GTS)
2. Value/size to be defined referring to the proposed solution
1.2.1.2.2. Electrical Components
1.2.1.2.2.1. Cables
rated current values and the required short-circuit current values, and must be design so as to comply with
the applicable ampacity and derating factor requirements (from applicable codes and standards). The
busbars shall ensure the necessary ampacity even with the maximum temperature inside the box (maximum
load and onsite environmental operating conditions – EGP GTS).
The horizontal bars shall be of electrolytic copper with a rectangular section and rounded corners, fixed to
the structure by means of insulated comb supports and arranged to allow future variations.
The entire internal panel busbar system comprising the main bars and shunts to the individual panels shall
feature bolted connections manufactured such as to ensure the initial tightening of the bolts for an indefinite
time, without requiring periodic tightening.
The connections between the horizontal and vertical busbars shall be made through standard connectors
supplied by the busbar manufacturer.
All wires, whether auxiliary or power cables (excepting the above provision) shall be connected to the modular
terminals on rails, with partitions where necessary, and unless otherwise required, suited to a cable cross-
section of no less than 6 mm2.
The internal wiring power cables of the field ac pre-parallel box shall be PV1-F cable type, and shall comply
with the following characteristics:
 Conductor: Tinned wired copper, class 5.
 Insulation: Cross-linked polyolefin.
 Outer Sheath: Cross-linked polyolefin Halogen free.
 Minimum insulation voltage level: 1.8 kV.
 Temperature range: -40ºC to +90ºC.
 Maximum operating temperature: +120ºC.
 Maximum temperature at short circuit (5s.): 250ºC
 Weather UV resistant.
 Flame retardant and no flame propagation according IEC 60332.
CODICE – CODE

30 of 287
1.2.1.2.2.2. Fuses
Required fuses for the protection for the string inverter lines shall be quick fuse type NH according to IEC
60269 and/or UL 2579.
Fuses must be dimensioned and must comply with the maximum temperature inside the box under the most
severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature according to EGP GTS). All applicable derating
factors shall be considered during the fuses dimensioning methodology
1.2.1.2.2.3. SPD
Surge Protection devices (SPD) from AC side shall be designed according to EN 61643-11, and shall be
based on varistor arresters class II with protection level Up ≤ 4.5 kV for voltages up to 1000 V.
SPD’s must be dimensioned and must comply with the maximum temperature inside the box under the most
severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature as per EGP GTS).
1.2.1.2.2.4. Switch Disconnector
General three-phase circuit breaker protections shall be designed in accordance with standards IEC 60947-
1 & IEC 60947-2 and shall be sized with the adequate breaking capacity.
General switch disconnectors shall be designed in accordance with IEC 60947-1 & IEC 60947-3.
All electrical components must be dimensioned and must comply with the maximum temperature inside the
box under the most severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature).
1.2.1.3. COMMON EQUIPMENT
1.2.1.3.1. Cable Gland
All the cableways of the incoming and outgoing lines on any field parallel boxes (AC or DC) shall be sealed
using suitable cable glands. The installation of the cable glands shall not reduce the overall protection level
of the parallel box.
Cable entry/exit shall pass through PG cable routing with IP 65 minimum degree of protection, or quick-
coupling panel feedthrough connector DC Fast Connectors.
1.2.1.3.2. Boxes
The housing for the containment of the equipment located outdoor shall be composed externally by glass
fiber reinforced polyester and resistant to UV rays, with minimum protection IP65 according IEC 60529, IK08
impact seal and insulation class II (symbol ).
All plastic components shall comply with self-extinguish ability requirements at 960°C (30/30s) and standards
IEC 60695-2-1.
The box shall be with a hinged door with unified key closure according to IEC 62208.
The box shall be equipped with accessories that protect from dust and condensation for extended periods
without the need for forced convection devices (no fan, no electrical resistance), according to IEC 62208.
CODICE – CODE

31 of 287
1.2.2. INVERTER
REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS
Code Description
Photovoltaic system performance monitoring - Guidelines for
IEC/EN 61724
measurement, data exchange and analysis
Overall efficiency of inverters for photovoltaic plants connected to
EN 50530:2010-12
the electricity grid
Low-voltage surge protective devices - surge protective devices for
EN 50539-11 specific application including d.c. - part 11: requirements and tests
for spds in photovoltaic applications
EN 61643 - 11 Low-voltage surge protective devices
Low-voltage electrical installations: Requirements for special
IEC 60364 - 7
installations or locations
This standard describes guidelines for measuring the efficiency of
power conditioners used in stand-alone and utility-interactive
IEC 61683
photovoltaic systems, where the output of the power conditioner is
a stable a.c. voltage of constant frequency or a stable d.c. voltage.
IEC 62109-1/2 Safety of power converters for use in photovoltaic power systems
Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear

IEC 62208
assemblies - General requirements
Protection against lightning - Part 4: Electrical and electronic
IEC 62305-4
systems within structures
This standard applies to all types of semiconductor inverters of the
self-commutated type and semiconductor convertors which contain
IEC/EN 60146-2
at least one part of a self-commutated type, including direct a.c.
convertors and d.c. convertors for all applications.
IEC/EN 60947 - 4 - 1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC/EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility
This standard applies to utility-interconnected photovoltaic (PV)
power systems operating in parallel with the utility and utilizing
IEC/EN 61727 static (solid-state) non-islanding inverters for the conversion of DC
to AC. Lays down requirements for interconnection of PV systems
to the utility distribution system.
Balance-of-system components for photovoltaic systems - Design
IEC/EN 62093
qualification natural environments
This standard provides a test procedure to evaluate the
performance of islanding prevention measures used with utility-
interconnected PV systems. This standard describes a guideline
IEC/EN 62116
for testing the performance of automatic islanding prevention
measures installed in or with single or multi-phase utility interactive
PV inverters connected to the utility grid.
The object of this standard is to provide minimum information
IEC/EN 62894 required to configure a safe and optimal system with photovoltaic
inverters.
IEEE Standard for Interconnecting Distributed Resources with
IEEE 1547
Electric Power Systems
CODICE – CODE

32 of 287
Code Description
IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements for Harmonic
IEEE 519
Control in Electric Power Systems
UE Electromagnetic
compatibility directive
Outline of Investigation for Low-Voltage Fuses - Fuses for
UL 2579
Photovoltaic Systems
Standard for Inverters, Converters, Controllers and Interconnection
UL1741
System Equipment for Use With Distributed Energy Resources
This standard defines the information and documentation required
to be handed over to a customer following the installation of a grid
IEC 62446 connected PV system. It also describes the commissioning tests,
inspection criteria and documentation expected to verify the safe
installation and correct operation of the system.
This standard provides a procedure for the measurement of the
IEC 62891 efficiency of the maximum power point tracking (MPPT) of
inverters, which are used in grid-connected photovoltaic systems.
This International Standard specifies general terms and definitions
relating to conformity assessment, including the accreditation of
ISO 17000:2004
conformity assessment bodies, and to the use of conformity
assessment to facilitate trade.
The standard provides guidance on the intent of the requirements
in ISO 9001:2015, with examples of possible steps an organization
ISO 9002:2016
can take to meet the requirements. It does not add to, subtract
from, or in any way modify those requirements.
The standard requires the organization to document any other
procedures required for its effective operation. It also requires the
ISO 9001:2015
organization to issue and communicate a documented quality
policy, a quality management system scope, and quality objectives
TYPE TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS OF THE INVERTERS

Unless otherwise required by local regulatory standards, type tests on the inverter shall be performed by an
EA accredited laboratory in accordance with ISO 17025. The device shall have a CE marking or similar
certifications (e.g. UL, etc.). Furthermore, the following tests shall be passed successfully (the IEC/EN
standard referred to for the tests is indicated in parentheses):
 connection and reconnection conditions, and gradual power increases;
 remote control of the reactive power feed;
 remote control of the active power limitation;
 remote control of over/under frequency threshold protection trips;
 remote tripping;
 DC output current check;
 verification of the AC circuit waveform and DC circuit disturbances;
 verification of insensitivity to voltage sags (LVFRT);
 MPPT efficiency;
 Verification of absence of damage in the event of an automatic reclosing by the Distributor.
The inverter shall have a CE marking or similar certifications (e.g. UL, etc.) and shall have the
CODICE – CODE

33 of 287
following certifications by EA laboratory (accredited in compliance with ISO 17000 series):

 IEC 62109-1 / 62109-2
 IEC 61000-6-2
 IEC 61000-6-4
 IEC 616831
 IEC 60068-2-(1-2-14-30-78)
 IEC 62116 (Utility-interconnected photovoltaic inverters - Test procedure of islanding
prevention measures)
 IEC 61727 (Photovoltaic (PV) systems - Characteristics of the utility interface.)
 IEEE 1547 UL 1741 (for US Market)
1.2.2.1. STRING INVERTER
A. TECHNICAL REQUIRMENTS
String inverters are Multi-String/MPPT inverters type with three-phase output for photovoltaic systems of
small and medium sizes (typically < 500kVA), without transformer, and integrated with functions of control
and protection, in order to regulate the delivery of active and reactive power to the grid in a safely and
controlled manner.
The string inverter supplied shall ensure a correct operation considering:
1. Type and number of modules per string indicated in GTS;
2. Maximum environmental conditions (solar radiation and ambient temperature) indicated in GTS;
3. That the apparent power of inverter shall be calculated according to:
o DC/AC ratio indicated in the GTS;
o Required power factor at the Point of Connection according to GTS and/or applicable local grid
code;
o The minimum value of power in the MPPT operational range;
For the operating data, see the synthetic table below:
STRING INVERTER
PARAMETERS VALUES
DC input
Maximum DC voltage 1500V
DC connection for each channel 2
AC output
Nominal system network Three-phase RST
Operating frequency 50/60Hz
Maximum AC voltage 1000V
1 To calculate the European efficiency to consider to EN 50530.

CODICE – CODE

34 of 287
Power factor PQ semi-circular capability

Max. current imbalance ≤ 2%
Harmonic distortion THD (1) ≤ 3%
European efficiency ≥ 98%
Max efficiency ≥ 98,4%
Static MPPT efficiency (2) ≥ 99,8%
Dynamic MPPT efficiency (2) ≥ 99%
Output waveform Sinusoidal
Max AC cable section 300 mm2
Maximum Operating temperature (3) (see GTS)
Environment humidity 100%
Operating altitude (3) (see GTS)
Protection level IP55
Protection internal level with open door IP20
Degree of safety insulation Class II
(1) For an output power greater than 25% of rated output
(2) The MPPT efficiency measurement shall be performed in accordance with the regulatory indications provided in
EN 50530 and subsequent amendments and additions
(3) Value/size to be defined referring to the General Technical Specification (GTS)
The casing housing the inverter electric power equipment and control electronics shall be an outdoor cabinet
solution with minimum IP65 (IEC 60529), IK08 the impact seal, and insulation class II (symbol ).
All the external parts of plastic material should be made of glass fiber reinforced polyester and resistant to
UV rays. The box shall have a hinged flap door and unified key closure or closure lid hinged bolted on all
four sides. The box shall be equipped with accessories that protect from dust and condensation for extended
periods without the need for forced convection devices (no fan, no electrical resistance), according to IEC
62208.
All electrical components must be dimensioned and comply with the maximum temperature inside the box
under the most severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature). The box in question should
be subjected to heat tests in a special climate chamber, with the full load of the nominal current and in the
declared maximum external temperature conditions. The heat test must be performed by an accredited
laboratory according to DIN, EN ISO/IEC 17025 for low voltage devices, and must also be supported by
thermal-visual images
The string inverter shall be designed with the sufficient ventilation in order to guarantee the rated power
supply, at any external environmental conditions (temperature, solar irradiation, humidity, etc.) declared
during tender phase and modelled inside the .OND model of the string inverter, without any further power
derating not declared before.
The inverters shall be compliant to European Directives Low Voltage and EMC directive (EMC), and shall
have the CE trademark if used in Europe; if operated elsewhere, they shall conform to local regulatory
CODICE – CODE

35 of 287
standards (e.g. UL, CSA, ETL standards). During technical alignment phase, the Contractor shall provide a
third party certification of the European Efficiency according to the procedure for measuring efficiency
showed inside the IEC 61683.
Moreover, following the same procedure used for the European Efficiency certification, efficiency – power
curves certified by third party shall be provided in order to allow EGP to calculate a site-specific efficiency
with the yearly load profile, in the following conditions:
 at 3 different DC voltage levels (Low V, Medium V, High V inside the MPPT range),
 Inverter loading condition ranging from 5% to 100%, with minimum power interval resolution of 5%.
Efficiency levels shall take into account any absorption for string inverter internal auxiliary services during
their normal operation.
The efficiency – power curves, at different DC voltages, shall be integrated in the .OND model of the inverter.
The inverter shall incorporate IGBT based power electronics technology with PWM modulation technique.
The technology shall incorporate software and hardware protection logics, including, but not limited to, short
circuit, over temperature, DC over/under voltage and AC over/under voltage, AC over/under frequency
conditions, so as to ensure a safe and reliable operation.
B. SIZING
The size of the components, minimum safety distances and protection calibrations shall take into account
thermal derating due to the operating temperature and installation altitude; when these values exceed the
maximum values of the used components, derating shall be applied according to the component's relative
IEC. The proposed configuration shall be validated by EGP before the assignation of the supply; alternative
configurations can be requested without additional costs.
C. MPPT
The inverters shall be equipped with a Maximum Power Point Tracker, or MPPT, in order to optimize the
production of the photovoltaic generator. The MPPT range of inverter shall be compliance with the,
environmental conditions (max solar radiation and ambient temperature), and with the type and number of
modules indicated in the General Technical Specification.
If the inverter DC link voltage goes outside the MPPT range, the inverter shall continue working (with derated
power supply - not at MPPT), and shall control the DC link voltage in order to bring it back inside the MPPT
range of the inverter. It is not acceptable that the inverter is only working when the DC link voltage is strictly
inside the MPPT range.
Only if the DC link voltage goes above 1500V, the inverter is allowed to switch off (stop production), due to
DC link overvoltage protection.
D. GROUNDING KIT AND GROUND FAULT DETECTION

In the case of applications with photovoltaic inverters non-galvanically isolated (transformerless), and
insulated from the ground, the inverter shall be capable of detecting the first ground fault, on both DC and
AC sides, according to IEC 62109-1/2 (and therefore the loss of plant insulation), which shall be detected by
a double contact NO or NC, at least.
The inverter shall feature a continuous insulation fault detection (also during the night), capable of detecting
the loss of insulation of the entire system, both at the DC and AC sides.
CODICE – CODE

36 of 287
The device responsible for detecting ground faults on each inverter shall be capable of calibration during the
commissioning of the installation, as well as during the plant’s operating lifetime.
In case of ground fault the inverter:
 Shall trip or remain connected, as requested by the IEC62109-1/2
 hall send the information on its display;
 shall transmit this information to the control and monitoring system;
 shall activate an audio (a local alarm by siren)/visual (strobe with flash) device that shall work when
any of the insulation fault trip threshold is activated. This audio/visual device shall be installed outside
of the transformation center. This means that the inverter shall provide the hardwired insulation trip
aux contact to the transformation center, where it will be installed the insulation control panel, in
charge of activating the alarm.
Inverters installed with photovoltaic modules requiring a ground connection for one of the poles shall be
equipped with a "grounding kit" for the ground connection and the detection of ground faults (detected by at
least one NO or NC contact).
The grounding kit system shall comply with the standards IEC62109-2, IEC 62548, as amended, as well as
all applicable regulations and any instructions provided by the module manufacturer. For the use of the
inverters in the U.S.A., refer to UL1741 as well. In the case of conflicting regulatory instructions, refer to and
apply the condition that most favors the safety of persons. The grounding kit shall be capable of restoring the
ground connection after reporting, and after remedial action is taken for the ground fault.
Such a recovery is preferable, whether executed by means of the reclosure (non-automatic) of a DC magnetic
switch, or where fuses are used by the replacement of the faulty fuse with a new one. In the latter case, the
Contractor shall supply at least three spare fuses for each inverter supplied. During the night (without
production) the grounding kit shall be bypassed, therefore the electrical system shall become totally insulated
from the ground.
E. INVERTER DC SIDE CONNECTIONS AND PROTECTIONS

DC Circuit Connections
The connection cables with the photovoltaic field shall be connected to special input plates on board the
string inverter unit. PG or MC4 (or similar/compatible) string cable connectors shall be installed on the string
inverter enclosure in order to suitably connect each of the string cables.
DC side cable shields from the field strings shall be connected on the Inverter side only.
Of course, the DC equipment shall be chosen according to the max voltage of modules, anyway not less
than 1500 V.
DC Circuit Protections
The inverters shall be protected from incorrect photovoltaic field polarity connection operations; e.g. with
appropriately positioned and differentiated connection terminals. The connection of the PV strings to the
inverter shall be protected by means of suitable fuses sized taking into consideration 1.25 times the short
circuit current from the photovoltaic generator, and the maximum operating temperature.
Fuses will be required always that the electrical energy system is not dimensioned to support DC fault
CODICE – CODE

37 of 287
currents.
Each photovoltaic field polarity shall be protected with class II SPD surge arrester. The intervention status of
the surge arresters and fuses shall be detected by the control and monitoring system.
A DC switch disconnector or circuit breaker (compliance with EN 60947-1/3) shall be installed between the
photovoltaic generator and each inverter, provided by a trip coil circuit for automatic disconnection of the PV
field.
Of course, the DC equipment shall be chosen according to the max voltage of modules, anyway not less
than 1500V.
F. INVERTER AC SIDE CONNECTIONS AND PROTECTIONS

AC Circuit Connections
All plates, bus bars and cables shall be correctly designed and sized according to the applicable Norms and
Standards, in order to ensure sufficient current carrying ampacity, at maximum Inverter power output and
temperature conditions, to avoid overheat problems due to the overloading of the bus bars. In addition proper
insulation between bus bars shall be guaranteed at any time, to avoid any arc fault.
The bars / plates shall be sized so as to allow a correct fastening of the AC cables to perform the
interconnection between the inverters and transformation center.
Correct tightening and torque control of bolts and nuts shall be visible, in order to avoid any poor AC circuit
connections that can cause dangerous hot spots.
The installation of the connectors and/or terminals (and cable glands) shall not reduce the overall protection
degree of the string inverter. Furthermore, in case of connection of different conductor materials, cable
connectors (if included inside the scope of supply) shall be tin-plated aluminum or copper type (tin-plated
copper for copper conductors, and tin-plated aluminium for aluminium cables). Minimum 15µ tin-plated layer
is required. The use of bimetallic connectors must be avoided.
AC Circuit Protections
Overloads and short circuits
The inverters shall be protected against overloads and short circuits through devices installed on board the
unit that can be easily handled by the operator. The contribution of the inverter to the short circuit current
shall be limited to a value of 𝐼𝑐𝑐 ≤ 2 × √2 × 𝐼𝑛 .
On the AC side, the inverter shall be equipped with a sectioning circuit breaker in accordance with IEC 60947-
2, with a throw switch on the outside of the housing and a removable key lock in the open position.
If the string inverter, and LVAC cable overload/shortcircuit protection is performed in the upstream incoming
position of the LV parallel panel (inside the transformation center), the AC circuit breaker installation onboard
the string inverter could be avoided.
If necessary suitable key interlocks shall be provided between the LV parallel panel input and the
corresponding inverter to which it is connected, so it is avoided at any time the access to live voltage parts.
Island effect
The inverters shall be equipped with protections that prevent operation in island mode. All measures shall
be adopted which reduce electromagnetic noise that may affect the function of the protections.
The interface protections adopted shall allow the inverter to resume automatically normal operating
conditions at the end of the disturbance that caused the intervention (automatic reset protections). Unless
CODICE – CODE

38 of 287
otherwise specified by local regulations, for each load condition the inverters shall be capable of remaining
permanently connected to the LV grid available/present at their terminals, for voltage or frequency variations
within the ranges specified in the corresponding grid code. The Contractor shall provide the test reports and
conformity certificates to guarantee that inverters shall comply to voltage and frequency variation specified
in the local grid code.
The interface protections shall function correctly in the environmental conditions specified in the General
Technical Specification. The compliance of the protections to the minimum admissible requirements shall be
supported by test documentation issued by an accredited laboratory associated with the European
Cooperation for Accreditation (EA) or similar body.
Voltage circuit reclosing
The electrical grid operator may require a plant disconnection action from the distribution network due to grid
stability problems, followed by a plant main breaker reclosure, once the grid problems are already resolved.
In this condition, the inverter shall be capable of withstanding the effects due to the current for counter-phase
reclosing of the main breaker of the plant.
Surges
The inverter shall incorporate all necessary surge protective measures (at a hardware level) in order to
protect the inverter from any direct or induced overvoltages, that could damage the inverter or its associated
auxiliary equipment. At least, a type II SPD AC side protection in order to protect the inverter from direct or
induced overvoltage.
Additionally, the inverter shall not give rise to surges exceeding 15% of the rated AC output voltage. In
particular, all provisions shall be adopted at a software/hardware level to prevent the voltage from exceeding
the abovementioned value.
G. INTERNAL DC/AC INVERTER PROTECTIONS

Internal failures
The inverters shall be equipped with all necessary software and hardware protections in order to protect the
inverter from any internal damage or malfunction. It shall be installed an internal diagnostics system capable
of inhibiting their operation in the event of a malfunction.
All possible alarms (and logics) creating such internal failures shall be provided to the SCADA, in order to
have detailed information about the malfunctioning event.
Thermal protections
Two thermal protection systems shall be provided for string inverters:
1. A thermal protection system capable of limiting output power from the inverters in the event of
overheating (power/temperature derating curve). In case of continued overheating, the inverters will
remain shut down until the temperature is normalized with an automatic restart.
Such thermal protection shall be activated and deactivated through a hysteresis threshold. This
means that the de-activation shall be produced at a lower temperature threshold than the activation.
An ulterior protection shall be installed in order to prevent from several consecutive re-starts.
The inverter cubicle temperature shall be available to the SCADA for monitoring and fault-diagnostic
purposes
2. A thermal protection system that shall trip the inverter in case of anomalous temperature detection
CODICE – CODE

39 of 287
on the IGBT modules.

Automatic re-start shall be avoided in this case.
The IGBT temperature shall be available to the SCADA for monitoring and fault-diagnostic purposes
Filters
The inverters shall be equipped with systems for reducing harmonic currents, both on the AC and DC sides
(for the drastic reduction of ripple voltage), so as to ensure that the inverter will operate in a stable and safely
manner, while meeting the necessary grid code requirements.
H. OPERATING MODES
The inverters shall comply with the requirements of the Local Grid Code, also through a Power Plant
Controller.
In particular, the minimum following features shall be implemented:
 Tolerance of frequency and voltage deviations (LVFRT) and (OVRT);
 Controlling of the active power production;
 Controlling of the reactive power production;
 Controlling of the power factor;
 Controlling of the voltage at the Point of Connection;
 Reactive Power Support during voltage drops or peaks at the Point of Connection.
 Q at Night (provide the reactive power needed at night);
 Power Quality compliant with local grid code;
The P-Q capability curve of the inverter shall be “voltage dependent” for a voltage range between 0.9-1.1
p.u. (in steps of 0.02), like the following figure.
Of course, all equipment inside the inverter shall be designed to operate continuously with the maximum
output current within the admissible voltage range of 0.9-1.1 p.u. No firmware limitation on the apparent
power is allowed.
The supplier shall provide a certification about the “voltage dependent” capability curve. The supplier shall
provide a dynamic model of the Inverter, developed for RMS/EMT simulation in DigSILENT powerFactory
(or other software required by EGP). Moreover, the supplier shall provide a detailed guideline which describes
the several slots of the composite frame of the dynamic model.
CODICE – CODE

40 of 287
I. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS

At least the following information shall be available from each inverter:
 Inverter On/Off Status;
 Ground fault Alarm;
 Inverter internal fault Alarm (with additional information about the cause of the alarm);
 Inverter shutdown due to Network out of range (with related out of range parameter);
 Temperature protection intervention (with discrimination from type 1 and type 2 thermal protection
detection);
 Input current Measure;
 Input voltage Measure;
 Input Power Measure;
 Output current (each phase);
 Output voltage (each phase);
 Three-phase power Measure;
 Cos φ Measure;
 Total energy DC side Measure;
 Daily energy produced Measure;
 Total energy produced Measure;
 Local network frequency Measure;
 Operating time Measure.
 Inverter enclosure temperature
 IGBT temperature
The operating parameters for the inverters (the same as those shown on the display on board the unit) shall
be available for storage, processing and transmission to the VLAN switch inside the MV cabin (or
transformation center). Each solar inverter shall communicate on the network through Modbus TCP
protocol.IEC-104 protocol can be also used by inverters by adding proper gateway (option to be quoted).
All communication protocol limitations, such as maximum length between the inverters and transformation
center, and maximum number of inverters to be integrated inside the communication bus, shall be clearly
identified during the technical alignment phase, inside the datasheet of the inverter.
Inverter signal database shall be organized and structured in order to easily distinguish the alarm signals
from the status and measure signals. It shall be possible to identify at least the following:
 Inverter stopped: when the inverter has been stopped by an operator (e.g. for maintenance
purposes);
 Inverter out of scan range: when the inverter no longer communicates;
 Inverter generating: when the inverter is in normal operation producing energy;
 Inverter available: when the inverter is in normal operation but is not producing energy because of
flow radiations;
 Inverter in alarm status: an alarm of some inverter anomaly that has no effect on its operation (the
inverter continues to function normally); It shall be provided also information about the nature of such
CODICE – CODE

41 of 287
alarm
 Inverter in synchronization mode: when the inverter is synchronizing mode with the network;
 Inverter blocked/in fault: when the inverter stopped due to a malfunction; It shall be provided also
information about the nature of such fault
 Inverter blocked due to a ground fault;
Anyway, the inverter and its accessories have to be compliant to PV Plant SCADA System (String Inverter
Configuration) - General Technical Specification.
The thresholds set on the inverters for the various conversion and control functions of the electrical network
parameters shall be controlled through internal software.
1.2.2.2. CENTRALIZED INVERTER
A. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Centralized inverters are single-MPPT inverters type with three-phase output for photovoltaic systems of
medium and large sizes (typically > 500kVA), without transformer, and integrated with functions of control
and protection, in order to regulate the delivery of active and reactive power to the grid in a safely and
controlled manner.
The centrlized inverter supplied shall ensure a correct operation considering:
1. Type and number of modules per string indicated in GTS;
2. Maximum environmental conditions (solar radiation and ambient temperature) indicated in GTS;
3. The apparent power of inverter shall be calculated according to:
o DC/AC ratio indicated in the GTS;
o Required power factor at the Point of Connection according to GTS and/or applicable local grid
code;
o The minimum value of power in the MPPT operational range.
For the operating data, see the synthetic table below:
CENTRALIZED INVERTER
PARAMETERS VALUES
DC input
Maximum DC voltage 1500V
Number of DC inputs per inverter ≤8
Max DC cable section 400 mm2
AC output
Nominal system network Three-phase RST
Operating frequency 50/60Hz
Maximum AC voltage 1000V
Power factor PQ semi-circular capability
Max. current imbalance ≤ 2%
Harmonic distortion THD (1) ≤ 3%
CODICE – CODE

42 of 287
European efficiency ≥ 98%

Max efficiency ≥ 98%
Static MPPT efficiency (2) ≥ 99,8%
Dynamic MPPT efficiency (2) ≥ 99%
Output waveform Sinusoidal
Max AC cable section 300 mm2
Maximum Operating temperature (3) (see GTS)
Environment humidity 100%
Operating altitude (3) (see GTS)
Protection level IP54
Protection internal level with open door IP20
(1) For an output power greater than 25% of rated output
(2) The MPPT efficiency measurement shall be performed in accordance with the regulatory indications provided in
EN 50530 and subsequent amendments and additions
(3) Value/size to be defined referring to the General Technical Specification (GTS)
The degree of mechanical protection required shall be adequate for the site conditions and soil granulometry
(i.e. high presence of dust, sand) and in any case shall not be less than IP54 – NEMA 3S.
In particular sites with presence of heavy sand/dust ambient conditions (desert), the degree of mechanical
protection (>IP54) shall be determined by the Contractor, in order to avoid any presence of dust/sand inside
the equipment (if outdoor), or inside the PCU container/cabinet (for indoor inverters).
All electrical components must be dimensioned and comply with the maximum temperature inside the inverter
under the most severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature). The inverter in question
should be subjected to heat tests in a special climate chamber, with the full load of the nominal current and
in the declared maximum external temperature conditions. The heat test must be performed by an accredited
laboratory according to applicable normative, and must also be supported by thermal-visual images. In case
the inverter is not directly installed outdoor, but it is installed inside an ulterior container/enclosure, the heat
tests shall be performed with the inverters installed inside a representative enclosure with exact dimensions
and materials, to emulate the heat operative performance of the inverter onsite.
The ventilation/conditioning system shall be adequately sized to ensure the power [MVA] vs external ambient
temperature [°C] performance of the inverter, declared during tender phase and modelled inside the .OND
model of the inverters, supported with a fluid dynamics analysis, in any environmental and irradiation
conditions on site, without any further power derating not declared before.
The inverters shall be compliant to European Directives Low Voltage and EMC directive (EMC), and shall
have the CE trademark if used in Europe; if operated elsewhere, they shall conform to local regulatory
standards (e.g. UL, CSA, ETL standards). During technical alignment phase, the Contractor shall provide a
third party certification of the European Efficiency according to the procedure for measuring efficiency
showed inside the IEC 61683.
CODICE – CODE

43 of 287
Moreover, following the same procedure used for the European Efficiency certification, efficiency – power
curves certified by third party shall be provided in order to allow EGP to calculate a site-specific efficiency
with the yearly load profile, in the following conditions:
 at 3 different DC voltage levels (Low V, Medium V, High V inside the MPPT range),
 Inverter loading condition ranging from 5% to 100%, with minimum power interval resolution of 5%.
Efficiency levels shall take into account any absorption for central inverter internal auxiliary services during
their normal operation.
The efficiency – power curves, at different DC voltages, shall be integrated in the .OND model of the inverter.
The inverter shall incorporate IGBT based power electronics technology with PWM modulation technique.
The technology shall incorporate software and hardware protection logics, including, but not limited to, short
circuit, over temperature, DC over/under voltage and AC over/under voltage, AC over/under frequency
conditions, so as to ensure a safe and reliable operation.
B. SIZING
The size of the components, minimum safety distances and protection calibrations shall take into account
thermal derating due to the operating temperature and installation altitude; when these values exceed the
maximum values of the used components, derating shall be applied according to the component's relative
IEC. The proposed configuration shall be validated by EGP before the assignation of the supply; alternative
configurations can be requested without additional costs.
C. MPPT
The inverters shall be equipped with a Maximum Power Point Tracker, or MPPT, in order to optimize the
production of the photovoltaic generator. The MPPT range of inverter shall be compliance with the,
environmental conditions (max solar radiation and ambient temperature), type and number of modules
indicated in the General Technical Specification.
If the inverter DC link voltage goes outside the MPPT range, the inverter shall continue working (with derated
power supply - not at MPPT), and shall control the DC link voltage in order to bring it back inside the MPPT
range of the inverter. It is not acceptable that the inverter is only working when the DC link voltage is strictly
inside the MPPT range.
Only if the DC link voltage goes above 1500V, the inverter is allowed to switch off (stop production), due to
DC link overvoltage protection.
D. GROUNDING KIT AND GROUND FAULT DETECTION

In the case of applications with photovoltaic inverters non-galvanically isolated (transformerless), and
insulated from the ground, the inverter shall be capable of detecting the first ground fault, on both DC and
AC sides, according to IEC 62109-1/2 (and therefore the loss of plant insulation), which shall be detected by
a double contact NO or NC, at least.
The inverter shall feature a continuous insulation fault detection (also during the night), capable of detecting
the loss of insulation of the entire system, both at the DC and AC sides.
The device responsible for detecting ground faults on each inverter shall be capable of calibration during the
commissioning of the installation, as well as during the plant’s operating lifetime.
In case of ground fault the inverter:
CODICE – CODE

44 of 287
 Shall trip or remain connected, as requested by the IEC62109-1/2

 Shall send the information on its display;
 Shall transmit this information to the control and monitoring system;
 Shall activate an audio (a local alarm by siren)/visual (strobe with flash) device that shall work when
any of the insulation fault trip threshold is activated. This audio/visual device shall be installed outside
of the Power Conversion Unit. This means that the inverter shall provide the hardwired insulation trip
aux contact to the LV auxiliary panel of the Power conversion Unit, where it will be installed the
insulation control panel, in charge of activating the alarm.
Inverters installed with photovoltaic modules requiring a ground connection for one of the poles shall be
equipped with a "grounding kit" for the ground connection and the detection of ground faults (detected by at
least one NO or NC contact).
The grounding kit system shall comply with the standards IEC62109-2, IEC 62548, as amended, as well as
all applicable regulations and any instructions provided by the module manufacturer. For the use of the
inverters in the U.S.A., refer to UL1741 as well. In the case of conflicting regulatory instructions, refer to and
apply the condition that most favors the safety of persons. The grounding kit shall be capable of restoring the
ground connection after reporting, and after remedial action is taken for the ground fault. Such a recovery is
preferable, whether executed by means of the reclosure (non-automatic) of a DC magnetic switch, or where
fuses are used by the replacement of the faulty fuse with a new one. In the latter case, the Contractor shall
supply at least three spare fuses for each inverter supplied. During the night (without production) the
grounding kit shall be bypassed, therefore the electrical system shall become totally insulated from the
ground.
E. INVERTER DC SIDE CONNECTIONS AND PROTECTIONS

The centralized inverter shall foresee a DC parallel compartment (QPPI), integrated inside the inverter panel,
which receives each of the DC inputs from the PV field (string boxes), and creates the DC bus of the inverter.
The DC cables from the photovoltaic field shall be connected to special input plates on board the unit. The
plates shall be sized so as to allow a correct fastening of the connecting cables with the corresponding lugs.
All plates and busbars shall be correctly designed and sized according to the applicable Norms and
Standards, in order to ensure sufficient current carrying ampacity, and avoid overheat problems due to the
overloading of busbars. In addition proper separation/insulation between busbars shall be guaranteed at any
time, to avoid any arc fault due to short circuit between different polarities.
DC side cable shields from the field strings shall be connected on the Inverter side only.
DC equipment shall be chosen according to the max voltage of modules, anyway not less than 1500 V.
The inverter DC Combiner box o parallel panel (QPPI) shall have protected inputs, using bayonet fuses on
both polarities (to be used with appropriate handles, which shall be provided, for the insertion and the
extraction of the fuses in total safety). All bayonet fuses shall be type gPV compliance with IEC 60269-6 and
UL 2579.
Each photovoltaic field polarity shall be protected with class II SPD surge arresters or better.
Finally, A DC switch disconnector or circuit breaker (compliance with EN 60947-1/3) shall be installed
CODICE – CODE

45 of 287
between the inverter QPPI, and each DC/AC conversion module, provided by a trip coil circuit for automatic
disconnection of the PV field.
The intervention status of the surge arresters, fuses and switch disconnectors shall be detected by the control
and monitoring system.
Moreover, each fuse shall be combined with a micro switch for a remote signaling of the fuse operation.
At the parallel level (QPPI), the following parameters shall be acquired with a measurement accuracy of 1%:
 Current of each input;
 Current of the output;
 Voltage of the output;
 Power of each input;
 Power of the output.
The QPPI shall implement a microprocessor able to elaborate the above measurements (i.e., the correction
in temperature through sensing units and dedicated algorithms) and allowing the integration of the DC QPPI
with the Local SCADA system.
F. INVERTER AC SIDE CONNECTIONS AND PROTECTIONS

AC Circuit Connections
All plates and bus bars shall be correctly designed and sized according to the applicable Norms and
Standards, in order to ensure sufficient current carrying ampacity, at maximum Inverter power output and
temperature conditions, to avoid overheat problems due to the overloading of the bus bars. In addition proper
insulation between bus bars shall be guaranteed at any time, to avoid any arc fault.
The AC
The bus bars / plates shall be sized so as to allow a correct fastening of the AC cables/busbars to perform
the interconnection between the inverters and MV/LV transformers .
Correct tightening and torque control of bolts and nuts shall be visible, in order to avoid any poor AC circuit
connections that can cause dangerous hot spots.
Furthermore, in case of connection of different conductor materials, cable connectors (if included inside the
scope of supply) shall be tin-plated aluminum or copper type (tin-plated copper for copper conductors, and
tin-plated aluminium for aluminium cables). The use of bimetallic connectors must be avoided.
AC Circuit Protections
Overloads and short circuits
The inverters shall be protected against overloads and short circuits through devices installed on board the
unit that can be easily handled by the operator. The contribution of the inverter to the short circuit current
shall be limited to a value of 𝐼𝑐𝑐 ≤ 2 × √2 × 𝐼𝑛 .
On the AC side, the inverter shall be equipped with a sectioning circuit breaker in accordance with IEC 60947-
2, with a throw switch on the outside of the housing and a removable key lock in the open position.
Island effect
The inverters shall be equipped with protections that prevent operation in island mode. All measures shall
be adopted which reduce electromagnetic noise that may affect the function of the protections. The panels
CODICE – CODE

46 of 287
for the protection devices shall be installed in appropriate compartments, ensuring that no electromagnetic
interference occurs due to the excessive proximity of the power circuits.
The interface protections adopted shall allow the inverter to resume automatically normal operating
conditions at the end of the disturbance that caused the intervention (automatic reset protections). Unless
otherwise specified by local regulations, for each load condition the inverters shall be capable of remaining
permanently connected to the LV grid available/present at their terminals, for voltage or frequency variations
within the ranges specified in the corresponding grid code. The Contractor shall provide the test reports and
conformity certificates to guarantee that inverters shall comply to voltage and frequency variation specified
in the local grid code.
The interface protections shall function correctly in the environmental conditions specified in the General
Technical Specification. The compliance of the protections to the minimum admissible requirements shall be
supported by test documentation issued by an accredited laboratory associated with the European
Cooperation for Accreditation (EA) or similar body.
Voltage circuit reclosing
The electrical grid operator may require a plant disconnection action from the distribution network due to grid
stability problems, followed by a plant main breaker reclosure, once the grid problems are already resolved.
In this condition, the inverter shall be capable of withstanding the effects due to the current for counter-phase
reclosing of the main breaker of the plant.
Surges
The inverter shall incorporate all necessary surge protective measures (at a hardware level) in order to
protect the inverter from any direct or induced overvoltages, that could damage the inverter or its associated
auxiliary equipment. At least, a type II SPD AC side protection in order to protect the inverter from direct or
induced overvoltage.
Additionally, the inverter shall not give rise to surges exceeding 15% of the rated AC output voltage. In
particular, all provisions shall be adopted at a software/hardware level to prevent the voltage from exceeding
the abovementioned.
G. INTERNAL DC/AC INVERTER PROTECTIONS

Internal failures
The inverters shall be equipped with all necessary software and hardware protections in order to protect the
inverter from any internal damage or malfunction. It shall be installed an internal diagnostics system capable
of inhibiting their operation in the event of a malfunction.
All possible alarms (and logics) creating such internal failures shall be provided to the SCADA, in order to
have detailed information about the malfunctioning event.
Thermal protections
Two thermal protection systems shall be provided:
3. A thermal protection system capable of limiting output power from the inverters in the event of
overheating (power/temperature derating curve). In case of continued overheating, the inverters will
remain shut down until the temperature is normalized with an automatic restart.
Such thermal protection shall be activated and deactivated through a hysteresis threshold. This
means that the de-activation shall be produced at a lower temperature threshold than the activation.
CODICE – CODE

47 of 287
An ulterior protection shall be installed in order to prevent from several consecutive re-starts.
The inverter cubicle temperature shall be available to the SCADA for monitoring and fault-diagnostic
purposes
4. A thermal protection system that shall trip the inverter in case of anomalous temperature detection
on the IGBT modules. Automatic re-start shall be avoided in this case.
The IGBT temperature shall be available to the SCADA for monitoring and fault-diagnostic purposes
Filters
The inverters shall be equipped with systems for reducing harmonic currents, both on the AC and DC sides
(for the drastic reduction of ripple voltage), so as to ensure that the inverter will operate in a stable and safely
manner, while meeting the necessary grid code requirements.
H. OPERATING MODES
The inverters shall comply with the requirements of the Local Grid Code, also through a Power Plant
Controller (PPC).
In particular, the minimum following features shall be implemented:
 tolerance of frequency and voltage deviations (LVRT) and (OVRT);
 controlling of the active power production;
 controlling of the reactive power production;
 controlling of the power factor;
 controlling of the voltage at the Point of Connection;
 Reactive Power Support during voltage drops or peaks at the Point of Connection;
 Q at Night (provide the reactive power needed at night);
 Power Quality compliant with local grid code;
The P-Q capability curve of the inverter shall be “voltage dependant” for a voltage range between 0.9-1.1
p.u. (in steps of 0.02).
Of course, all equipment inside the inverter shall be designed to operate continuously with the maximum
output current within the admissible voltage range of 0.9-1.1 p.u. No firmware limitation on the apparent
power is allowed.
The Contractor shall provide a certification about the “voltage dependent” capability curve and the related
DIgSILENT Model (or other software specified by EGP). Moreover, the Contractor shall provide a detailed
CODICE – CODE

48 of 287
guideline, which describes the several slots of the composite frame of the dynamic model.
I. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEMS

At least the following information shall be available from each inverter:
 Inverter On/Off Status;
 Ground fault Alarm;
 Inverter internal fault Alarm (with additional information about the cause of the alarm);
 Inverter shutdown due to Network out of range (with related out of range parameter);
 Temperature protection intervention (with discrimination from type 1 and type 2 thermal protection
detection);
 Input current Measure;
 Input voltage Measure;
 Input Power Measure;
 Output current (each phase);
 Output voltage (each phase);
 Three-phase power Measure;
 Cos φ Measure;
 Total energy DC side Measure;
 Daily energy produced Measure;
 Total energy produced Measure;
 Local network frequency Measure;
 Operating time Measure.
 Inverter enclosure temperature
 IGBT temperature
The operating parameters for the inverters (the same as those shown on the display on board the unit) shall
be available for storage, processing and transmission to the VLAN switch inside the cabin. Each solar inverter
shall communicate on the network through Modbus TCP protocol.IEC-104 protocol can be also used by
inverters by adding proper gateway (option to be quoted).
All communication protocol limitations shall be clearly identified during the technical alignment phase, inside
the datasheet of the inverter.
Inverter signal database shall be organized and structured in order to easily distinguish the alarm signals
from the status and measure signals. It shall be possible to identify at least the following:
 Inverter stopped: when the inverter has been stopped by an operator (e.g. for maintenance
purposes);
 Inverter out of scan range: when the inverter no longer communicates;
 Inverter generating: when the inverter is in normal operation producing energy;
 Inverter available: when the inverter is in normal operation but is not producing energy because of
flow radiations;
 Inverter in alarm status: an alarm of some inverter anomaly that has no effect on its operation (the
CODICE – CODE

49 of 287
inverter continues to function normally); It shall be provided also information about the nature of such
alarm
 Inverter in synchronization mode: when the inverter is synchronizing mode with the network;
 Inverter blocked/in fault: when the inverter stopped due to a malfunction; It shall be provided also
information about the nature of such fault
 Inverter blocked due to a ground fault;
Anyway, the inverter and its accessories have to be compliant to PV Plant SCADA System (String Inverter
Configuration) - General Technical Specification.
The thresholds set on the inverters for the various conversion and control functions of the electrical network
parameters shall be controlled through internal software.
1.2.3. MV CABINS
Code Description
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for
EN 1000 - 3 -2
harmonic current emissions
EN 5027 //
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Protection
EN 50274
against electric shock
EN 50470 - 3 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.)
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 1: General and safety
EN 62040 - 1
requirements for UPS
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic
EN 62040 - 2
compatibility (EMC) requirements
Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of specifying
EN 62040 - 3
the performance and test requirements
EN 62053 - 22 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.). Particular requirements
EN 62053-23 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.). Particular requirements
Empty enclosures for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 62208
assemblies. General requirements
Paints and varnishes – Corrosion protection of steel structures by
EN ISO 12944 (all parts)
protective paint systems
EN/IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
IEC 354 Loading Guide for oil-immersed type power transformers
Three-phase oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 Hz, from
50kVA to 2500kVA with highest voltage for equipment not exceeding
IEC 50464-4
36 kV -- Part 4: Requirements and tests concerning pressurized
corrugated tanks
Three phase dry-type distribution transformers 50 Hz, from 100 to
IEC 50541-1 3150 kVA, with highest voltage for equipment not exceeding 36 kV
Part 1: General requirements;
CODICE – CODE

50 of 287
Code Description
IEC 60044 Instrument transformers
IEC 60068-2 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests
IEC 60076 Power transformers
IEC 60076-1 Power transformers - Part 1: General
IEC 60076-10 Power transformers - Part 10: Determination of sound levels
IEC 60076-11 Power transformers - Part 11: Dry-type transformers
Power transformers - Part 16: Transformers for wind turbines
IEC 60076-16
application
IEC 60076-2 Power transformers – Part 2: Temperature--rise
Power transformers - Part 3: Insulation levels, dielectric tests and
IEC 60076-3
external clearances in air
Power transformer – part 4 : Guide to the lightning impulse and
IEC 60076-4
switching impulse testing - Power transformers and reactors
IEC 60076-5 Power transformers – Part 5: Ability to withstand short circuits
IEC 60076-7 Loading guide for oil-immersed power transformers
IEC 60076-8 Power transformers –Part 8: Application guide
IEC 60125 Protection relays
IEC 60265-1 Switch disconnectors.
IEC 60282-1 Protection fuse
Fluids for electrotechnical applications - Unused mineral insulating
IEC 60296
oils for transformers and switchgear
IEC 60296-6 The standard applies to Fuses for Photovoltaic Systems rated up to
UL 2579 1500 V dc.
The standard applies to the electrical installation of PV systems
IEC 60364-7-712
intended to supply all or part of an installation
Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in
IEC 60376
electrical equipment
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: Type-
IEC 60439-1
tested and partially type-tested assemblies
Basic and safety principles for HMI, marking and identification -
IEC 60447
Actuating principles
IEC 60470 Contactors
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformers
Fire hazard testing: guidance for assessing the fire hazard of
IEC 60695-1-40
electrotechnical products - insulating liquids
It specifies a method of temperature-rise verification of low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear ASSEMBLIES by calculation. The method
IEC 60890
is applicable to enclosed ASSEMBLIES or partitioned sections of
ASSEMBLIES without forced ventilation.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 6-2: Generic standards -
IEC 61000-6-2
Immunity for industrial environments
CODICE – CODE

51 of 287
Code Description
IEC 61378 Converter transformers - the whole series
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1: General
IEC 61439-1
rules
This part of IEC 61558 deals with safety aspects of control
IEC 61558-2-2 transformers and power supplies incorporating control transformers
such as electrical, thermal and mechanical safety
Power transformers – Terminal and tapping markings for power
IEC 616:1978-01
transformers;
IEC 62040 Uninterruptible power systems (UPS)
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for electrical equipment
IEC 62262
against external mechanical impacts (IK code)
IEC 62271-1 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear standards
IEC 62271-100 High voltage alternating current circuit breaker
IEC 62271-102 Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches
High voltage switches Part. 1: High voltage switches for rated
IEC 62271-103
voltages Above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
IEC 62271-105 High voltage alternating current switch-fuse combinations
AC metal enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages
IEC 62271-200
above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
AC insulated enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages
IEC 62271-201
above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 202: High voltage/low
IEC 62271-202
voltage prefabricated substation
The standard specifies a method of temperature-rise verification of
IEC TR 60890
low-voltage switchgear and controlgear ASSEMBLIES by calculation
Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound
ISO 3746
pressure
UE N.548/2014
MV Cabins shall be designed for outdoor conditions, in order to protect all internal equipment against rain,
snow, condensation, water, corrosion, UV etc. without degradations of the performances, the technical
availability and the life‐span. Where the enclosure of the cabinets shall have a lifespan as required in EGP
GTS.
The Manufacturer has to verify the most stringent environmental conditions of the site (stated in EGP General
Technical Specifications) to apply the proper design to the enclosure and/or equipment.
MV Cabins can be:

 Outdoor type, installed on a “skid solution”, non-walking kiosk type with reduced footprint, compact
dimension, with all equipment’s front door access, allowing maintenance and operation from the
outside of the equipment enclosure. Proper protection (roof) shall be provided in order to allow the
maintenance/operation in case of adverse weather conditions (rain, snow, etc.)
 Indoor type, with all equipment inside a precasted concrete (vibrated reinforced) or metal enclosure.
CODICE – CODE

52 of 287
The Cabins can be installed at the ground level (over concrete slab/tank foundations), or above an elevated
support structure. In any case, a safe and easy access to each cabin door shall be ensured through
necessary stairs/platforms/access ramps, to allow O&M personnel to perform onsite works. If the operator
shall work from outside of the cabins, the ground floor shall be levelled (without slopes or inclinations).
All Cabins shall ensure the following requirements:

 Structural reliability and security: calculations shall be carried out according to the Local and the
International Regulations concerning vibrated reinforced concrete and metal structures;
 Durability over time: the walls shall be coated with special plasters and sealants in order to protect
them from adverse atmospheric agents (i.e. water infiltration, corrosion, etc.), even in salty and
aggressive environments. The Cabins structure and constructive characteristics shall remain
unchanged over the entire lifetime of the plant as specified in the General Technical Specification
(GTS);
 Accident-prevention: guarantee the equipotentiality of the internal concrete reinforcement and the
metal structure by means of the “Faraday cage” in order to keep the effects of touch and step
voltages within the limits defined by the EN and IEC Standards; the quality of the grounding system
and equipotential characteristics shall remain unchanged over the entire lifetime of the plant;
 Containment of any leaks of the insulation liquid from the transformers by means of an appropriate
tank in compliance with the EN Standards;
 Complete recoverability of the Cabins and of all the equipment inside them, including the MV and LV
connections.
1.2.3.1. CONFIGURATION FIELDS CABINS
Cabins shall be designed, manufactured and tested in compliance with IEC (International Electrical Code)
standards, specifically:
The Cabin shall house all necessary equipment, and shall be divided in different and separated
rooms/compartments/direct equipment location, in order to provide physical separation between the following
equipment:
 MV/LV transformers
 MV Switchgear
 LV panels
 LV auxiliary equipment
Also, the access to each of these equipment/rooms shall be only allowed specific personnel, which have all
competences and experience to carry out the works in a safety manner.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
The Cabins shall be completely wired (power and control/signals) ready to work as a plug-play system.
The supplier shall provide at least the following power cabling:
 Between the LV parallel panel and the LV/MV transformer
CODICE – CODE

53 of 287
 Between the LV/MV transformer and the MV switchboard

The MV and LV power cabling type and design shall be as indicated in Chapter 1.3.1.2.3.1 and 1.3.1.2.3.2,
and shall be sized to maintain the voltage drop within the limits values indicated in the Chapter 1.3.1.2.3.3:
LV bus bars connection (i.e. “blindosbarre”, as indicated in Chapter 1.2.3.1.3) entails the preferred
solution.
DEGREE OF MECHANICAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Cabin enclosure (indoor type) or equipment cabins (outdoor type) shall be minimum IP54 (according to IEC
60529) except for the basement/foundation (i.e. the part of the enclosure which is buried) and all panels
cables entries, which shall be IP67.
the equipment (if outdoor), or inside the PCU container/cabinet (for indoor inverters).
Independently on the outdoor/indoor Cabin configuration, the MV/LV transformer shall be installed outdoor,
which means that at least the 2 longitudinal sides of the transformer shall be fully opened, to favor outdoor
natural ventilation.
The transformer life parts and connections shall be provided with IP54 metallic protection enclosures, in order
to avoid any direct contact to life parts or adverse environmental condition problems. In addition, a heat
danger sign shall be visible on the transformer tank in order to minimize any safety risk due to direct contact
on heat elements.
For those cases in which the life parts and/or connections of the transformer are not protected against direct
touch and/or adverse environmental conditions, through IP54 protection of terminal/connection metallic
enclosures, the transformer shall be installed inside a PRFV mesh/grid, which shall ensure IP20 protection
to the transformer. Additionally, a roofing shall be provided on top of the transformer, in order to protect the
life parts against adverse environmental conditions.
In any case, the transformer access to life parts shall only be allowed once it has been already de-energized
through suitable key interlock operations with the MVSWGR.
The interface between any enclosure or equipment cabin and the foundation has to be properly sealed, to
guarantee a complete waterproofing and avoid the entrance of animals.
For outdoor type, the Contractor shall supply all the equipment with a metal or prefabricated base/walls in
order to allow a plug & play type installation, including a properly sealed passage of cables from outside and
inside or viceversa.
A degree of protection IP 20 / NEMA 2 is also required for any equipment with the doors open, in order to
avoid any direct contact with energized equipment.
1.2.3.1.1. Conversion Cabin
The conversion cabin, or Power Conversion Unit (PCU) shall be understood as the electrical energy system
that converts, in a centralized manner, the DC power received from the PV field into MV AC power, ready to
CODICE – CODE

54 of 287
be delivered to the grid.

The PCU typically includes the following equipment:
Conversion unit equipment

DC parallel boxes (if applicable)
Central inverters
Main Equipment
MV/LV transformers
MV switchboard
LV auxiliary panel
Auxiliary transformer
Other Control system RTU/PLC for data collection and interface with plant control
Equipment system and monitoring
Power analyzer
UPS
Equipotential system
Normal & emergency lighting
Ventilation system
Service
Smoke detection system
equipment
Anti-intrusion system
Anti-rodent system
Insulation monitoring system
1.2.3.1.2. LV/MV Transformation Cabin
The transformation cabin (TC) shall be understood as the electrical energy system that converts, in a
centralized manner, the AC power received from the string inverters placed on the PV field, into Medium
Voltage AC power, ready to be delivered to the grid.
The TC typically includes the following equipment:
Transformation Cabin equipment

AC parallel boxes
Main Equipment MV/LV transformers
MV switchboard
LV auxiliary panel
Other Control system RTU/PLC for data collection and interface with plant control
Equipment system and monitoring
Power analyzer
UPS
Service
equipment
Ventilation system
CODICE – CODE

55 of 287

Anti-intrusion system
Anti-rodent system
Insulation monitoring system
The design, construction and testing requirements shall conform to the EGP technical specifications, and the
applicable IEC (CEI EN in Europe), ANSI standards. In particular, the transformation center shall be in
compliance with IEC62271-212: Compact Equipment Assembly for Distribution Substation (CEADS).
OPTIMIZED CONFIGURATION
The contractor could follow the prescriptions below in order to provide a more optimized transformation center
design
A. MV/LV Transformer
 1 Unique Transformer / Solar field (reduce the number of switchgear units to 3)
 PADMOUNT SYSTEM FOR USA MARKET (check SoW different)
 Multiple LV windings up to 2
 Each LV winding Rated Power lower than 3,5 MVA (reduce Isc at LV)
 Vcc% (according IEC 60076-5 or higher) to keep Isc < 35 kA (+-10%) (reduce cost of LV equipment
and increase safety)
 Neutral in LV AC --> Isolated or Grounded
B. MV Switchgear
 Only 1 Circuit Breaker unit (due to only 1 transformer / Transformer Center)
 Incoming without switch disconnector / 1 outgoing with Switch disconnector
 Possible inter-trip from LV fault detection to MV CB to avoid LV circuit breaker
C. LV Parallel Panel
NEUTRAL INSULATED GROUNDED

Main panel protection (panel output) Circuit breaker Circuit breaker
String inverter protection (panel inputs) Fuse + disconnector Fuse + disconnector
isolation monitoring required not required
surge protection SPD type II SPD type II
1 Power analyzer at the LV 1 Power analyzer at the LV
Main Measurement unit
panel output panel output
D. Aux Services
 Containerized solution or Outdoor Skid with outdoor panels allowed. (IP 54)
 SCADA & Com equipment: Observed very different cost: [320-5179 USD] Not necessary a SCADA
itself for the Transformer Center. Only necessary to install an acquisition signals I/O equipment or
RTU. This Equipment will be on site connected through MODBUS-RTU with Inverter DATALOGGER
Signals will be integrated in Inverter SCADA.
CODICE – CODE

56 of 287
MV SWGR (FEEDERn.TCn)
n.n.4 52S1
89S1 57S1 89S1 57S1
INCOMING OUTGOING
TO CONNECTION POINT TO MVSWGR (FEEDERn.TCn+1)
TRANSFORMER
MV/LV
LV PARALLEL PANEL LV PARALLEL PANEL
AUX SERVICE
LV AUX
1.2.3.1.3. LV Busbar Connection
The LV bus bars shall have the following minimum requirements:

 Degree of mechanical protection IP 54;
 The transformer shall be installed next to the LV AC parallel panel;
 No joints shall be installed along the bus bars;
 The bus bars shall be assembled and tested on site. However, all bus bars type test certificates
(thermal tests, short circuit withstand test, etc.) and test reports shall be available for inspection of
EGP before onsite equipment procurement;
 The installation of the bus bars shall be in accordance to the erection manual provided by the
manufacturer.
The bus bars shall be in accordance to EN / IEC / AS and they shall be compliant and certified in accordance
with the product standard EN / IEC 61439-6 and AS3439.2. The Contractor shall ensure at any time, through
certificates and test reports, that all bus bars and conductors shall be sized to withstand thermal and dynamic
stresses corresponding to the rated current values and the required short-circuit current values, according to
the applicable Norms and Standards.
1.2.3.2. CONFIGURATION CONNECTION CABINS
Cabins shall be designed, manufactured and tested in compliance with IEC (International Electrical Code)
standards, specifically:
CODICE – CODE

57 of 287
DEGREE OF MECHANICAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

Cabin enclosure (indoor type) or equipment cabins (outdoor type) shall be minimum IP54 (according to IEC
60529) except for the basement/foundation (i.e. the part of the enclosure which is buried) and all panels
cables entries, which shall be IP67.
the equipment (if outdoor), or inside the delivery cabin container/cabinet (if indoor).
The interface between any enclosure or equipment cabin and the foundation has to be properly sealed, to
guarantee a complete waterproofing and avoid the entrance of animals.
The Contractor shall supply all the equipment with a metal or prefabricated base/walls in order to allow a
plug & play type installation, including a properly sealed passage of cables from outside and inside or vice
versa.
A degree of protection IP 20 / NEMA 2 is also required for any power equipment with the doors open, in order
to avoid any direct contact with energized equipment. Direct contact to life parts shall be prevented at any
time.
1.2.3.2.1. Delivery Cabin
The delivery cabin shall be understood as the electrical energy cabin that parallels several MV feeders, and
provides a single MV connection to the grid, ready with all fiscal and grid connection measurements and
controls in order to interface with the grid operator. The delivery cabin output entails the point of
interconnection (POI) of the plant.
The Delivery Cabin typically includes the following equipment:
Delivery Cabin equipment

Main Equipment MV switchboard
LV auxiliary panel
Other
Equipment Control system RTU/PLC for data collection and interface
with plant control system and monitoring
UPS
Service Ventilation system

equipment Smoke detection system
Anti-intrusion sytem
Anti-rodent system
The delivery cabin shall house all necessary equipment. The delivery cabin shall be divided in different and
CODICE – CODE

58 of 287
separated rooms/compartments/direct equipment location, in order to provide physical separation between

the following equipment:
 MV SWGR inside the MV room,
 MV/LV auxiliary transformer inside AST room,
 Plant control and protection equipment inside LV room,
 Point of interconnection measuring equipment inside the measure room,
 Equipment interface with the outgoing MV line and/or DSO inside the delivery room.
The delivery cabin type (indoor / outdoor) and constructive requirements shall fulfill at any time all local
requirements and grid interconnection requests, considering also those related to the requirements on the
delivery cabin configuration and rooms. If allowed by local permitting and grid connection authorities, the
delivery cabin could be integrated inside a suitably selected conversion or transformation cabin, so as to
unify the use of common equipment and reduce the CAPEX on equipment.
1.2.3.2.2. Parallel Cabin
In cases where connection point at the national electric grid is away from the plant, it shall be also included
the supply and installation of a MV parallel cabin (inside the plant), which main purpose is to collect the power
from all conversion/transformation cabins of the plant, and deliver it to the point of connection to the local
electric grid.
The Parallel Cabin typically includes the following equipment.
Parallel Cabin equipment

Main Equipment MV switchboard
LV auxiliary panel
Other
Equipment Control system RTU/PLC for data collection and interface
with plant control system and monitoring
UPS
Equipotential sytem
Service Normal & emergency lighting

equipment Ventilation system
CODICE – CODE

59 of 287
Anti-intrusion sytem
Anti-rodent system
The parallel cabin shall house all necessary equipment. It shall be divided in different and separated
rooms/compartments/direct equipment location, in order to provide physical separation between the following
equipment:
 MV SWGR inside the MV room
 MV/LV auxiliary transformer inside AST room
 Plant monitoring/control and protection equipment inside LV room
The parallel cabin type (indoor / outdoor) and constructive requirements shall fulfill at any time all local
permitting requirements and grid interconnection requests, considering also those related to the requirements
on the parallel cabin configuration and rooms (if any). If allowed by local permitting and grid connection
authorities, the delivery cabin could be integrated inside a suitably selected conversion or transformation
cabin, so as to unify the use of common equipment and reduce the CAPEX on equipment.
1.2.3.3. BUILDING
1.2.3.3.1. Structure
Cabin’s buildings shall be designed for outdoor conditions, in order to protect all internal equipment against
rain, snow, condensation, water, corrosion, UV etc. without degradations of the performances, the technical
availability and the life‐span. The Manufacturer has to verify the most stringent environmental conditions of
the site (stated in the General Technical Specifications) to apply the proper design to the enclosure.
1.2.3.3.2. Safety Equipment
Each electrical cabin shall be equipped with appropriate accident prevention equipment and signs, monitoring
and providing information regarding prohibitions, obligations, danger and safety; however, the number and
the type of such equipment and signs shall be compliant with current standardization and all regulatory
standards/laws in force in the specific country of destination. All labels and signs shall be metallic. Below the
minimum number and type of equipment that the Contractor shall provide, such as:
 monitoring signs providing information on prohibitions, obligations, dangers and safety.
o Warning sign with emergency instructions
o Danger sign specifying voltage indications
CODICE – CODE

60 of 287
o Sign prohibiting the use of water for extinguishing a fire

o Sign prohibiting access to unauthorized personnel
o Sign indicating the maximum number of people allowed at the same time within the various local
 Interlocks
 Pair of insulating gloves in a sleeve hanging from the wall (according to the local voltage)
 36 kV no-slip insulated carpet and glover (according to the local voltage)
 Emergency buttons
 Support for operating levers of the MV switchboards, wall mounted
 Single line diagram (framed under glass, A3)
 MV mobile grounding device
 Portable emergency lamp with auto-charging nickel-cadmium battery, 25W lamp, 3 hr range,
complete with recharging cable and plug and a wall mounted support bracket
 First aid box
 Emergency exit lights on each port
 CO2 extinguishers (properly sized)
The supply will also provide a segregation grid behind the access door to the AST transformer room, screwed
and removable with equipment in case of maintenance to the transformer. It should have a degree of
protection not less than IP20.
1.2.3.3.3. Cableway
MV cableway
The connection of MV cables will be done through the precast concrete foundations or metallic base platform
of the cabin, using blind holes with predetermined break for entry and exit of cables.
To allow access to the cables as smoothly as possible it will be realized some floor traps of various rooms of
the cabin, the exact position of the doors will be defined in agreement with EGP.
MV switchboard
The route of the cables from the PV park and from the delivery room will be built using prefabricated
foundation or metallic base platform.
The AST transformer will be connected to the cell of the MV switchgear, passing the cables through the
prefabricated foundation metallic base platform.
LV cableway inside the MV cabin

The route of LV cables will be physically separated from MV cables.
For this purpose, while for MV cables will be use the foundation or metallic base platform, the LV cables will
be placed above the floor, using suitable conduits or cables way anchored to the cabin structure. Signal and
data cables will be placed in a separate conduits from the power cables.
CODICE – CODE

61 of 287
1.2.3.3.4. Interlocks
The switchgear must be equipped with all the interlocks necessary to prevent malfunctioning that could
compromise not only the efficiency and reliability of the equipment, but also the safety of the electrical panel
operators. The typical structure of MV switchgears correspond to the one introduced in the Figure “Single
Line Diagram of the Interlocks between two consecutive PCU/TC (Cabin n and Cabin n+1)”, with available
connection positions to MV/LV transformers, and to immediately upstream and downstream MV switchgears
of the same feeder.
All interlocks between switching devices (circuit breakers, line disconnectors, and earthing switches) shall be
executed through mechanical interlocks.
The minimum interlocks to be satisfied between switching devices within the consecutive cabins of the same
feeder, shall follow the interlock philosophy introduced in the table below (Table “Minimum interlocks between
consecutive cabins of the same feeder”). In case of implementation of line switch disconnectors with
capability of opening the circuit under load, the interlock between the circuit breaker and the disconnector of
the same panel could be avoided, as in case of circuit breaker failure, the disconnector should still be able
to open the circuit. However, under normal operation, the operation procedure should consider the suitable
maneuvering, which is to open first the circuit breaker, and later open the disconnector.
The access door of the cable compartment panel must be removed only under safe conditions that is with
open switch-disconnector and closed earthing switch; this condition shall be made with a mechanical
interlock.
Once the maintenance working duties have been carried out, the interlock between the access panel door
reclosure and the opening of the earthing switch shall be done with a spring catch keylock/sensor (on the
panel door), whose compressed spring position will be the only necessary condition that can allow the
opening of the earthing switch disconnector. This means that maintenance duties have been finished and
the system is ready to be re-energized again in safe conditions. The compression of the spring catch
keylock/sensor shall be possible directly with the door closed, or by using a special tool.
A step-by-step detailed operational description (visual indications through pictures) shall be provided of all
the switch maneuvers associated to a given cell should be included on the panel front doors. Summarized
or vague operation instructions shall not be sufficient.
CODICE – CODE

62 of 287
Figure “Single Line Diagram of the Interlocks between two consecutive PCU/TC (Cabin n and Cabin n+1)”
CODICE – CODE

63 of 287
Table “Minimum interlocks between consecutive cabins of the same feeder”

CODICE – CODE

64 of 287
1.2.3.3.5. Signing
The Cabins container shall have a plate containing the following information, which shall remain fixed and
readable over the entire lifetime of the plant:
o Name of the Manufacturer;
o Identification code assigned to the box by the Manufacturer;
o Year of manufacturing.
All main equipment of the Cabins (Inverters, MV/LV Transformers, MV Switchgears) shall have its own Rating
Plate with engraved all data according to the applicable International Norms.
1.2.3.4. MAIN EQUIPMENT
1.2.3.4.1. AC Parallel Box
A. REQUIREMENTS
The station AC parallel box is a LV panel located in the transformation cabin to make the connection of the
string inverters or field ac pre-parallel boxes and provide the protection of the circuits.
This panel shall have the minimum technical details indicated below:
Nominal operating voltage up to: 1000 V
Insulation voltage: 1000 V
Test voltage for 1 min.: 8 kV
Number of phases: 3F
Nominal frequency: 50/60 Hz
Rated bus bar current up to (2):
Min. degree of protection: IP 54/NEMA 3 outdoor IP 20 if door open
Form of segregation: Form 3b
Power sources: 1 (Normal)
Access: Frontal
Cable channel: Frontal
B. LV PANEL CONFIGURATION AND PROTECTION
NEUTRAL INSULATED GROUNDED
Main panel protection (panel Circuit breaker

Circuit breaker
output)
String inverter protection Circuit breaker, or Circuit breaker, or
(panel inputs) fuse+disconnector fuse+disconnector
isolation monitoring required not required
surge protection SPD type II SPD type II
1 Power analyzer at the LV 1 Power analyzer at the LV panel
Main Measurement unit
panel output output
2
According to the distribution system and transformer size.
CODICE – CODE

65 of 287
It is necessary to provide voltage presence indicators in each LV input.

All switching devices shall be provided with key interlocks so as to ensure a safe operation of the entire
system.
C. POWER CABLING
rated current values and the required short-circuit current values.
the structure by means of insulated comb supports and arranged so as to allow for future variations.
The circuit breakers in boxes set vertically side by side on a single plate shall be powered from the top using
(as specified by the manufacturer) specific prefabricated dispatchers allowing for the connections as well as
the possibility of adding or replacing equipment with suitable characteristics without making substantial
changes to the operating unit in question.
time, without requiring periodic tightening.
Measures adopted to achieve these specifications shall be guaranteed and certified by the manufacturer as
part of the quality assurance.
The main busbars shall be arranged and divided into sections equal to the number of elements into which
the panel can be broken down, allowing for extensions on both sides.
The connections between the horizontal and vertical busbars shall be made through standard connectors
supplied by the busbar manufacturer.
D. AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS
The auxiliary connections shall be flexible and stranded, with an isolation of 3 kV with the following minimum
sections:
 4 mm2 for the current transformers (CT);
 2.5 mm2 for the control circuits;
 1.5 mm2 for the signal circuits and voltage transformers (VT).
Each conductor shall include a numbered ring corresponding to the number on the terminal and functional
diagram; inside the panel the wires for the various utilities shall be identified:
 Power circuit (phase): Black
 Power circuit (neutral): Light Blue
 Ground circuit: Yellow/Green
 Auxiliary circuit for internal utilities: Red
 Auxiliary circuit for external utilities: Orange
 Auxiliary circuit for settings: White
Two wires may be allowed on the same terminal only on the internal side of the panel. The terminals shall
CODICE – CODE

66 of 287
be a type for which the tightening pressure is obtained by means of a splint and not directly from the screw.
The wires shall be combined in bundles in channel runs or similar systems with a removable cover. These
systems shall allow for additional wires to be inserted, whose volume equals 25% of those already installed.
Adhesive fastening systems are not permitted.
E. STRUCTURE AND PAINTWORK

Stand-alone panels or panel elements shall be equipped with retractable lifting eyebolts.
All electrical components shall be accessible only from the front, via hinged panels. The front panel shall be
equipped with slots for passing through the control units.
All equipment shall be fastened onto guides or panels fixed onto specific support beams.
Instruments and signal lamps shall be assembled onto the front panels.
To ensure effective resistance to corrosion, the structure and panels shall be suitably treated and varnished.
The treated metal sheets shall be painted with thermosetting powder epoxy resin mixed with polyester resin,
finished colour RAL 7030 smooth finish and semi-gloss, with a minimum thickness of 70 μm.
F. DIAGRAMS
Each panel, even the simplest panels, shall be equipped with a special diagram pocket holding the latest up-
to-date power and functional diagrams.
G. MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
Where not specified, measuring instrumentation shall be modular with DIN guides and shall foresee a
Modbus communication protocol interface (TCP/IP preferred).
1.2.3.4.2. MV Switchboard
1.2.3.4.2.1. MV Switchboard for Conversion/Transformation Cabins
This section describes all the Gas Insulating (GIS) MVSWGR requirements related to the MV
conversion cabins and/or transformation cabins.
All parts, accessories, expenses and obligations necessary for the supply of the switchgear are into
Contractor’s responsibility, including those not explicitly mentioned herein, but indispensable for the proper
operation.
A. DESIGN CRITERIA
MV SWG can be installed inside an electrical cabinet or outside.
TEMPERATURE LIMITS AND ENVIRONMENT

Environmental conditions according to IEC
Standards
Maximum temperature ambient 40ºC
Maximum temperature inside the cabin 40ºC+5k (cabin thermal class)
Maximum 24 h average temperature 35ºC
Minimum (corresponds to “minus 5 °C indoor class”) -5ºC
Maximum relative humidity
for 1 hour 90%
CODICE – CODE

67 of 287
for 24 hours 95%

Altitude ≤1000m asl
SWITCHGEAR INTERNAL ARC FAULT
IEC 62271-200 Classification AFLR
For indoor application certified according to IEC Type test certificate
62271-202 is required
SWITCHGEAR RATINGS
System configuration
Nominal system voltage [24-36-40.5-52]kV
Minimum rated main bus current [400-630]A (1)
Minimum rated interrupting (short-circuit) current, ≥20kA(2)
symmetrical
Peak withstand current 40kA
Rated power-frequency withstand voltage (one- [50-70-85-100]kV
minute)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (BIL) [125-170-200-260]kV
Continuous current rating of the main circuit breaker [400-630]A (1)
Continuous current rating of the feeder circuit [400-630]A (1)
breaker2
MV SPD type II shall be installed in order to protect
the MV/LV transformer from an overvoltage event
1. Rated normal currents of components shall be
valid for ambient temperature of 40° C. Rated
nominal current to be determined in a project
by project basis according to the rating
current/power to be delivered
2. This is a reference value, which shall be
determined in a project by project basis. The
correct shortcircuit value to be considered will
be provided in the EGP GTS document. If not
provided, consider 20kA
B. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION
The structure of the switchboard shall be constructed with standardized type units placed side-by-side, each
one of which is comprised of standardized modular construction materials tested at the factory.
Each unit’s structure shall be self-supporting and made with press-formed pre-galvanized sheet metal with a
thickness of 2 mm.
Loss of Service Continuity category, according to LSC2

IEC 62271-200
Protection degree of MV panel for indoor installation IP33
Protection degree of MV panel for outdoor IP54
installation or MV panel parts with outdoor access
Insulating gas with maintenance-free components
under normal ambient conditions according to IEC
62271-1.
Wall-standing or free-standing arrangement
The arc proof switchgear shall be in compliance with
IEC 62271-200 in accordance with classification
AFLR minimum time duration of 1 sec ensuring
operator safety. The set of the switchgear installed
into a prefabricated cabin, as a Compact sub-station
CODICE – CODE

68 of 287
system, shall be in compliance and certified

according to IEC 62271-202.
Any gas duct exhaust solution proposed by the MV
cabin contractor or MV SWG manufacturer, shall be
certified IEC 62271-201, and any gas duct exhaust
shall be vented in a controlled manner through a
dedicated wall damper with septal fracture (with the
same IP54 rating of the prefabricated cabin).
Each MV switchgear system will have a self-supporting structure and will contain compartments filled with
gas insulating hermetically sealed; there will be one or more compartments for the busbar system (including
the isolator side bars), the circuit breaker, the switch-disconnectors and line side of the earth.
Each compartment will be equipped with:
 safety valve against overpressure;
 portholes for visual verification of the position of switching devices (disconnectors);
 device for the verification of the busbar voltage presence and arrivals line, on the front panel;
Each compartment will also complete with:
 devices controlling disconnectors with related interlocks;
 devices for the local control of the closing springs;
 mechanical indicator of the switch position and the state of the springs;
 opening button local;
 terminal which will report all the circuits, and control measures specified in the wiring diagrams of the
uprights;
 auxiliary relays and components to realize the logic required;
 mimic diagram for circuit breakers and disconnectors placed on the front panel;
 alerts for alarms and faults (gas pressure, lack of auxiliary voltage, power snap switch actuator, etc.);
 cable area in the lower part of the compartment, air-insulated, arranged to accommodate the
necessary cables arriving to the MVSWGR. This area should have a size that allows for the easy
connection of cables to the terminals of each upright from the front panel.
 terminals cables whose type will be agreed with EGP.
The base of the MVSWGR shall consist of continuous structural–steel channel extending completely around
all four sides of each bay and welded or bolted at each corner.
All cable compartment doors shall be provided with a sturdy, corrosion resistant self–latching door position
holder. In addition, all doors shall be equipped with key interlock mechanical device to allow opening only
when the cubicle has been previously grounded.
Door openings bolted panels (and bolted panels providing access to low–voltage components) shall have
resilient compression gasketing at the top and both sides to prevent water from entering the enclosure.
Externally visible permanent nameplates shall be provided identifying each instrument, instrument switch,
meter, relay, control switch, indicating light, potential transformer compartment and circuit breaker
compartment. The identification shall be the same as on the drawings.
Equipment and terminal blocks within the compartments shall be suitably identified and shall have the same
identification as on the drawings.
CODICE – CODE

69 of 287
Each compartment shall have a corrosion resistant nameplate according to IEC 62271 series.
CT and VT labels (adhesive label are accepted) shall be duplicated and attached inside each column
instruments cubicle door.
All key interlocks procedures, internal or external to the panel, shall be detailed for each cubicle in a dedicated
label, fixed to each cubicle in a visible position.
C. CABIN CONFIGURATION AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Line-out cell (cell going towards the substation), containing the following components:
 Voltage capacitors;
 Cable compartment;
 Thermal cable sensor to monitor the temperature of the terminal cables
Line-in (cell collecting the power from lower level PCUn+1/TCn+1 of the same feeder), containing the
following components:
 Line-grounding disconnector (89LT);
 Voltage capacitors signal
 Cable compartment;
Trafo-in cell (collects the power generated by the transformers of the PCU/TC in question) containing the
following components:
 Circuit breaker (52L) with manual command;
 Line-grounding disconnector (89LT);
 N. 3 CT for 50/51 protection;
 Toroidal CT for 50N protection
 Cable compartment
CODICE – CODE

70 of 287
1. Ground Bus
A 70 mm2 or larger, copper ground bus shall be located in the bottom front of the equipment compartment
and run the entire length of the switchgear, affording connecting to all units and equipped with solderless
cable connectors at each end.
The doors shall be connected to the metal structure by means of flexible copper sleeves with a cross section
of 16 mm2.
All the main equipment shall be grounded.
2. Circuit breaker
As a circuit breaker type, it can be acceptable both vacuum or SF6 insulated breakers.
The circuit breaker shall be comply with IEC 62271-100 standard.
The other main features are:
Rated operating sequence O-0,3s-CO-30s-CO
Mechanical endurance class M2
Electrical endurance class E2
Capacitive current breaking class C2
Independently on the breaking technology selected, the Breaker shall be provided with 2 opening circuits as
indicated below:
 first opening circuit: shunt trip coil (Tripping by protection relay or electrical actuation)
 second opening circuit: auxiliary voltage loss trip coil (auxiliary undervoltage release: which is
permanently connected to voltage while the vacuum circuit-breaker is closed, tripping is initiated
when this voltage drops). The voltage loss trip coil must be mechanically excludable.
The opening control commands will activate the tripolar switch by means of opening coil. The control
commands will consist on opening coils powered at 230 Vac under UPS.
It must be possible to control the breaker locally, using the buttons shown on the front of the panel.
An external circuit breaker opening command must be available.
The control system will also be equipped with:

 mechanical operation counter;
 Anti-pumping device;
 interlock for open the breaker that prevents the closing mechanical and electrical with key removed;
The switch should be provided with all necessary auxiliary contacts to the needs of the operating logic
implemented within the MV switchgear; Moreover, for any external requirements, shall be prepared for further
auxiliary contacts as follows:
 No. 4NO + 4NC auxiliary contacts for closed breaker;
 No. 4NO + 4NC auxiliary contacts for open breaker.
CODICE – CODE

71 of 287
3. Disconnectors
The disconnectors shall be able to assume three positions: closed, open, and grounded.
The disconnector shall be comply with IEC 62271-102 standard.
The other main features are:
Mechanical endurance class M1
Electrical endurance class E0
Disconnector class E2
The disconnectors will be manually controlled by a control (tripolar) on the front of the compartment. The
disconnectors will be moved by the actuation of a lever whose extraction, will ensure the completion of the
moving.
Mechanical indicator of the open and closed state shall be included on the synoptic diagram located on the
front of the electrical panel.
To avoid incorrect operations, the disconnector must be, normally, interlocked with the breaker when it is in
earthing switch position.
The grounding disconnectors, required for grounding the MV equipment and cables that can be accessed by
the operator, must be suitable for resisting short-circuit currents.
The other disconnectors shall be with adequate capacity to satisfy the load requirements of the units for
which they will be used.
The disconnectors shall be provided with all necessary auxiliary contacts to the needs of the operating logic
implemented within the framework agreement and, any external requirements, shall be prepared for
additional auxiliary contacts as follows:
 No. 4NO + 4NC auxiliary contacts for disconnecting closed;
 No. 4NO + 4NC auxiliary contacts for earthing switch open.
4. Cable compartment
The cable compartment must be equipped with a hinged door with a handle to allow opening and access
inside to inspect the equipment. The door handle shall be pad–lockable and the door mechanism shall have
a three point latch system.
All doors shall be provided with a sturdy, corrosion resistant self–latching door position holder. The cable
compartment door shall be interlocked with the earth and load disconnectors, so as to allow a safe access
to the cable compartment panel
The following equipment can be installed inside the line cubicle:
- current transformers
- cable MV terminals
- anti-condensate heater
MV SWG shall be fitted with external cone bushings, with capacitive voltage divider if required, according to
IEC 50181 standard to connect MV cable terminals. The bushing insulators must have a rated current suitable
for the load to be supplied.
CODICE – CODE

72 of 287
5. Voltage and current protection transformers (CT and VT)

Transformers shall be protected with current–limiting primary fuses, and shall be designed to withstand the
basic impulse level (BIL) of the switchgear assembly. The primary connection shall be disconnected before
the transformer or its primary fuses become accessible. A similar arrangement shall be provided for the
primary fuses of control power transformers.
The current transformers for the maximum current protection shall be three and installed each one on a single
phases.
The zero-phase sequence current transformer must be unique for each user, of the appropriate size and
type, to be installed inside the cable compartment and in any case not outside the MV SWG.
The voltage and current transformers shall possess the performance and precision class specified in the
description of the units. Specifically:
 The current transformers for the maximum current protection shall be able to reproduce at the
secondary winding even the maximum short-circuit current in the primary, in a manner that is
sufficiently reliable and precise as to guarantee the operation of the protection.
 The zero-phase sequence current transformer, used for the grounding zero-phase sequence
protection shall have a ratio of 100/1 and performance that is at least equivalent to that of precision
class 5P20; they shall also be able to reproduce at the secondary even the maximum grounded
double fault current on different lines of 2 kA, in a manner that is sufficiently reliable and precise as
to guarantee the operation of the protection.
 The phase-ground voltage transformer circuit used for the reconstruction of the zero-phase
sequence voltage shall be class 0.5 3P, with voltage factor 1.9 for 30 s, rated performance 50 VA,
with work induction value not exceeding 0.7 T, and with a transformation factor able to produce a
secondary voltage on the open-triangle circuit of 100 V in the case of a single-phase grounding fault
on the MV power grid.
6. Instruments cubicle
The instruments cubicle shall be housed in the upper front portion of the electrical panel, in one separate and
segregate part, provided with a hinged door with opening knobs to allow access to the equipment inside the
cubicle.
The LV equipment shall be installed in the instruments cubicle, specifically:
Control and signaling device
 Microprocessor multifunction protection unit for controlled communication, supervision and control
function, measuring and protection, which is able which is able to communicate the characteristic
operating data to the local SCADA system. Each SCADA will receive correct information according
to specific use
 Control and signaling device
 Thermal cables monitoring system
 Transformer thermometric unit (where required)
 Relays and instruments
CODICE – CODE

73 of 287
 Auxiliary switches and fuses

 Terminal blocks
 Terminal board for the remote signal transmission (open/closed switch position, open/closed
disconnector position, signals from the transducer, activation of the protection release, etc.), to the
local SCADA plant system
 Switch unit, shall group all microprocessor-controlled communication and protection units installed
on the MV switchgear to be interfaced with plant SCADA via modbus
7. Protection relay
MV switchgear protection relay shall be microprocessor type
Fault tripping relays shall trip via a manual re–settable lockout relay inclusive in the protection. The protection
shall be mounted on the front of the instruments cubicle. Protective relays with appropriate CT’s and
voltage/sensors shall be supplied.
The protection relays used shall therefore be able to:
 realize all the protective functions provided for each functional unit implementing commands and
returning the signal to the remote operation;
 develop logical details such as the logical coordination between different protections of functional
units;
 give back error messages or any internal operating states of details that will be defined in the
development phase of the project executive;
 measure and give back, remote with local display, all measures provided;
 give back through the serial port and optical port functions RCE (history event) and OP
(oscilloperturbography);
 acquire and give back through the serial port and optical port other possible signals coming from the
protection;
 Give back to the remote operation the measures, the alerts and alarms, will be through native
protocol IEC 61850.
For protections tripping of the MV switchgear for external causes, it will be sent a block command that will
open the lock switch, this block must be stored.
A centralized thermal monitoring system of MV cables shall be provided for each MV SWG units. This shall
be capable of monitoring the temperature of each cable connected to the SWG by providing at least one
alarm signal in the event of a predetermined threshold being exceeded.
8. Operation sequence plate and synoptic diagram

Each modules shall be equipped with a "maneuver sequence plate" which shows the sequence of maneuvers
to be performed, respectively, for access to the compartment and for commissioning. It shall be also include
the SLD of the module. This plate must be positioned on the front of the module so as to be clearly visible.
CODICE – CODE

74 of 287
9. Signaling screen on maneuvering seats

On each module, in correspondence with each manual maneuvering seat, there shall be installed the label
signaling to indicate the position of the component devices and the directions of movement for performing
the maneuvers.
1.2.3.4.2.2. MV Switchgear for Delivery Cabin
The information comprised inside this section and subsections is only applicable for the delivery cabin.
If not explicitly mentioned hereinafter, the same MVSWGR requirements introduced in section 1.2.3.4.2.1
shall be followed, for MVSWGRs installed inside delivery or parallel cabin applications
For the specific case in which the plant is connected to the grid directly in MV, this will be done through a
delivery MVSGR, whose main purpose is to aggregate all the MV feeders of the plant (as input), and provide
a single MV output to evacuate the total power of the plant towards the point of connection. In addition to the
MVSWGR requirements provided so far, this type of delivery MVSGRs shall respect the following switchgear
ratings.
main Rated short-

Rated busbar rated time maximum
Rated switchgear
operating current in withstand power for grid
Insulation rated current
voltage Vn continuous current IK (A) connection
Voltage (kV) in continuous
(kV) service In (A) (MW)
service In (A) ( 3)
7,2 kV 6 kV 2000 2000 25kA/1s 7.5
12 kV 10 kV 2000 2000 40kA/1s 13
17,5 kV 15 kV 2000 2000 40kA/1s 19.5
24 kV 20 kV 2000 2000 40kA/1s 26
36 kV 30 kV 2500 2500 40kA/1s 39
36 kV 33 kV 2500 2500 41kA/1s 43
40,5 kV 34,5 kV 2500 2500 31.5kA/1s 45
Other relevant parameter relevant to delivery MVSWGRs:
Rated short- Rated

Rated Rated
duration lightning Rated Rated peak internal arc
Insulation operating
power- impulse frequency withstand protection
Voltage voltage Vn
freq.withstand withstand fr current Ip (duration)
(kV) (kV)
voltage (kV) voltage
7,2 kV 6 kV 28 75
12 kV 10 kV 28 75
17,5 kV 15 kV 50 125 50/60 Hz 2.5 x Ik Ik – 1sec
24 kV 20 kV 50 125
36 kV 30 kV 70 170
3
This is a reference value, which shall be determined in a project by project basis. The correct shortcircuit value to be
considered will be provided in the EGP GTS document
CODICE – CODE

75 of 287
Rated short- Rated

Rated Rated
duration lightning Rated Rated peak internal arc
Insulation operating
power- impulse frequency withstand protection
Voltage voltage Vn
freq.withstand withstand fr current Ip (duration)
(kV) (kV)
voltage (kV) voltage
36 kV 33 kV 85 185
40,5 kV 34,5 kV 85 185
A. CONFIGURATION AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT
Line-out cell, containing the following components:

 interface disconnector (89I);
 General disconnector (89C);
 Main breaker (52C);
 earthing disconnector;
 busbar earthing disconnector (may be added in other column also);
 CT and VT dedicated to the fiscal energy measurement fed into the grid;
 CT and VT needed to implement the protection system and metering circuit diagram (including the
toroidal CT for the 67N protection);
 protection system with the functions contained in the scheme;
The arrival line components and protection functions shall be reviewed in a project by project basis, and shall
always comply with the grid interconnection norms and regulations.
Line-in circuit (is the same for two or more subfields) containing the following components:
 disconnector (89L);
CODICE – CODE

76 of 287
 breaker (52L);
 breaker earthing disconnector;
 line earthing disconnector;
 CT and VT needed to implement the protection system and metering circuit diagram (including the
toroidal CT for the 67N protection);
 if needed, the supply of CT for the measurement of the energy produced by the single circuit (the
voltage will be derived, via sealable terminal dedicated, from fiscal VT installed on the busbars);
 protection system with the functions contained in the scheme;
 measuring system with the instructions given in the diagram (digital multimeter with simultaneous
reading of all quantities);
 external control, status, alarm, logic, undervoltage release and shunt trip coils, etc.
Output AST transformer circuit, containing the following components:

 disconnector (89SC);
 breaker (52SC);
 breaker earthing disconnector;
 AST transformer earthing disconnector;
 CT for the overcurrent protection;
 overcurrent protection 50/51;
 external control, status, alarm, logic, undervoltage release and shunt trip coils, etc.
In the front of the compartment of the AST, the Supplier shall install the thermometric control unit of the AST
transformer (Trip: high temperature second threshold, Alarm: High temperature threshold first, Fault:
Watchdog). The controller's alimentation will be derived from the auxiliary panel and the alarm signals will be
made available in the terminal box or wired with other alarms according to the requests that EGP shall provide
at the time of order.
If applicable and allowed by grid connection regulation and standards, the line disconnector and ground
disconnector could be integrated in a unique device, with 3 positions: line disconnector closed, opened, or
grounded.
A1. Measuring transformers (CT and VT)

For all interfaces with energy measurement systems, please refer to compliance with the applicable
regulations; in particular:
 performance choice shall be such as to ensure that the gear units are working more than 25% of the
rated itself;
 terminal blocks (amperometer and voltmeter) and the voltage switch circuit shall be sealable and
housed in the same container.
A2. Fiscal measurement transformers (CT and VT)

Accordance with the GTS, for required applications, the supply shall include the measure transformers
CODICE – CODE

77 of 287
intended for fiscal energy, shall be provided for each typical compartment related to the circuits, the following
components:
 No. 1 set of three CTs installed in the circuit compartment;
 No. 1 set of VT busbar.
The wiring of the CT and the VT to certificate the fiscal energy produced by each compartment, shall be
made in conformity with the valid regulations and in particular shall be cabled using cables of section not less
than 6mm2 for CT and 6mm2 for the VT, shall posed in a separate conduit from the rest of the wiring of the
switchboard. All points of connection and / or disconnection (Stotz terminal blocks, etc.) shall be protected
by PVC caps for use sealable.
 The VT and CT shall be provided with Accuracy Classes: 0,2
 All instrument transformers for the energy measurement, shall be provided with certificates of
calibration for fiscal use, drawn up by approved laboratories included stamp.
A3. Protection and measurement system

The protective system functions to be implemented are essentially those indicated in the attached diagrams
(configuration diagram shown in Chapter 1.2.3.4.2.2 Section A) and are functionally divided into:
 general protections (arrival line and MV busbars);
 circuits protections;
 AST transformer protections.
Generally, shall be provided so as to realize multi-function devices with one unit for each circuit, all the
protective and measuring functions requests.
For protections tripping of the MV switchgear for external causes, will be sent a block command that will open
the lock switch. This block shall be stored and shall be provided for a reset command block that can be made
either by "local" than by "remote".
Each function shall be able to return at least two levels of intervention with timing separately. Detail settings
will be defined after order.
Similar functions present in different functional units, shall be coordinated logically (through exchange of
data) in order to ensure the maximum vertical selectivity to the whole system.
A fault in the voltage power supply of protection system that affects the proper functioning, should be
considered cause of block; It is desirable, therefore, that the protection system is equipped with adequate
self-diagnosis (watchdog).
If required, the protection system shall also provide for the automatic closing of the main breaker 52C if the
voltage grid come back (Function 79/59) or for external command.
The logic shall be implemented in order to ensure maximum reliability and safety of operation of the system
and shall be excluded by manual selector.
In particular, the closing will take effect after a programmable time, only if will be verified the following
requirements:
 come back of the line voltage in the face of external fault;
 absence of internal faults;
 absence of the maintenance condition, or state of the command set in "local" mode.
CODICE – CODE

78 of 287
The supplier will arrange the system so that it is capable of achieving this logic however it shall agree with
EGP the ultimate solution.
The voltage and current transformers shall possess the performance and precision class specified in the
description of the units. Specifically:
 The current transformers for the maximum current protection shall be able to reproduce at the
secondary even the maximum short-circuit current of 10 kA, in a manner that is sufficiently reliable
and precise as to guarantee the operation of the protection.
 The zero-phase sequence current transformer for powering the grounding zero-phase sequence
protection shall have a ratio of 100/1 and performance that is at least equivalent to that of precision
class 5P20; they shall also be able to reproduce at the secondary even the maximum grounded
double-fault current on different lines of 2 kA, in a manner that is sufficiently reliable and precise as
to guarantee the operation of the protection.
 The phase-ground voltage transformer circuit used for the reconstruction of the zero-phase
sequence voltage shall be class 0.5 3P, with voltage factor 1.9 for 30 s, rated performance 50 VA,
with work induction value not exceeding 0.7 T, and with a transformation factor able to produce a
secondary voltage on the open-triangle circuit of 100 V in the case of a single-phase grounding fault
on the MV power grid.
A4. Fault and signal circuits

All signaling and fault circuits interfaced with external systems will be equipped with dry contacts to energize
the receiving location.
All reports and anomalies (tripped circuit breakers, thermal protection occurred, abnormalities of individual
components, etc.) within the panel will have to be combined and returned to the equipment acquisition and
return to the remote supervision.
The reports, alarms and anomalies of MV switchboard will also be acquired from the SCADA. This acquisition
may be in either serial or wired, in the latter case it is accepted the return of cumulative signals through the
use of disconnectable terminal block; however, the exchange of information to the control equipment of the
station will be defined in detail in the design phase.
A5. Communication protocol

All microprocessor relays of the MV switchboard shall be transmitted to the SCADA through fiber optic or
Ethernet support using IEC 61850 communication protocol; for each MV switchboard, a single point of
interface to the SCADA is required (serial interface, IEC 61850 communication protocol).
Different technical solution could be evaluated by EGP.
Converters cannot be used unless technical agreement with EGP during offer technical alignment; in this
case converters shall be I charge of the Supplier.
The minimum amount of signals exchanged between the security system of the MV switchboard and the
SCADA (through communication network) is specified into the Annex L.24.IT.X.10000.08.001.
All signals shall be as follows: wired to the security system of the MV switchboard will exchange with SCADA
will be:
CODICE – CODE

79 of 287
 4-20mA for analog signal;

 voltage free contacts for digital signals.
A6. Transformer thermometric unit

The thermometric control of the transformer will have the following minimum requirements:
 4 temperatures control
 outputs with dry contact relay, alarm and trip, fault reporting
 At least 4 inputs three wires RTD Pt100
 Removable rear terminals
 Input channels protected against electromagnetic disturbances
 Construction in conformity with valid regulations
 Protection against electromagnetic disturbances IEC 61000-4-4
 Temperature control from 0 ° C to 200 ° C
 At least 4 alarm thresholds
 Watchdog
 Self-diagnosis circuit
 Diagnostic sensors
 Alarm Memory
 Reset button
The thermometric unit's supply will be derived from the AST transformer compartment and the alarm signal
of the same will be made available in the terminal block or wired as "OR" with other alarms, according to the
EGP requests.
1.2.3.4.3. MV/LV Transformer
1.2.3.4.3.1. Oil-Sealed
A. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The object of this specification is to define the requirements for the supply of power transformers (with or
without conservator), destined for use in Renewable Power Plants in a three-phase MV/LV systems.
The transformers shall be three-phase, oil-immersed sealed, insulation

Type system with oil natural and air natural (ONAN) cooling for outdoor
installation.
According to Transformer Data Sheet.
However:
Environmental conditions - air temperature range: -25°C to +40°C
- altitude: 1000m a.s.l. with derating factors according to IEC 60076-11
- installation type: outdoor
Number of secondary One or two with electrostatic shield
windings
Cooling system ONAN
Temperature rise (40ºC) - average oil temperature rise ≤ 60ºK
CODICE – CODE

80 of 287
- average winding temperature rise ≤ 65ºK

- hottest–spot temperature ≤ 78ºK
Thermal class A – Insulation: 105°C; Copper: 250°C; Aluminium: 200°C
For MV, the highest voltage [UM] of each winding shall be at least 1.1
times the maximum rated voltage [Urated_max] (including the tap
charger variation).
Insulation levels 𝑈𝑀 ≥ 1.1 · 𝑈𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑥
For the LV windings, the insulation level shall not be lower than 3.6 kV.
In any case the insulation level shall be in compliance with the following
values indicated in IEC 60076-3.
Rated short duration induced or
Highest voltage for Rated lightning impulse
separate source AC withstand
equipment Um withstand voltage
voltage
[kV r.m.s.] [kV peak]
[kV r.m.s.]
3.6 20 10
24 145 50
36 170 70
15 kV up to 33 kV or better specified, project by project, in the
Primary nominal voltage:
Transformer Data Sheet;
Connections: Dy11 or Dy11/y11 better specified, project by project, in the Transformer
Data Sheet
Secondary nominal voltage: Coordinated with the inverter’s output voltage.

Between the primary winding and the single secondary winding:
shortcircuit impedance - up to 3.5MVA for each winding: Zcc=6%
- > 3.5MVA for each winding: Zcc=7%
Capability to withstand According to IEC 60076-5
short circuit
Overload According to IEC 60076-7
No operation limits is required for the transformers with double-
secondary winding. The transformers shall be designed and sized to
operate continuously even with only one powered secondary winding
Operation limits
without any voltage and current imbalances, high magnetizing currents,
or any other factors which can compromise the normal operation of
transformer
Losses UE N.548/2014 and EN 50588-1 – [A0; Ak]
Sound power level EN 50588-1 – 65dB (A)
- Unless otherwise specified, the transformers shall comply with
IEC 60076-1. The single parts of the transformers shall comply
with the relevant standards.
- The transformers shall be designed and sized taking into
consideration the presence of current harmonics produced by
Design requirements the inverters equal to 3% (THD). For this aspect the
transformers supplied with a THD equal to 3% cannot have no-
load and load losses exceeding 110% of nominal losses.
- The transformers shall be capable of supporting a maximum
voltage growth rate dV/dt between the low voltage winding and
earth equal to 500V/μs maximum.
CODICE – CODE

81 of 287
- The transformers shall be sized for direct sunlight installation.

- Typical PV daily load curve
B. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Shall be made wrapped type or cold rolled magnetic strips. The

material shall be low specific loss grain-oriented. The laminations shall
Magnetic cores
be insulated with mineral oxides and protected against corrosion by a
special varnish.
LV and MV Windings shall be made of electrolytic copper of 99.9%
purity or aluminum conductors of at least 99.5% aluminum content. The
cross section of winding shall be constant. The star point of the LV
windings shall be made on the connections of the layer or turn nearer
to the oil duct between LV and MV windings. The enameled insulated
Windings conductors shall comply with IEC 60317.
The ties of joints and connection from the windings to the bushings or
to the de-energized tap changer shall be manufactured in order to
prevent damaging of the conductor insulation during transformers
lifetime.
MV bushings shall be cable to oil, plug-in type, made of Epoxy. The MV
transformer connection can be made through properly dimensioned
insulated cables
LV bushings shall be cable to oil, outdoor type, according to IEC60137
For the MV and LV bushing, the insulation level shall not be lower than
the one specified for transformer windings (3.6/10/20kV; 24/50/145kV;
36/70/170kV).
MV bushings and its connections shall be mechanically protected by
metallic covers, in order to prevent access to the live parts of the
transformer. The cover can be removed only when the transformer is
switched off. Therefore, these covers must be mechanically interlocked
by means of keys with the state of opening of the MV transformer
Transformer bushings and circuit breaker. The covers must be with a minimum degree of
connections protection IP20 and anchored directly on the transformer tank in special
seats provided.
In addition the MV bushing and connector shall be protected from direct
sunlight.
The LV transformer connection can be made through:
- Direct cable connection on the LV bushing plate. The bushing
plate shall be provided with the sufficient holes and dimension,
necessary to connect all cables per phase. If the terminal plate
is not sufficient for direct connection of the cables, it is allowed
to use extension plates of the same material as the terminal.
These plates must be appropriately fixed and insulated to a
self-supporting structure that avoids downloading weight and
stresses directly on the transformer bushing. LV bushings and
CODICE – CODE

82 of 287
its connections shall be mechanically protected through

metallic terminal covers, in order to avoid any damage on the
transformer connectors or bushings. The cover box must be
with a minimum degree of protection IP55 and anchored
directly on the transformer tank in suitable prepared seats. For
the cables, suitable cable glands must be provided for each
single cable. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided also for
the cover box, in order to avoid direct acces with the
transformer energized.
- Direct connection through busbars duct. The busbar duct must
be mandatory when the LV current rating is ≥ 1500A for each
phase. The busbar duct must be according to IEC 61439-6, CE
marked with a protection degree at least IP54 (between the
inverter and transformer). Type test certificate and size report
calculation to be provided.
- Bushings shall be rated for minimum +30% full current capacity
of the transformer.
De-energized tap-changer (DETC) shall be in compliance with IEC
60214 and will be provided with a padlocking facility on the top cover of
the transformer: voltage variation range of Vn ±2x2.5%.
Tap changer mechanism shall be manually operated with transformer
de-energized and shall have handles brought out through the tank.
Rating current must be 1.5 In (line current) and in any case not less of
MV tapping
63A.
In case of transformers with n. 2 secondary winding, the tapping must be
double type.
The control shaft of the tap-changer shall be made of stainless steel or
suitable insulating material; in the first case it shall be connected to
earth under the cover.
The tank shall be made of steel sheets and shall not permit stagnation
of water on the cover.
The tank shall be provided sealed (without conservator), with full oil
filling.
The coupling tank-cover shall be made by using a seal gasket, stainless
steel fixing screws and washers, and brass or hot zinc-plated nuts.
The bottom plate, wall side and frames shall be made of welded
construction. The welds shall be tested for oil tightness.
All protection device flanges, bushings, tap switch drive and lifting lugs
Tank
shall be made fitted on the tank cover.
The underbase channel shall be welded to the base plate and the
rollers shall be suitable 360° movements.
On the tank-cover the serial number of the transformer must be stamped.
Transformer tanks shall be designed and braced so as to eliminate
movement of the bushing terminals due to normal operating
deformation of the tank.
Tank grounding provisions shall consist of two ground pads, welded on
the base or on the tank wall near the base.
The external painting of transformers and metallic accessories made of
iron materials, shall be obtained by using the epoxy or polyurethane
Protection against painting cycle according to IEC 60815 for High pollution level:
corrosion - Base layer ≥ 80 μm
- Cover layer ≥ 80 μm
- Total thickness ≥ 160μm.
CODICE – CODE

83 of 287
Alternatively the painting may be made by one layer of the same total
thickness, also mono component. Galvanized layers are also accepted.
Internal surfaces of the transformers shall be protected by a hot oil
resistant painting (epoxy-polyamine or equivalent), ≥ 30 μm thick.
The paint must be free of lead oxides or chromates. The safety and
technical data sheets of the painting shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
The reports and tests aimed to verify the good quality and the process
of the painting cycle shall be provided by the manufacturer.
C. ACCESSORIES
The transformer supply shall include the following protection:

- 1 oil control system unit, type DGPT2 or similar
- 1 overpressure valve
The oil control system unit shall be integrate with the following monitoring
and protection function, measuring sensor and instruments:
- independent oil RTD Pt100 according to IEC 60751 for
monitoring
- oil level indicator
- oil temperature indicator
- stand oil level function
- detection oil gas discharge protection trip
Protection - excessive oil pressure protection trip
- excessive oil temperature protection alarm and trip
All of these detection functions shall be provided with the necessary aux
contacts request for the trip and alarm action. The instrument indicators
shall be visible enough from O&M personnel from the outside of the
transformer
- Support for surge arrester. The transformer must be provided of
a support (one each phase) for the installation of medium
voltage arresters. The structures may be welded or bolted to the
tank or fixed by the bolt, nut and washer of the tank-cover
coupling hardware, according to manufacturer's design and
approval of the Client. The material used for brackets, bolts, nuts
and washers shall be carbon steel hot dip galvanized.
The surge arresters are not considered in the supply.
- 4 bi-directional flat rollers
- 4 lifting and untanking lugs
- 2 earthling terminals
- 1 filling plug
Other accessories - 1 Drain valve with sampler
- 4 trolley tow hooks
- 1 transformer nameplate
- 1 oil drain device and sampling valve complying with EN 50216-4
type C standard (DIN 42551) and placed at the bottom of the tank
on the short side.
The nameplate will be installed in a visible position on the transformer
Nameplate
and it shall be in compliance to IEC 60076-11
Transformer Oil Transformer shall be supplied complete with all necessary oil.
CODICE – CODE

84 of 287
The insulating liquids shall be mineral oil of the not-inhibited type,

identified with the U letter, without any anti-oxidant additive, accordingly
to IEC 60296. The oil shall not contain PCB.
The manufacturer shall supply a MSDS (material safety Data Sheet) to
EGP before the shipment of the oil and transformer.
A certified report shall be provided for the oil and will include, as
minimum, the following tests:
 Dissolved gas analysis
 Furan analysis
 PCB analysis
 General electrical & physical tests:
- Color & Appearance
- Breakdown voltage
- Water content
- Acidity (Neutralization value)
- Dielectric dissipation factor
- Resistivity
- Sediments & sludge
- Interfacial tension
- Flash point
- Pour point
- Density
- Kinematic viscosity
The absence of sulfur corrosive must be certified and verified by a
recognized independent laboratory applying both of the following
methods:
1. IEC 62535 test
2. ASTM D 1275-B test
3. CCD test (CIGRE TF A2.32)
The manufacturer shall describe, in a dedicated manual, all the
maintenance aspects like:
Maintenance - the activities description,
- the required time for each activity
- the necessary materials and tools for maintenance
the following type and special test shall be performed on each
transformer of different type and characteristics:
Type Test
1) Full wave lightning impulse test for the line terminals (LI) (IEC
60076-3)
2) Temperature-rise type test (IEC 60076-2)
3) Analysis of the oil before and after the temperature rise test (IEC
Type test and Special test 60076-2)
4) Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90% and 110% of rated
voltage (IEC 60076-1)
5) Determination of sound level (IEC 60076-1)
Special Test
1) Chopped wave lightning impulse test for the line terminals (LIC)
(IEC 60076-3)
2) Induced voltage test with parcial decharge measurement (IVPD)
CODICE – CODE

85 of 287
(IEC 60076-3)
3) Short-circuit withstand test (IEC 60076-5)
4) Determination of capacitances windings-to-earth, and between
windings (IEC 60076-1)
5) Measurement of dissipation factor (tan δ) of the insulation system
capacitances (IEC 60076-1)
6) Measurement of DC insulation resistance each winding to earth and
between windings (IEC 60076-1)
7) Measurement of tangent of angle of dielectric losses of Oil (IEC
60076-1)
The above tests shall be carried out on a sample of transformers chosen

at random amongst those submitted to the testing from manufacturer.
Furthermore, on each type of tank shall be performed the tests

concerning pressurized corrugated tank according to EN 50464-4.
According to UNI EN ISO17638:2016, UNI EN ISO11666:2011 and UNI

EN ISO17640:2011, they are also required:
 NDT. Visual check of welds
 NDT. PT or MT on Corner, fillet and partial penetration of welds
 NDT. MT and UT on full penetration welds
to be carried out on the quantities of transformers indicated in the EGP
QCP’s.
Routine test according to IEC 60076-1 shall be performed on the
transformers. EGP participation in the FAT is indicated, (transformer
quantities) in the EGP QCP’s.
Is required the execution of insulation test of the core and frame

Routine test obviously with transformer still open. During this phase shall be
performed also the check of the correspondence with the project and
check the screen and grounding connection. These test are part of
routine test indicated in IEC60076-1 and must be performed on all
transformers. EGP participation to the Test is indicated, (transformer
quantities) in the EGP QCP’s.
1.2.3.4.3.2. Dry Type
A. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
The object of this section is to define the requirements for the supply of three-phase MV/LV power
transformers with epoxy resin impregnated embedded windings, destined for use in Renewable Power Plant
in a three-phase MV/LV systems.
The same specifications are applicable for MV/LV transformers powering the auxiliary services.
transformers shall be low-loss (Ak,A0), three-phase, insulation class

Functional characteristics F resin type, designed with natural air cooling, AN type for indoor
installation
Unless otherwise specified, transformers shall be for use in air
temperature +50°C maximum, -25°C minimum, at an altitude of
Environmental conditions 1500m a.s.l.
For installations above 1000 m a.s.l., refer to the derating factors
according to the IEC 60076-11.
- average winding temperature rise = 60/60ºC
Temperature rise
- hottest–spot winding temperature = 80ºC
CODICE – CODE

86 of 287
The highest voltage for equipment [UM] of each winding shall be at

least 1.1 times the maximum rated voltage of each winding
[Urated_max] (maximum voltage value including the tap charger
variation).
𝑈𝑀 ≥ 1.1 · 𝑈𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑥
Insulation levels For the LV windings, the insulation level shall not be lower than the
one specified for a Um voltage of 3.6 kV. A lightning impulse test is
not required for this winding.
In any case for the MV and LV windings the insulation level shall be in
compliance with the max values indicated in IEC 60076-3. In
particular:
Rated short duration induced
Highest voltage for equipment Rated lightning impulse
or separate source AC
Um withstand voltage
withstand voltage
[kV r.m.s.] [kV peak]
[kV r.m.s.]
3.6 20-40 10
24 125 50
36 170 70
15 kV up to 36 kV or better specified, project by project, in the
Primary nominal voltage:
Transformer Data Sheet;
Connections: Delta / Star with neutral – vector Group Dyn11 or better specified,
project by project, in the Transformer Data Sheet
Secondary nominal voltage: 400V, or coordinated with the inverter’s output voltage.
- no-load losses: Class A0
Losses, noise and shortcircuit - load losses: Class Ak
impedance As such, maximum losses and noise levels shall not exceed the value
indicated in the tables in CEI/IEC 50541-1-2011-11
- Vcc ≤ 4%
For transformers with Prated ≤
630kVA and UM ≤ 12kV losses and noise levels shall not exceed the values indicated in Table
2 (sect. 3.9.1) in CEI IEC 50541-1-2011-11;
- Vcc ≤ 6%
For transformers with Prated ≥
630kVA and UM ≤ 12kV losses and noise levels shall not exceed the values indicated in Table
3 (sect. 3.8.2) in CEI IEC 50541-1-2011-11;
- Vcc ≤ 4%
For transformers with Prated ≤
630kVA and 17.5 ≤ UM ≤ 24kV losses and noise levels shall not exceed the values indicated in Table
4 (sect. 3.9.3) in CEI IEC 50541-1-2011-11;
- Vcc ≤ 6%
For transformers with Prated ≥
630kVA and 17.5 ≤ UM ≤ 24kV losses and noise levels shall not exceed the values indicated in Table
5 (sect. 3.9.4) in CEI IEC 50541-1-2011-11;
- Vcc ≤ 6%
For transformers with UM =
36kV losses and noise levels shall not exceed the values indicated in Table
6 (sect. 3.9.5) in CEI IEC 50541-1-2011-11;
For all transformers not included into the above categories, e.g. due to different nominal voltages, Table 4
will be considered as a reference. For transformers with a rated power not specified in the Table, the limit
values will be calculated as a linear interpolation.
The short circuit impedance values and losses under load refer to a temperature of 120°C.
In addition, in all cases, the noise level for the units cannot exceed 80 dB.
CODICE – CODE

87 of 287
The permanent level of partial discharges for the transformers shall

Partial discharges:
not exceed a value of 10 pC, measured as specified in the standards.
The transformers shall be built so as to withstand electrodynamics
and thermal effects following a direct short circuit occurring at LV
Shortcircuit withstand capacity
terminals without damaged, as required by current regulatory
standards.
The transformers shall meet class E2 environmental requirements,
class C2 for climate and class F1 for fire behaviour, as defined under
paragraph 13 of IEC 60076-11. These characteristics shall be
Environmental, climatic and
certified e verified by special tests performed from third party
fire behavior class
organization recognized by EGP (for instance CESI, etc.). A copy of
such certificates shall be sent to EGP together with the transmittal of
technical offer. Offers without certificates will not be accepted.
- The transformers shall be designed and sized taking into
consideration the presence of current harmonics produced by the
inverters, for this aspect the transformers cannot have no-load and
Additional requirements load losses exceeding 110% of nominal losses.
(specific characteristics for - The transformers shall be able to withstand at a voltage variation
photovoltaic power plant are dV/dt between the low voltage winding and earth equal to 500V/μs
listed here). maximum.
- The transformers shall have an electrostatic shield between the low
voltage and high voltage winding, made by wrapping a shield
grounded with the transformer box, if applicable.
B. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Shall be manufactured with low specific loss grain-oriented Fe-Si steel

sheets, ensuring a uniform flow distribution in order to avoid local
Magnetic Cores
overheating. The laminations shall be insulated with mineral oxides
and protected against corrosion by a special varnish.
The LV windings shall be manufactured in aluminium tapes insulated
with class F impregnated in resin and subsequently polymerized.
The MV windings shall be manufactured of an aluminium taps and
cast under vacuum with an epoxy resin to ensure a low emission of
smoke and toxic and corrosive gases.
In case of MV/LV Transformer with 2 LV windings, they shall be inter
reeling as showed in the attached figure.
Windings
The MV windings transformers shall be installed a off-circuit tap

Off circuit tap changer changer by means a terminal board with bolted connection plates.
The tap changer with 5 taps to allow a variation of the voltage ratio of
CODICE – CODE

88 of 287
± 5% of the rated value with tapping range ± 2x2.5%. The tap changer
shall be controlled when the transformer is off-circuit.
- The MV insulators will be designed for internal use in epoxy resin.
The output terminals will be positioned normally, unless specified
otherwise, on the long sides of the upper part of the transformer
next to each column. The realization of the connections in a star or
delta connection of the windings may be an open design using
insulated bars with the same insulation levels specified for the
transformer
- The MV cables connections to the respective MV winding terminals
Insulators and connections shall be from above, on the terminal plates of the MV winding
connecting bars, with a lug with a 13 mm hole diameter to allow for
a M12 bolt coupling.
- The LV cables connections to the respective LV winding terminals
shall be from above, on the terminal platelets with holes (3 holes
per M12 phase), situated in the upper part of the winding on the
side opposite the MV connections.
- The neutral terminal will be situated on the side of the "u" phase. All
connection surfaces shall be sealed.
- For internal ventilation, appropriate ventilation slots shall be
provided on the cabinet ensuring the unit’s continuous operation at
max output power, respecting the overtemperature values defined
in IEC IEC 60076-11.
Ventilation
- The ventilation openings and insect screens shall be designed in
accordance with CEI 70-1. The enclosure shall be designed in
accordance with IEC 60529. In all cases, the degree of protection
for the cabinet shall be no less than IP21.
C. ACCESSORIES REQUIREMENTS
- 6 RTDs Pt 100 (of which 3 reserve)for each LV winding, therefore

in case of two secondary windings shall be supply 12 RTDs Pt 100;
- 2 RTDs Pt 100 in the magnetic core (of which 1 reserve);
- 1 centralized box containing the above RTD connections,
Thermal protection: positioned on top of the core
temperature measurements - The thermo-resistances (PT 100) shall be positioned as follows:
one on the core and three arranged on the upper part of each LV
windings in the hot-spot area
- The PT100 sensors will be 100 ohm thermometric platinum
resistances at 0°C in compliance with IEC 60751.
1 temperature control unit, type Tecsystem (NT935 for one secondary
winding and NT538 for two secondary windings) or similar, with the
following functions:
- 4 inputs RTD Pt100 sensors, 1 for the core and 3 for each LV
winding (in case of two LV windings 7 inputs RTD Pt100
sensors shall be provided)
Thermal protection:
- Temperature display for the phases and core;
temperature control unit
- Output Modbus RS485
- Possibility to set the alarm and trip level
- possibility of automatic control of fans*;
- Power supply at 240 VAC
- Alarm for fault of the sensors and control unit
CODICE – CODE

89 of 287
- operating temperatures: -10 to +55 °C

The control thermometer shall be supplied with all accessories for
installation on the front panel (auxiliary switch column located on the
medium voltage panel).
The auxiliary circuits centralized box shall be built in aluminum alloy,
complete with a thermoplastic and self-extinguishing terminal box.
The cables for the connections between the instruments, sensors and
terminal box shall be fire retardant and low emission of toxic and
corrosive fumes with section ≥1.5 mmq. These cables shall be also
screened by aluminum tape covering 100%. These connections shall
be protected by conduit.
Connections to the terminals shall be pre-insulated terminals suitable
for compression.
- Surge arrestors on MV Terminals, according to the EGP
design and site requirement
- 4 Removable, flat wheel assembly turning in both directions
- 4 Eyebolts for the lifting of the transformer
- trolley tow hooks
- 2 grounding terminals
- 2 plates with the serial number and specifications 1 for the LV
side 1 for the MV side
- MV connection bars with connecting plates
Other accessories - 1 set of terminals on the LV side
- 1 set of terminals on the MV side
- Protection enclosure with lighting system (if requested)
- 1 current transformer mounted on each neutral bushing
All junction boxes shall be IP66 gasketed.
All enclosures and devices shall be appropriate for the area
classification in which the transformer will be located.
All main auxiliary cabinets shall be rated NEMA 4X or IP66 stainless
steel and be equipped with breather and drain and, unless specified
otherwise, space heaters and thermostat.
Two plates listing the transformer’s data will be installed in a visible
Nameplate position on the transformer or on the enclosure if applicable; the
plates shall be in compliance to IEC 60076-11:2006-02, paragraph 9.
The external parts of the transformer and enclosure shall be metallic
Protective treatment
and painted in compliance to EN ISO 12944.
The manufacturer shall describe, in a dedicated manual, all the
maintenance aspects like:
Maintenance - the activities description,
- the required time for each activity
- the necessary materials and tools for maintenance
Double secondary winding transformers shall be decoupled.
These transformers shall be designed and sized to operate
Transformer with double- continuously even with only one powered secondary winding without
secondary winding any voltage and current imbalances, high magnetizing currents, or
any other factors which can compromise the normal operation of
transformer
CODICE – CODE

90 of 287
1.2.3.4.3.3. Pre-Casted and Metal Oil Retention Tank
In case of oil transformer, the supplier have to provide an oil retention tank to receive the insulating liquid of
a transformer or other equipment in case of leakage with min. volume 120% of oil, according to the local
standard (and/or IEEE 980:2).
The retention oil tank shall be self-supporting type. The retention oil tank shall be stainless steel AISI 316
metal sheet or reinforced concrete treated with anti-penetration liquids material, for better corrosion
resistance. Each tank shall be equipped with emptying valve, safety siphon for evacuation of rain water, a
system of internal taxiing, plaques dampener to reduce acoustic noise at the time of installation at site.
The retention oil tank shall be equipped with float level sensor.
1.2.3.5. OTHER EQUIPMENT
1.2.3.5.1. Auxiliary Services Electrical Panel
This section describes the main requirements about the design, construction, supply and commissioning of
the auxiliary low voltage electrical panel that feed all auxiliary equipment in the cabin.
All plastic components shall comply with the requirement of being self-extinguishable at 960°C (30/30s) and
standards IEC 695.2.I
This panel shall have the minimum technical details indicated below:
Item Requirements
Nominal operating voltage 400V
Insulation voltage 500V
Test voltage for 1 min. 2500V
Number of phases 3F + N
Nominal frequency 50/60Hz
Rated bus bar current 160A
Min. breaking capacity of circuit breakers 6kA
Min. degree of protection IP 44/NEMA 3 outdoor IP 20/NEMA 2 indoor
Form of segregation Form 1
Power sources 2 (normal, continuity)
Normally each output from these panels shall be equipped with an RCD and circuit breaker (modular or in
boxes), comprising all disconnecting and switching devices and related command, control, measuring,
protection and settings systems for each control utility.
In addition, all equipment shall feature auxiliary status indication and alarm exchange contacts. The external
light output shall be an automatic light sensor and person presence sensor control. The panel, built according
to the above specifications, shall be divided into 2 sections, with its own main switch:
 The first section (“normal section”) is powered directly from the grid through a transformer with a
rated voltage of 400V 3F+N neutral directly connected to the ground and protection conductor
CODICE – CODE

91 of 287
separated (TN-S according IEC 60364), powering all of the non-priority utilities;
 The second section (“continuity section”) is powered by an emergency UPS at 230V single
phase+Neutral LV isolated neutral network (IT according IEC 60364), feeding all system’s priority
utilities
A. NORMAL SECTION
According to the document attached below, the normal section shall be equipped with a general circuit
breaker and shall feed following loads:
 sockets power system,
 IEC sockets power system,
 external lighting system,
 internal lighting system,
 MV power panels,
 Auxiliary power for String Boxes (one for each inverter),
 UPS emergency power,
 Air conditioning power (if needed),
 Transformer air extraction power,
 Inverter air extraction power (if INDOOR),
 video-surveillance power,
 anti-Intrusion detection system,
 smoke detection system,
 Anti-rodent system,
 Spare circuit breakers (+2 2P 10 A and +2 3P+N 16 A),
 tracker power supply. One power alimentation 3P+N with a power of 10 kVA each 1 MWp of
photovoltaic field available for the trackers (This alimentation will be used for the auxiliary system of
the trackers (Engine Power, control system, etc...)..
B. CONTINUITY SECTION
According to the document attached below, the following utilities are powered from the continuity section
230V Single Phase + N:
 Socket inside the LV Panel;
 MV power panels;
 Power to the panel auxiliaries;
 Transformer control units;
 RTU/ PLC system power;
 Permanent insulation control panel power;
 Spare circuit breakers (2 x 2P 6A).
The panel shall have a preferential power source from an emergency generator by male/plug IEC 16/32A
PLUG 3 Phase + Neutral + Protective Earthing.
CODICE – CODE

92 of 287
C. OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
C.1 Structure and Paintwork
The panel’s structure shall be built of metal with steel section uprights and rimmed sheet closure panels with
a thickness of no less than 15/10 or 10/10; modular type for secondary distribution with a floor resting cabinet
structure, or wall mounted, and equipped with a transparent front door.
The panels shall be closed on each side and at the rear; the perimeter panels shall be removable by means
of screws. Stand-alone panels or panel elements shall be equipped with retractable lifting eyebolts.
All electrical components shall be accessible only from the front, via hinged panels. The front panel shall be
equipped with slots for passing through the control units. All equipment shall be fastened onto guides or
panels fixed onto specific support beams. Instruments and signal lamps shall be assembled onto the front
panels.
To ensure effective resistance to corrosion, the structure and panels shall be suitably treated and varnished.
The primer treatment shall involve the washing, pickling, phosphatizing and electro-galvanizing of the metal
sheets. The treated metal sheets shall be painted with thermosetting powder epoxy resin mixed with polyester
resin, finished color RAL 7030 smooth finish and semi-gloss, with a minimum thickness of 70 μm.
C.2 Power cabling

rated current values and the required short-circuit current values.
the structure by means of insulated comb supports and arranged so as to allow for future variations. The
circuit breakers in boxes set vertically side by side on a single plate shall be powered from the top using (as
specified by the manufacturer) specific prefabricated dispatchers allowing for the connections as well as the
possibility of adding or replacing equipment with suitable characteristics without making substantial changes
to the operating unit in question.
time, without requiring periodic tightening. Measures adopted to achieve these specifications shall be
guaranteed and certified by the manufacturer as part of the quality assurance.
The main busbars shall be arranged and divided into sections equal to the number of elements into which
the panel can be broken down, allowing for extensions on both sides. The wheelbase between the phases
and distance between the busbar supports will be defined by laboratory tests performed by the manufacturer,
reported in the specifications. The connections between the horizontal and vertical busbars shall be made
through standard connectors supplied by the busbar manufacturer.
CODICE – CODE

93 of 287
The panel’s structure, arrangement and characteristics of the equipment and accessories used for the
implementation of the internal connections shall be such as to make possible at any time the installation of a
new output, using the output switch change with another one of a different load or calibration in complete
safety (degree of protection for the powered panel of at least IP20/NEMA 2), without having to open the main
switch and without cutting off the other circuits in the panel.
C.3 Auxiliary connections

The auxiliary connections shall be flexible and stranded, with an isolation of 3 kV with the following minimum
sections:
 mm2 for the current transformers (CT);
 2.5 mm2 for the control circuits;
 1.5 mm2 for the signal circuits and voltage transformers (VT).
 Power circuit (phase): Black;
 Power circuit (neutral): Light Blue;
 Ground circuit: Yellow/Green;
 Auxiliary circuit for internal utilities: Red;
 Auxiliary circuit for external utilities: Orange;
 Auxiliary circuit for settings: White;
 Two wires may be allowed on the same terminal only on the internal side of the panel.
The terminals shall be a type for which the tightening pressure is obtained by means of a splint and not
directly from the screw. The wires shall be combined in bundles in channel runs or similar systems with a
removable cover. These systems shall allow for additional wires to be inserted, whose volume equals 25%
of those already installed. Adhesive fastening systems are not permitted.
C.4 Diagrams
Each panel shall be equipped with a pocket on the door containing the As Built version of the single line and
functional diagrams.
C.5 Measuring instruments

Where not specified, measuring instrumentation shall be modular with DIN guides and shall foresee a
Modbus communication protocol interface (TCP/IP preferred).
CODICE – CODE

94 of 287
In addition to the LV auxiliary panel requested above, it will be necessary to foresee a free space (0,8 m x
0,8 m x whole height of cabin) near the LV auxiliary panel to install the LV dristribution board of the trackers.
1.2.3.5.2. LV/LV Transformer for auxiliary Services
A. REQUIREMENTS
Each cabin will be provided with LV/LV transformer for the cabinet’s auxiliary services to a rated voltage of
400V 3F+N. This transformer shall be protected by a suitably ventilated metal box equipped with an input
and output circuit breaker protection. This LV/LV transformer shall be located inside the LV room. The
transformer LV/LV shall have the following electrical characteristics:
Item Requirements
Type classification Dry Type
Cooling Air Natural (AN)
10kVA + 10 kVA/MVA (in case of PV tracking supply from auxiliary panel) of
PCU installed4.
Power greater than This is an initial estimate, since the final LV/LV transformer power shall be
defined during the detailed design phase, in coordination with EGP.
In any case, it shall be sufficient to supply all PCU auxiliary loads of the PCU
Primary voltage V 3phase5
Secondary voltage6 400 V 3phase+Neutral
Connection group Dyn11
Over-temperature class F
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz
Losses < 2,5 %
Short circuit voltage 4%
Minimum degree of
IP 21 external (with roof cover), or IP 20 internal
protection
1.2.3.5.3. Power Analyzer (Metering)
A. REQUIREMENTS
Each PCU/TC shall be equipped with power/network analyzer for each inverter and for the auxiliary panel (to
measure the auxiliary energy). Every power analyzer, suitable for three-phase three or four wires systems
with unbalanced load, even with distorted waveforms, shall measure voltage and currents by CT (Current
Transformer) and VT (Voltage Transformer) with min class 0,5.
These are the main characteristics:
4 If PV tracking supply from auxiliary panel, the transformer power shall be 10kVA+10kVA/MVA of PCU power installed. If PV tracking
not supplied from auxiliaries, the transformer power shall be higher than 10kVA
5 Low voltage (cat. I) in relation to the inverter’s output voltage
6
The voltage shall be compliant with local standard
CODICE – CODE

95 of 287
Requirements
Minimum 4 rows LCD display
Class 0.5 (kWh) according to EN62053-22
Class C (kWh) according to EN50470-3
Class 2 (kvarh) according to EN62053-23
Accuracy ±0.2% RDG (current/voltage)
Instantaneous variables readout: 4x4 DGT
Energies readout: 9+1 DGT
System variables: VLL, VLN, A, VA, W, var, PF, Hz, Phase-sequence-asymmetry-loss
Single phase variables: VLL, VLN, AL, An (calculated), VA, W, var, PF
Both system and single phase variables with average and max calculation
Harmonic analysis (FFT) up to the 32nd harmonic (current and voltage)
Energy measurements (imported/exported): total and partial kWh and kvarh
Energy measurements according to ANSI C12.20 CA 0.5, ANSI C12.1 (revenue grade)
Run hours counter (8+2 DGT)
Real time clock function
Application adaptable display and programming procedure (Easyprog function)
IP65/NEMA 4
All power analyzers shall be installed in the LV electrical panel and shall be connected to the VLAN switch
inside the cabin: Modbus TCP/IP, IEC 61850 and IEC60870-5-104 shall be foreseen for this purpose as
communication protocol interface.
1.2.3.5.4. UPS
A. COMPOSITION OF THE SUPPLY

An Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be supplied, installed and connected, with an automated zero-
time bypass, ensuring the necessary continuous power to the critical utilities on the photovoltaic installation.
Essentially, this unit includes:
 Rectifier;
 Battery charger (one for each battery pack);
 Inverter;
 Internal automated bypass;
 Manual bypass;
 Parallel circuit management and selective detachment;
 Battery;
 Plug-in connection.
The rectifier shall be designed and built for a single-phase grid, with an input power control factor (PFC),
absence of rush current, and low input current harmonic distortion (compliant to EN 1000-3-2).
CODICE – CODE

96 of 287
The battery shall be housed in a casing that is directly accessible from outside the UPS and/or in one or more
battery modules; the self-sufficiency guaranteed by the battery shall also be subsequently expandable
without any changes to the UPS unit and existing system. Maintenance operation shall be possible without
interruption of the continuity for the utilities connected. An insulation-monitoring device shall be installed at
the output of the UPS, in order to detect any phase-to-ground fault. For the insulation-monitoring device,
please refer to Chapter 1.2.3.6.7.
B. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS
The contractor shall provide an emergency system consisting of UPS system with battery banks to feed the
continuity section of the auxiliary electrical panels. The UPS shall use a dual conversion (VFI) online
technology and shall be compatible with PV inverters and emergency diesel generators. The bank battery
shall have an expected lifespan of 5 years, ensuring enough power and energy ratings, in order to supply all
the loads fed in the continuity section, with a minimum autonomy of 3 hours. The UPS shall be easily
accessible and rigidly fixed on a surface that is located at least 40 cm from the floor. In all the operational
mode (normal and emergency) the power system shall be neutral isolated type (IT system). The UPS shall
guarantee the permanent adjustment of the voltage and output frequency. The automatic by-pass shall be
activated immediately in cases of overload or failure to ensure continuity of supply to the services.
The UPS shall have a display on the LCD control panel and various LED indicators where we can see the
operating mode (as above indicated), measures and alarms shall be as described below:
Table of alarms Table of measures

GENERAL ALARM INPUT Voltage CONF. CORRUPTED
BATTERY ALARM AUXILIARY Voltage RECTIFIER ALARM
UPS OVERLOAD AUXILIARY Frequency BOOST ALARM
Vout OUT OF TOL OUTPUT Voltage INVERTER ALARM
Vin OUT OF TOL OUTPUT Frequency OVERLOAD STOP
Vaux OUT OF TOL OUTPUT LOAD % MODULE 1 ALARM
UPS OVER TEMP. BATTERY Voltage MODULE 2 ALARM
MANUAL BY-PASS BATTERY Capacity % MODULE 3 ALARM
BATTERY Back-up
SH. CIRCUIT OUT E.S.D. ACTIVE
minutes
BOOST TOO LOW Ambient TEMPERATURE INPUT OPTIONAL
BOOST TOO HIGH INPUT OPTIONAL 2
Vbatt. TOO HIGH INPUT OPTIONAL 3
IMPROPER USE E-SERVICE ALARM
OVERLOAD OFF INV REDUNDANCY LOST
All UPS information (status, measurements, alarms and controls) shall be sent as hardwired signals to cabin
control system RTU/ PLC. Contacts shall be free voltage contacts. The UPS shall foresee a digital input from
CODICE – CODE

97 of 287
cabin control system RTU/ PLC to activate an emergency shutdown (E.S.D).

At least the following NO/NC programmable voltage free contacts shall be provided:
 UPS on line normal operation;
 UPS Bypass active status;
 UPS under battery operation;
 UPS Low battery alarm;
 UPS Fault/diagnostic alarm.
Below the minimum characteristic that the UPS shall have:
General details
Input/Output → single phase / single phase
Technology in accordance with IEC 60240 → On-line dual conversion (VFI -Voltage Frequency Independent)
Bypass circuit → Automatic without interruption (static contactor) + Manual internal for maintenance
Ground connection wiring diagram upstream/downstream → The neutral is through and isolated from the casing.
Unit of
Parameters Data specifications
measure
INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal voltage power1 (V) 230 V single phase
Voltage tolerance ensuring battery recharge and 100% of
(%) ±20
output power.
Voltage tolerance ensuring battery recharge and 70% of
(%) +20 - 30
output power.
Nominal frequency (60 Hz selectable) (Hz) 50
Frequency tolerance (%) ±10
Input power factor @ V nom > 0.99
Current total harmonic distortion (THDi) at full load (%) <5
INVERTER OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal voltage (220/240 selectable) (V) 230
Rated apparent power @ 40°C 2 (kVA) -
Rated active power @ 40°C 3 (kW) -
4
Maximum power expansion (kVA) -
Degree of redundancy 5 (N+X) -
Stability of output voltage under static conditions with
input within allowable limits and load variation from 0 to (%) 3
100%
Stability in dynamic conditions with instantaneous
(%) VFI-SS-112
variation of the load from 0 to 100%
Voltage restore time within static stability values (ms) < 10
Load peak factor without derating 3:1
Output voltage distortion with 100% linear load (%) 3
Output voltage distortion with 100% non-linear load and a
(%) Compliant with EN62040-3
3:1 peak factor
Output frequency stability in synchronism with mains
(%) ±2
(± 8 % selectable)
Output frequency stability with internal oscillator (%) ±0.05
Frequency variation speed (Hz/sec) <1
CODICE – CODE

98 of 287
Unit of
measure
Minimum Overload capacity with mains ± 20%:
110
- for 1 minute
(%) 130
- for 10 seconds
200
- for 100 ms
AUTOMATIC BYPASS SPECIFICATIONS (Separate input)
Nominal voltage (220/240 selectable)6 (V) 230
Voltage tolerance (%) ± 15
Frequency tolerance (± 8 selectable) (%) ±2
Overload capacity:
(%) 115
- stabile
(%) 125
- for 120 seconds
(%) 150
- for 30 seconds
(%) 180
- for 20 seconds
UPS SPECIFICATIONS
Measured noise level @ 1 m and @ 100% of load in
(dBA) 52
accordance with ISO 3746
Efficiency at 100% load (%) 90
Efficiency at 50% load (%) 87
LxPxH
Dimensions in frame 550 x 625 x max 1800
(mm)
19” Rack dimensions (U=height, D=depth in mm) (U/D) 12U x 584mm
Weight (kg)
Degree of protection - Outdoor/Indoor IP54/IP20 – NEMA 3
CONTINUOUS OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal voltage (12V DC) (kW)
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS
Long-lasting battery life expectancy 5
Type
years (sealed, maintenance free)
NO LESS THAN 3 hours, while supplying
Autonomy at 40°C (UPS inside the Inverter Cabin)
all necessary continuity loads
Recharge period < 3 hours
EFFICIENCY (certified)
On-line mode (%) Up to 90%
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Ambient operating temperature
According General
Relative humidity
Technical Specification
Maximum altitude
SIGNALLING
- UPS
- Statuses Alarms YES
- Events history
Remote Management
- Serial connection interface
YES
- LAN TCP/IP interface
- Dry contact relay board
NORMS
CODICE – CODE

99 of 287
Unit of
measure
Safety EN 62040-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 62040-2
Performance EN 62040-3
Product declaration EEC
Certification TUV or similar
BRAND (*)
MODEL (*)
1 The voltage shall be according to local standard.
2 Depending on the necessary load to be supplied under the continuity section.
3 Depending on the necessary load to be supplied under the continuity section.
4 If applicable.
5 If applicable.
6 The voltage shall be according to local standard.
C. OPERATING MODE
The UPS selected shall be capable of operating in any of the operation modes described below:
 Normal operating conditions (on line): Power to the utilities shall always be provided by the inverter, which
is in turn powered from the grid through the AC/DC converter. The battery charger shall provide the
necessary power to maintain or recharge the storage battery to the maximum level. The inverter shall
constantly synchronized to the grid to allow the transfer of the loads from the inverter to the normal power
source (due to an overload or inverter outage), without any power interruption.
 Inverter shutdown or overload: In the event of an inverter shutdown (due to a system failure or the
triggering of a protection) or overload, the utilities/loads will be automatically transferred to the normal
power system, then when the overload or the cause of stoppage has ceased the utilities shall
automatically come back under UPS. This characteristic shall allow for the insertion of utilities with an
inrush current that is higher than the inverter’s delivery capacity. In the event of a permanent short circuit,
the inverter shall switch off by an electronic protection and shall inhibit the bypass function.
 Emergency condition: If the main power supply is outage or its parameters (frequency or voltage) is out
of normal range, power to the utilities will be ensured by the storage battery through the inverter. In this
case the UPS shall activate visual and acoustic warning signals. A diagnostic algorithm will calculate the
system’s available residual autonomy. The UPS shall have functions against a total discharge, blocking
it beyond a certain discharge level (residual charge of minimum 20%). If further battery discharge is
required, the UPS shall restart without the presence of the main electrical grid, thanks to a manual
command.
 Restored primary power network: When the main power is restored to admissible limits, the UPS will
automatically return to its normal operating mode. Even in the case of a storage battery completely
discharged, the rectifier/battery charger will restart automatically and immediately begin to charge the
storage battery, so that the maximum charge is restored in the shortest possible time. All transitions from
one operation mode to others shall be activated automatically and avoiding any power interruption to the
supplied loads.
 Manual bypass maneuver: The UPS shall operate in conjunction with a manual bypass. The bypass and
return maneuver shall guarantee transfer operations without load interruptions, allowing for any type of
CODICE – CODE

100 of 287
maintenance, including a total shutdown, and the isolation and the replacement of defective parts.
1.2.3.6. SERVICE EQUIPMENT
1.2.3.6.1. Equipotential System
Each cabin shall include a grounding and equipotential system built in copper, as described below:
 Main ground collector: includes a copper plate, where the external cabin grounding is interconnected.
The plate shall have the following connections available:
o 2 connections; with the grounding of the upstream and downstream cabins grounding plate.
There shall be a grounding bare copper rope that connects all the equipotential plates of the MV
cabins of the same feeder (from the last MV of the feeder, to the substation).
o 2 connections; with the external grounding cross that is installed behind the cabin foundation.
o 2 connections; with the upstream PV field and downstream PV field grounding system
Secondary ground collector: it ensures an equipotential connection of all the metallic masses of the MV cabin.
It holds at grounding connections of all the equipments inside the cabins:
o Inverters grounding
o Transformers grounding
o MVSWGR grounding
o LV panel grounding
o LV aux panel grounding
o Aux transformer grounding
Insulated yellow/green copper cable designed according to IEC 60364, used to connect all the metallic
bodies/components to the ground collector.
All metallic components in the cabin (Metallic doors, metallic structures, rebar of foundations, LV panel, UPS,
LV/LV transformer, MV switchgear, MV/LV transformer, Inverters, and any other metallic parts) shall be
earthed to the secondary ground collector with insulated yellow/green copper cable.
CODICE – CODE

101 of 287
The supply of these elements shall be completed with design calculation, pictures of the components that
will be covered by concrete, and the detail of the junctions
1.2.3.6.2. Normal & Emergency Lighting
LIGHTING SYSTEM
Each room shall include an external lighting system designed with fluorescent ceiling lamps providing within
an area of 5 meters all around its perimeter a min. average lighting of 50 Lux, comprising heavy wall-mounted
PVC tubing and N07VK type wiring sized according to the load (min. 1.5 mm2); unless otherwise specified,
the minimum degree of protection for all components is IP 55/NEMA3.
In particular, each room will be equipped with:
 1 automated twilight + presence detector control switch;
 1 manual timer control switch forcing the automated control switch;
 An adequate number of fluorescent ceiling lamps to obtain the required lighting level;
 1 ceiling lamp with an automated emergency control (to be positioned in access area of each utility
room).
SOCKET SYSTEM
Each cabin will be equipped with a sockets power system in a wall-mounted heavy PVC duct using sized
appropriately for the type of load (min. 2.5 mm2); the minimum degree of protection of all components, unless
otherwise specified, will be IP 55/NEMA3.
Each cabin will be equipped with:
 1 normal IEC outlet comprising an IEC 2Phase+Earthing 16 A socket + IEC 3 Phase+Neutral
+Earthing 16 A socket on an external IP55/NEMA 3 PVC base for each cabinet.
Each room will be equipped with:
 1 normal socket comprising 2 universal bipolar/Schuko 2 Phase+Earthing 10/16 A sockets in an
external IP55/NEMA 3;
 1 continuity socket comprising 2 universal bipolar/Schuko 2 Phase+Earthing 10/16 A sockets in an
external IP55/NEMA 3.
1.2.3.6.3. Ventilation System
All PCU rooms (indoor), or equipment cabins (outdoor) shall be designed to guarantee the proper ventilation
in accordance with the installed equipment inside, and shall guarantee the rated power of the entire PCU
components, at any external environmental conditions (temperature, solar irradiation, humidity, etc.) declared
during tender phase and modelled inside the .OND model of the PCU, without any further power derating not
declared before. The supplier shall provide a thermal calculation report to demonstrate a correct ventilation
dimensioning, considering all required parameters (maximum ambient site conditions such as temperature,
solar irradiation, humidity, thermal heat dissipation of installed equipment, PCU rooms or equipment cabin
dimensions, thermal characteristics of the cabin enclosures, etc.), following the technical guideline Enel will
provide before the detailed design phase.
CODICE – CODE

102 of 287
In particular, the ventilation system design shall consider:

 an adequate exchange of natural air shall be guaranteed in all areas;
 to guarantee an adequate temperature inside the rooms (Delta temperature max 5°C with respect to
outside);
 suitable protection/cover against entry of water, animals, insects, foreign bodies, etc;
All ventilation panels shall be provided with stainless steel sand trap louvers (air grids) to repel the entry of
water, dust and sand, with self-emptying system and insect screen of stainless steel, mounted on the outside
walls. If filters are installed, they shall be removable from the outside, in order to avoid out of services. When
the filters are removed, a degree of protection equal to IP2X shall be guaranteed. Each cabin room shall be
equipped with an adequate ventilation system avoiding condensation by resistances against condensation
(if needed). Based on the site conditions stated in the General Technical Specification the Contractor shall
design the ventilation / filtering system of the cabins of the Power Conversion Units in order to guarantee a
cleaning intervals of not less than 6 months.
In case that the MV/LV transformer is installed indoor, inside a PCU compartment, the ventilation shall be
designed to guarantee the rated power output, at any external environmental conditions (temperature, solar
irradiation, wind speed, etc.). The ventilation shall be natural, forced ventilation shall be avoided.
The hot air outlet surface shall be minimum +20% bigger than the cold air inlet ventilation grid, and the
disposition of such grids surfaces shall ensure the proper ventilation through chimney effect. In case that
force ventilation cannot be avoided, it shall be redundant (2x100%), in order to guarantee a maximum internal
∆T over-temperature of no more than 10°C with respect to the outside air temperature and an air speed less
of 2 m/s. A proper logic shall be implemented by Contractor in case of failure or malfunctioning of the forced
ventilation to reduce the power generated in order to guarantee the maximum temperature limit of the
equipment given by the reference Standards.
The air extractor shall be mounted on the outside wall opposite the access door, fitted with an adjustable
thermostat up to 50°C for automatic starts. The control system of the thermostat shall not be installed inside
the MV/LV transformer room. The ventilation system shall guarantee that the maximum oil temperature rise
(∆T) of the transformer is below the temperature rise reference required in the applicable standards.
The thermostat shall have two thresholds:
 first threshold shall activate the first ventilation system;
 second threshold shall activate the backup ventilation system;
The thermostat shall be capable to send also the continuous measure of room temperature (analogue signal
4-20 mA) to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC. Both fans status (main fan ON signal and secondary fan
ON signal) shall be transmitted as hardwired signals to control system RTU/ PLC as well.
1.2.3.6.4. Smoke Detection System
The smoke detection requirements are specifically applicable to PCUs and transformation centers, where
the equipment is installed inside a precast concrete or metal enclosure. Each PCU room shall be equipped
with a fire detection system totally compliant with current standardization and all regulatory standards/laws
in force in the country of destination. The standard supply shall provide optical sensors totally compliant with
UNI EN 54-x. The required number of smoke detectors shall be defined by the PCU manufacturer. However,
CODICE – CODE

103 of 287
the minimum number of sensors to be installed are the following:

 Indoor PCUs o transformation centers
o 2 ceiling sensors in each room;
o 2 sensors in the cable compartment;
o 1 sensor inside the QPPI panel for PCUs, or inside the LV AC parallel panel for transformation
centers.
 Outdoor/Skid PCUs o transformation centers
o 2 ceiling sensors in each room or inside the following main equipment compartments:
 central inverter, LVAC parallel panel room, MVSWGR room, LV auxiliary room
o 2 sensors in the cable compartment;
o 1 sensor inside the QPPI panel for PCUs, or inside the LV AC parallel panel for transformation
centers.
The intervention of one of detectors will cause (pre-alarm):
 a visual alarm inside and outside of the building;
 a digital hardwired signal (voltage free contact) to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC.
The intervention of two detectors will cause (alarm):
 a visual and audible alarm inside and outside the building;
 a digital hardwired signal (voltage free contact) to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC;
 the shutdown of the ventilation/conditioning system;
 the trip of the:
o DC and AC circuit breakers of the inverters – in case of Power Conversion Unit
o The AC circuit breaker of the LV parallel panel – in case of Transformation Center
o The trip of the MV breakers in the cabin.
The smoke control unit (totally compliant with UNI EN 54-x) shall provide the following hardwired signals
(voltage-free contact) to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC:
 Smoke System pre-alarm;
 Smoke System alarm;
 Smoke System Unit Fault;
 Smoke System Detectors fault;
 Smoke System loss of supply.
The smoke detection system, including cables, shall be fire resistant. Audible and visual alarms shall be
installed outdoors (IP55/NEMA 3S minimum) and indoors.
1.2.3.6.5. Anti-Intrusion System
Each cabin will be equipped with a door control system by using of magnetic contacts, a signal management
relay and a control unit. The following will be connected to the relay and control unit:
Inputs:
 Open door magnetic contacts signal for each room;
 230 VAC system power.
CODICE – CODE

104 of 287
Outputs:
 Hardwired alarm signal transmitted to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC.
The equipment will be installed in a plastic mounted box with a degree of protection IP 55/NEMA 3, or
integrated inside the inverter panel.
1.2.3.6.6. Anti-Rodent device
The anti-rodent system shall be design and sized according to the cabin dimensions and it has to include [in
particular, in the cables (all types) compartment and in the PCU tank basement], at least, the following
equipment:
 BLACK TERRIER or similar type control unit for the programming and medium-frequency control of
the system;
 BLACK TERRIER or similar type medium-frequency diffuser terminals, complete with accessories
for attachment;
 Power, control, and signal cables;
 Cable conduits, supports, and accessories for the installation;
 the Residual Current Device (RCD) and automatic circuit breaker to protect the system’s equipment.
The anti-rodent detection system shall have one alarm free voltage contacts to the cabin control system RTU/
PLC representative of: anti-rodent system fault (of both sensors and control unit).
The design of system shall be approved and checked by the supplier of the anti-rodent system
The design and the installation shall be made taking into consideration the possible generation of
disturbances from the structures. Such disturbances shall not interfere with radio broadcasts, alarm systems
and remote control systems at the plant; similarly, the operation of the anti-rodent shall not be sensitive to
electromagnetic disturbances induced by other installations. Furthermore, the control units shall be protected
against overloads or disturbances from the electrical power line. Emissions produced by the system shall not
entail any health risks nor cause discomfort to people working in affected environments. Power supply and
control lines will make use of self-extinguishing cables with a minimum section of 2.5 mm² and a suitable
degree of insulation. Cables will be routed inside PVC protected ducts or cable runs (rigid or flexible, heavy-
duty type). All cable connections included in the supply shall be numbered and marked in compliance and
consistent with other connections, to be agreed in advance with EGP.
In case that the MV cabins (Conversion Cabin, LV/MV Transformation Cabin, Delivery Cabin and Parallel
Cabin) are directly installed on top of a concrete slab foundation, and with all entries properly sealed, the
supply and installation of the anti-rodent system could be avoided. Also all cabin bottom plates shall be
properly holed (proper hole diameter and placement), to just allow the passage of cables inside the cabins.
1.2.3.6.7. Insulation Monitoring System
The permanent insulation control panel manages the detection, acquisition and signaling of all insulation
faults detected in the DC or AC LV ground-isolated network.
The insulation monitoring system will include an audio (a local alarm by siren)/visual (strobe with flash)
device, that shall work when one of the following insulation devices detect a trip condition:
CODICE – CODE

105 of 287
Central Inverter LV AC output Power Conversion Unit

(hardwired)
Central Inverter LV DC input
(hardwired)
UPS LV output (hardwired)
String Inverter LV AC output Transformation Center
(communication) or
in LV AC parallel panel output
(hardwired)
String Inverter LV DC input
(communication)
UPS LV output (hardwired)
The insulation fault detection shall be done through the monitoring of low insulation resistance (insulation
monitoring device) and/or through residual currents out of range, as explicitly requested in IEC62109-1/2.
In case of string inverter solution, the insulation monitoring system shall acquire by communication any
insulation fault status activated from any of its underneath string inverters connected to such transformation
center, and shall perform all the alarm actions foreseen in this section.
The device audio/visual shall be located out of the cabin and shall be identified by an information plaque
“ATTENTION GROUND FAULT”. The signals (free voltage contacts) of each control unit shall be transmitted
to the cabin control system RTU/ PLC.
The insulation monitoring and residual current detection units inside the inverter shall be internal of the
machine and shall be provided together with the inverter.
The other insulation monitoring devices to be installed inside the PCU/Transformation center, such as in the
UPS, or in the LV parallel panel output, shall be suitable to be used under any climactic conditions and shall
have the following characteristics:
Electrical specifications
Insulation resistance reading range 0.1 kΩ to 10 MΩ
Malfunction signaling Number of thresholds 2 (password protected)
Pre-alarm 1 kΩ to 1 MΩ
Malfunction 0,5 kΩ to 0.5 MΩ
Accuracy 5%
Response time ≤5s
Equipment functionality test Self-diagnostics and manual test
Internal impedance 50/60 Hz 110 kΩ
Positive safety intervention 1 (standard)
Output contacts number 2 pre-alarm
2 malfunction
(standard or positive safety)
CODICE – CODE

106 of 287
Type of contact In switching

Brought to 250 Vac 6A
Brought from 12 to 24
6A
VDC
Input contact (self-exclusion) Voltage supplied 24 V
Minimum load 5 mA
Malfunction signaling timer From 0 to 300 s
Auxiliary power voltage Ac 45- 440 Hz From 110 to 415 VAC ± 15%
DC 125/250 VDC ± 15%
Max. Consumption 12 VA (approx.)
Measuring voltage 75 V peak
Measuring current 0.9 mA
Dielectric strength 4 kVAC / 5.5 kVDC
Other characteristics
Climactic conditions EN 60068
Standards Product EN 61557-8
Plant IEC 60364
Accessories: surge arrester
1.2.4. PV SUPPORT STRUCTURES
1.2.4.1. FOUNDATION
1.2.4.1.1. Ramming Pole
Piles shall be driven directly in soils using a pile-driving machine, avoiding any kind of damage to the driven
steel profile. The procedure shall be in accordance with the tolerance required by the tracker supplied.
Figure 5 – Pile Driving
1.2.4.1.2. Pre-Drilled and Ramming
In case ramming is not sufficient to install the piles with the required embedded depth, due to the presence
CODICE – CODE

107 of 287
of boulder in the soil, the following procedure can be applied:

 predrill with a diameter smaller than the size of the steel profile of the pile (the predrilling diameter
shall be evaluated case by case, several diameters may be tested);
 fill the hole with drilled soil, removing boulders having a size higher than 2 cm;
 ram the pile
An iterative procedure can be requested to obtain the minimum feasible drilling diameter to allow the ramming
of the pile for the required embedded depth.
1.2.4.1.3. Pre-Drilling and Screwing
In case screwing is not sufficient to install the profile with the required embedded depth, the following
procedure can be applied:
 predrill with a diameter smaller than the diameter of the helix; (the predrilling diameter shall be
evaluated case by case, several diameters may be tested);
 fill the hole with drilled soil, removing boulders having a size higher than 2 cm;
 screw the pile
An iterative procedure can be requested to obtain the minimum feasible drilling diameter to allow the pile
screwing for the required embedded depth.
1.2.4.1.4. Screws
The screw type reported below is the only acceptable screw.
Figure 6 – Typical screw shape
Screw shall have a uniform diameter for the full length (up to the tip); the thread shall be made of a helix with
a minimum thickness of 2 mm (5/64in).
Helix width (Dhelix-Dpipe)/2 shall be at least 7 cm (2-3/4in).
CODICE – CODE

108 of 287
Figure 7 – Screw section
Cone shaped screws shown in the Figure below shall be avoided due to their low resistance and the small
thread width.
Figure 8 – Unacceptable Screw shape
1.2.4.1.5. Screwing
Piles shall be screwed directly in soils using a pile-screwing machine according to the tolerance requested
by the tracker supplier for the installation.
1.2.4.1.6. Drilling and Concreting
In case of screwing/piles driven in rock, or in case the contractor has the necessity to execute a drilling, the
anchorage shall be provided with the following method:
 drill a hole twice the diameter of the helix/maximum section dimension of the profile;
 insert the profile
 fill the volume between the screw/profile and the rock by using non-shrinking resistant concrete.
The procedure shall be properly described by the Contractor and validated by ENEL before starting any site
activity.
1.2.4.1.7. Shallow Foundations
The support structure shall be connected to the concrete foundation, using a sized plate welded at the base
of the support structure. The concrete foundation shall have sized anchor bolts; the embedment length shall
resist to the applied forces from the supporting structure. The steel plate welded to the support structure shall
be placed on a resistant leveling grout layer. Shear lug or shear keys shall be used to resist all the horizontal
forces transmitted from the structure.
Anchor bolts shall be made of galvanized steel or stainless steel.
Structural concrete for foundations should be at least class [C20/25 (R ck=25MPa, fck=20MPa) according to
CODICE – CODE

109 of 287
EN 1992, or 3000psi according to ASTM C33].
Figure 9 – Support structure on concrete raft
1.2.4.2. STRUCTURES IN ELEVATION
1.2.4.2.1. Welding
The welding connections installed by the contractor shall conform to the validated design. Steel parts shall
be welded with one of the electric arc procedures specified in standard [EN ISO 4063, AWS A5.1, A5.5].
Welds can be made either by means of automatic or robotized processes or by means of manual or
semiautomatic processes.
Welders shall be qualified and have working knowledge of the specifications [AWS B5.1 EN ISO 9606], (for
manual or semiautomatic processes/for shielded and gas metal arc welding), AWS A5.1 for submerged arc
welding, AWS A5.17 for flux cored arc welding, AWS A5.20 for electrogas welding and [EN 1418] (for
automatic or robotized processes).
The welds shall be of quality C as per EN ISO 5817/AISC specifications sec. M2.4. The edges of the joints
to be welded shall be prepared in conformity with the provisions of EN ISO 9692-1/ASTM A490M-08.
1.2.4.2.2. Bolts
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip galvanized as prescribed in [EN ISO 10684/ASTM Specifications].
Bolts shall be class 6.8 (Group A) as a minimum, according to [EN ISO 898/ASTM A325].
As an alternative, stainless steel bolts can be used and the specification given in [EN ISO 3506/ASTM
F593/A193] shall be followed.
The torque value to be applied at site should be shown on the relevant drawings for each type of bolted
connection, included clamps. All bolts shall be tightened by dynamometric torque and this requirement shall
be specified by Contractor in the drawings and in the installation and maintenance manuals.
1.2.4.3. PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
Protective treatment of the steel structures depends on the environmental conditions in which the steelworks
will be installed and on the service life of PV plant.
Metal structures will be mainly subject to atmospheric and soil corrosions.
For piles partially embedded in soil, the supplier shall take into account both atmospheric and soil corrosion.
Based on the corrosivity information reported in the General Technical Specification and on the soil tests,
CODICE – CODE

110 of 287
the Supplier shall propose the appropriate protective coating described in a dedicated report which shall be
validated by Enel.
A minimum design life of 30 years shall be considered for the plant, unless otherwise specified in General
Technical Specification.
1.2.4.3.1. Galvanization
Steel structures shall be zinc galvanized. Both hot-dip Galvanized (HDG) and continuously hot-dip coated
steel flat (Pre-Galv.) are allowed, according to the thickness required. The galvanization shall be performed
for all the steel profiles.
Galvanization shall comply with all the relevant codes and all the documents necessary to assess the product
quality.
ATMOSPHERIC CORROSION
According to the corrosion category and the design plant life, defined by ENEL in the General Technical
Specification for the site, the Supplier shall provide the zinc coating minimum thickness according to the table
below:
Atmospheric Service Life (Years)

Corrosion Corr.Rate for
Zinc Rcorr 15 20 25 30
Category
µm/y Minimum Thickness (µm)
C1 0,1 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0
C2 0,7 8 10 12 14
C3 low 1,4 15 19 23 27
C3 high 2,1 22 29 35 41
C4 low 3,2 34 44 53 63
C4 high 4,2 45 57 70 82
C5 low 6,3 67 86 105 124
C5 high 8,4 89 115 140 165
CX 25 266 342 416 491
Table 1 - Minimum zinc coating thickness according to environmental categories and service
Atmospheric corrosion categories are based on standard EN ISO 9223 with some additional sub-categories
(low and high) in order to optimize the coating thickness. For plant life lower than 15 years (t), the coating
thickness shall be determined using the equation below:
MThick = Rcorr * t 0,87 (μm)

Where:
MThick Minimum zinc coating thickness
Rcorr Zinc corrosion Rate (from table 1)
t Plant life
CODICE – CODE

111 of 287
SOIL CORROSION
Category of soil corrosivity, and relative corrosion rate, shall be determined on the basis of the results of the
hydrological and hydraulic analysis and geological and geotechnical studies.
Zinc
As regards zinc corrosion, two parameters must be taken into account, resistivity and pH according to the
following table:
pH Resistivity (Ω cm) Corrosion

< 3,5 Any High
<4.500 High
3,5 – 4,5
>4.500 Medium - High
< 4.500 High
4,5 – 5,5 4.500 – 5.000 Medium – High
>5.000 Medium
< 1.000 High
1.000– 5.000 Medium – High
5,5 – 6,0
5.000 – 10.000 Medium
>1.0000 Medium - Low
< 1.000 High
1.000– 3.000 Medium – High
6,0 – 9,5 3.000 – 10.000 Medium
10.000 – 20.000 Medium – Low
>20.000 Low
Table 2 - Soil corrosivity for zinc
According to the soil corrosion category of zinc and the design life indicated in general technical specification
for the site, the Supplier shall provide the zinc coating thickness according to Table 3.
If ENEL provides any test result, the Contractor is responsible to review and accept the data for the
calculation.
Soil Service Life (Years)

Corrosive Corr.Rate
Soil Load for Zinc 15 20 25 30
Rcorr,zinc
µm/y Minimum Thickness (µm)
Low 0,6 9 12 15 18
Medium-Low 1,25 19 25 31 38
Medium 2,4 36 48 60 72
Medium-High 3,2 48 64 80 96
High 5 75 100 125 150
Table 3 - Minimum zinc coating thickness according to soil corrosivity and service life
The plant area may be divided in areas of homogenous corrosivity level or defining the highest level for the
whole plant. In both cases, the soil classification shall be validated by Enel.
CODICE – CODE

112 of 287
The zinc thickness of the partially embedded piles in soil shall be the highest one between the atmospheric
and soil corrosion needs.
Steel
Steel corrosion category shall be identified according to the values, reported in table 4 and table 5.
As per DIN 50929 standard, the following points are established and listed:
 fundamental factors (Zi) that determine soil corrosion;
 a weight to the fundamental factors that determine the corrosion in soil (Zi) (Table 4);
 benchmarks based on factor weights (Table 2 and Table 5)
 zinc and steel corrosion rates according to the assumed rating (Table 3 and Table 6)
In case of homogeneous soils for the ground rating the following equation shall be used:
B0 = Z1 + Z2 +Z3 + Z4 + Z5 + Z6 + Z7 +Z8 + Z9
While for heterogeneous soils:

B1 = B0 + Z10 +Z11 + Z12
a) Assessment of the soil samples Measurement Range Rating

Type of Soil % of Weight Z1
≤10 +4
>10 to 30 +2
Cohesion: proportion of elutriable matter >30 to 50 0
1 > 50 to 80 -2
>80 -4
Peat, fen, mud and marsh soil, organic carbon -12
Heavily contaminated soil -12

Soil Resistivity Ω cm Z2
> 50.000 +4
> 20.000 to 50.000 +2
2 > 5.000 to 20.000 0
> 2.000 to 5.000 -2
> 1.000 to 2.000 -4
< 1.000 -6
Water Content % of Weight Z3
3 ≤ 20 0
> 20 -1
pH Value Z4
>9 +2
4 > 5,5 to 9 0
> 4 to 5,5 -1
<4 -3
Buffer Capacity mmol/kg Z5
< 200 0
5 Acidity up to pH 4,3 (alkalinity Ks 4,3) > 200 to 1.000 +1
> 1.000 +3
< 2,5 0
Alcalinity up to pH 7 (alkalinity KB 7,0)
> 2,5 to 5 -2
CODICE – CODE

113 of 287
> 5 to 10 -4
> 10 to 20 -6
> 20 to 30 -8
> 30 -10
Sulfites (S2-) content mg/kg Z6
6 <5 0
> 5 to 10 -3
> 10 -6
Neutral Salt in aqueous extract c (Cl-) and
mmol/kg Z7
2 c (SO4 2-
)
<3 0
7
> 3 to 10 -1
> 10 to 30 -2
> 30 to 100 -3
> 100 -4
Sulphate (SO4 2-
, hydrocloridic acid extract) mmol/kg Z8
<2 0
8 > 2 to 5 -1
> 5 to 10 -2
> 10 -3
b) Assessment based on local factor Measurement Range Rating

Location of structure with respect to ground
Z9
water
9 Ground water absent 0
Ground water present Ground -1
water change over time -2
Soil homogeneity, Horizontal Z10
10 Soil resistance profile: Variation of Z2 above │ Δ Z2 │ < 2 0

adjacent soil regions (all positive value of Z2 2 ≤ │ Δ Z2 │ ≤ 3 -2
are to be set equal to +1) │ Δ Z2 │ > 3 -4
Soil homogeneity, Vertical Z11
Homogenous bending with
soil of similar type, sand 0
Inhomogeneous bedding with

Soil in immediate vicinity
11 extraneous material as
woods, roots, etc. and with
relatively heterogeneous -6
corrosive soil
Layering of different soil with different Z3 2 ≤ │ Δ Z2 │ ≤ 3 -1
value │ Δ Z2 │ > 3 -2
Structure/soil potential UCu/CuSO4
V Z12
(to detect impressed current cathodes)
12 - 0,5 to -0,4 -3
> -0,4 to – 0,3 -8
> -0,3 -10
Table 4– Soil assessment for steel
CODICE – CODE

114 of 287
Ground Rating
Corrosion
(B0 or B1 value)
≥0 Non aggressive
-1 to -4 Mildly aggressive
-5 to -10 Aggressive
< -10 Very aggressive
Table 5 – Soil corrosivity for steel
At each point of investigation, the soil corrosivity shall be calculated according to Table 4 and Table 5.
Steel overthickness design

Contractor could decide to allow the complete loss of zinc coating for the pile embedded portion before the
working life of the plant is reached and calculate the loss of steel thickness occurring during the remaining
years.
Serviceability limit state, ultimate limit state verifications on the structures and the geometrical limitations
shall be performed considering the reduced sections.
A uniform loss of steel thickness all around the perimeter of the cross-section shall be considered by using
the soil corrosion rates for steel defined in the following section.
Steel corrosion over-thickness in the pile surface shall be determined according to Table 6.
Corrosion rate classification and the remaining service life can be calculated as:
CLSteel = DLP – (DLP/Rcorr,Zinc)

Where:
CLSteel Life to consider for steel corrosion
DLP Design Life of the Plant
Rcorr Zinc Zinc corrosion rate (from Table 6)
According to the classification given in Table 5 and the CLsteel defined above, the steel overthickness to be
provided is shown in Table 6.
Soil Remaining Service Life (Years)

Corr.Rate
Soil Category
for Steel 5 10 15 20
Rcorr,steel
mm/y Minimum Overthickness (mm)
Not Aggressive 0,005 0,03 0,05 0,08 0,10
Weakly Aggressive 0,01 0,05 0,10 0,15 0,20
Aggressive 0,02 0,10 0,20 0,30 0,40
Highly Aggressive 0,06 0,30 0,60 0,90 1,20
Table 6 – Minimum Steel over thickness according to soil corrosivity and remaining service life
For intermediate value of remaining service life, steel over thickness shall be determined using linear
CODICE – CODE

115 of 287
interpolation.
1.2.4.3.1.1. Pre-Galvanization
Standards consider the average thickness and the minimum value or a range of acceptability (minimum and
maximum thickness values). For pre-galvanized profiles, the typical value of zinc coating thickness shall be
considered as reported in Table 7.
Standard ISO 10346

Coating Designation Z100 Z140 Z200 Z225 Z275 Z350 Z450 Z600
Design Coating
7 10 14 16 20 25 32 42
Thickness (µm)
Standard ASTM A653
Coating Designation G90 G115 G140 G165 G185 G210 G235 G300
Design Coating
20,6 26,3 32 37,7 42,3 48 53,7 68,6
Thickness (µm)
Table 7 – Mean Zinc coating thickness per surface according to coating designation
1.2.4.3.1.2. Hot Dip Galvanization
Standards consider the average thickness and the minimum value or a range of acceptability (minimum and
maximum thickness values). For HDG, the value to be taken as reference for the comparison with the
requested thickness, shall be at least the mean coating thickness.
Thin section profiles may not be suitable for the designed coating thickness by HDG .
1.2.4.3.2. Other
The Contractor can propose to reduce the galvanization thickness applying an additional paint system on top
of the galvanization. The type of coating should be calculated in accordance with [EN ISO 12944]. The
protective paint system shall be adequate to the environmental conditions and shall assure a durability class
“H” or “VH” as defined in [EN ISO 12944] according to the corrosion category and the service life of the plant.
Effects of the paint layer shall be considered in order to evaluate the galvanization thickness.
The Contractor may also propose optional alternative protection treatments and provide ENEL with all the
documentation demonstrating the suitability of the proposed treatment, as well as the durability for the
defined environmental conditions.
Steel profile thickness should guarantee the proper application of the prescribed coating thickness. If
requested by ENEL, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the structure with the coating at its own
expenses and without affecting the schedule of the project.
The aluminum structure protection shall be in compliance with [EN-1999], considering a minimum service
life of 30 years, unless otherwise specified in General Technical Specification and the environmental
conditions agreed with ENEL.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary documentation to demonstrate the feasibility of the
protective treatment prescribed in ENEL specification and in accordance with the applicable codes.
The protection treatment shall be validated by ENEL before starting the activities.
CODICE – CODE

116 of 287
In case of alternative treatment, should ENEL not validate the procedure, the Contractor shall perform the
standard treatments at its own costs.
1.2.4.4. MONO-AXIAL TRACKER
The support configurations shall be defined in order to achieve a proper structural behavior.
The environmental conditions shall properly assess the suitability of the site and ensure that soil erosion,
frosting-defrosting cycles and any other phenomenon that affect the superficial soil characteristics will not
affect the structural reliability during the full service life of the plant.
The structure shall ensure the stability in a manner that all structural elements will participate to resist the
applied external actions. Localized plastic deformations shall be avoided to prevent damage of the modules
and the functionality of trackers mechanism (SLS checks).
The Contractor has to verify that the structure has a proper stiffness: the main vibration period of the tracker
structure shall be lower than 1.0 sec. The period shall be evaluated by FEM model. The numerical model
shall not take in consideration the rigidity of the module, but only its mass.
During the tender phase the Contractor shall provide adequate documentations, calculations and finite
element models (FEM) to demonstrate that the main vibration period of the proposed tracker is lower than
1,0 s. Moreover, after the tender phase, before the final validation of the tracker detailed design, the
Contractor shall build a full scale prototype and perform vibration tests on it, in order to verify the reliability of
the calculation provided in the tender phase. The results of the vibration tests on the full scale prototype shall
be provided to Enel for the validation of the proposed support structure. Any change to the structure,
necessary to comply with the requirement, will be at the Contractor own costs.
The tracker frames may be bolted or welded. The protective coating shall be applied after the welds have
been completed. If the steel structures are galvanized prior to welding, then the galvanization should be
properly repaired under the responsibility of the Contractor. Site welds are not allowed in any case.
If the columns above ground are not continuous with the embedded part (piles or screws), the connection
shall be designed as a hinge and modeled accordingly in the calculation. The connection between the
embedded pile/screw and the structure may be modeled as a moment connection only if properly justified by
the Contractor and if agreed and validated by ENEL. The distance between the module and the ground shall
be at least 50 cm (1.7ft), additional value might be required based on local snow expectations.
1.2.4.4.1. Mechanical
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
 Type of tracking system: horizontal single axis tracking system with back-tracking. The orientation
should be defined for each specific site, generally for flat areas:
 Axis orientation: N-S
 Tracking: E-W
For particular sites, a different orientation may be defined by ENEL to achieve an optimal layout.
 Maximum tracking error: 2°. It represents the maximum allowable discrepancy between the
theoretical tilt angle and the real tilt angle measured through the movement sensor. The theoretical
tilt angle is the inclination that should be taken by tracker at that time, implementing the astronomical
CODICE – CODE

117 of 287
algorithm.
 Number of modules/tracker: each tracker structure shall contain modules in multiple of string size.
 Minimum rotation angle: the range specified in the General Technical Specification.
 Minimum height over ground at maximum tilt angle: 0.5 m.
 Tracking control system (one for each tracker): astronomical.
 Movement sensor:
 Inclinometer (one for each tracker);
 Alternative method based on the use of the encoder integrated into the motor.
In the second case the Supplier shall provide all documentation needed to describe in detail the
solution: method of calculation of real tilt angle, encoder datasheet, and method of actuation of the
motor based on encoder outputs, eventual correction of position.
 The support structures shall be compliant for the type of PV modules specified for the project
according to their installation manual.
 The support structures and the components that will be supplied shall be compliant with specific site
corrosiveness.
INSTALLATION TOLLERANCE
The following parameters tolerances shall be specified by the Supplier:
 Piles plan location (NSEW) or row alignment;
 Piles rotational twist;
 Piles height;
 Piles vertical inclination;
 Irregular Surface Installation (upper and lower);
 Slope installation (maximum ground inclination).
1.2.4.4.1.1. Defense System
 Stow position is generally horizontal 0°. Other different positions are accepted as stow if they are
demonstrated and justified by the Contractor.
 The maximum wind speed to activate the defense mechanism is Vwork max - 10 km/h.
 Time to go from maximum tilt to stow position shall be determined taking into account possible wind
gusts impacts during the system movement to stow position.
 The trackers must stay in defense position until the wind speed is higher than V work max - 20km/h.
1.2.4.4.1.2. Motor and Actuator
The Supplier can propose the following driving system to move the tracker:
 An independent motor/actuator for each tracker
 A transmission axis commanded by a motor and moving more trackers contemporary
The supplier can adopt only electrical motors, while it is forbidden to use hydraulic/oil engine.
CODICE – CODE

118 of 287
The supplier shall describe the method used for the motor-actuator sizing specifying the following information
at least:
 Factor of use
 Static load and dynamic load requested
 Method to calculate the static and dynamic load requested
 Operative cycle requested
 Operative speed requested
 Operative stroke requested (in case of linear actuator)
 Push dynamic load
The supplier shall provide a selection flow diagram that summarize the method of motor-actuator selection
by main steps.
1.2.4.4.1.3. Rotation Head
The bottom and the upper flange of the rotational head shall be done with metallic material (steel or
aluminum). The Contractor also can propose flanges realized with different material (e.g. plastic material
and/or polymer): in this case a datasheet including the following information shall be provided:
 Main physical properties
 Main mechanical characteristics
 Maximum resistant loads (pull, compression, shear, pressure)
 Maximum loads acting on the rotational head, calculated through FEA
Figure 10 – Head of Piles rotation joint
Furthermore, the Contractor shall guarantee the durability of the material for entire power plant life and
CODICE – CODE

119 of 287
provide ENEL a warranty certification.
1.2.4.4.1.4. Drive and Control System
 Rotating drive system: Electromechanical equipped with thermal relay for the motor protection
 Control system composed by:
 Tracker Controllers;
 Field Communication devices;
 Central SCADA.
 Power supply panel (1 for Conversion Unit), this component it is necessary to supply electrical power
to tracker controllers Related to each Conversion Unit.
 Control panel (1 for Conversion Unit), this component is necessary to manage and control the
Tracker Controller.
 Connectivity:
 Local control access for manual movements;
 Remote control access.
 Alarms management capability.
1.2.4.4.2. Electronic Control Board
Each tracker system shall have all electrical equipment (motors, actuators, electric board, wiring, and so on.)
according to reference code and to the environmental conditions indicated in the General Technical
Specification.
All Electrical equipment of the electrical board shall be protected against overloads, short circuits, surges of
type II and protection against indirect contacts.
The electronic control system shall ensure that the tracker will move with a simultaneity factor as closer to 0
as possible, during the early morning and late afternoon, in order to limit the peak power consumption when
the trackers are consuming power from the grid, (i.e. when the trackers move from the stall-to-initial position,
and from final-to-stall position of the day).
During the energy production process, the trackers shall move with the backtracking algorithm in order to
maximize the energy yield of the PV field.
Code Description
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses - Part 1: General requirements
Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by
IEC 60269-2 authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
Low-voltage surge protective devices - Part 11: Surge protective devices connected to
EN 61643-11 low-voltage power systems - Requirements and test methods
IEC 60695-2-1 Fire hazard testing - Part 2: Test methods - Section 1: Glow-wire test and guidance
1.2.4.4.3. Communication
Field Communication devices (e.g. gateways, Ethernet switches), physically located in each Conversion
CODICE – CODE

120 of 287
Cabin, which communicate with the several Tracker Controllers and convert the received information to
TCP/IP protocol through an Ethernet connection.
The communication between the tracker Controllers and the Field Communication devices can be achieved
with:
 Wireless Configuration
 Wired Configuration
1.2.4.4.3.1. Wireless
by wireless technology.
This solution shall be subject to a preliminary mandatory approval by EGP and the following minimum
characteristics shall be fulfilled:
 A mesh routing topology with an approximate length covered by wireless of about 200m. Each
Tracker line implements independent Wireless network with different channels to avoid conflict
with next TR line. Each Wireless concentrator must have all available data regarding the trackers.
Local memory of the wireless concentrator is 1 month of data. If requested by EGP an external
datalog server must be provided. The maximum rate for the data is 5 minutes.
 Battery warranty of 5 years for drive components and 10 years for structural components and a
battery autonomy of 3 days for temperatures of 20-40 °C.
 Zigbee Wireless solution
 Achilles certification
 Repeaters within a single network must be avoided if not necessary.
1.2.4.4.3.2. Wired
by wired technology: RS485 bus solution is acceptable.
In this case, the use of RS485 opto-isolators in the main nodes of the RS485 bus will be mandatory, in order
to provide galvanic isolation and prevent ground loops, electrical noise and power spikes. Besides the
aforementioned, it also shall be supplied Surge Protection Devices (SPD) for each gateway and for each
head tracker in order to prevent damage to the RS485 electronics of the devices on field against lightning
and overvoltages.
1.2.4.4.4. Tracker Power Supply
A. WIRED TRACKER POWER SUPPLY

Low voltage panel shall be installed in order to supply all necessary tracker loads. Such LV distribution panel
shall be designed in accordance to the tracker supply distribution system proposed. This LV panel will be
installed inside the PCU/Transformation center, and shall have a general circuit breaker as input, and as
many output circuit breakers as tracker supply feeder lines. The general circuit breaker (input) and the feeder
circuit breakers (output), shall be appropriately sized so as to protect against leakage currents and against
overload and short-circuit. In particular, the circuit breaker dimensioning shall be made paying attention to
CODICE – CODE

121 of 287
avoid the trip of circuit breaker due to inrush current of trackers. Every circuit breakers shall have the auxiliary
contacts, about their status, that the PLC have to acquire. The low voltage panel shall be in compliance with
all applicable rules and norms referred to the design construction and testing of LV electrical panels.
For all electrical equipment installed outdoor, it is requested IP55 protection, insulation class II and UV rays
protection.
The wired tracker power supply shall consider all the necessary wires and connections to deliver suitable
auxiliary power to the tracker actuators systems.
All necessary power distribution boards/boxes to be installed along the entire tracker supply distribution
system shall be also considered, following always the architecture/guidelines proposed from the PV tracker
constructor.
All electrical equipment (power and control) must be protected with voltage dischargers appropriate to the
site's environmental characteristics.
B. SELF-POWERED TRACKER SUPPLY

Self-powered solutions (stand alone with PV Panel or not) of the tracker system are accepted but only as
option in order to allow to EGP to perform technical and economical assessment compared to a wired
solution. In case of self-powered solutions, the batteries shall be guaranteed for 5 years.
1.2.4.4.5. Back-Tracking
The supplier shall provide the following information/documentation:

 Theoretical curve
o Algorithm definition: Theoretical explication about the algorithm used, how the theoretical
simulation curve is created and which parameters are used. Description about how the algorithm
will be applied:
 one logic for whole project,
 adjusting per zones,
 adjusting per NCU, etc.
o Simulation theoretical curve in 3 points into the project some points into the project (a point each
20MWac): the theoretical curve will be simulated (according available info: orography) in 3
different points (selected by EGP) for the following days: Summer Solstice and Winter Solstice.
The contractor shall provide at least 6 simulations. In the case these theoretical curves are
different within the same row of trackers (W-E), the manufacturer shall send a simulation for
whole row.
These curves have to be adjusted after the total installation of trackers (eg. according as-built
position of trackers, adapted “buffer”), these curves will be the ones expected to be set in the
trackers on site. The curves to be submitted would be just for a specific day (Tracker hot
commissioning: this day has to be agreed between EGP Engineering, Commissioning and the
Contractor).
 Certification of the algorithm by third parties: certification done by a third part on the correct
functioning of the algorithm.
CODICE – CODE

122 of 287
 Track record (for plants already built): list of the worldwide projects where has been used the same
algorithm.
 In case of “Row by Row backtracking”, technical report describing the methodology used to
determine the real position of the tracker with the declaration if the manufacturer is going to use the
technology “row to row” in the algorithm:
o In positive case, it should be described the methodology for identifying (procedure and number
of points) the real position (X, Y, Z) of the trackers. It is also necessary to detail a schedule for
this activities.
o In negative case, it is necessary to explain how the algorithm works when there are irregularities
of the terrain, how “buffer” or “shading distance” will be calculated and how it is applied.
 Technical report describing algorithm in case of irradiation of high diffuse content: Declaration if the
manufacturer applies any variable to take into account the diffuse irradiation. In positive case, a
technical description of the variables, how the variables are obtained, changes into the algorithm,
etc…
1.2.4.4.6. Monitoring
1.2.4.4.6.1. Inclinometer
The Supplier shall provide a drawing, showing the anchoring system of the inclinometer on the tracker, to
identify the position of the inclinometer along the tracker.
1.2.4.4.6.2. Integrated Encoder
The Supplier shall provide all documentation needed to describe in detail the solution: method of calculation
of real tilt angle, encoder datasheet, method of actuation of the motor based on encoder outputs, eventual
correction of position.
1.2.4.5. SEASONAL
ENEL can ask the design and supply of structures with a modifiable tilt during the year.
CODICE – CODE

123 of 287
This kind of structure can be monopole or bi-pole and they follow the rules of the fixed structures.
Please consider the following figures just as a reference:
Figure 11 – Seasonal structure
The structure shall be provided with a predisposition for the application of a mechanical engine for the tilt
modification.
Frames of the structure shall be designed considering the regulation of 3 different tilt between 5° and 30°.
The values of the tilt will be communicated by ENEL.
1.2.4.6. FIXED STRUCTURES
Structures shall be built using main frames and longitudinal beams. Main frames shall be bolted or welded.
Protective coating shall be applied after the welds have been completed, or alternatively the galvanization
should be repaired if already galvanized items are welded. Site welds are not allowed in any case.
If the above ground columns are not continuous with the embedded part (piles or screws), the connection
shall be designed as a hinge and modeled accordingly in the calculation. In order to achieve the desired
CODICE – CODE

124 of 287
structural behavior, frames shall be braced as shown in the following figures. Longitudinal X braces shall be
applied to the central bay. The connection between the embedded pile/screw and the structure shall be
modeled as a moment connection only if properly justified by the Contractor and if validated by ENEL.
Figure 12 – Typical layout with longitudinal bracings
The design shall ensure the structural stability and the external actions should be resisted through proper
forces distribution. Localized deformations shall be avoided to prevent any damage to the modules. When
bolted connections are used, the connections should be modeled as a hinge unless a moment connection is
assured by the bolts geometry. Typical frames suggested by ENEL are shown in Figure 13 and Figure 14.
The Contractor has to verify that the structure has a proper stiffness: the main vibration period of the structure
shall be lower than 1.0 s. The period shall be evaluated by FEM model. The numerical model shall not take
in consideration the rigidity of the module, but only its mass.
In case the above ground columns are connected to the embedded piles/screws or to the transversal beam
using a hinge connection, a horizontal beam shall be used to connect the two columns:
Figure 13 – Typical transversal section
Figure 14 – Typical transversal section with intermediate beams

CODICE – CODE

125 of 287
The horizontal beam may be avoided in case of concrete foundations.
Figure 15 – Typical transversal section on concrete raft
The distance between the module and the ground shall be at least 50 cm (1.7ft); additional value will be
required based on local snow load expectations (see Figure below).
Figure 16 – Distance between the module and the ground
Mono-pile structures connected to an embedded mono-pile or screw are acceptable if the displacements
measured in correspondence of the pile head respect the displacement limits measured during the pile load
tests. Environmental conditions shall properly assess the suitability of the site and ensure that soil erosion,
frosting-defrosting cycles and any other phenomenon that affect the superficial soil characteristics will not
occur during the full service life of the plant. The Contractor is responsible to take into account all the
information available.
Figure 17 – Typical transversal section for mono-pile structures

CODICE – CODE

126 of 287
1.2.5. CABLES
Code Description
DIN 50563-2-1 Sheath: Cross-linked EVA rubber 120C (EM4/EM8)
DIN EN 50305-9 Multiple Cable Flame Test
EN 50305 Low Toxicity
EN 50618:2014 Solar Cable certification
HD 605 S2 par 2.4.20 UV resistance
HD 620
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables
IEC 60228 (VDE 0295) Conductor: Electrolytic Tinned Copper
IEC 60332-1-5 Single Flame Cable Test
IEC 60502-1 Power Cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
Determination of hardness of HEPR insulations test - Annex
IEC 60502-2
E
IEC 60754-1 Halogen Free
IEC 60754-2 Non-Corrosive
IEC 60811
Water Absorption test on insulation (9.1 or 9.2, considering
IEC 60811-1-3
the conditions in table 16 or 17
IEC 61034 Low Smoke Emission
TÜV 2Pfg 1169/08.2007 Solar Cable certification
1.2.5.1. POWER MV
This paragraph covers the supply and installation of the following MV cables:
 Between the PCUs,
 Between the PCUs and the main MV Panel,
 Between the main MV Panel and the Point of Connection (in case of MV connection),
 Between MV/LV power transformers and MV panels of PCUs.
1.2.5.1.1. AC Cable
All MV cables shall be designed and manufactured according to the figure below: conductor, inner semi-
conductor, insulation, outer semi-conductor, water blocking element, metallic screen and outer sheat.
CODICE – CODE

127 of 287
In particular MV cables shall be Type II: Single insulated cable of aluminum conductor with cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE) reduced thickness insulation, aluminum tape screen and polyolefin sheath DMZ1.
The cables can be single core (up to 630 mm 2) or triplex (up to 300 mm 2) or three core (up to 300 mm 2) type
in order to allow an optimization of the technical and economical solutions.
The cable screen can be also copper binder tape with copper wires screen.
Voltage level
Voltage type
Uo/U (Umax) [kV]
A 8.7/15 (17.5)
B 12/20 (24)
C 15/25 (30)
D 18/30 (36)
E (Latin America) 20/35 (42)
F 26/45 (52)
Design and Manufacture

Conductor: Stranded compacted circular, class 2 (reference IEC 60228), and
manufactured of aluminum wires (AAC-1350) (GSC001 section 5.1)
Inner semi-conductive screen: Extruded thermosetting semi-conducting screen bonded over the conductor,
without causing damage to conductor or insulation. (GSC001 section 5.2)
Insulation: Cross-Linked PolyEthylene (XLPE) satisfying characteristics specified in
IEC 60502-2. The insulation shall allow the following maximum conductor
temperatures: 90°C in normal operation and 250°C in short-circuit for at least
5 seconds. (GSC001 section 5.3)
Outer semi-conductive screen: Over the insulation screen shall be laid a thermosetting semi-conducting
screen manufactured of XLPE, compatible with insulation and temperatures
in normal operation and in short-circuit. (GSC001 section 5.4)
Water blocking element: The water swell material is made using a semi-conductive tape with a
minimum overlap of 10%. The layer shall meet the standard IEC 60502-2
“Water penetration test – Annex F”. (GSC001 section 5.5)
CODICE – CODE

128 of 287
Metallic screen: Aluminum tape screen according to GSC001 section 5.6.2.

Copper binder tape with copper wire screen according to GSC001 section
5.6.1.
Sheath: Polyolefin sheat DMZ1, red color, maximum conductor temperature 90°C in
normal operation and 250°C in short-circuit for at least 5 seconds.
Mechanical self-protection: In case of adoption of mechanically self-protected cables, polymeric
material, according to standard HD 620 (metallic armored cables not
allowed).
Marking: The marking shall be indelible paint, easily readable and carried out by
engraving or in relief on the outer sheath in a continuously way. The marking
shall indicate: manufacturer, identification mark, rated voltage, cross-
section, year of production, site of production.
1.2.5.1.2. Associated Equipment
1.2.5.1.2.1. Terminal
MV cables terminals can be modular type or separable connector type, according to following Standards:
 ANSI/IEEE 48
 HD 629-1
 IEC 60502-4
1.2.5.1.2.2. Cable Joint
MV connections shall be mechanical shear bolt connectors type. The shear bolt connectors shall be in
compliance with the following regulations and specifications:
 CENELEC HD 629-1
 IEC 61238-1
 IEC 60721-2-1
 ANSI C119.4-2004;
 ANSI Class 2 (40% RBS);
 Dual-Rated (AL/CU);
 Current Cycle Test - Class A @ 284 °F (140 °C) Conductor;
 Mechanical Pullout Test -Class 2;
 Conducting load cycle, mechanical (tensile) and short-circuit testing in accordance with BS EN
61238.
MV cold shrink joints shall be adopted, in accordance with Enel Global Standard GSC004, IEC 60502-4 and
CENELEC HD 629-1-2. Heat shrink joints are not allowed.
The external protection sheath of the joints shall be of insulating material resistant to possible agents present
in the soil; the use of tapes, paints, enamels or similar materials is not considered sufficient to ensure the
level of protection required. The joints shall be waterproof (IP67) in order to prevent water penetration during
CODICE – CODE

129 of 287
the operation. Furthermore, the joints shall be designed to prevent the longitudinal migration of water along
the cable screens.
1.2.5.2. POWER LV
LV power cables elementary part describes the supply and installation of the following LV cables:
 Solar cables,
 LV DC cables between string boxes and inverters,
 LV AC cables between inverters (string or central) and MV/LV power transformers,
 LV aux power cables.
The colors of single core cable sheaths shall be in accordance with Local Norms and Standards.
Design and Manufacture

Core: Aluminum rigid compact conductor class 2 IEC 60228 or Stranded
flexible annealed bare copper conductor (only for LV aux power
cables)
Insulation: Cross-Linked PolyEthylene (XLPE) or High module Ethylene
Propylene Rubber (HEPR); the insulation shall meet the standard IEC
60502-2 “Determination of hardness of HEPR insulations test – Annex
E”.
The insulation shall allow the following maximum conductor
temperatures: 90°C in normal operation and 250°C in short-circuit for
at least 5 seconds.
Water absorption test on insulation: According to IEC 60811-1-3 9.1 or 9.2, considering the conditions
specified in table 16 or 17.
Sheath: Thermoplastic quality ST2 or Rz, Polyethylene quality ST7, maximum
conductor temperature 90°C in normal operation and 250°C in short-
circuit for at least 5 seconds.
Mechanical protection: In polymeric material, according to standard HD 620.
Marking: The marking shall be indelible paint, easily legible and carried out by
engraving or in relief on the outer sheath in a continuously way. The
marking shall indicate: manufacturer, identification mark, rated
voltage, cross-section, year of production, site of production.
All LV cables described above shall be provided with suitable UV protection, except for the cases in which
the cable is completely buried, or for the cases in which the cable is installed inside a suitably UV protected
HDPE corrugated tube.
1.2.5.2.1. DC Cable
LV DC cables, between String Boxes and Inverters, shall be aluminum conductor, single core or two cores
CODICE – CODE

130 of 287
(up to 400 mm 2) and can be directly buried. Furthermore cable cross-sections shall be in accordance with
string boxes and QPPI input Technical Specifications (number of inputs/outputs and cable sections from the
string box and central inverter manufacturer).
1.2.5.2.2. AC Cable
LV AC cables, between inverters (string or central) and MV/LV power transformers, shall be aluminum or
copper conductor, can be single-core (up to 400mm 2) or three-core (up to 300 mm2) and can be directly
buried.
LV aux power cables shall be in aluminum or copper conductor, single-core, three-core or five-core, and shall
be laid in HDPE corrugated pipes (when installed under-ground).
1.2.5.2.3. Solar Cables
This section gives the technical requirements for the supply and installation of the solar cables for the
connection of the PV strings to any of the equipment below:
 the pre-parallel boxes/connectors
 the string boxes
 the string inverters
The cable type shall be FG21M21 (or similar solar cable).

The solar cables can be single core or two core (up to 6 mm 2). Cable cross-sections shall be in accordance
with string boxes, string inverters, or pre-parallel boxes/connectors Technical Specifications (as requested
by the equipment manufacturer). Colors of sheath of single core cables shall be in accordance with Local
Norms and Standards.
The cables shall meet the following requirements:
 Conductor: Electrolytic tinned copper, Class 5 in accordance with IEC 60228 (VDE 0295);
 Insulation: HEPR 120°C similar to IEC 60502-1 (compound type EI6 / EI8);
 Sheath: Cross-linked EVA rubber 120°C based on DIN 50563-2-1 (compound type EM4 / EM8);
 Rated voltage (Uo/U) 600/1000 V AC;
 Maximum PV-system voltage: DC up to 2000 V;
 Maximum permissible operating voltage in DC system (U0/U): 900/1800 V;
 Ambient temperature: from -40°C up to +90°C for fixed and flexible installation;
 Maximum permissible conductor operating temperature: per IEC 60216, permanent temperature 120
°C for 20.000 h;
 Short-Circuit temperature: 200 °C at the conductor max 5 sec;
 Minimum bending radius: 4xD (D = Overall Cable Diameter);
 Climatic properties: resistance to Cold (Cold Bend Test at -40° C temperature per EN 60811-1-4
Impact Test -40° C temperature similar to EN 50305), resistance to UV (HD 22.2 Test Type B UV-
Resistance per UL 1581 -Xeno-Test-), resistance to Ozone (Ozone resistance per EN 50396);
CODICE – CODE

131 of 287
 Chemical Resistance: Mineral oil, Acid and Alkaline, Ammonia;

 Fire properties: Single Cable Flame Test per IEC 60332-1-2; Multiple Cable Flame Test per DIN EN
50305-9; Halogen free per IEC 60754-1; Non-corrosive as per IEC 60754-2; Low Smoke Emission
per IEC 61034; Low Toxicity per EN 50305.
All solar cables shall be certified according to applicable International and/or Local Standards, and test
reports shall be available for inspection by EGP. The solar cables certified according to the TÜV 2Pfg
1169/08.2007 and/or EN 50618:2014 are approved by EGP.
The Contractor can propose as OPTION solar cables with conductor material in aluminum. In this case proper
connectors shall be adopted (see 1.2.5.2.4.1).
1.2.5.2.4.1. Solar Connectors
The use of DC fast connectors is requested for any solar cable connector.
LV cables connectors body shall be high strength aluminum alloy with tin-plated surface, in case of aluminum
core cables, or copper tin-plated surface material in case of copper core cables. The use of bimetallic (CU/AL)
connectors shall be avoided.
The connectors shall maintain the same protection level (minimum IP65) of the equipment in order to maintain
the overall protection level of the system.
1.2.5.2.4.2. Terminal
Scope
The section covers the low voltage power cables connectors for:
 LV connections on the auxiliary switchboards
 LV AC cables for the tracker power supply
Material
For terminals for input and output lines up to 25 mm 2, the type with spring cord clamping is preferred
 Output conductor connector lug: 15µ tin-plated copper/aluminum
 Output conductor/lug temperature rating: 90C, for continuous duty
 Connector shall be rated for correct service voltage
 Coordinate sizes and types of conductor terminals for LV power cable terminations in equipment
furnished with conductor and terminal connector data.
 The contractor shall guarantee proper matching of aluminum and copper cables to avoid any issues
that may arise due to the different metals.
Installation
 Connect all the terminals considering the complete contact between the pallet of the terminal and
busbar, considering the adequacy of the contact surfaces.
 Care should be taken to check that the press connections used between cable lug and cable are up
to accepted standards
 The connection shall be carried out in accordance with best practices.
CODICE – CODE

132 of 287
Identification
Cable designations shall be visible after installation without requiring physical movement of cable.
Provide conductor identification sleeve on each end of each internal conductor. Mark each sleeve with
opposite end destination identification with non-smudging, permanent black ink. Sleeves shall be UV-
resistant self-adhesive type or PVC, not less than 1/2” long.
1.2.5.2.4.3. Cable Joint
Splices or cable joints are not allowed unless specifically indicated on project Drawings or required for
connection to equipment. In all cases the electrical design shall be optimized to avoid or minimize the number
of splices/joints.
If splices or cable joints shall be used, provide wire and cable connectors of high-conductivity corrosion-
resistant material with contact area equal to at least the current carrying capacity of wire or cable.
1.2.5.3. SIGNAL/DATA CABLE
1.2.5.3.1. Fiber Optic
A. CODE AND NORMATIVES

The last edition of the STDs listed in this chapter shall to be considered as integral part of this CTS. Each
prescription of interest contained shall be respected.
All regulatory standards or Local decree not expressly indicated in this list but in force at the time of the
tender, shall be considered as applicable.
Even if not explicitly mentioned, it shall be respected every applicable rule and law with particular reference
to the Safety regulations. The rules shall be applied to the respective types of cables.
In case of disagreement between the requirements of reference standard mentioned here after and the local
national STDs, these last ones shall be applied.
Code Description
ISO11801 “Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises”
EN 50173-1 “Information technology - Generic cabling systems” Part 1: General requirements
IEC 60794-1 “Optical fibre cables - Part 1-: Generic specification”
IEC 60793-1 “Optical fibre cables - Measurement methods and test procedures”
IEC 60304 “Optical fibre cables – Fiber colour code”

“Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Test for vertical flame
IEC 60332-1-2 propagation for a single insulated wire or cable - Procedure for 1 kW pre-mixed flame
EN 60332-3-22 (IDT “Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions - Test for vertical flame
IEC 60332-3-22) spread of vertically-mounted bunched wires or cables - Category A”
EN 60332-3-24 (IDT “Test on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions – Test for vertical flame
IEC 60332-3-24) spread of vertically –mounted bunched wires or cables – Category C”
“Common test methods for cables under fire conditions – Tests on gases evolved during
EN 50267-1 combustion of materials from cables Part 1: Apparatus
“Common test methods for cables under fire conditions – Test on gases evolved during
EN 50267-2-2 combustion of material from cables – Part 2-2: Procedures Determination of degree of
acidity of gases for material by measuring ph and conductivity
CODICE – CODE

133 of 287
Code Description
“Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables - Part 1:
IEC 60754-1 Determination of the halogen acid gas content”
“Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables - Part 2:
IEC 60754-2 Determination of acidity (by pH measurement) and conductivity”
EN 61034-1 (IDT IEC “Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined conditions Part 1: Test
61034-1) apparatus”
EN 61034-2 (IDT IEC “Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined conditions Part 2: Test
61034-2) procedure and requirement”
“Insulating and sheathing materials of electric and optical cables: Part 1: General
EN 60811-1-3 (IDT application – Section 3: Methods for determining the density – Water absorption test –
IEC 60811-1-3)
Shrinkage test.”
“Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of electric and optical
EN 60811-2-1 (IDT cables: Part 2-1: Method specific to elastomeric compounds – Ozone resistance, hot set
IEC 60811-2-1)
and mineral oil immersion test.”
“Insulating, sheathing, and covering materials for low-voltage energy cables Part 0:
EN 50363-0 General introduction”
305/2011/UE Construction Products Regulation (CPR)
Directive 2011/65/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 8 June 2011 on
2011/65/UE the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment.
Directive 2006/95/CE of the European parliament and of the Council of 12 December
2006/95/CE 2006 on the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment
designed for use within certain voltage limits (Low voltage)
B. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
Optical fibers
Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical,
mechanical, and environmental requirements of this technical specification and applicable STDs.
Optical fibers shall consist of doped high-grade silica core/high grade silica cladding. A bonded hard polymer
cladding material will be accepted too.
The refractive index of the core shall have graded or step profile as will be specified by the data sheet.
Primary coating shall be by UV cured acrylate.
Fiber secondary coating

Secondary coating shall be either tight or loose technique, as will be specified by the data sheet.
The loose tube containing fibers shall be made of high modulus plastic.
One to four differently colored fibers can be accommodated in a loose tube.
A suitable compound capable to ensure low stress levels on the fibers shall be filled in the tube to prevent
water ingress and protect against temperature changes.
Each buffer tube shall contain up to 12 fibers for 48-fiber FO cable.
24-fiber FO cable will be also one buffer tube for outdoor installation (underground mainly).
Stranding
The jacketed optical fibers shall be stranded around a central member together with all necessary non-
CODICE – CODE

134 of 287
hygroscopic filling elements in order to form a compact and circular cable core.
The strength member shall be a stainless steel wire or dielectric extruded rod, as will be specified by the data
sheet. The core shall be wrapped by tapes of polyester or non-hygroscopic material.
Core filling
The interstices among elements of the cable core shall be filled with a moisture resistant filling compound to
prevent axial and longitudinal flow of water throughout the cable.
The filling compound shall not have any harmful effects upon other materials of the cable and shall not
change the colors of tubes and fibers.
The filling compound shall be free from dirt, metal particles and other foreign matters.
It shall have the following properties:
 drop point: ≥ 80 °C;
 flash point: ≥ 230 °C;
 no separation of its constituents.
Moisture Barrier
If specified by the data sheet, the cable core shall be wrapped and protected by a moisture barrier sheath
consisting of:
 an aluminum tape 0,15 mm thick coated with a polymer film, applied longitudinally with overlap
as per reference standards;
 a black polyethylene sheath extruded over the aluminum tape so as to adhere to its polymer film.
Water swell able yarns

If specified by the data sheet, it shall be included in the cable construction and placed in the interstices of the
core to provide water-blocking capability for the cable core.
Lead sheath
If specified by the data sheet, the core of the cable shall be closed in a lead alloy tube. The tube shall have
uniform diameter and thickness along the whole length of the cable and shall be free of any defect.
The thickness of the lead tube shall correspond to the provisions indicated in the reference standards.
Inner sheath
If specified by the data sheet, a thermoplastic material inner sheath, mainly consisting of PE or PVC, it shall
be extruded on the cable core.
Armouring
If specified by the data sheet, the cables shall have the specified armouring for mechanical and anti-rodent
protection consisting of:
 two overlapped steel tapes, helically wound, or
CODICE – CODE

135 of 287
 corrugated steel tape, or

 galvanized steel wires or straps, arranged on a single layer, or
 braid of galvanized steel wires, or
 several layers of glass/aramidic yarns
The galvanizing of the wires and straps shall be of pure zinc. Armouring components shall have smooth
surface and thickness in accordance with the reference standards.
Ripcord
The cable shall contain at least one ripcord under the inner sheath to allow an easy sheath removal.
Outer sheath
In general the following criteria has adopted and specified by the data sheet
Outdoor installation
HDPE (High Density Poly Ethylene) or PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) and UV resistant jacket has provided
Indoor installation
Non-flammable, LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) and UV resistant jacket has provided.
The hydrocarbon resistant sheath will be used where a frequent and long contact of the cables with solvents
is envisaged. The external sheath colour will be specified by the data sheet.
Reaction to fire and additional classification level for outdoor installation

Based on EN 50575 STD (CPR classification), cables as minimum requirement will have the following class
of reaction to fire and additional classification (smoke opacity; fall of drops; smoke acidity):
No Performance Determined (NPD)
Reaction to fire and additional classification level for indoor installation

Cca - s1b, d1, a1.
Identification of cable elements

The identification of the elements of the cable and the optical fibers shall be based on colour coding according
to the reference STDs.
Cable identification
Marking codes shall be applied throughout the length of the cable by embossing the outer sheath at intervals
of not more than one metres complete with:
 The Commodity code
 the words “FIBRE OPTIC CABLE”
 cable designation code
 fibre type
CODICE – CODE

136 of 287
 Class of reaction to fire

 Manufacturer's name
 date of manufacture
 sequential length brand.
C. REFERENCE LENGTH AND PACKAGING

Length
The minimum cable length, for each drum, shall be defined according to external diameter of the required
cables. In the bid, the Supplier shall indicate, for each ordered cable type and relevant cross section, the
drums type and the minimum allowed length (cut out length).
The cut out lengths shall be considered as minimum values to be guaranteed by Supplier during the supply
contract validity.
Packaging
The cables shall be supplied wound on appropriate drums for packaging that allow the proper transportation
and protection against the elements. Cable drums shall be made of timber pressure impregnated against
fungal and insect attack. They shall be lagged with closely fitting battens.
The supplier shall consider in the quotation and clearly states in the offer documentation the returnable or
not returnable cable drums.
In particular, the free ends shall be protected against moisture.
Each drum will have to be provided in accordance with IEC nameplate.
On the cable drums shall be engraved in English and in the language of installation Country the followings:
 Commodity code
 Name of Manufacturer
 Drum number
 Cable identification code
 Length of cable
 Gross and net weight
 Identification number (Part Number)
 Purchase order number
 Handling instruction
 Shipping instruction
 Direction of cable pulling.
D. MANUFACTURING TEST
Factory tests shall verify that the material supplied complies with the prescriptions mentioned in this
specification.
The Supplier shall certify that the Fiber Optical cables have been provided tested in accordance to the
corresponding standards IEC 60793 and IEC 60794.
The Supplier shall include in the bid the list of the acceptance tests, and the relevant reference standards,
CODICE – CODE

137 of 287
that will carry out on the cables. Enel reserves the right to attend, upon explicit request, to the testing of one
or more lots of cables at the Supplier site, in which case the Supplier shall be required to alert Enel with an
advance of at least 15 days before the testing date.
 Type tests certifications needed for cables homologation per type of cable shall be delivered to
EGP.
 Routine tests over the 100% of the cables (drums).
 Sample tests shall be based on an amount of at least ten (10) percent of the cables (drums).
 The Supplier shall attach to each lot a certificate stating:
 The responsiveness of supply to IEC standards
 The results of individual tests with the indication of the measured values.
 The following table provides main non-electric tests to perform on the cables.
REFERENCE REFERENCE VALUE FOR

CHARACTERISTICS NOTES
STANDARDS TEST RESULT
EN 60811-1-3 Maximum increase of mass: With gravimetric
Test
(Art. 9.1 – 5 mg/cm2 for HEPR insulating method
Water resistance method 9.2) compounds
(Insulation) Test IEC 60502-1 1 mg/cm2 for XLPE insulating
(Tab.17)
result compounds
Test EN 60811-2-1 Maximum tensil strength: ±30%
method (Art.10) Maximum elongationat break :
Oil resistance
EN 50363 -0 ± 30%
(Sheath) Test
(Table 4.2)
result
Test HD 605.S2 The maximum variation of (**) To be agreed
Solar radiation – UV method mechanical oversheat will be with manufacturer.
resistance CEI 20-13 allowed : ± 30%
(Sheath) Test
(Appendix E
result Point 27) (**)
Test EN 60811-2-1 The ozone concentration (by The test is only
method (Art.3) volume) (test duration without performed on
Ozone resistance
IEC 60502-1 cracks h 24) must be between insulation HEPR
(insulation) Test
(Tab. 17) 0.025 ÷ 0.030 % type.
result
EN 60332-3- The maximum extent of the
Test 24 (For charred portion measured on
method Category “C” the sample shall not have
Fire propagation cables) reached a height exceeding
Test EN 60332-3- 2.5m above the bottom edge of
result 24 the nurner.
(See Attachment B)
Test EN 50267-2- pH value shall be pH≥ 4.3
method 2 referred to 1l (one liter) of
water (for cabling having outer
sheat M1 Type) (Art. 6 EN
Corrosive gas
50267-2-2 STD)
emission Test
EN 50267-2-2 The value of conductivity shall
result be ≤10µS/mm referred to 1l
(one liter) of water (Art 6 EN
50267-2-2 STD)
CODICE – CODE

138 of 287

Test EN 61034-1 Value of 60% cable light
method EN 61034-2 transmittance (with distance of
Smoke emission 3000mm) is adopted as a
Test EN 61034-2 minimum for any cable tested -
result EN 61034-2 (Attachment B)
CEI 20-37/4- Limit value pescribed is 2 (two) ITALIAN
Test
0 (Weighted average calculated NATIONAL STD
method
using value of each component)
Development of toxix CEI 20-13 Point 4.1.0.7 –C-) CEI 20-13
gases Test STD
result CEI 20-38/1 Tab.1, Column 5,
Ref. number 12.
Non Electrical Tests
1.2.5.3.2. Copper Cable
A. INSTRUMENTATION CABLES
Rated voltages and frequencies
Rated voltage shall be 300 V (maximum conductor size 1 mm2; minimum insulation thickness 0,26 mm) in
compliance with Table 1 of EN 50288-7 STD.
General characteristics
I&C cables must be designed to operate correctly at least 75 ° C in wet and 90 ° C dry and continuously
under environmental conditions between -9ºC / + 43ºC and up to 100% relative humidity. The teams must
support these conditions during the transport and storage phases. The supplier must indicate the temperature
and humidity limit values at which the I&C cables maintain their qualities and guarantees.
Cables must be prepared to withstand process conditions and conditions of work to which they will be subject
in their respective applications.
The cables will also be resistant to ultraviolet radiation and prepared for outdoor installation.
 Instrumentation cables: twisted pairs with individual screen will be used.
 Multicables for signal grouping: multi-cables formed by the association of 2,4, 6, 8, 12 or 24
twisted pairs with individual screen and overall screen.
 Extension cables and thermocouple compensation: they have to be considered extension cable
materials which coincide with that of the thermocouple
With reference to Par. 4.2 of EN 50288-7 and EN 50290-2-29 STD’s the type of insulating compound required
is “Cross-linked polyethylene” (XLPE).
Sheathing compound shall be thermoplastic “flame retardant”, “low smoke”, “Halogen free” (LSZH), as
defined by EN 50290-2-26 STD.
Instrumentation cables shall be “Category C” type in compliance with EN 60332-3-24 STD.
Insulation material shall be extruded dielectric as above chosen.
The minimum thickness at any point of the insulation shall not be less than the value given in
Table “1” of EN 50288-5 STD (Par. 4.2).
CODICE – CODE

139 of 287
Cores identification: The colour required for the identification of instrumentation cables are the following:
 Pair: Blue – Black
 Identification of pairs: by means of sequential number
All cable, as required by the harmonized standard EN 50575, shall have an indelibly code continually printed
on their oversheat. (Metric marking)
This code will ensure to establish the main information and characteristics about the cable.
All cables must be obligatorily marked with the following information:
 Facility location
 Manufacturer name
 Identification code (cable code)
 Class of reaction to fire
 Conductor number and size
Furthermore, the following elements may be present (optional):
 Lot number / Production year
 Main technical STD
 Rated voltage
In accordance with CEI UNEL 35011 or HD 361.S3 STDs (for cables harmonized by CENELEC).
Instrumentation cables shall be resistant to the following agents:
 water (occasional immersion)
 oils (mineral)
 solar radiation (UV)
 ozone
in compliance with reference standards as indicated in the following table “Non Electrical Test”.
Conductors
Conductors shall consist of plain annealed copper wires flexible, Class 5 in compliance with EN 60228 STD.
In particular conductor shall be in stranded untinned annealed copper (Cu ETP 99,9%) cross section 0,5 or
1 sqmm according to the requirements for each application.
The conductors shall be uniformly twisted to the right-handed in pairs.
Individual and overall screen

Individual Screen and Overall Screen: The individual screen on each pair and overall screen is normally
formed by an aluminum tape bonded to a polyester tape helically or longitudinally wound over the conductors
with an overlap of approx. 25% in order to assure a total coverage during bending. The thickness of the tapes
are established by the technical norm of reference.
In contact with the metallic part is applied a tinned copper drain wire. Other tapes of polyester or other material
can be used as screening components.
CODICE – CODE

140 of 287
Metallic armouring
The reinforcement of the cables will be done through an armor and will be included for those cables that are
directly buried or in IECEx zone.
The metallic armouring (if required) for mechanical protection of cables is formed by galvanised steel wires,
applied by braiding or in single layer, tapes or strips of galvanised steel.
The armouring is also a good rodent protection.
Internal sheat
An internal sheath is applied when instrumentation cables are armoured, over the grouped pairs or over the
overall screen.
Oversheat
The oversheath shall be Green colour and it shall consist of a thermoplastic compound, nontoxic material,
“flame retardant”, “Halogen free”, “low smoke emission”, (LSZH); 90°C maximum conductor temperature, as
defined to EN 50290-2-26.
According to Italian STDs (Ref. CEI EN 50363-0/Attachment “B” – table 4.2 applicable only in
Italy country) the oversheat is identified by type “M1”.
Reaction to fire and additional classification level

Cca - s1b, d1, a1.
B. THERMOCOUPLE CABLES
General characteristics
Thermocouple cables shall be in accordance to EN 60584-3 STD or ANSI MC 96.1.
The cable of extension and compensating for thermocouple shall be screened with flame retardant material
as per IEC-60332-3.
Thermocouple cables shall be “Category C” type in compliance with EN 60332-3-24 STD.
Type of conductors
Solid conductor diameter 1sqmm (For 1 or 2 pairs) and 0.8 sqmm (for 3 Pairs and over) in accordance to EN
60584-3 STD or ANSI MC 96.1.
Identification of conductors as per EN 60584-3 STD:
Each pair of conductor shall be identified with printed number as per following example:
gr1-wh1; gr2-wh2; gr3-wh3; etc. for KX thermocouple
blk1-wh1; blk2-wh2; blk3-wh3; etc. for JX thermocouple
violet1-wh1; violet2-wh2; violet3-wh3; etc. for EX thermocouple
CODICE – CODE

141 of 287
Type of thermocouple
First character in according to EN 60584-1 (Chapter 3): Thermocouple type letter designations
(Example: K = Nickel-Chromium/nickel-Aluminium)
Second Character is to identify extension or compensating cable:
Extension cable: are manufactured from conductors having the same nominal composition as those of the
corresponding thermocouple; they are designated by the letter “X” following the designation of thermocouple
(Ex. “KX”) (See EN 60584-3 STD point 2.1)
Type KX + Chromel (Ni-Cr)
- Alumel (Ni-Al)
Type JX + Iron (Fe)
- Constantan (Cu-Ni)
Type EX + Chromel (Ni-Cr)
- Constantan (Cu-Ni)
Compensating cable: are manufactured from conductors having a composition different from the
corresponding thermocouple. They are designated by a letter “C” following the designation of the
thermocouple, for example “KC”. Different alloys may be used for the same thermocouple type, they are
distinguished by additional letters such as, for example, KCA and KCB.
Colour of insulation conductors:
Positive conductor (+): See table of EN 60584-3 STD or ANSI MC 96.1
Negative conductor (-): White colour (See EN 60584-3 STD)
Examples of identification of cables as per EN 60584-3 STD

 EN KX (1x2x1sqmm)-80 (for normal temperature up to 80°C)
 EN KX (1x2x1sqmm)-200 (for high temperature up to 200°C)
 EN JX (1x2x1sqmm)-80 (for normal temperature up to 80°C)
 IEC JX (1x2x1sqmm)-200 (for high temperature up to 200°C)
 EN EX (1x2x1sqmm)-80 (for normal temperature up to 80°C)
 EN EX (1x2x1sqmm)-200 (for high temperature up to 200°C)
Individual and overall screen

Aluminium/polyester tape, with stranded tinned copper drain wire
Insulating
 Cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) (for normally temperature)
 Special silicon rubber compound (for high temperature)
Twisting
The insulated cores shall be twisted for a good reduction of the electromagnetic noise.
CODICE – CODE

142 of 287
Lenght of twist; 50mm
Oversheat
The oversheath colour shall be in compliance with EN 60584-3 or ANSI MC 96.1 and it shall consist of
nontoxic material, “flame retardant”, “Halogen free”, “low smoke emission”, (LSZH), as definied to EN 50290-
2-26 STD. According to Italian STDs (Ref. CEI EN 50363-0/Attachment “B” – table 4.2 applicable only in Italy
country) the oversheat is identified by type “M1”.
Reaction to fire and additional classification level

Cca - s1b, d1, a1.
C. TESTS FOR INSTRUMENTATION CABLES AND THERMOCOUPLE CABLES

Supplier shall provide cables certified by the relevant type test reports.
Tests to be taken into account are the following:
Type Test, Electrical
Shall be applied the following STD: EN 50288-7
 Electrical Test Method:
 Electrical Test Result:
Type Test, Non Electrical:

Shall be applied Table shown hereinafter.

EN 60811-1-3 Maximum increase of mass: With gravimetric
Test
(Art. 9.1 – 5 mg/cm2 for HEPR insulating method
Water resistance method 9.2) compounds
(Insulation) IEC 60502-1 1 mg/cm2 for XLPE insulating
Test
(Tab.17)
result compounds
Test EN 60811-2-1 Maximum tensil strength: ±30%
method (Art.10) Maximum elongationat break :
Oil resistance
EN 50363 -0 ± 30%
(Sheath) Test
(Table 4.2)
result
Test HD 605.S2 The maximum variation of (**) To be agreed
Solar radiation – UV method mechanical oversheat will be with manufacturer.
resistance CEI 20-13 allowed : ± 30%
(Sheath) Test
(Appendix E
result Point 27) (**)
CODICE – CODE

143 of 287

Test EN 60811-2-1 The ozone concentration (by The test is only
method (Art.3) volume) (test duration without performed on
Ozone resistance
IEC 60502-1 cracks h 24) must be between insulation HEPR
(insulation) Test
(Tab. 17) 0.025 ÷ 0.030 % type.
result
EN 60332-3- The maximum extent of the
Test 24 (For charred portion measured on
method Category “C” the sample shall not have
cables)
Fire propagation reached a height exceeding
Test EN 60332-3- 2.5m above the bottom edge of
result 24 the nurner.
(See Attachment B)
Test EN 50267-2- pH value shall be pH≥ 4.3
method 2 referred to 1l (one liter) of
water (for cabling having outer
sheat M1 Type) (Art. 6 EN
Corrosive gas
50267-2-2 STD)
emission Test
EN 50267-2-2 The value of conductivity shall
result be ≤10µS/mm referred to 1l
(one liter) of water (Art 6 EN
50267-2-2 STD)
Test EN 61034-1 Value of 60% cable light
method EN 61034-2 transmittance (with distance of
Smoke emission 3000mm) is adopted as a
Test EN 61034-2 minimum for any cable tested -
result EN 61034-2 (Attachment B)
CEI 20-37/4- Limit value pescribed is 2 (two) ITALIAN
Test
0 (Weighted average calculated NATIONAL STD
method
using value of each component)
Development of toxix CEI 20-13 Point 4.1.0.7 –C-) CEI 20-13
gases Test STD
result CEI 20-38/1 Tab.1, Column 5,
Ref. number 12.
Non Electrical Tests
D. COMMUNICATION CABLES
The application of the communication cables will be:
 Ethernet
 RS-485
D1. ETHERNET
The conductor material should be soft copper or annealed in flexible construction.
The maximum length of laying will be 100 m. Pair of lengths exceeding 100 m a converter to optical fiber will
be placed and the laying with fiber optic cable will be carried out.
The isolation and covering conditions of the TCP/IP Ethernet cables must be in accordance with those
specified for instrumentation cables.
The cables will be specified FTE Cat 5e/Cat6.
D2. RS-485
CODICE – CODE

144 of 287
A specific cable will be used when the communication protocol between devices is Modbus RTU/RS-485. It
will have 3 white, blue and orange threads.
The conductor material must be made of soft copper or annealed in flexible construction.
The insulation and cover conditions of the RS-485 cables must be in accordance with the specified for
instrumentation cables.
The screen will be helical polyester tape with aluminum coating in one of its sides in continuous contact with
a tinned wire with a diameter of 22 AWG.
The supplied communication cables will comply with the regulations established for this type of cable. In the
same way they will have the appropriate properties according to whether they are for indoor or outdoor
installation and if they are installed in trays, ducts or buried directly.
D3. POWER LINE COMMUNICATION

Also Power Line Communications (PLC) technological solution can be used.
PLC technology reuse existing infrastructures (i.e. power lines) whose primary purpose is the delivery of AC
(50 Hz or 60 Hz) or DC electric power, for the purpose of data communications. Hence, compared to the
electric power ‘signal’, PLC uses high frequency signals with frequency components starting from a few
hundred Hz up to a few hundred MHz. The plurality of frequency bands used for PLC is related to different
applications supported by PLC and their data-rate requirements, the specifics of grid topologies over which
PLC is applied, as well as the ability of PLC technology to deal with the harsh communication environment.
1.2.5.3.3.1. Ethernet Switches
The switches shall be of an industrial Layer 2 type, 19-Port Modular Managed Ethernet Switches with up to
3-gigabit Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber and up to 16-fast Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber Gigabit
Uplink Ports, 128-bit Encryption; for the interconnections between its inner devices (RTU, SCADA Servers,
etc.) and the remainder of the process networks of the Wind/Photovoltaic Plant. These devices must be utility
grade, fully managed and modular, specifically designed to operate reliably in electrically harsh and
climatically demanding utility substations. The final configuration of ports (speed and physical media) will be
defined project-by-project during the definitions stage of them. The switches shall have redundant power
supplies and a malfunction signal contact sent to the RTU, as a digital input transferring information to the
EGP RCC/LCR.
As general rule 88 ... 300 Vdc power supply voltage is required. If the available voltage on site is different
from this range, the most appropriate power supply for switches shall be provided and guaranteed.
In case of specific and additional request from EGP, industrial Layer 3 type Ethernet switches could be
needed.
A dedicated communication port for diagnostics and switch configuration from the Engineering Workstation
shall be provided. The configuration and diagnostics software, as well as the connection cable must be
supplied with the device. Any “virtualization”, when applicable, of the local network with IP addresses
provided by EGP later on, must be comprised in the purpose of procurement for the supplier.
CODICE – CODE

145 of 287
In the following table the minimum requirements to be fulfilled:
Item Description
Compliancy to substation automation specifications, including IEC61850-3 and IEEE1613
16 Port 10/100/BaseT(X) or 100BaseFX (Multi-mode ST/SC/MTRJ/LC
Connector). Auto negotiation speed.
Ethernet Ports
3 Gigabit Uplink ports 1000BASE-X or 1000BASE-T
1 RJ45 port operator console.
Supply voltage Redundant power supplies, rated value: 88 ... 300 Vdc
during operation: - 40 °C ÷ +85 °C
Storage Temperature - 40 °C ÷ +85 °C (-40 to 185°F)
Ambient conditions Relative Humidity 5%-95%
Fanless operation
Protection class IP IP40
19" rack
Mounting 35 mm DIN rail mounting
Wall mounting
Management,
CLI, web-based management, MIB support, RMON
configuration
VLAN port based Yes
Number of VLANs / maximum 255
VLAN
VLAN-Identification number 1…4094
Protocol / is supported / GVRP Yes
Priority Queues 4
Switch properties IGMP Groups 256
Non-blocking, store and forward switching
Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, TFTP, SFTP, IGMPv1/v2, SNMP (v1, v2, v2c, v3),
Protocols
SNTP, RMON, Syslog, SS
Network Redundancy STP, RSTP, MSTP
IEEE 802.1x (radius), SSL (128 bits), SSH
Port security to secure the access to an access or 802.1q trunk port
Security
based on MAC address
Port-based ACLs for Layer 2 interfaces
Time Synchronization SNTP Client / SNTP Server
MAC address notification
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Others
Dynamic ARP inspection
Embedded Event Manager (EEM)
IEEE 802.3 for 10BaseT
IEEE 802.3u for 100BaseT(X) and 100BaseFX
IEEE 802.3ab for 1000BaseT(X)
Standards IEEE 802.3z for 1000BaseX
IEEE 802.3x for Flow Control
IEEE 802.1d-2004 for Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1w for Rapid STP
CODICE – CODE

146 of 287
Item Description
IEEE 802.1s for Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1Q for VLAN Tagging
IEEE 802.1Q-2005 (formerly IEEE 802.1s) MSTP
IEEE 802.1p for Class of Service
IEEE 802.1X for Authentication
IEEE 802.3ad for Port Trunk with LACP
The supplier must include Ethernet switches featuring the capability for the WPCMS to be connected to the
substation Ethernet network based on PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) technology.
PRP technology must be provided as integrated in the RTU without using external devices (e.g. RedBoxes).
Switched Ethernet technology (IEEE 802.3) shall be used.

Different Virtual LANs (VLAN) shall be realized based on network switches in the Electrical Substation and
in the Conversion Cabins.
The switches shall be compatible with the Optic Fiber characteristic and configuration of the PV plant (mono
or multi-mode type, numbers of ports, etc…).
The VLAN application is to share the same overall physical network structure of the local network linked to
the need to apply different security/access policies, or a different communication “pipe,” to the traffic
workgroup or conversion cabin or Contractors.
The automation and control applications shall have network traffic at Process Network level using multicast
packets (one sender, many receivers). The network shall be realized with determinism and real-time network
as main requirements —quick and consistent network transmission of the data.
Network switches shall be “managed” type.
Network switches shall permit VLANs, traffic segregation, prioritization, frame latencies minimization, frame
collision reduction and switch throughput increase.
Network switches used to create LANs shall have as minimum the following features:
 Redundant Power Supply (mandatory for the main switch in the Substation). Each power supply of
the main switch must be UPS backed according to UPS requirements.
 The Ethernet switches in the conversion cabin shall have a UPS backed power supply
 Full duplex type with 100Mbps or above port speed (Industrial Ethernet Solution)
 Port-based Virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q standard
 Monitoring of loss of link management
 IEEE 802.1x, HTTPS protocol or similar communication protocol for network security purpose
 Remote monitoring, port mirroring and diagnostic
 IGMP snooping and multicast filtering
 Priority queues based on IEEE 802.1p standard to increase determinism
 Quality of Service facility to manage frame delay, delay variation (jitter), bandwidth and packet loss
parameters
 Electromagnetic Immunity
CODICE – CODE

147 of 287
 Fiber Optic port interfaces

 CE marking
Operating environment in terms of humidity and temperature is to be considered by Contractor for proper
functionality of network switch. For network switch’s selection as general environment condition can be
considered:
Temperature range - 40 °C ÷ +75 °C and Relative Humidity 5%÷95%.
If necessary for network switches configuration and set-up, Laptop PC, accessories, License and Software
of network switch will be included in the supply.
Network switches shall fulfill the following Cyber Security requirements:

 compliancy to substation automation specifications, including IEC61850 and IEEE1613
 IEEE 802.1x with VLAN assignment, guest VLAN allows dynamic port-based security, providing user
authentication
 HTTPS, Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol v2 , SNMP v2 and SNMP v3 for switch administration and
management
 TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication
 MAC address notification
 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping
 DHCP Interface Tracker (Option 82
 Port security to secure the access or 802.1q trunk port based on MAC address
 Dynamic ARP Inspection
 Embedded Event Manager (EEM)
 Port-based ACLs for Layer 2 interfaces
1.2.5.3.3.2. Opto-electronic converters
On client demand, Opto/electronic converters and relevant accessories shall be provided. The following must
be quoted separately:
 Opto/electronic Converter: single mode - Ethernet
 Opto/electronic Converter: multimode - Ethernet
 Opto/electronic Converter: single mode – RS232/RS485
 Opto/electronic Converter: multimode - RS232/RS485
1.2.5.3.3.3. Fiber Connectors
 Low coupling losses: The connector assembly must maintain stringent alignment tolerances to
assure low mating losses.
 Interchangeability.
 Ease of assembly.
CODICE – CODE

148 of 287
 Low environment sensitivity.

 Low cost and reliable construction.
 High strength.
 Ease of connection.
1.2.6. AUXILIARY SCADA
Auxiliary SCADA is any supervisory control and data acquisition system aimed to monitor and control specific
subsystems belonging to the PV Park, such us Tracker SCADA and Inverter SCADA.
The equipment supplied shall be designed and realized to fully comply with the basic architecture required
into in Attachment “PV SCADA Network Architecture”.
Each subsystem must be provided with its own Ethernet switches so each subsystem communicates with
their centralized servers through a dedicated and physically separated network (ref. to the different FO rings
as shown into Attachment “PV SCADA Network Architecture”. The only shared Ethernet device is the FO
Header located in each Cabin Unit, provided by the Conversion Cabin Contractor and sized according to the
FO strands required by the Trackers and CCTV Contractors respectively.
The whole SCADA system will be based on a Client-Server architecture. All equipment acting as a Server
shall communicate through Client-Server protocol to give a response to more than one Client at the same
time and also ask to acquire local data. Each Client’s instance is directly in connection with the Server’s
software application.
The SCADA system architecture shall be designed to minimize unavailability and failures of the whole control
system caused by single component faults in conjunction with hardware segregation of the related
components.
Servers shall have the capability to communicate at the same time with all the clients interested in acquiring
the local data. Basically, the Server offers services to multiple Clients at the same time, without requiring
each client to wait for previous clients to finish. Each Server application must support the communication
with at least three different Client’s instances. This means that each Client-Server protocol is able to
communicate simultaneously with a minimum of two different clients.
Server machine shall be designed to realize the service for the Client on the network. The Server shall
manage the entire plant database and provide data updating, data integrity checks, etc.
Supplier shall guarantee continuous plant operation including during any maintenance activities relevant to
software upgrading/patching performed on any of the SCADA equipment in its scope of supply.
The Client-Server model for dynamic data collects and forwards data frequently based on the master poll
rate, or by exception. The data include protection data, metering data, automation data, control data and
supervisory data. Moreover the Client-Server model collects and archives historical data from several
devices including system profile, sequence report, sequence event recorder reports, and power quality
reports providing a clear picture of system performance.
CODICE – CODE

149 of 287
Authentication, authorization and data security must be guaranteed by the Server machine when exchanging
data with the Client machine. Controlling access to server resources is to be made identifying “users” entering
a valid “user name” and valid “password” before access is granted. User access shall have limited
authorization for doing certain tasks or activities based upon the user’s profile. Different user profiles shall
be provided for different tasks and activities that can be performed on the system.
IP addresses of each machine on the network, and subnet mask addresses, will be assigned by EGP
according to ICT requirements. The Contractor shall configure each machine accordingly and provide, during
the execution phase, based on EGP/ICT dedicated template, a complete Inventory Equipment/ Component
list including a for each component: description, model, vendor, IP address, software, operating system, TCP
ports, etc.
System architecture shall be based on Virtual LANs and on star or ring network topology. The network shall
be realized with multi-core fiber optic cables.
A time synchronization broadcast system shall be utilized to synchronize all equipment clocks from a GPS
reference time value. NTP or IRIG-B protocol can be used for the clock transmission.
Each system platform included into the whole SCADA system architecture (Local SCADA, PPC, tracker
SCADA, etc…) is required to be potentially equipped with all the connection interfaces, both in terms of
hardware availability and software configuration possibilities. Obviously, once the specific detailed project
has been defined, the exact number and type of interface ports will be defined by cyber security constraints
as per Attachment GICT-SGL_12_V02_ICS OT Security Guideline.
In addition, all systems and network devices (SCADAs, RTU, PPC, etc...) shall be equipped with a dedicate
instance for communication with the Front-End Service Gateway (FES-GW), both for real-time and historical
data. These instance shall use the same protocols used for communication with Plant SCADA.
In addition, all systems and network devices (SCADAs, RTU, PPC, etc...) shall be equipped with a dedicate
instance for communication with the Front-End Service Gateway (FES-GW), both for real-time and historical
data. These instance shall use the same protocols used for communication with Plant SCADA.
Any RTU/PLC/SCADA (Server/HMI)/PPC belonging to the Auxiliary SCADA system shall be installed in
dedicated cabinet with mechanical protection IP52 or better.
The cabinet shall have front opening door and if necessary swing frame type shall be realized.
Cabinet will be completely fabricated, assembled wired and tested before leaving the Vendor’s works.
A rigid, self-supporting free standing cabinet type shall be supplied.
Removable access doors and panels shall be fitted with dust tight seals.
All door locks shall be provided with the same lock and key combination. Keys shall be removable with the
doors either locked or unlocked.
Adequate natural ventilation shall be provided to ensure the internal ambient temperature does not exceed
the safe continuous operating temperature of the components located therein.
CODICE – CODE

150 of 287
A metallic pocket shall be provided on the inside of the door to contain drawings and data.
Whenever possible, cables entrance will be through the base of the cabinets.
Sufficient clearance shall be provided between components to permit maintenance while in operation.
Cabinet nameplates shall be made from laminated plastic, and shall be attached with stainless steel screws.
Ductwork for field cables shall be provided inside the cabinet for all terminals in the terminals block to
segregate the following services:
 AC Power Distribution
 High Level analog (4-20 mA, 1-5V)
 24 VDC level digital input/outputs
(Note: Digital output from RTU/PLC to external electrical loads shall be voltage free contacts. Interface relay
with external power supply shall be used to drive digital output contacts).
All terminated cables shall be fitted with heat shrink sleeves and identified showing cable code number.
Letters and identification numbers shall be readable.
Individual wires shall be tagged at each end including termination details.
Two Grounding bus bar shall be supplied: protection earth bar and devices shield bar.
1.2.6.1. TRACKER SCADA
The Trackers Control System (named Tracker SCADA system as well) shall be mainly composed by:
 Tracker Controllers: one independent PLC-based controller for each Tracker System with back-
tracking1 (one for each tracker) and wind protection speed. Redundant system for wind speed
control.
 Field Communication devices: physically located in each Conversion Cabin, which
communicate with the several Tracker Controllers and convert the received information to TCP/IP
protocol through an Ethernet connection (including NCU - Network Control Unit, each Tracker
System; Ethernet Switch, each Conversion Cabin; gateways).
The following requirements about NCU shall be considered:
 The NCUs shall be placed in the same Conversion Unit (or Transformer Cabinet), in the
space that the supplier of the cabin has available for third parties (Trackers + CCTV). For this
purpose, the NCU outline drawing comprehensive of dimensions shall be provided.
 From the NCUs, a cable shall be connected to the antenna, which must be erected close
to the cabin, avoiding the laying of fiber optic jumpers outside the cabin. In this way, the jumpers
are located between the switches of the NCU and FO header provided by ENEL, both being
inside the CU.
 NCUs shall be directly connected to the FO rings of the plant.
 Tracker SCADA (Server/HMI)
CODICE – CODE

151 of 287
1.2.6.1.1. Tracker SCADA (Server/HMI)
The Tracker SCADA shall be installed in the Electrical Substation in order to collect all the data from the
field trackers controllers by means of a wired TCP/IP protocol communication with the gateways in each
cabin. It shall be able to collect all measurements signals from field instrumentation (inclinometers,
anemometers, etc...). In addition it shall acquire and monitor all signals, status and alarms and it shall be
interfaced with the EGP plant SCADA (not in the scope). A dedicated HMI shall be provided to operate,
monitor and configure the Tracker Control System.
This Tracker SCADA shall meet or exceed the following:

 Server machine
 CPU: INTEL 64 bit Quad-Core with 12MB of cache (latest version available)
 CPU clock above 2 GHz
 32 GB RAM
 Dual power supply module in hot stand-by configuration (redundancy)
 USB ports (N.4 ports)
 Ethernet ports (N.4 ports)
 Serial ports (N.1 port)
 Hard disk drives of 500GB each one, at least two disks
 48X/32X/48X/16X CD-RW/DVD-ROM
 Software platform “Microsoft Windows latest version”, language of the country
 Hardware based on standard RAID 1 for hot swap drive
 Diagnostic and fault analysis capability
 Smart UPS for Server/Network Cabinet, estimated runtime 4 hours
 19” Color LCD Monitor, keyboard, mouse
 Stand rack cabinet with KVM switch
 Ethernet switch with at least 16 ports
IP addresses and subnet mask addresses, of each component on the network, will be assigned by EGP,
according to ICT requirements.
For the data exchange (real-time database) with the Plant SCADA, the Tracker SCADA should be flexible to
handle at least one of the following TCP/IP communication protocol:
 IEC-104
 IEC-61850
 OPC-UA
Any other communication protocol not included in this specification will be declared explicitly by the
Contractor and submitted to EGP for approval before use.
CODICE – CODE

152 of 287
Upon request a dedicated engineering workstation (PC) shall be provided to manage, upgrade, configure,
implement and to add new applicative tools regarding all devices of the Tracker Control System.
Remote control access and Local control access for manual movements of the trackers shall be provided.
At Tracker SCADA level, it shall be provided a specific HMI graphic view in order to identify for each
conversion cabin the total amount of trackers related to the conversion cabin in exam as well as the exact
number of trackers in tracking state.
Besides the in-depth alarms belonging to the trackers system, the Tracker SCADA shall group a subset of
those signals in order to get them available (along with the in-depth ones) for being sent to EGP’s Plant
SCADA through communications protocol. The grouping of these signals shall make possible that one alarm
of each type being representative (through an OR Boolean operator) of all the alarms of the same type
belonging to the trackers associated to the same inverter (grouping alarms for each inverter rather that in a
per CU basis).
Moreover, the Contractor is required to guarantee the correct functioning of the Trackers Control System,
especially to avoid mutual shadowing among different strings: at least for the first 2 years (starting from the
complete installation and commissioning) any fault condition or underperformance event have to be solved
by the Contractor without any extra cost.
In the following the minimum list of data information (signals, alarms, events, statuses and commands)
required at Tracker Control System level:
Category Data Description Type EU
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - Connection loss Alarm  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - Firmware version Info  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - IP address Info  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - Current Date and Time Analog  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - Gateway in wind alarm state Alarm  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - GPS fail Alarm  
GATEWAY alarms and states (true-false) Gateway - Connection lost with Tracker Z Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS battery low Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS on bypass Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS overload Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS over-temperature Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS power fail Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) UPS summary alarm Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) GPS fail (PV supervisor GPS antenna) Alarm  
GLOBAL alarms and states (true-false) Current Server Date and Time Analog  
GLOBAL Parameters Quantity of trackers installed Info  
SUBFIELD Measures Anemometer - wind speed Info m/s
SUBFIELD Parameters Anemometer - wind alarm - input threshold Info m/s
SUBFIELD Parameters Anemometer - wind alarm - input delay Info min
SUBFIELD Parameters Anemometer - wind alarm - safe position Info degree
SUBFIELD Parameters Number of trackers in Tracking state Info

CODICE – CODE

153 of 287
SUBFIELD alarms and states (true-false) Anemometer not linked with SCADA Alarm  
SUBFIELD alarms and states (true-false) Anemometer Sensor not Connected Alarm  
SUBFIELD alarms and states (true-false) Anemometer - Wind alarm Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Emergency mode Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Manual mode Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Automatic mode Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Defense position Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Tracking state Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Night state Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  in Cleaning state Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  limited by Back-tracking Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  East/West Limit Switch Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker  recoverable tracking error Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker non-recoverable tracking error Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker Latency Failure Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker - Connection loss Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker - Manual mode ON Event  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker - Motor m fault Alarm  
TRACKER alarms and states (true-false) Tracker - Tracker alarm Alarm  
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - tracking position Info degree
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - Subfield Info ---
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - inverter Info ---
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - index Info ---
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - latitude Info degree
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - longitude Info degree
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - installation azimuth Info degree
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - installation tilt Info degree
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - module width Info mm
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - Motor current consumption Analog mA
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - Stop button status Alarm  
TRACKER Parameters and measures Tracker - Battery state of charge Analog %
Tracker-Commands Tracker Cleaning position command Command  
Tracker-Commands Tracker Defense position command Command  
Tracker-Commands Tracker - Move Eastwards Command  
Tracker-Commands Tracker - Move Westwards Command  
Tracker-Commands Tracker - Stop Command  
Tracker-Commands Tracker - Target roll (tracking angle) Command  
Minimum list of data information (signals, alarms, events, statuses and commands)
required at Tracker Control System level
CODICE – CODE

154 of 287
1.2.6.2. INVERTER SCADA
In a Photovoltaic Power Plant, Conversion Cabin Contractor shall supply one SCADA complete platform
(named INVERTER SCADA system) relevant to the photovoltaic power system and conversion cabins. The
typical Conversion Cabin Contractor scope of supply is composed by the main following subsystems:
 Local SCADA (SERVER/HMI)
 Conversion Cabin RTU/PLC (one for each Conversion Cabin)
 Power Plant Controller (PPC)
1.2.6.2.1. Configuration
1.2.6.2.1.1. String Inverter
Each PV Transformation Center shall be equipped with its own Controller/PLC/RTU; technical solution of
Data Concentrator as Datalogger shall be submitted to specific approval from Client.
The control system, for each PV Transformation Center, shall consist of the following:
 Controller/PLC/RTU or Data Concentrator as Datalogger;
 Industrial switches (redundant mode) at least;
 ODF (Optical Distribution Frame); including copper cable pack and required optical patch cords to
integrate with different systems (metering, weather station a transformers).
The communication between the Controller/PLC/RTU installed inside the Transformation Center and the
Local Inverter SCADA (installed in the electrical substation) will be based on Modbus/TCP or IEC-60870-5-
104 protocol or PLC (Power Line Communication), consequently an Ethernet network will be used (fiber
optical ring).
The infrastructure of the data network is realized through industrial switches and ODFs. These switches are
modular so that the quantity and type of the ports can be chosen at the time of acquisition, respecting the
minimum quantities for perfect system operation and considering 20% of reserve ports.
The Controller/PLC/RTU or Data Concentrator must have at least:
 N.2 Ethernet network interfaces at least, preferably configured with a single IP address on both
interfaces. IP addresses and subnets shall be provided by ENEL.
 Internal PLC (or similar) for modulation of the power system in order to enable the acquisition from
the inverter and the active string boxes (SBM) data (If the Inverters will use frequency modulation -
AC cables - to exchange the data); it should be able to get all information from the inverters and
SBMs under Modbus RTU if the equipment will use copper communication cables (RS-485)
according to IEC 61643-21;
 N.6 communication ports (serial / Ethernet) at least for communication with the power transformers,
meteorological stations and power meters, as well as support for communication protocols with the
systems described above.
 specific diagnostic / watchdog signal (for Plant SCADA);
The supplier should take in consideration some important functions required by the string inverters
monitoring:
CODICE – CODE

155 of 287
Protection from AC power side overvoltage according to IEC 61643-11, based on varistor arresters class II
with protection level Up ≤ 1.5 kV;
Surge protection on RS485 data line side in accordance with EN 61643-21, based on arresters class
D1+C1+C2;
The supplier should provide a complete interface between the Controller/PLC/RTU or Data Concentrator
(into the Transformation Center) and the Local Inverter SCADA panel (level 2), using independent industrial
switches with electrical / optical ports, ODFs, optical cable with sufficient couple fiber (including spare fibers).
HIERARCHICAL LEVELS
For both 'level 2' and 'level 3', the system structure, interconnections, protocols, will be presented in the
architecture design of the system.
SOFTWARE FOR DATA CONCENTRATOR PARAMETERIZATION

Maintenance software must be provided, including logging, parameterization / suitability of the concentrator.
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
The following table summarizes the protocols that will be used:
1.2.6.2.1.2. Centralized Inverter
Each PV Conversion Cabin Controller/PLC/RTU shall be provided in its own 19” cabinet.
CPU (Control Processor Unit)

The microprocessor (CPU) shall be at least 32 bit data bus, with total memory capacity of 256 kByte
CODICE – CODE

156 of 287
(expandable to 4 Mbytes) and with clock rate above 1 GHz.

RTU/PLC CPU cycle scan time shall be less than 5 milliseconds.
CPU load shall have 25% of spare memory.
PLC/RTU system shall be a real-time system where the reaction time and response time can be set in a
limited time.
Analogue and Digital I/O modules

I/O cards shall have channel to channel galvanic isolation. Digital signals shall be optic-isolated between field
and the internal CPU bus.
For analog I/O cards shall be considered a resolution of 16 bits and the following input ranges: ±5 V, ±10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA.
For digital I/O cards shall be considered the following ranges: 0-24VDC, 0-48VDC, 0-110VDC, 0-125VDC
For each electrical protection, where applicable, two hardwired contacts of Trip Signal and Warning Signal
shall be connected to RTUs/PLCs. The scan time of I/O cards connected to electrical protections shall be
less than 5 milliseconds.
I/O cards shall include be 10% spare signal points.
All electronic cards shall be in slotted 19” rack cabinets. Each electronic card can be replaced for
maintenance purpose during normal operation without rebooting the entire system.
Communication interfaces
For the data exchange with inverters, meters, smart string boxes and soiling measurement system, the
RTU/PLC should be flexible enough to handle at least one of the following TCP/IP communication protocol
time stamp supporting:
 IEC-104
 DNP3
 IEC 61850
 MODBUS TCP/IP
or the following serial communication (with max data acquisition time 30 seconds):
 IEC-101
 MODBUS RTU
For the data exchange with the Local SCADA, the RTU/PLC should be flexible enough to handle the following
TCP/IP communication protocol time stamp supporting:
 IEC-104
 DNP3
 IEC 61850
 MODBUS TCP/IP
The use of MODBUS TCP/IP could be evaluated jointly between EGP and the Supplier, depending of the
project and of the quantity of hosts to query on the network since in any case the MODBUS Master shall poll
all Slaves within 1 minute.
CODICE – CODE

157 of 287
Contractor and submitted to EGP for final approval before use.
Power supply modules

Power supply modules shall be redundant and fed by an external uninterruptible power source (UPS) by
means of two external power incomings.
Power supply modules shall feed all electronic cards, field contacts and field sensors.
The Contractor must consider all of the space necessary for third parties devices (Tracker system, CCTV,
etc.) to be mounted inside the Cabin, providing auxiliary services and also the physical media in order to
these devices being able to communicate with other ones outside the Cabin.
1.2.6.2.2. Power Plant Controller
This item shall be quoted separately and the supply shall be submitted to EGP final approval.
The Supplier is requested to quote the supply of a Power Plant Controller (PPC), completely independent
from other systems, based on a dedicated PLC hardware/software system (any different technical solution
shall be previously submitted to ENEL consideration and approval; the submission shall include a technical
justification by the Contractor), in order to manage the active power and reactive power, voltage, power factor
and frequency delivered by the power plant to the point of interconnection (POI) 1.
The PPC must be fully compliant to the specification of the Local Grid Code in terms of guaranteed
performance and system response time.
The PPC shall be able to receive signals and commands from the plant RTU/SCADA and/or directly from
TSO’s external automatic device or dedicated gateways (selected by local TSO and included in the supply
of the Supplier), according to the Local Grid Code.
This PPC panel shall have the minimum following characteristics:
 Dedicated device PLC class with:
o Single CPU (with availability upon request of hot-backup redundancy)
o Redundant Power Supply
o I/O module: Minimum 16 DI and 16 DO
o Local HMI touch-screen minimum 15”
 The PPC must be equipped with its own metering device in order to get feedback respect to the
measurements of the Power Network (POI power grid analyzer).
The PPC shall be equipped with a dedicated, touch screen, HMI included in the scope of supply and shall
be mounted in the PPC cabinet or externally on a dedicated workstation, if requested by EGP.
From this dedicated HMI it shall be possible to switch off/disable the PPC, in any condition and by means of
a virtual selector. A physical selector will be allowed as well.
PLC technological solution shall be based on Industrial Standard Communication Protocols.

CODICE – CODE

158 of 287
Modbus RTU is not acceptable for communication between PPC and Inverters, unless differently allowed and
confirmed by the Client.
The PPC panel shall implement what follows:

1. To feature one or more local/remote physical or logical selectors permitting to choose from
different set-point sources (such as Local SCADA, Plant SCADA, TSO, etc …) for handling of the
able/disable function of the regulation by external systems.
2. Programming of control logics, even complex, according to IEC 61131-3.
3. Fully compliance to the specification of the Local Grid Code in terms of guaranteed performance
and system time response.
4. To synchronize all inverters Controllers to the grid and to manage the power flow control by
means of current-controlled or voltage-controlled strategies. PPC must control and operate:
o The power plant in respect to the Active-Reactive power capability curve and react to
external imposed set points within tolerance and limited time as expressed in Grid Code
requirements.
o The plant in a voltage (V), power factor (Q/Pmax) or reactive power (Q or Mvar) control
modes within tolerance and limited time as expressed in Grid Code requirements. The shift
from one operation mode to the other must be bumpless/seamless meaning that once
changed the operation mode, the POI active and reactive power should remain the same.
These values will change only if entered a new set point in the selected control mode.
o The actual operating mode (V, power factor or Q control) as well as the operating point
shall be in accordance with the Grid Code and agreed with TSO.
o The power plant set points and setting operational control modes received, through
dedicated gateways, from TSO station. Each setpoint sent from the PPC to its inverters
(active, reactive, voltage and cosfi setpoints), shall be reported to the Plant SCADA in a
per-inverter basis.
5. The PPC shall use a dedicated VLAN switch port to manage directly the inverters Controllers
and Local SCADA. If PV plant rapid disconnection from the grid is required from the local Grid Code,
the PPC shall be able to send the stop command in parallel to all plant inverters Controllers within
the time required: proper communication protocol shall be used to satisfy this requirement and the
time response required by the local Grid Code.
6. PPC applicative configuration must be fully compliant and integrated in Plant SCADA
architecture and development tools, the latter must be configurable through same tools as Plant
SCADA without any tag and parameters duplication on PPC and Plant SCADA configurations.
7. Ability to control (autonomously from Plant SCADA) through local HMI touch screen.
8. Communication to inverters, Local SCADA through standard protocols in monitor and control
mode (ENEL shall provide standardized interfaces and I/O signal lists). Multi-clients connection.
9. Communication to FES-GW, in monitor mode only.
10. Availability to accept connections by Plant SCADA through IEC 60870-5-104 protocol on
dedicated channel.
CODICE – CODE

159 of 287
11. Availability to accept connections by external systems (TSO, LCR) through IEC 60870-5-104
protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101 Client/Server Protocol can be implemented upon
EGP's request.
12. Availability to accept connections by Energy Management System (EMS) for the Hybrid plant
through IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP3.0 protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101
Client/Server Protocol can be implemented upon EGP's request.
13. Other protocols upon Enel request.
Among others, at least the following electrical requirements (always according to Grid Code and/or improving
it) to be fulfilled, being X the requested response time and Y the percentage tolerance of final values
against the set-point specified in the corresponding Country:
a. Active power control:

 Tolerance Y% (typical value 2%).
 For SetPoint = 0: Time to reach the SP within the tolerance X [s].
 For other SetPoint; rampUP and rampDOWN of MW/min to reach the set-point within the
tolerance X [s].
b. Reactive control, mutually exclusive between:

 Reactive power control:
1. Tolerance Y% (typical value 2%).
2. Time to reach the SP within the tolerance X [s].
 Voltage power control:
1. Tolerance Y% (typical value 0.5%).
 Power control, power factor:
1. Tolerance Y% (typical value 0.1%).
c. Capability curve:
 Grid code capability curve shall take into consideration the sum of the installed inverters
Moreover the PPC shall be interfaced, via the local control network, with:
 Operator Station (Server)

 Engineering Work Station
 Third parties Electrical substation devices and subsystems
And, via local supervision network, with:

 the integrated power grid analyzer (at POI) for the acquisition of metering data and the
configuration of parameters;
CODICE – CODE

160 of 287
 all subsystems (inverters, Local SCADA, FES GW, etc…) for the acquisition of data and
configuration.
Finally, via the remote control network, with the:

EGP Remote Control Centre (RCC/LCR)
 TSO Centre
 Energy Management System (EMS), for the Hybrid plant
The monitoring and remote networks will use an Ethernet connection, in compliance with IEEE standards.
The supplier must install at least n.2 Ethernet cards at 10/100 Mbit/s. These two devices must be independent
and individually configurable.
The n.2 Ethernet ports (free) will be at exclusive use of EGP and not be used by the Supplier for its
connections.
The Contractor shall provide on hard-paper and electronic copy the mathematical algorithm implemented in
the PPC for managing the power plant as per Grid Code requirements.
The Contractor shall provide a signed document that guarantees that the PPC that it will supply complies
with the current Grid Code, it will also deliver the technical information according to requirement of Grid Code,
the mathematical model of the PPC in the Software and Version indicated in the Grid Code, which must not
be encrypted, and additionally any other technical information specified by EGP. This mathematical
model must be implemented in the PPC for the correct management of the power plant according to the
requirements of the Grid Code. The Contractor will implement the aforementioned mathematical algorithm in
the same operating system used by the TSO/DSO, so that it is compatible with software level. Moreover the
Contractor shall implement the here above mentioned mathematical algorithm into the same operative
system used by the TSO/DSO, in order to be compatible at software level. All the field tests necessary for
the approval of any mathematical model demanded by the Grid Code or Grid Operator shall be performed
by the Contractor.
In case the plant is equipped with Capacitor Banks/ STATCOM for the Power Factor Correction or Reactive
Power Compensation, the PPC could be required to be interfaced with their control device in the Substation
Control System in order to ask for the Connection/ Disconnection of the Capacitor Banks when the PV/WF
system cannot reach anymore the performance required (i.e. the desired point is out of its P-Q
curve). Following the PPC request, the Capacitor Bank/ STATCOM control device will check the
operational condition of the system and will send the Close/Open command to the Capacitor
Bank/STATCOM insertion accordingly. The Substation Control System can also be interfaced by the PPC
in order to send, via communication protocol, raise/lower commands to the Tap Changer Controller of the
main power transformer located in the substation, in order to move the tap position according to the
reactive power and voltage level needs.
For more details about PPC communication interfaces, refer to § A “PPC Communication interfaces”.
CODICE – CODE

161 of 287
In order to reach the setpoints received from the Plant RTU/SCADA and/or directly from TSO’s external
automatic device or dedicated gateways, the PPC shall calculate the setpoints to be sent to the park in
base on the inverters that are in service at that time, excluding those that are out of service. This way, it is
seeking to speed up the convergence of the PID algorithms on the PPC and thus, optimizing the time
response of the system.
In case of loss of communication event between the PPC and the relevant metering device (POI power grid
analyzer), the PPC must be able to guarantee the entering into an emergency condition (safe
mode); transient from the previous operation mode into the safe mode must be bumpless/seamless
meaning that once changed the operation mode, the POI active and reactive power should remain the
same. These values will change only if entered a new set point in the selected control mode.
Safe mode must be mandatorily foreseen in any case of emergency condition, such as:
 loss of communication between the PPC and the relevant metering device (POI power grid
analyzer);
 lack of synchronization about communication network among PPC, metering device/ grid
analyzer and inverters/WTG Controllers;
 any critical event about communication network (including wrong IP assignment);
 power supply fault.
Moreover, hot-redundancy connection shall be provided between PPC and POI power grid analyzer. Any
different alternative solution shall be submitted to EGP approval.
No limits in terms of amount of served channels, remote clients and licenses are acceptable.
A. PPC COMMUNICATION INTERFACES

Depending on project type, could be one or more PPCs, and for same plant technology or mixed tech.
As general rule, direct PPC – Substation Control Unit (SCU) integration shall be considered. Depending on
the project and under Enel indication, the integration could not be necessary and not implemented.
For the information exchange between the PPC and the Substation Control System, one or more direct
serial channels (e.g. Master/Slave and Slave/Master) will be connected between both systems. For this
reason, the PPC must be provided with at least four RS232/485 serial ports and the communication
protocols will be DNP and Modbus RTU, when serial, and IEC-104, OPC-UA, DNP3.0 and Modbus TCP
when Ethernet protocol required (in compliance with ENEL ICS Security requirements as per Annexes [A9]
and [A10]). This communication could be also implemented using hardwired signals (digital inputs, digital
outputs, 4-20 mA, etc…).
The PPC shall be able to accept direct connections with external systems (TSO, LCR) through IEC 60870-
5-104 protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101 Client/Server Protocol can be implemented upon
EGP's request or others as per specific project or country special requirements.
Communication to FES-GW, in monitor mode only, through dedicated instance.
Availability to accept connections by Plant SCADA through IEC 60870-5-104 protocol on dedicated
channel.
CODICE – CODE

162 of 287
Availability to accept connections by Energy Management System (EMS) for the Hybrid plant through IEC
60870-5-104 and DNP3.0 protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101 Client/Server Protocol can be
implemented upon EGP's request.
The PPCs shall incorporate their own Energy Meters but as per specific Enel indications, the SCU’s meter
for redundant input shall be shared for PPCs’ control loops.
1.2.6.2.3. Master Power Plant Controller
The Supplier shall be requested to quote the supply of a MASTER Power Plant Controller (MASTER PPC),
based on a dedicated PLC hardware/software system (any different technical solution is submitted to ENEL
consideration and approval, to be previously technically justified by the contractor), in order to manage the
active power and reactive power delivered by the power plant to the transmission grid 1.
MASTER PPC shall acquire measures and digital states from slave PPCs and shall send set points and
commands to slave PPCs, acting as a high level hierarchic controller, in order to realize optimized
management of more than one sub-plants or different technologies or different technological equipment.
MASTER PPC shall be technology independent and shall manage simultaneously at least following
technologies:
 Wind PPC
 Solar PPC
 BESS PPC
 Capacitor Banks
The MASTER PPC must be fully compliant to the specification of the Local Grid Code in terms of
guaranteed performance and system response time.
The MASTER PPC must meet or exceed the requirements described for the individual PPCs (refer to
§ 3.3.8), unless prior approval by ENEL in specific and technically justified cases.
The MASTER PPC shall be able to receive signals and commands from the plant RTU/SCADA and/or
directly from TSO’s external automatic device or dedicated gateways (selected by local TSO and included
in the supply of the Supplier), according to the Local Grid Code.
The MASTER PPC panel shall have the minimum following characteristics:
 Dedicated device PLC class with:
o Redundant CPU (hot-backup redundancy)
o Redundant Power Supply
o I/O module: Minimum 16 DI and 16 DO
o Local HMI touch-screen minimum 15”
o P, Q, V, F Converter
The MASTER PPC shall be equipped with a dedicated, touch screen, HMI included in the scope of supply
and shall be mounted in the PPC cabinet or externally on a dedicated workstation, if requested by EGP.
From this dedicated HMI it shall be possible to switch off/disable the MASTER PPC, in any condition and
by means of a virtual selector. A physical selector will be allowed as well.
CODICE – CODE

163 of 287
PLC technological solution shall be based on Industrial Standard Communication Protocols.
Modbus RTU is not acceptable for communication between PPC and Inverters/WTGs, unless
differently allowed and confirmed by the Client.
MASTER PPC shall implement a complex and structured algorithm to provide at least the following
services to the grid:
1. Instantaneous reactive power, voltage, cos(fi) regulation

2. Primary frequency regulation
3. Secondary frequency regulation
4. To feature one or more local/remote physical or logical selectors permitting to choose from
different set-point sources (such as Plant SCADA, TSO, etc …) for handling of the able/disable
function of the regulation by external systems.
5. Programming of control logics, even complex, according to IEC 61131-3.
6. Fully compliance to the specification of the Local Grid Code in terms of guaranteed performance
and system time response.
7. To synchronize (by slave PPCs) all inverters/WTG Controllers to the grid and to manage the
power flow control by means of current-controlled or voltage-controlled strategies. MASTER PPC
must control and operate:
o The power plant in respect to the Active-Reactive power capability curve and react to
external imposed set points within limited time as expressed in Grid Code requirements.
o The plant in a voltage (V), power factor (Q/Pmax) or reactive power (Q or Mvar) control
modes. The shift from one operation mode to the other must be bumpless/seamless
meaning that once changed the operation mode, the POI active and reactive power should
remain the same. These values will change only if entered a new set point in the selected
control mode.
o The actual operating mode (V, power factor or Q control) as well as the operating point
shall be in accordance with the Grid Code and agreed with TSO.
o The power plant giving set points and setting operational control modes received, through
dedicated gateways, from TSO station.
8. The MASTER PPC shall use a dedicated VLAN switch port to manage (by slave PPCs) the
inverters/WTG Controllers and Local SCADA PV/WTG SCADA. If PV plant rapid disconnection from
the grid is required from the local Grid Code, the MASTER PPC shall be able to send the stop
command in parallel to all plant inverters/WTG Controllers (by slave PPCs) within the time required:
proper communication protocol shall be used to satisfy this requirement and the time response
required by the local Grid Code.
9. MASTER PPC applicative configuration must be fully compliant and integrated in Plant SCADA
architecture and development tools, the latter must be configurable through same tools as Plant
CODICE – CODE

164 of 287
SCADA without any tag and parameters duplication on MASTER PPC and Plant SCADA
configurations.
10. Ability to control (autonomously from Plant SCADA) through local HMI touch screen.
11. Communication to slave PPCs through standard protocols in monitor and control mode (ENEL
shall provide standardized interfaces and I/O signal lists).
12. Communication to slave PPCs through hardwired interface to monitor slave PPCs statuses and
to command in case of critical events (e.g. an emergency stop in case of a communication loss).
13. Communication to FES-GW in monitor mode only.
14. Availability to accept connections by Plant SCADA through IEC 60870-5-104 protocol on
dedicated channel.
15. Availability to accept connections by external systems (TSO, LCR) through IEC 60870-5-104
and DNP3.0 protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101 Client/Server Protocol can be
implemented upon EGP's request.
16. Availability to accept connections by Energy Management System (EMS) for the Hybrid plant
through IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP3.0 protocol on dedicated channels. IEC 60870-5-101
Client/Server Protocol can be implemented upon EGP's request.
Moreover the MASTER PPC shall be interfaced, via the local control network, with:
 Operator Station (Server)

 Engineering Work Station
 Third parties Electrical Substation devices and subsystems
and, via local supervision network, with:
 the integrated P,Q,V,F converter for the acquisition of metering data and the configuration of
parameters;
 all subsystems (slave PPCs, inverters, WTG Controllers, Local SCADA WF/PV, etc…) for
the acquisition and control.
Finally, via the remote control network, with the:
 EGP Remote Control Centre (RCC/LCR)

 TSO Centre
 Energy Management System (EMS), for the Hybrid plant
The monitoring and remote networks will use an Ethernet connection, in compliance with IEEE standards.
The supplier must install at least n.2 Ethernet cards at 10/100 Mbit/s. These two devices must be
independent and individually configurable.
CODICE – CODE

165 of 287
The n.2 Ethernet ports (free) will be at exclusive use of EGP and not be used by the Supplier for its
connections.
Contractor shall provide on hard-paper and electronic copy the mathematical algorithm implemented in the
MASTER PPC for managing the power plant as per Grid Code requirements. Moreover the Contractor shall
implement the here above mentioned mathematical algorithm into the same operative system used by the
TSO/DSO, in order to be compatible at software level.
In order to reach the setpoints received from the Plant RTU/SCADA and/or directly from TSO’s external
automatic device or dedicated gateways, the MASTER PPC shall calculate the setpoints to be sent to the
slave PPCs.
The MASTER PPC must be equipped with its own metering device in order to get feedback respect to the
measurements of the Power Network (POI power grid analyzer).
In case of loss of communication event between the MASTER PPC and the relevant metering device (POI
power grid analyzer), the MASTER PPC must be able to guarantee the entering into an emergency
condition (safe mode); transient from the previous operation mode into the safe mode must
be bumpless/seamless meaning that once changed the operation mode, the POI active and reactive power
should remain the same. These values will change only if entered a new set point in the selected control
mode.
Safe mode must be mandatorily foreseen in any case of emergency condition, such as:
 loss of communication between the MASTER PPC and the relevant metering device (POI power
grid analyzer);
 lack of synchronization about communication network among MASTER PPC, slave PPCs,
metering device/ grid analyzer and inverters/WTG Controllers;
 any critical event about communication network (including wrong IP assignment).
Moreover, hot-redundancy connection shall be provided between MASTER PPC and POI power
grid analyzer. Any different alternative solution shall be submitted to EGP approval.
It shall be guaranteed that all POI measurements shall be directly acquired by the each PPC (MASTER
PPC and slave PPCs) by its own transducer.
No limits in terms of amount of served channels, remote clients and licenses are acceptable.
1.2.6.2.4. Inverter Controller-PLC-RTU
For both types of configuration:

 centralized inverter
 string inverter
each Power Conversion Unit (PCU) – Conversion Cabin (1) or Transformation Centre (2) - shall be provided
with a Controller/PLC/RTU to provide data acquisition, control and monitoring of equipment at some remote
location as well as to transfer this data back to Local SCADA via a communication system.
CODICE – CODE

166 of 287
The solution with a Data Logger and a separated Ethernet Remote I/O module could be proposed and
evaluated by EGP during the bid phase provided it is guaranteed the same functionality and performance in
any condition.
Inverters as well as any intelligent electronic devices such as Meters, Protocol Gateways, Transformer
Control Units, Dataloggers, CU HMI, etc. shall feature their own Ethernet interface in order to grant remote
access from networks located outside or inside the power plant. This remote access is intended to make
possible the full remote monitoring, diagnostic, setting and maintenance of such devices for which they shall
accept remote Ethernet connections through the proprietary management software developed by the
supplier. In order to these devices being able to communicate with several IP segments, they shall permit
to be configured with a Default Gateway (i.e. a router).
The Controller/PLC/RTU will be microprocessor based with an internal central communication bus
interconnecting both I/O cards and serial communication. Modular platform and high flexibility for
expandability are required. Robust operation (failure of one module will not affect the performance of other
modules) and local and remote fault diagnostic facilities are required as well. Each module should have
internal software continuously testing the system I/O and hardware and any abnormal or fault conditions
must be communicated back to the master station.
Each RTU/PLC shall include: CPU, internal bus, redundant power supply modules and network
communication modules.
Down time is required to be minimal. The Contractor shall provide availability documents citing RTU/PLC
system MTBF and MTTR.
Each Controller/PLC/RTU shall include at least the following:
 CPU (Control Processor Unit) and associated memory
 Analogue and Digital I/O modules
 Communication interfaces (at least 3 ports)
 Redundant Power supply modules.
 One touch screen in which all of the events, alarms, statuses and analog measurements
belonging to the CU can be displayed. From this touch screen it shall be possible to acknowledge
the alarms but it shouldn’t affect the alarms’ acknowledgement in the Local SCADA HMI.
The Controller/PLC/RTU (or an external device such as a Datalogger) shall be able to store all COS (Change
Of Status) and events occurred inside the CU and its related devices (Inverter signals, Combiner boxes,
Remote I/O devices, UPS, Transformer signals, Anti-fire System, Anti-intrusion system, etc.). This way,
the COS of these signals will be stored locally in the Conversion Unit even if the communication with the
Local SCADA has been lost. These COS shall be available for being downloaded through TXT or CSV file
formats. The storage capacity must be enough to store at least one month of signals being generated inside
the Conversion Unit under any operational scenario and in any case shall be at least being able to store
5.000 COS, being recorded the name of the device that generated the signal, the time and date at which
such event took place (with a resolution of 1 ms) and the status of the signal (Open/Close, Normal/Alarm,
etc.). This information shall be displayed also in the HMI located inside the CU.
In the following the minimum hardwired signals list of the cabin control system Controller/PLC/RTU are
reported.
CODICE – CODE

167 of 287
Description From To HW/SW Signal Type Function
UPS On line Normal Operation UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status

UPS BYPASS Active Status UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
UPS Under Battery Operation UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
UPS Low Battery Alarm UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
UPS Fault/Diagnostic Alarm UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
UPS Overload Alarm UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
UPS Very High Temperature Alarm UPS Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
LVP Status (cumulative) - (normal section) LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
LVP Status (cumulative) - (continuity section) LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
Permanent Insulation Control Panel - LV unit Low
Insulation Alarm LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Permanent Insulation Control Panel - DC unit Low
Permanent Insulation Control Panel - UPS unit Low
MV/LV Transformer Winding High Temperature
Alarm TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NA Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Winding Very High Temperature
Trip TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Monitoring system FAULT Alarm TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV/LV Transformer FASE U Winding Temperature TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer FASE V Winding Temperature TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer FASE W Winding Temperature TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer Core Temperature TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer Oil Temperature (if applicable) TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer Oil Hot Point Temperature (if
applicable) TCU Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer Oil Temperature Alarm (if
applicable) TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NO Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Oil Very High Temperature Trip (if
applicable) TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Fans status (if applicable) TCU Cabin RTU HW DI NO Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Room Temperature Thermostat Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
MV/LV Transformer Room Main Ventilation Fan ON LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
MV/LV Transformer Room Secondary Ventilation Fan
ON LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Room Ventilation Selector in 0
mode LVP-AUX Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Anti-intrusion Alarm Signal Anti intrusion Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Fire Smoke Detection System pre-Alarm Fire System Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Fire Smoke Detection System Alarm Fire System Cabin RTU HW DI NO Alarm
Fire Smoke Detection System Unit Fault Fire System Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Fire Smoke Detection System Detectors Fault Fire System Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
Fire Smoke Detection System Loss of Supply Fire System Cabin RTU HW DI NO Alarm
Anti-rodent System Fault Alarm Anti rodent Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV/LV Transformer Fuse Intervention Alarm MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Alarm
MV Panel TRAFO Switch Disconnector Open MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
MV Panel TRAFO Switch Disconnector Closed MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
CODICE – CODE

168 of 287
MV Panel Earthing Switch Disconnector Closed MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status

MV Panel Inlet Switch Disconnector Open MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
MV Panel Inlet Switch Disconnector Closed MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
MV Panel Outlet Switch Disconnector Open MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NO Status
MV Panel Outlet Switch Disconnector Closed MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
SF6 Loss Contact MVP Cabin RTU HW DI NC Status
Inverter Fast Stop Signal (dep. On Grid Code time
response requirement) Cabin RTU Inverter HW DO NO Command
Inverter Room Temperature (1 per each Inverter
Room within Cabin) Thermostat Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
Current measure on Inverter DC side Inverter Cabin RTU HW AI 4-20 mA Measure
String box current measure String box Cabin RTU HW/SW AI 4-20 mA Measure
Hardwired signals list of the cabin control system RTU/ PL
1.2.6.2.5. Local SCADA (Server/HMI)
The Local SCADA system, installed in the electrical substation, shall collect all the data from each RTU/PLC
in the Conversion Cabin (host) and forward them to the Plant SCADA.
It shall acquire and monitor all signals, status and alarms pertinent to conversion cabins and photovoltaic
plant field (such as smart string boxes, weather station, transformers, meters, soiling measurement system,
etc.). The Local SCADA system shall include database management (real-time and historical) of all
conversion cabins.
Local SCADA equipment shall be based on the following requirements and specifications:
 Server machine
 CPU: INTEL 64 bit Quad-Core with 12MB of cache (latest version available)
 CPU clock above 2 GHz
 32 GB RAM
 Dual power supply module in hot stand-by configuration (redundancy)
 USB ports (N.4 ports)
 Ethernet ports (N.4 ports)
 Serial ports (N.1 port)
 Hard disk drives of 1TB each one, at least two disks
 48X/32X/48X/16X CD-RW/DVD-ROM
 Software platform “Microsoft Windows latest version”; language of the country.
 Hardware based on standard RAID 1 for hot swap drive
 Diagnostic and fault analysis capability
 Smart UPS for Server/Network Cabinet, at least 4 hours estimated runtime
 19” Color LCD Monitor, keyboard, mouse
 Stand rack cabinet with KVM switch
CODICE – CODE

169 of 287
 Ethernet switch with at least 16 ports and as many fiber optic ports as fiber optic rings to be
deployed on the project, plus the corresponding spare ports. The Ethernet switch shall feature
redundant power supplies.
Local SCADA system shall acquire all necessary data from all host devices on the network. Data acquisition
time will not be greater than 1 minute.
Local SCADA server shall be designed and supplied to include data storage and database management
(historical database and real-time database). Relational database shall be used to exchange information
within external servers. Oracle or SQL Server are included in the scope of supply.
Server machine shall have capability for memory expansion up to 10 TB.
Within Local SCADA system architecture, Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices could be considered in
order to allow LAN users to create shared volumes that can be accessed by one or more LAN users and it
shall be used as data back-up of the main SCADA inside the delivery station. NAS volumes (NAS Shares)
can be accessed by more than one LAN user or LAN server at the same time.
NAS devices shall provide central, consolidated data storage available to LAN users through a standard
network connection. Data storage shall be based on RAID 1. Typical access to files shall be provided using
network file sharing protocols such as NFS (Network File System popular in UNIX systems), SMB/CIFS
(Server Message Block/ Common Internet File System used with Microsoft windows) or AFP (Apple Filing
Protocol). Network Attached Storage devices can be used for multi-tasking issues and multiple requests as
they serve information, applications and act as storage.
Contractor shall advise on the best solution for NAS and SCADA server.
Each SCADA system shall be installed in dedicated 19” rack cabinet, IP52 or better.
To protect the critical data from equipment failure and adverse environmental factors, a dedicated
software/hardware shall be present to manage:
 Disk Backup function
 Data Recovery
 Space memory management
 Database protection
 Disaster Recovery
A. COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
For the data exchange with each conversion cabin RTU/PLC, the local SCADA should be flexible to handle
at least one of the following TCP/IP communication protocol time stamp supporting:
 IEC-104
 DNP 3.0
 IEC 61850
 OPC-UA/XML
The use of MODBUS TCP/IP could be evaluated jointly between EGP and Contractor, depending of the
CODICE – CODE

170 of 287
project and of the quantity of hosts to query on the network since in any case the MODBUS Master shall poll
all Slaves within 1 minute.
Supplier shall design all system in order to have a MODBUS Client (Server) opening parallel TCP/IP
connections with a remote MODBUS server. One connection per application could be a good practice.
For the data exchange with the Plant SCADA, the Local SCADA should be flexible to handle at least one of
the following TCP/IP communication protocol:
 IEC-104
 IEC-61850
 Server protocol to exchange data between databases (HTTP, HTTPS, MYSQL, VNC, SSH,
OPC-UA)
This data exchange must include the whole real-time database contained in the Local SCADA.
Contractor and submitted to EGP for final approval before use.
The Local SCADA shall acquire all the data from each conversion cabin.
Any optimization or reduction of the number of data acquired shall be proposed by Supplier during the
engineering phase and submitted to the Client for approval.
In case the hardwired signals in each conversion cabin are not acquired by the RTU/PLC but by a separated
Ethernet Remote I/O module, the local SCADA shall be able to acquire it autonomously with a maximum
time of 5 seconds.
In case of active string box, all the signals of the strings shall be acquired by the RTU/ PLC of the cabin and
transmitted to the Local SCADA.
In case of passive string boxes, the RTU/ PLC of the cabin is only required to directly monitor the DC
Combiner Box in order to allow the zone monitoring and detection. Afterward the RTU/ PLC of the cabin shall
transmit all signals to the Local SCADA.
Upon request a dedicated engineering workstation (PC) shall be provided to manage, upgrade, configure,
implement and to add new applicative tools regarding all devices of architecture:
 Local SCADA,
 local HMI in the conversion cabins,
 RTUs/PLCs,
 Power Plant Controller,
 Metering,
 Any other configurable equipment.
All software packages and tools shall be installed and provided with official licenses.
The software licenses shall be provided for programs loaded in the engineering workstation for “run time”
CODICE – CODE

171 of 287
functionality and for project development: configuration, modification or debugging. All those activities for
project development shall be made in run-time mode and on-line status without reducing performance of
system.
From the engineering workstation it shall be possible to monitor the system status and its essential
components. Furthermore it shall be possible to develop and to configure: the database, Applicative
processes, HMI and I/O configuration.
A dedicated diagnostic graphic display shall be implemented in the local SCADA HMI in order to show the
status of the Ethernet network of the whole PV plant included in the fiber optic ring, by means of deploying
SNMP protocol. This graphic display should also display the status of the Ethernet devices inside each cabin
unit.
B. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
Local SCADA system equipment shall have the capability to perform the following functions:
 Data displaying in real-time
 Data recording and storage
 Alarming
 Sequential process control and Numerical calculation
 Internal Diagnostic monitoring (on-line diagnostic)
 Network connectivity
 Sequence of Events (SOE) capability for events or alarms
 Log digital and analog SOEs to an external printer, PC or to a .CSV file shall be foreseen
The entire SCADA system shall provide for:

 Safety of equipment, people and environment
 Power plant operation by local stations
 Interface with external network to allow the operation of the power plant by remote control room
 Analysis of local alarms and power production trips
 Interface to allow remote power production trip analysis
 Local and historical data storage
 Dynamic real-time data publication using Data Base Management System
 Historical data publication using Data Base Management System
C. SOFTWARE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall supply software and licenses to realize human machine interface, graphic pages and
dynamic pictures visualization.
The graphic pages shall have the capability to report alarms and abnormal conditions for each variable
acquired
 configure digital and analog points (physical and software points)
 configure alarms with different priority and to realize alarm management system
CODICE – CODE

172 of 287
 configure status and realize log book

 realize Sequence of Events (SOE) with file recording time and data per each event
 manage real-time and historical database (using Oracle or SQL Server)
 configure a scalable system
Programmable logic software and licenses shall be supplied for RTUs and PLCs. The programmable logic
software shall execute Boolean logic, sequences, word, timer/counter, and program control operations as
well custom control logic equations. The programmable logic software shall be able to work out algorithms
to monitoring and govern the photovoltaic power plant.
Contractor shall produce documentation of programs or special logic and other algorithm schemes inside
PLC/RTU/PPC. Paper copy documentation of Software program and Structured Advanced languages shall
be produced according to IEC 61131; Programs and logic diagrams shall not be an extraction of software
configuration of control and SCADA system, but are to be made on hard-paper copy.
D. HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) DESIGN CRITERIA
HMI graphic pages shall be used by the operator to monitor and make commands to photovoltaic power
plant. The commands shall be done using mouse and key-board.
The following groups of HMI graphic pages shall be realized:

 menu pages
 synoptic electrical measurements pages
 alarms and interlocks pages
 pages for querying the historical database
 real-time trend and historical database pages
 pages for setting of operating parameters
 system diagnostic pages
The HMI graphic page shall be subdivided internally at least in the following areas:
 menus area where it is possible to have access to different typology of the HMI and make
navigation through them, alarm list, page of measurement and trends, archives, configuration
and general information on the system
 Variables, signals and alarms area where it is possible to see real-time variables and devices
status and to have direct access to the alarm list. Tags and engineering units shall be present
for each variables
Basically the graphic pages shall visualize active devices of the power plant where their status is represented.
For each device, the color and visualization shall change according to the last position obtained by the device.
For example color and shape representation of circuit-breaker positions (open-closed), motor operations
(running/not running), actuator and motor status (available/not available), discrepancy between commands
CODICE – CODE

173 of 287
and feedback device position (open/close command but not matching with open/close status, the same for
start/stop with running/not running), and others active device.
Customized start-up and trip plant graphic pages shall be realized where there are shown critical and not-
critical alarms, interlocks and permissive signals.
Graphic pages with an alarms summary shall also be realized. Graphic pages regarding grouping of alarms,
abnormal conditions and interlocks signals shall be made gathering all relevant signals that are functionally
homogeneous.
The plant graphic pages shall be submitted to EGP for approval prior to being implemented into the system.
At least one graphic page shall be created showing the actual values of active power, reactive power/cos phi
and total energy delivered into Grid Network.
Any modification to any graphic pages to optimize the monitoring and power production during the
commission phase and during the plant warranty period is included in the Contractor scope of work without
additional costs.
E. ALARM MANAGEMENT CRITERIA
Into the whole SCADA system a chronological alarm list shall be present where it will be possible to identify
the current variable status, identification variables code and type of alarm together with description,
priority/severity level and time of event (time stamp).
Audible alarm annunciation shall be used when new alarms arrive.
Four different priority levels can be considered for alarms:
 High priority level should be used to alarm plant conditions with potentially high consequences
unless the operator takes immediate corrective action. The severity of consequences is
measured in terms of safety of personnel, protection of equipment, environment, and maintaining
and optimizing power production.
 Medium priority level should alarm plant conditions that require attention or action that have a
limited time to avoid consequences. For this kind of priority alarms, there should be sufficient
time available for the operator to act effectively.
 Low priority level should be used for plant conditions where the need for action is less urgent.
 No Priority Level (Normal) should be used for normal operation.
Besides this, the vendor shall register all alarms included in a per-inverter basis list of points.
Different alarm’s priority/severity shall have different color in the alarm list page. Color association shall be
defined together with EGP.
The alarms identified must be memorized and displayed on the SCADA servers within 1 seconds of their
occurrence. The alarms shall be acknowledged either in the chronological alarm list or on the other pages
for which the presentation of the alarms message is provided.
The following functionality shall be performed by the system:

CODICE – CODE

174 of 287
 Alarm System Performance (Alarms per Time Period, Frequent Alarms, Chattering Alarms,
Priority Distribution, Alarm Summary, etc.)
 Alarm System Settings (Alarms Set by Priority, Disabled/Inhibited Alarms, etc.)
 Devices Changes (Alarm Enable States, Alarm Priorities, etc.)
 "Alarm First Out" logic shall be configured to identify the root cause that tripped the power plant.
One graphic page shall be created for Alarm First Out
For alarm management, as general guidelines the following standard must be followed by Contractor:
EEMUA 191 “Alarm systems: a guide to design, management and procurement”, ISA SP 18.2 “Alarm
Systems Management and Design Guide.”
F. DATA BASE, TREND AND REPORT
The SCADA system shall have archiving data capabilities. Two kinds of archiving shall be realized: real-time
database and historical database.
Real-time data archive unit shall be sufficient for continuous variables for a period 1 month at sampling rate
of 1 minute.
Data Historical archive unit shall be sufficient to keep a historic database with capability of a minimum one
(1) year with 1 minute minimum sampling rate of the main data. Varying the sampling rate shall make it
possible to store more points or for longer periods.
SCADA system shall be capable of displaying both real-time and historical trends as follow:
A. real-time trend shall be for a minimum of 1 hour at 1 min sampling rate;
B. historical trend shall be for a minimum period of 24 hours.
For each day, historic daily data file shall be generated by SCADA and it shall put in massive storage memory.
From the Remote Station it shall be possible to get access to the massive storage memory.
The historical data base shall allow trending of at least N°5 signals in the same graphic and shall produce a
table of the 5 min data (.CSV file), where a group of measures will be stored as follow:
 Average of variable within 5 min,
 Maximum of variable within 5 min,
 Minimum of variable within 5 min,
 Median value of variable within 5 min,
 Standard deviation of variable within 5 min,
The historical data base shall contain tables with the theoretical production curves of:
 Each string box,
 Each module,
 Each inverter,
 Complete plant.
CODICE – CODE

175 of 287
Web-based thin-client access to the historical data shall be supplied. Add-ins for Microsoft Word and Excel
provide additional access to the database of Historian.
G. POWER PRODUCTION MONITORING
By means of a dedicated software tool, the following information shall be available in the Local SCADA
(where applicable and depending on string box configuration):
 The production of each string box
 The production of each module
 The production of each inverter
The above calculated data shall be stored with 5 min data.

Another software tool shall be able to graphically compare each average of the above 5 min variable data
with the respected theoretical curve, considering irradiance and the ambient condition for the normalization.
The software tool shall advise with a warning, at run time level, when the power production is out of the
tolerance comparing the theoretical curve.
H. NOISE IMMUNITY (RFI/EMI)
The systems shall be capable of accepting various signal inputs for its direct use while preventing noise
errors due to electromagnet or UHF radio frequency interference including hand-held or mobile
communications equipment, nearby radio stations, electrical storms, solenoids, relays or conductors carrying
heavy currents.
Regarding to electromagnetic compatibility immunity, each SCADA system equipment shall be in compliance
with the following standards for conducted emission and radiated emission:
 IEC 60255-25 conducted RF
 IEC 61000-4-16 conducted common mode disturbance
 IEC 60255-22-2 electrostatic discharge
 IEC 60255-22-4 fast transient/burst
 IEC 61000-4-8 and IEC 61000-4-9 magnetic field.
 IEC 61000-6-2 – electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-2: generic standards – immunity
for industrial environments.
 IEC 61000-6-4 – electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-4: generic standards – emission
standard for industrial environments.
I. APPENDIX
I1. Signals to be acquired about soiling measurement systems

Here below the typical amount of signals to be acquired about soiling measurement systems, which
shall be typically constituted by the following main components:
 Measurement and Control Unit
 PV 1 device: PV cell or PV module identical to the others installed in the field, designed as the
“clean” reference (automatically or manually cleaned)
CODICE – CODE

176 of 287
 PV 2 device: PV cell or PV module identical to the others installed in the field, designed as the
“soiled” reference
 Wash Unit (optional)
PV Read/
Parameter Unit Meaning of parameter
device Write
Returns the measured irradiance, which is calculated from the temperature-
corrected short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV device, using internally stored
Read calibration constants.
1 Irradiance W/m2
Only The temperature-corrected Isc used in the irradiance calculation is calculated from
the measured Isc and measured temperature using internally stored calibration
constants.
Read Returns the measured short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV device. This value is not
1 Isc A
Only temperature-corrected.
Read
1 PV Temperature °C Returns the temperature of the PV device measured using the attached RTD.
Only
Read Returns the measured maximum power (Pmax) of the PV device. This value is not
1 Pmax W
Returns the measured irradiance, which is calculated from the temperature-
corrected short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV device, using internally stored
Read calibration constants.
2 Irradiance W/m2
Only The temperature-corrected Isc used in the irradiance calculation is calculated from
the measured Isc and measured temperature using internally stored calibration
constants.
Read Returns the measured short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV device. This value is not
2 Isc A
Read
2 PV Temperature °C Returns the temperature of the PV device measured using the attached RTD.
Only
Read Returns the measured maximum power (Pmax) of the PV device. This value is not
2 Pmax W
Returns the measured Soiling Ratio of the PV device. The ratio is calculated from
Read the device's temperature-corrected output as referenced to the irradiance
2 Soiling Ratio n/a
Only measured by PV Channel 1, which must be kept clean. The value is a weighted
average of the Isc Index and Pmax Index.
Returns the ratio of the temperature-corrected Isc of the PV Channel 2 device to
Read its expected temperature-corrected Isc under clean conditions at the current
2 Isc Index n/a
Only irradiance measured by PV Channel 1. If the PV Channel 2 device is clean, the
ratio should be close to 1.00.
Returns the ratio of the temperature-corrected Pmax of the PV Channel 2 device
Read to its expected temperature-corrected Pmax under clean conditions at the current
2 Pmax Index n/a
Only irradiance measured by PV Channel 1. If the PV Channel 2 device is clean, the
ratio should be close to 1.00.
When the measurement and control unit of soiling measurement system is
Initiate Write configured to triggered mode (optional), write a 1 to this register to initiate a
n/a n/a
Measurements Only measurement. Data will then become available for readout at the appropriate
registers. In periodic mode (if any), this register does not need to be used.
Read
n/a Event Code n/a This register returns an Event Code (optional).
Only
Read
n/a Fluid Low n/a Status of fluid level in wash unit tank (optional).
Only
Read
n/a Pump State n/a Status of pump in wash unit tank (optional).
Only
I2. Signals to be exchanged between the LOCAL SCADA and the Plant SCADA
In the following, the minimum amount of signals to be exchanged between the LOCAL SCADA and the Plant
SCADA is reported here below:
CODICE – CODE

177 of 287
DATA NAME DESCRIPTION SOURCE NOTES
Met Stations
Ambient Ambient Ambient temperature measured by suitable sensors

Met station equipment
Temperature temperature installed in the plant
Barometric Barometric Barometric pressure measured by suitable sensors

Met station equipment
Pressure pressure installed in the plant
Module Measure of module

Met station equipment Measure module temperature measured by PT100
temperature temperature
Rain measure Level of the rain Met station equipment Measure of level of the rain
Measure of relative
Relative humidity Met station equipment Measure of relative humidity
humidity
Solar radiation
Measure of solar
on horizontal Met station equipment Measure of solar radiation in the horizontal plane
radiation
plane
Solar radiation Measure of solar
Met station equipment Measure of solar radiation in the plane of solar modules
on tilted plane radiation
Wind direction at Wind direction measured by suitable sensors installed

Wind Direction Met station equipment
the plant in the plant
Wind speed at the Wind speed measured by suitable sensors installed in

Wind Speed Met station equipment
plant the plant
Met station Any possible code related to the status of the met
Code Met station equipment
status/alarms station (e.g. fault)
Solar Plants
Any code or signaling concerning alarms of the plant
Alarms Alarm code PV Plant equipment devices (e.g. protective relays, fuse alarm, GU fault,
etc.)
PV Plant equipment Commands towards any possible plant equipment that
Commands related
Commands can be operated remotely (e.g. open/close breakers,
to the plant
stop/start GU, etc.)
PV Plant equipment All the electric measures available in the plant (at least:
Electric Electric measures
AC and DC powers,energies, currents and voltages),
measures of the plant
measured at different points (at least: stringbox and
Measure of PV Plant equipment MPPT)
Measures of mechanical parameters related to the
Mechanical
mechanical devices installed in the plant (at least: inverter fan
measures
parameters speed, inclination of modules in case of tracking
Status related to PV Plant equipment systems, etc.)
Status of Electric Status related to any possible device installed in the
the devices
Devices plant (e.g. breakers status, GU status, etc.)
installed in the
plant PV Plant equipment Measure of temperatures concerning the devices
Temperature Measure of
installed in the plant (at least: solar modules, IGBT,
measures temperatures
Inverter case, technical buildings)
Other signals and PV Plant equipment
Other signals Any other signal and measure concerning the
measures
and measures equipments installed in the plant
concerning the
plant
I3. Minimum digital and analog signals list

In the following the MINIMUM DIGITAL AND ANALOG SIGNALS LIST that each inverter shall be able to
exchange with the Local SCADA platform:
Signal Signal Type Notes
AC Current Line 1 of Inverter Analog
CODICE – CODE

178 of 287

AC Voltage Line 1-2 of Inverter Analog
Active Limit Setpoint of Inverter Analog
Active Power of Inverter Analog
Cosfi of Inverter Analog
Cosfi Setpoint of Inverter Analog
Field DC Current of Inverter Analog
Field DC Power of Inverter Analog
Field DC Voltage of Inverter Analog
Frequency of Inverter Analog
Internal Temperature of Inverter Analog
Number of working module of Inverter Analog
Reactive Power of Inverter Analog
Reactive Setpoint of Inverter Analog
Total energy DC side of Inverter Analog
Total Energy of Inverter Analog
Voltage Setpoint of Inverter Analog
Temperature of IGBT Analog
String box current measure Analog
AC surge protection Digital
AC Switch Open Alarm Digital
Automatic & Running Digital
Automatic & Stand-by Digital
Automatic & Stopped by remote Digital
Current Sensor Fault Alarm Digital
DC Isolation Loss Alarm Digital
DC Open/Close Timeout Alarm Digital
DC Precharge timeout Digital
DC surge protection Digital
DC Switch not ready to close Digital
DC Switch Open Alarm Digital
Degraded Service Alarm Digital
Derating Alarm Digital
EEprom Fault Alarm Digital
Emergency Power Off Alarm Digital
Fan X Alarm Digital Where X=1, 2, 3, etc
Grid frequency out of range Digital
Insulation Loss Alarm Digital
Internal Protection High Frequency Alarm Digital
Internal Protection High Voltage Alarm Digital
Internal Protection Low Frequency Alarm Digital
Internal Protection Low Voltage Alarm Digital
Inverter Enabled to receive PPC Command Digital If applicable
Inverter Enabled to receive remote Command Digital If applicable
Inverter Enabled to receive remote Setpoint Digital If applicable
Inverter internal fault Alarm Digital
Inverter Open Door Alarm Digital
Local / Remote Status of Inverter Digital
Main Board Alarm X of Inverter Digital Where X=1, 2, 3, etc
Manual or Automatic & Operator Stop or EPO Alarm Digital
Module not answer alarm Digital
Module X Alarm of Inverter Digital Where X=1, 2, 3, etc
OverCurrent DC Alarm Digital
OverCurrent R Alarm Digital
OverCurrent S Alarm Digital
CODICE – CODE

179 of 287

OverCurrent T Alarm Digital
Overfrecuency Digital
Overheating Alarm Digital
OverVoltage RS Alarm Digital
OverVoltage ST Alarm Digital
OverVoltage TR Alarm Digital
OverVoltage UDC Alarm Digital
Phase Sequence Alarm Digital
Power Limit Active Alarm Digital
PPC Comm Error Alarm Digital
Status ON/OFF of Inverter Digital
Temperature MAX Alarm Digital
Temperature Warning Alarm Digital
Unbalance Current Digital
UnderVoltage RS Alarm Digital
UnderVoltage ST Alarm Digital
UnderVoltage TR Alarm Digital
UnderVoltage UDC Alarm Digital
Unexpected DC Open/Close Alarm Digital
Moreover, independently from the here above reported alarm list, it shall be understood that the inverter
platform is required to detect and record any cause (identified by alarm) related to every trip event should
occur, in order to allow offline evaluation of failure root analysis.
During the warranty period any modification required by EGP related to the CU and the behavior in terms of
malfunction shall be totally in charge of the Supplier. EGP requires to provide to the SCADA system, as
independent alarm signals, any inverter internal software/hardware protection variable/magnitude that can
cause an automatic stop, trip of the inverter or power reduction.
Also whole specific needed tools (hardware and software) shall be provided in order to identify any
malfunction in the inverters or the CU’s.
I4. Minimum signal list and the relevant taxonomy required at Plant SCADA level for each
Inverter
Signal Label Eng_Unit Aggregation Required Signal name
IDC A Avg, Max, Min Input 1 Current (A)
VDC V Avg, Max, Min DC Input Voltage (V)
PDC kW Avg, Max, Min DC Input Power (kW)
IAC A Avg, Max, Min Grid current (Average of phase 1,2,3)
IACR A Avg, Max, Min Grid current phase 1 (A)
IACS A Avg, Max, Min Grid current phase 2 (A)
IACT A Avg, Max, Min Grid current phase 3 (A)
VAC V Avg, Max, Min Grid Voltage (Average of phase r,s,t)
VACR V Avg, Max, Min RMS Line Voltage, Phase R (V)
VACS V Avg, Max, Min RMS Line Voltage, Phase S (V)
VACT V Avg, Max, Min RMS Line Voltage, Phase T (V)
PAC kW Avg, Max, Min Inverter AC Power (Average of phase r,s,t)
CODICE – CODE

180 of 287
Signal Label Eng_Unit Aggregation Required Signal name

PACR kW Avg, Max, Min Line Active Power, Phase R (kW)
PACS kW Avg, Max, Min Line Active Power, Phase S (kW)
PACT kW Avg, Max, Min Line Active Power, Phase T (kW)
FAC Hz Avg, Max, Min Grid Frequency (Hz)
ENERGY kWh Avg, Max, Min Total Energy (kWh)
T_AIR_OUT °C Avg, Max, Min Inverter_air_temperature (°C)
T_REEL °C Avg, Max, Min Reel Temperature (°C)
T_HEAT_SINK °C Avg, Max, Min Heat Sink Temperature (°C)
T_ALIM °C Avg, Max, Min Alim. Temperature (°C)
T_BOARD °C Avg, Max, Min Control Board Temperature Measure (°C)
T_IGBT °C Avg, Max, Min IGBT Temperature Measure (°C)
T_CU °C Avg, Max, Min Internal Cabin Temperature (°C)
FAN_SPEED rpm Avg, Max, Min fan_speed (RPM)
For each of here above listed signal, three different types of data aggregations are required:
 Average (_Avg) containing the Average values of the signals in the relative time interval;
 Maximum (_Max) containing the Maximum values of the signals in the relative time interval;
 Minimum (_Min) containing the Minimum values of the signals in the relative time interval.
From the Plant SCADA platform it shall be possible to export the here above mentioned data through a
.CSV list format as follows:
"PlantName_MeasureType_AggregationType”
(e.g.: "PlantName_Inverter_Avg").
With regard to the time resolution required, it is required to provide 1 min resolution-based data.
If 1 min resolution cannot be guaranteed, different resolution could be accepted (5, 10 or 15 min) unless
all the three aggregation levels (Avg, Max, Min) are provided.
Herein attached the .CSV list format to be used.
Column “Log_Interval” shall specify which aggregation level is taken in account.
I5. Minimum signal list and the relevant taxonomy required at Plant SCADA level for each
Meteo Station
Eng Aggregation
Signal_Label Signal name
Unit Required
Tilt ° Avg, Max, Min Tilt of the relative Sensor (if there is a tracker please use the code: 999999)
Azimuth ° Avg, Max, Min Azimuth of the relative Sensor (if there is a tracker please use the code: 999999)
GTI W/m2 Avg, Max, Min Irradiance Tilted from pyranometer (or solar cell)
GHI W/m2 Avg, Max, Min Irradiance Horizontal from pyranometer (or solar cell)
DHI W/m2 Avg, Max, Min Diffused Horizontal Irradiance
TEMP_AMB °C Avg, Max, Min Enviroment Temperature
TEMP_M °C Avg, Max, Min PV Module Temperature
WS m/s Avg, Max, Min Wind Speed
WD ° Avg, Max, Min Wind Direction
CODICE – CODE

181 of 287
Eng Aggregation
Signal_Label Signal name
Unit Required
RAIN mm Avg, Max, Min Pluviometer
SNOW mm Avg, Max, Min Snow
RH kg/m3 Avg, Max, Min Relative Humidity
PRESSURE Pa Avg, Max, Min Atmospheric Pressure
For each of here above listed signal, three different types of data aggregations are required:
 Average (_Avg) containing the Average values of the signals in the relative time interval;
 Maximum (_Max) containing the Maximum values of the signals in the relative time interval;
 Minimum (_Min) containing the Minimum values of the signals in the relative time interval.
From the Plant SCADA platform it shall be possible to export the here above mentioned data through a .CSV
list format as follows:
"PlantName_MeasureType_AggregationType”
(e.g.: "PlantName_Meteo_Avg").
With regard to the time resolution required, it is required to provide 1 min resolution-based data.
If 1 min resolution cannot be guaranteed, different resolution could be accepted (5, 10 or 15 min) unless all
the three aggregation levels (Avg, Max, Min) are provided.
Herein attached the .CSV list format to be used.
Column “Log_Interval” shall specify which aggregation level is taken in account.
1.2.7. METEOROLOGICAL MONITORING SYSTEM
CODE DESCRIPTION
IEC 61724-2017 Photovoltaic system performance - Part 1: Monitoring
Hot Dip Galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles -
DS/ISO 1461
Specifications and test methods
EN 1011 Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials.
Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use -
EN 61326-1
EMC requirements - Part 1: General requirement
Quality requirements for welding. Fusion welding of metallic
EN 729-2
materials. Comprehensive quality requirements.
EUROCODE-EN-1991-1-4 Actions on structures - Part 1-4: General actions -Wind actions
Design of steel structures - Part 3-1: Towers, masts and chimneys –
EUROCODE-EN-1993-3-1
Towers and masts
IEC 60529-2004 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 61724-2017 Photovoltaic system performance - Part 1: Monitoring
Solar Energy - Specification and classification of Instruments for
ISO 9060-2018
measuring hemispherical solar and direct solar radiation
CODICE – CODE

182 of 287
CODE DESCRIPTION
ISO 9846 Calibration of a pyranometer using a pyrheliometer
Solar Energy - Calibration of field pyranometers by comparison to a
ISO 9847
reference pyranometer
General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration
ISO/IEC 17025
laboratories
TIA/EIA-222-F The tower structure shall comply with the American building code
1.2.7.1. SYSTEM
1.2.7.1.1. Meteorological Tower
The Contractor shall provide one or more meteorological towers as main systems for weather conditions
monitoring in the PV plant, which is necessary to analyze and monitor the power plant production.
The meteorological towers shall be installed in one or more focal points of the plant according to EGP
indications, far from the cabins to avoid falsified measure.
The characteristic and number of meteorological tower is influenced by the size of the project, according to
the following table:
PV Plant Nominal Power (AC) Number of towers

< 5 MW 1
≥ 5 MW and < 40 MW 2
≥ 40 MW and < 100 MW 3
≥ 100 MW and < 200 MW 4
≥ 200 MW and < 300 MW 5
≥ 300 MW and < 500 MW 6
≥ 500 MW and < 750 MW 7
≥ 750 MW 8
Following the first meteorological tower, called “Central meteorological tower”, all the other towers (called
“Secondary towers”) shall have a simplified structure, as in the following table:
Central Secondary
Sensor type Parameters measured
Tower Tower
Pyranometer Measurement of global horizontal solar irradiance X X
Temperature, relative humidity, precipitation

All-in-one weather
intensity, precipitation type, precipitation quantity, X X
sensor
air pressure, wind direction, wind speed
Measurement of global & diffuse horizontal solar
SPN1 (or similar) X
irradiance
Back Pyranometer Measurement of global reflected solar irradiance X

CODICE – CODE

183 of 287
Central Secondary
Sensor type Parameters measured
Tower Tower
UV Radiometer Measurement of UV irradiance X
All the environmental data shall be transmitted to the SCADA, to the function Performance Ratio.
TOWER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

The towers structure shall be made of lattice or tubular/tapered self-standing met masts. As a minimum
requirement, the mast shall be compliant with all the requirements of the following normative: EUROCODE-
EN-1993-3-1 and EUROCODE-EN-1991-2-4 (or equivalent state building code) with a minimum Vref=133
km/h with 1 cm of ice. The mast shall be manufactured in coal steel according to the EN1011 and EN 729-2
standards (or equivalent state building code) and, for highly corrosive environments, it shall be galvanized
according to the normative DS/ISO 1461 (hot immersion, which means a zinc bath immersion melted at
450º). This system shall guarantee protection of the entire surface of the mast. . Aluminum masts are also
welcome, with the additional compliance requirement with EUROCODE-EN 1999-1-1+A1 (or equivalent state
building code).
A possible layout for the tower and its sensors is reported in the following figure. The orientation of the booms
of the central tower shall be according to the reported top view.
Central meteorological tower Secondary tower/s

CODICE – CODE

184 of 287
Central tower top view
In case of marine or highly corrosive ambient, special painting procedure will be requested to ensure required
durability. The joining between the plate mounting and the foundation shall be done with steel bolts. All
material shall be treated to avoid corrosion of the masts on the entire surface.
The tower shall be supplied with all the elements needed for proper assembling and erection, taking into
account the soil characteristics. The choice of the devices for tower assembling and erection is under the full
responsibility of the Contractor.
CIVIL WORKS BEFORE THE INSTALLATION

Depending on the characteristics specified by the manufacturer, which supplies the meteorological tower,
the installer shall notify in writing to EGP of the detailed assembly procedure and await its approval for the
work in order to guarantee the quality of the assembly.
The meteorological tower shall be installed in one or more focal points of the plant and far from the cabins to
avoid falsified measures and according to specific EGP indications.
1.2.7.1.2. Field monitoring system
The Contractor shall provide the field monitoring system, which includes all the sensors distributed in the PV
field according to specific EGP indications.
These sensors shall be placed close to a subfield row of modules, as close as possible to the inverter cabin
to minimize the power and data cabling. They shall include the following instrumentation:
 Digital thermopile pyranometer to measure the solar radiation on the modules tilt angle or on the
tracker modules plan. Hence, they shall be placed directly on the module racking or on an extension
arm, to keep the same tilt angle as the modules, avoiding shadings and reflections completely. For
tracking system these sensors shall be placed in the central position of the tracker (on the axis),
following the same tilt angle tracked by the modules all the time;
CODICE – CODE

185 of 287
 Module temperature sensor;

 Digital thermopile pyranometer to measure the average radiation on the back surface of the panel
array. Also in this case, it shall be installed in the central position of the tracker (on the axis), following
the same tilt angle tracked by the modules all the time;
 Soiling measurement system (Atonometrics device);
The number of the sensors to be installed will depend on the PV plant nominal power, according to the
following table:
Number of sensors7
Plant Size (AC power) Pyranometers in the plane of the array Temperature Soiling
(front and back8) sensors devices
< 5 MW 2 6 1
≥ 5 MW to < 40 MW 1 every 10 MW (minimum 2) 12 2

≥ 750 MW 1 every 30 MW (minimum 12) 48 8
The field monitoring system shall include also a digital radiation monitoring system as a reference PV cell, of
the same type as the ones installed in the field, being one for the entire PV Plant.
For each sensor, the corresponding measured quantity shall be presented as average, standard deviation,
minimum and maximum within the recording interval. The sampling interval and record interval for all the
sensors shall be according to the IEC 61724-2017 as reported in the following table:
Units Sampling interval Recording interval

Radiation W/m2 3 sec 1 min
Module temperature °C 3 sec 1 min
Soiling device 1 min 1 min
All the environmental data shall be transmitted to the SCADA, to the function Performance Ratio.
INSTALLATION
The Contractor shall include the installation of all above-mentioned environmental monitoring sensors,
7 In case the number of pyranometers is not exact, consider the following entire number as the final one
8 Only in case of bifacial modules
CODICE – CODE

186 of 287
including the:
 Power supply and data cabling from the closest inverter cabin;
 The associated connections of the probes in shielded cable, which shall be placed inside its own
dedicated piping with a minimum protection of IP67
 The fastening supports and any other ancillary item required to provide a finished operational unit,
including the eventual programming.
1.2.7.2. INSTRUMENTS
1.2.7.2.1. Sensors
1.2.7.2.1.1. Pyranometers
The Contractor shall provide thermopile digital pyranometers.

Pyranometers can be used either to measure the global horizontal irradiation (GHI) or the reflected ground
radiation (Albedo). In both cases they shall be equipped with a heating unit. Heating of pyranometers shall
be guaranteed at daytime and during night, when the temperature goes below 0°C, and always between 6:00
AM and 7:00 AM to avoid condensation.
Only for pyranometers aimed at the measurement of the GHI, they shall be equipped with an external
ventilation unit (fans), to be activated when the GHI ≥ 500 W/m2 or when the temperature is greater or equal
than 35°C.
The pyranometers shall always be classified as Class A (High accuracy) in accordance to ISO 9060-2018
and IEC 61724-2017.
All pyranometers shall be calibrated according to ISO 9846 and ISO 9847. The Contractor shall issue the
calibration certificate to EGP after the installation. The calibration report shall conform to the requirements of
ISO/IEC 17025.
1.2.7.2.1.2. SPN1
The Contractor shall provide a measurement instrument like SPN1 device by Delta-T or similar, to measure
the diffuse horizontal irradiation.
It shall be classified as Class B or C in accordance to ISO 9060-2018 and IEC 61724-2017.
The Contractor shall issue a factory certificate to guarantee the sensor calibration.
1.2.7.2.1.3. All-in-one weather
The Contractor shall provide an all-in-one weather sensor for the measurement of temperature, relative
humidity, precipitation quantity, air pressure, wind direction and wind speed.
All the measurements acquired by the all-in-one station shall comply with the Class A classification in
accordance to ISO 9060-2018 and IEC 61724-2017.
The Contractor shall issue a factory certificate to guarantee the sensor calibration.
CODICE – CODE

187 of 287
1.2.7.2.1.4. Soiling device
The Contractor shall provide the Atonometrics device to measure the soiling ratio, in compliance with IEC
61724-1 for what concerns the calculations, measurements and instrument calibration. This measuring
system operates on two PV modules of the same type of the ones installed in the PV plant. One of them is
manually washed, as reported in the following figure.
The soiling device has to measure the irradiance, short-circuit current, temperature and maximum power in
both the clean and the dirty modules, named PV1 and PV2 respectively, with an uncertainty of ± 2%.
The following table includes the parameters that shall be available from the Atonometrics device for the
system monitoring.
The acquisition frequency of these parameters shall be every minute.
The soiling device shall communicate via Ethernet using the Modbus TCP protocol.
The soiling device shall be installed in a shaded location to minimize heating of the electronics.
Parameter Name Unit Description
The measured irradiance, which is calculated from the

Irradiance W/m2 temperature-corrected short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV
device, using internally stored calibration constants.
PV Module 1
The measured short-circuit current (Isc) of the PV device.

Isc A
This value is not temperature-corrected.
The temperature of the PV device measured using the
PV Temperature °C attached RTD or from the PV device open-circuit voltage
(Voc).
The measured maximum power (Pmax) of the PV device. This
Pmax W
value is not temperature-corrected.
Irradiance W/m2 See notes for PV 1

PV Module 2
Isc A See notes for PV 1

PV Temperature °C See notes for PV 1
Pmax W See notes for PV 1
The instantaneous soiling ratio of the PV device. The ratio is
Soiling Ratio calculated from the device's temperature-corrected output as
referenced to the irradiance measured by PV 1, which shall
CODICE – CODE

188 of 287
Parameter Name Unit Description

be kept clean. The value returned is a weighted average of
the soiling ratio Isc and soiling ratio Pmax.
The instantaneous soiling ratio Isc (also known as Isc Index),
the ratio of the temperature-corrected Isc of the PV 2 device
Soiling Ratio Isc n.a. to its expected temperature-corrected Isc under clean
conditions at the current irradiance measured by PV 1. If the
PV 2 device is clean, the ratio should be close to 1.00.
The instantaneous soiling ratio Pmax (also known as Pmax
Index), the ratio of the temperature-corrected Pmax of the PV
Soiling Ratio Pmax n.a. 2 device to its expected temperature-corrected Pmax under
clean conditions at the current irradiance measured by PV 1.
If the PV 2 device is clean, the ratio should be close to 1.00.
The daily average value of the soiling ratio, updated each
Soiling Ratio Daily
n.a. day at the end of the soiling analysis time window. This is the
Average
user’s primary output for soiling ratio.
The daily average value of the soiling ratio Isc, updated each
Soiling Ratio Isc Daily
n.a. day at the end of the soiling analysis time window. This is the
Average
user’s primary output for soiling ratio Isc.
The daily average value of the soiling ratio Pmax, updated
Soiling Ratio Pmax
each day at the end of the soiling analysis time window. This
Daily Average
is the user’s primary output for soiling ratio Pmax.
The daily average value of the irradiance of points used in
Irradiance Daily
n.a. the soiling ratio averaging analyses, updated each day at the
Average
end of the soiling analysis time window.
The number of data points used to calculate the most recent
Number of Data points
n.a. soiling ratio and irradiance daily averages. Use this
in Daily Average
parameter as a quality metric for the reported daily averages.
1.2.7.2.1.5. Module temperature sensors
The Contractor shall provide module temperature sensors to be placed on the module backside, with an
accuracy of ± 1°C.
1.2.7.2.1.6. Anemometer
1.2.7.2.1.7. UV Radiometer
The Contractor shall provide UV radiometer.

UV radiometers can be used to measure the UV radiation UVA and UVB on the same sensor, for example
SUV5 from Kipp & Zonen or similar. The sensor shall be equipped with a heating and ventilation unit, for
example CVF4 unit from Kipp & Zonen or similar. Heating of UV radiometers shall be guaranteed at daytime
and during night, when the temperature goes below 0°C, and always between 6:00 AM and 7:00 AM to avoid
condensation. The external ventilation unit (fans), shall be guaranteed to be activated when the GHI ≥ 500
W/m2 or when the temperature is greater or equal than 35°C.
The UV radiometers shall always be classified as Class A (High accuracy) in accordance to ISO 9060-2018
and IEC 61724-2017.
CODICE – CODE

189 of 287
All UV radiometers shall be calibrated according to ISO 9846 and ISO 9847. The Contractor shall issue the
calibration certificate to EGP after the installation. The calibration report shall conform to the requirements of
ISO/IEC 17025.
1.2.7.2.2. Data Logger
An independent data acquisition system (DAS) shall be used to record the electrical values provided by each
installed sensor. This system consists of a small programmable device, equipped with a microprocessor, a
RAM memory and Modbus interface.
The DAS shall have a sufficient number of analog-digital inputs, I/O serial channels, and open collector
control channels to support all the sensors to be installed on the tower, in addition to those already installed.
If needed, analog to digital converters shall have minimum 16 bits resolution.
The electronic design shall allow operation at low energy consumption. It shall be capable of being powered
by backup batteries, connected to a charge regulator powered by the UPS line of the nearest CU, or by a
power supply connected to the network. With this option, the DAS should be able to operate for prolonged
periods in the absence of power supply voltage, thanks to the energy storage provided by the rechargeable
batteries installed in the DAS external box.
The data acquisition system (DAS) shall perform the following functions:
 Instantaneous transmission of the data acquired by the tower instrumentation
 Transmission of data based on recording interval; the DAS generates a register of the statistical
values based on the instantaneous data
 Management of historical data; based on recording interval, registers shall be saved in the memory
for a minimum period of 18 months. In the event of a tower failure, these data shall be recoverable
and transmitted to the substation once the system is restored
 Time synchronization with the SCADA
Main characteristics of the data logger shall be:

 Temperature
o Operating : -50°C / +60 °C (-58°F / +140 °F)
o Storage -50°C / +70 °C (-58°F / +158 °F)
 Humidity 0% / 100 % RH
 EMC In compliance with EN 61326-1 (2001-12); EMC requirements – for use in industrial locations
 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
 IP rating NEMA-4X / IP-66
 Materials: Stainless steel / Plastic
 Power supply : 230 VAC
 Temperature compensation
 Data communications (TCP/IP + USB)
 Backup battery
CODICE – CODE

190 of 287
The data logger shall be compatible with the output of the sensors and appropriately connected to
local/central SCADA. The data logger shall acquire all the signals in digital (preferred) and/or analog format,
executes average values, standard deviation, save and storage data in a memory system and communicate
with the local/central SCADA. The physical connection shall be done through the nearest CU. The
communication protocol has to be compatible with the SCADA System. It has to be Modbus RTU / TCP I, as
no other protocol will be accepted. The data logger shall be able to communicate in parallel with the SCADA
system and USB port.
DATA SAMPLING AND SAVING

The DAS shall also be able to sample at a rate of 3 sec and to generate a register of the statistical values
based on the instantaneous data, according to record interval. The sampling interval and record interval for
all the sensors shall be according to the IEC 61724-2017 as reported in the following table:
Units Sampling Interval Recording Interval
Global Radiation W/m2 3s 1 min

Air Temperature °C 3s 1 min
Relative Humidity % 1 min 1 min
Air Pressure hPa 1 min 1 min
Precipitation Mm 1 min 1 min
Wind direction Degrees 3s 1 min
Wind speed m/s 3s 1 min
UV radiation W/m2 3s 1 min
The processed data values for each parameter shall be recorded based on recording interval. At each
recording interval, the time and date at the end of the period in which measurements were taken shall be
recorded. The time shall always refer to local standard time, not to daylight-saving time. The data format
shall be the single record format, in which all of the data for a given recording interval is listed on one line. A
field separation character (FS) which may be preferably a comma (ASCII 44), or optionally a tab (ASCII 9)
should separate each field.
For each sensor, the corresponding measured quantity shall be computed as average, standard deviation,
number of sampled values averaged, minimum and maximum within the recording interval.
The DAS shall have sufficient memory to store at least 12 months of data, without overwriting the stored files
when the size of the memory is exceeded.
Label text chosen for each measured quantities shall be easy to understand (e.g. GHI for Global Horizontal
Irradiation) and unique. The supplier shall provide EGP with the suitable software to read the downloaded
data in proprietary file format and to convert it into standard text formats (e.g. .txt, .csv .xls).
DATA LOGGER EXTERNAL BOXES
The data logger, communication system, the protections and the necessary power system for the
CODICE – CODE

191 of 287
meteorological towers shall be installed in a shelter box and with minimal weather protection of IP-64 in
accordance with IEC 60529-2004.
The weatherproof enclosure shall have sufficient space for handling power system circuits, batteries,
communication and heating. The box shall be equipped with lock, DIN rails for mounting equipment, wiring
ducts, fuses for each of the meteorological sensors, circuit breakers for power supplies, sensors and heating
terminals for connecting external cables. Each cable shall be clearly identified and marked.
1.2.7.2.3. Wiring and Power Supply
SENSOR WIRING
The cable used for every sensor shall be a shielded tube of N x 0.5 mm2, where N is the number of wires
required for each sensor; it shall be inserted in the lower part of the data logger box through padding with a
minimum protection of IP64
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

The main power supply of the meteorological tower comes normally through an UPS line cable (230 V) from
the nearest CU. Every meteorological tower, shall be equipped with a charge regulator and slow discharge
batteries in order to supplying energy to all the tower equipment for at least 7 days in case of UPS fault line.
Independent transformation shall be enabled to 12V or 24V to ensure the heating and the cooling of the
sensor, at least while the main power is available.
The sizing of the batteries capacity and the relative charge controller shall be performed considering the
following minimum requirements:
 Heating of pyranometers at daytime & during night when the temperature is lower or equal to 0°C
and anyway between 6:00 AM and 7:00 AM (to avoid condensation, whatever the temperature)
 Activation of pyranometers fans when the GHI ≥ 500W/m² or when the temperature is greater or
equal than 35°C
 Power supply to data logger at daytime & night time
 Power supply to communication devices at daytime & night time
 Power supply to all meteorological sensors at daytime & night time
The Supplier shall indicate the installed power based on the equipment and consumption proposed. The
calculation report showing the sufficient power installed for all the equipment shall be provided by the
supplier.
The Contractor shall include the wiring diagram of the sensors and power supply in the documentation to be
provided for the offer.
1.2.8. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.2.8.1. STORAGE AREAS
Areas for the storage of materials, equipment and PV modules shall be of adequate dimensions and placed
CODICE – CODE

192 of 287
in the construction site. Several storage areas should be considered in order to facilitate the mobilization of
materials, equipment and PV modules and reduce the mobilization from the storage areas to the plant.
As reference, the following guidelines shall be considered for each storage area:
 adequate space for metallic structures, piles/screws, bolts and all the necessary components;
 adequate space for electrical cables and all the necessary consumables;
 adequate space for the storage of modules.
The area necessary for the proper storage of all materials will be defined by ENEL and by all the Suppliers
and Contractors based on the specific needs of the projects.
In case the existing soil is not able to carry the storage material weights, the Contractor shall provide a layer
of aggregate material, properly compacted before any storage. The Contractor is responsible for the integrity
of the stored material.
In order to allow an efficient management of the material any ponding of water shall be avoided and the area
shall be properly drained.
Based on the specific project requirements, the storage area shall be restored to the initial conditions.
1.2.9. DEFINITIVE INFRASTRUCTURES
1.2.9.1. ROADS
The Contractor is responsible for any possible improvement to the existing road and for the design and
construction of:
 roads to connect the PV plant to the existing road network;
 access roads to the substation and to the O&M building;
 internal roads to the Cabins.
Final level of roads shall be at least 10 cm above the existing ground level; all roads shall be provided with
ditches having a proper gradient to allow water flow.
Roads can be divided in main roads (for the transportation of the main equipment to the substation, such as
the main transformers) and secondary roads (i.e. the roads connecting Cabins and for the transportation of
modules). The minimum road width shall be 3.0 m.
Performances of the two types of roads shall be defined in accordance with:
 expected traffic load (i.e. number of equivalent single axle loads)
 maximum axle load
 geological and geotechnical parameters of the soil.
 service life (as defined in GTS)
Minimum performances shall always assure the transportation activities in safe conditions.
One of the following approaches may be used for the design:
 AASHTO methodology (flexible pavements approach or the low traffic volume roads approach);
 bulb pressure calculation with finite element methods or analytical calculations;
 other methodologies for the analytical and numerical design of road proposed by the Contractor.
CODICE – CODE

193 of 287
Whatever design method is used, the roads calculation report shall contain the input data relevant to traffic
and maximum loads, the mechanical parameters of subgrade and road layer(s) clearly defined.
Mechanical properties of subgrade and road layers used in the design shall be confirmed during the
construction phase by means of site tests, as defined in table below.
Layer Type of test Frequency

Subgrade/Embankment Plate load test 1000 m
Penetrometric test
Plate load test 500 m at each layer
Road layer(s) Penetrometric test
Granulometry
Different kinds of road pavements can be used to reach the same performance according to the geotechnical
properties of existing subgrade. In any case the material to be used as final road layer on top of the suitable
sub-grade shall be classified as A1 or A3 (according to ASTM D3282 or AASHTO) and compacted at least
95% of its Proctor modified density.
After the construction phase the internal roads shall be restored and delivered in the design state.
Figure 18 – Internal Roads Cross Section
1.2.9.2. PLATFORM/FOUNDATION
1.2.9.2.1. Platform
The Contractor shall execute the earthworks where the cabin foundations are going to be constructed. The
final level of the embankment shall be higher than the flooding levels, obtained from the Hydraulic Studies
and flood risk analysis.
Embankment characteristics shall be defined in accordance with the Cabin Supplier input (design loads and
limit displacements), geological and geotechnical soil properties.
During the construction phase the soil properties shall be confirmed by using on-site tests. The tests to be
performed shall be:
CODICE – CODE

194 of 287
LAYER TYPE OF TEST FREQUENCY
Subgrade Plate load test - Penetrometric test One per platform
Plate load test - Penetrometric test - One per platform, at each

Embankment
Granulometry 30cm layer
Table 8 - Cabin site tests
In any case the minimum deformation modulus Md to be reached at the bottom of any concrete works is 30
MPa, to be verified through plate load tests; equivalent alternatives methods may be proposed, assuring the
achievement of similar properties.
1.2.9.2.2. Foundation
On the top of the embankment, the foundation could be of following types:

1. Shallow foundations
 surface layer made by compacted engineered soil;
 surface layer made by compacted engineered soil and a reinforced concrete slab (pre-cast or
cast-in-situ);
 pre-cast or cast-in-situ concrete foundation tank;
 pre-cast or cast-in-situ concrete pedestals, piles, or beams properly sized;
2. Deep foundations:
 pre-cast or cast-in-situ concrete piles
 Elevated support steel structure.
The Calculation Report of the cabin foundation, shall contain the geological and geotechnical soil properties,
embankment properties and the cabin design input (i.e. design loads and design displacements).
DESIGN LOAD
The Contractor shall design the foundation necessary to withstand the cabin loads, according to the input
provided by the Cabin Supplier, the geological soil properties and the local standards.
All foundation cableways shall precisely match with the available holes from the PCU equipment.
1.2.9.2.2.1. Shallow Foundation
The precast concrete base shall be holed (to be defined during the order phase) in order to allow and easy
way for the passage of MV and LV cables. The holes shall be equipped with a cable bushing system, in a
pre-assembled kit, that guarantees the sealing requirements even when there are no cables inside. All the
kits shall be flexible, adjustable to the diameter of the cables, and equipped with all the parts necessary for
sealing cables of any type.
The cable bushing system shall have the approvals and certifications prescribed by applicable safety
regulations. The system shall be capable for installation of additional cables or pipes with a diameter that is
within the required ranges.
CODICE – CODE

195 of 287
The system components shall be halogens free. The unused holes shall be with a preset size, facing outward,
and designed for the possible installation of other cable bushings (cylindrical hole and smoothed inner
surface).
All cable bushings shall be with smoothed inner surface in order to avoid any damage of the outer sheet of
the cables, due to any possible contact with sharp edges.
1.2.9.2.2.2. Deep Foundation
Proper meshed metallic protection grids shall be installed under the PCU, in order to protect all cables from
the ground level, up to the PCU inlets. The access of animals and rodents shall be avoided at any time.
Suitably sized metallic cable glands shall be installed on the PCU basement, in order to allow easy connection
of the cables and ensure IP67 protection degree.
1.2.9.2.3. Concrete Structure Sealing
The Contractor shall seal, after erection of cables, all the holes on the cabin and its foundation to assure a
complete waterproof, IP67.
1.2.9.2.4. Transformer Foundation-Tank
The Contractor shall design and build the oil pit and related system (oil skimmer, overflow pipe) according to
the transformer supplier input and local standard and codes.
The foundation tank shall have a minimum internal available net height of 50 cm, in order to allow safe
operation, easy installation and inspection during the construction and maintenance phases.
In case of oil cooled power transformer installation, the oil retention tank can be part of the concrete
foundation, having a suitable segregation to divide the two areas, or can be located outside separately.
1.2.9.3. SECURITY SYSTEM
REFERENCE STANDARD
Code Description
Standard Practice for Testing Forced Entry, Ballistic and Low
ASTM F281-10
Impact Resistance of Security Fence System
EN 50131 Alarm Systems – Intrusion and hold-up systems
EN 62676 CCTV Cameras
The security system shall comply with standard EN 50131 to guarantee a security degree II. The Contractor
shall also follow the requirements set by the local codes and norms, or local authorities.
The security system shall include at least the following:
 Perimeter protection to identify attempts to approach and bypass the fencing, using various types of
sensors. This protection shall detect the access into the PV area (including any substation) and any
attempts to approach the modules;
 Infrared, inertial, microwave type volumetric protection of the buildings;
 Volumetric protection of the modules area combined with the video surveillance system;
CODICE – CODE

196 of 287
 Dissuasive or deterrent means such as sirens and/or signal lights;

 CCTV system of video surveillance of the perimeter and of the modules area;
 Infrastructures for local and remote signal connection, redundant type with intrinsic security,
complete with auxiliary and security power supply;
The Contractor shall take into account the following aspects and requirements in the design of the security
system:
 protection from intrusions along the site perimeter;
 the sites are generally isolated and unmanned;
 false alarms to be reduced to minimum;
 high degree of reliability and redundancy of the solution;
 simple engineering solution to reduce maintenance costs;
 use at least two different active technologies for perimeter surveillance: one of them shall be based
on video monitoring;
 automatic detection and alarm events transmission;
 communication system integrated with a standard fiber optic IP data transmission system;
 monitoring the alarms on a single HMI system that integrates video, video analysis / verification, and
alarms from field sensors;
 process information from the area by means of the peripheral alarm control unit;
 local and/or remote activation of law enforcement in the event of crime;
 process and transmit information from the peripheral alarm control unit to the remote control center
operator to be handled according to the proper procedures.
Above functions shall be implemented by using the following components (but not limited to):
 Detectors;
 Peripheral alarm control units;
 Local deterrent or dissuasive devices;
 Remote transmission and communication devices;
 Remote alarm receiving center;
 Primary and backup power supplies for all the components of the security system;
 Primary and secondary electric power units (UPS);
 Local and remote activation and de-activation systems;
 Events recording devices;
 Images taping and recording devices;
 HMI devices;
 Telecommunication network for exchanging data with remote control center.
1.2.9.3.1. Fence
The fence shall be a made by a chain link net on posts. In order to avoid shadowing effects the minimum
distance between the fence and the panels shall be at least 5m.
The minimum height from the ground shall be 2,5m.
CODICE – CODE

197 of 287
The items described below are considered as part of the fencing system:
 Chain link mesh: the wires shall be of hot dip galvanized steel or plastic-coated steel, mesh
50mmx50mm. The thickness of the steel wires shall be at least 1.9mm in any case.
Typical Chain Link
The mesh shall be connected to tree horizontal steel wire 2,5mm that divide the net in three equal
parts.
Typical Chain Link Fence
 Metal posts: shall be hot deep galvanized steel pipes; the minimum diameter shall be 2 inches (2”)
with a minimum thickness of 3,25 mm. A metal post shall be installed maximum every 3,5 meters and
embedded in the concrete foundation for 30cm, as a minimum. The netting mesh shall be connected to
the post using mechanical fastening systems, site welds are not permitted.
 Bracing: shall be installed at every point where the fence change direction (corner point) and at every
35 meters of straight section. The brace installed shall be the same material (2" galv. steel pipe). Braces
shall be connected to the vertical poles with standard mechanical galvanized couplings. No welding for
the connection of different parts is permitted;
 Concrete foundation for posts and bracings: the size of the foundations shall be designed by the
Contractor considering the soil properties; the minimum dimensions shall be 300x300x400mm for the
post and 400x400x500 for the bracings. The concrete shall be at least class C16/20 [as per EN 1992].
CODICE – CODE

198 of 287
NOTE: in case the PV plant is connected to the HV grid, both for the fence of the PV plant and for the fence
of the HV/MV substation, if a metal net is used, the net shall be interrupted every 20m and the concrete
foundation edge shall be interrupted in the same point too with a polystyrene sheet of 1cm width cutting
concrete and the re-bars.
1.2.9.3.2. Gate
All the elements of the entrance gates, shall be properly designed by the Contractor, taking into account the
soil properties and any specific local requirement or applicable regulation.
The gates should be sliding type or consisting of two rotating leaves. The sliding gate, or each leaf of the
rotating gate, shall be built using the same type and characteristics used for the fences where the gate will
be located. The frames shall be 2 inch pipes or 60x40 mm tubular frames with a thickness of 3,5mm. All
gates shall be complete with locks, handles and all other accessories. Sliding gates shall be equipped with
wheels, rails and all the appropriate safety devices. All the metallic parts shall be connected using welds.
Welds shall be continuous, smooth, without notches, cracks. After welding, the surfaces shall be hot dip
galvanized or shall be protected by means of cold galvanizing.
The minimum height and total width of access gates shall be 2,3m and 5,0m respectively.
Typical Gate Access
The Contractor shall generally install one gate for each access road. The number of gates shall be defined
by the Contractor in accordance with the safety, security and maintenance requirements.
1.2.9.3.3. Intrusion System
1.2.9.3.3.1. Detectors
The intrusion system shall use the following detector technologies:

 Magnetic Contacts;
 Piezoelectric;
 Optical Fiber;
 Taut wiring;
CODICE – CODE

199 of 287
 Infrared;
 Microwave.
Detectors installation involves:

 Fastening and positioning detectors;
 Laying and fastening interconnections. Interconnections are electric cables duly protected by the
control unit, to be able to carry signals from the detectors to the control unit and from the control unit to
the actuators.
 Fastening (centrally) and connecting wires;
 Fastening alarm devices;
 Connecting and fastening transmission devices;
 Updating and completing the maintenance manual.
Indoor volumetric detectors must be installed at a minimum height of 2,1m, on walls or ceilings, and ensure
full coverage of the area to be protected (no shaded areas). Outdoor detectors are more prone to false alarms
caused mainly by changes in the surrounding environment that the detector is not able to tolerate. To this
aim, dual technology detectors can be installed to minimize false alarms.
The Contractor shall guarantee a 2 meters setback from any obstructions (in particular plants having long
stems) along the perimeter sections covered by detection systems in order to reduce possible false alarms.
Depending on the area to be protected, different detectors can be used.
Area Type of detector Specification Position

9/125 single-mode - Flexion and shear-sensitive glass Half the height of the
optical fiber detector single-mode optical fiber cable fence; detectors
- Degree of protection: IP 55 positioned at
- Environmental class 3 intervals of 100m up
Perimeter
- Signal processing in time, frequency to 1km, depending
and time-frequency domains on analysis distance
- Subdivision into virtual zones guaranteed
- Probability of Detection ≥ 95%
- False alarm rate ≤ 10/1000m/year
Microwave - Degree of protection: IP 65 Poles or walls
- 12 VCC power supply Range of up to 200m
- Operating temperature -25° + 60°C
Active infrared - Mode of detection: 3 beams Columns installed on
interrupted simultaneously perimeter with a
- Response time: 50-240m/sec. maximum range of
- Operating temperature -25°+60°C 200m
Dual-technology - 1 MW + 2 IR Columns installed on
- Column height 2m-4m perimeter with a maximum
- Operating temperature range of
-25°+60°C 200m
CODICE – CODE

200 of 287
Dual-technology - PIR detector + MW detector Minimum height, 1.5m -

volumetric detector - Anti-masking maximum height 2m
- Anti-tampering Detection distance 12m
Building, 90° horizontal
- Degree of protection: IP 65
warehouse detection width
- Environmental class 3
(external areas) 30° vertical detection
- Detection of crossing and approach
- Probability of Detection ≥ 95% width
- False alarm rate ≤ 10/1000m/year
Dual-technology - PIR detector + MW detector Minimum height,

volumetric detector - Anti-masking 2.1m – maximum
- Anti-tampering height 2.4m
Building, - Degree of protection: IP 44 Detection distance
warehouse - Environmental class 2 12m
(internal areas) - Detection of crossing and approach 90° horizontal
- Probability of Detection ≥ 95% detection width
- False Alarm Rate ≤ 10/1000m/year 30°vertical detection
width
Magnetic contacts - Pair of spacers (5mm) Magnetic contact on
- Grade 3 security frame and
- Environmental class 4 magnet on door
1.2.9.3.3.2. Control Unit and Alarms
The control unit is an electronic device acquiring detector signals, checking the working state of detectors
and executing appropriate commands and actions on alarm execution devices.
The alarm system and its components shall be self-protected against any form of tampering and shall be
equipped with an appropriate electrical backup system (at least 24 hours backup in case of grid outages) and
with acoustic alarms.
In case of an intrusion event the alarm shall activate the lighting system installed in the project area. This
alarm shall also activate the CCTV system in the area where the event occurred.
The acoustic alarm shall:
 Be self-powered and self-protected especially in case of outdoor installation (i.e. made by materials
that guarantee an increased level of protection against wear and tear due to the effects of atmospheric
agents);
 Be fitted with anti-tamper protection;
 Have a fundamental frequency of at least 1800Hz and an acoustic pressure of at least 105 dB(A) at
3 meters.
The intrusion alarm control unit shall:
 be capable of selecting a sufficient number of different types of zones;
CODICE – CODE

201 of 287
 be capable to program at least 15 systems (areas) of independent alarms and allow alarms to be
allocated to specific areas (offices, plant, etc) of common areas;
 be equipped with analog outputs for the measurement of the input loops resistance for diagnostic
purposes;
 be capable of integrated diagnostic functions and capable of measuring the voltage and current
supplied to all devices;
 be capable of flagging up alarms and specific events using a wide range of formats and
protocols (SIA, XSIA, CID etc.) using a PSTN dial pad or modules that can be adapted to ISDN-GSM;
 allow full flexibility in programming the outputs;
 include the remote recording of events using ISDN-GSM lines or IP networks;
 be programmed, monitored and maintained via a local or remote computer stations.
A small keypad for remote input shall:

 allow the programming functions of the alarm system to be viewed;
 allow the viewing of a status of at least six hours;
 display the alarms;
 be backlit so that they can be used both during the day and at night.
1.2.9.3.3.3. Video Surveillance and Recording
The Contractor shall install CCTV system of video surveillance of the perimeter and of the modules area,
with digital video recording, speed dome, and video motion detector.
The CCTV system shall be compliant with EN 62676. The video surveillance service shall trigger a video
recording in case of security event. The camera shall be able to transmit the video recording of what
happened before, during, and after the event for processing purposes.
CCTV cameras accepted are:
 PTZ (Pan Tilt Zoom);
 Dome;
 Bullet.
Whose technology can be:
 IP;
 Infrared;
 Day and night;
 Motion detection;
 Thermal imaging.
Depending on the area of the site to be monitored, CCTV operating requirements must be clearly defined to
ensure optimal image viewing. Particularly, camera height shall be around 2,5 m for optimal image viewing
and easy wiring.
Video surveillance systems shall be equipped with digital video cameras capable of detecting intrusion events
and the early stage of a fire in the areas being monitored.
CODICE – CODE

202 of 287
The Contractor shall design the video surveillance system by taking into account the following requirements:
 the identification of the zones to be monitored;
 characteristics and number of video units needed to monitor each zone;
 configuration, functional and electrical diagrams of the system;
 wireless transmission for video transmission;
 storage capacity according to the number of cameras installed, hours of recording, video
compression and image retention period (minimum 20 days storage);
 the monitoring stations characteristics;
 “Motion Detection” functionalities with automatic triggering of the alarm and video recording
capabilities. The system shall activate the automatic call up of the image corresponding to the alarm in
the “Security Control Room”;
 Capability of setting the system functions on a daily, weekly or yearly basis.
The cameras shall have the following characteristics:

 High resolution images with digital image processing both in colors and B/W (day and night).
 be capable of operating in a complete dark environment (i.e. no artificial lighting);
 be capable of switching automatically from color to black and white and vice versa;
 have an adequate signal/noise ratio and electromagnetic isolation to be assessed in relation to the
industrial setting;
 eliminate the distortion caused by switching from color to black and white and vice versa;
 when operating in black and white, be sensitive to infrared in order to allow them to generate images
even in the absence of visible light;
 have an auto iris connector on the side of the camera to allow for the connection of auto iris as well
as direct drive lenses;
 have an intelligent “back light” multi-zone circuit with automatic and manual white balance
adjustment;
 have gamma correction and a back focus system to obtain good focus adjustment;
 have a synchronization system both internally, externally and line-lock.
A video recorder shall be provided for video surveillance systems and video monitoring systems in IP. It shall
therefore be capable of recording via an Ethernet network card and analog access points.
It shall allow access to an unlimited number of users (using encrypted passwords) and shall operate
simultaneously live, recording, remote viewing, backup and with HSDPA/UMTS access, etc. If requested,
the video recorder system shall be integrated with a UMTS transmission device to send alarms and alerts
via sms, mms and e-mail with attachments.
The video recorder system shall be compatible with any model of IP video camera (even megapixel).
The video recorder system shall:
 guarantee the display of live images;
 guarantee the possibility of searching through recorded images by date, time or event;
 guarantee a full customization of the system with no proprietary software;
CODICE – CODE

203 of 287
 allow the viewing of the system status;

 guarantee the compatibility with the standard hardware for PCs;
 guarantee the updating to new versions of the display;
 allow the viewing of live images and the control of the alarms, even via enabled smartphone/tablet;
 recalling of the recorded images on a date and time basis;
 allow the activation of motion detection on each individual camera (motion detect) with user
adjustable sensitivity levels;
 give the possibility of confirming the cameras resolution in order to increase the number of cameras
operating simultaneously on motion detection;
 assure continuous recording and on simultaneous motion direct;
 assure the variation in recording speeds on motion detect activation;
 give the possibility of searching through images by date or event or type of alarm;
 save images in different resolutions;
 record at speeds up to 150 fps (320x240) and 1x, 4x, 8x playback speeds;
 assure a full interaction between the intrusion system and the video surveillance system, showing
every type of alarm live on the video recorder;
 support a minimum of eight and a maximum of thirty-two video cameras in total;
 allow live multiple display of layouts, the zoom on individual video cameras, PTZ "live”, controls for
DOME IP, the running of groups of video cameras, cyclical viewing operation for individual cameras or
groups, activation/deactivation of camera viewing, user and password management at different levels,
window with events log for the display of general alarms;
 export image files in single JPGs and in AVI/MPEG4 video formats.
It shall also include an event log window that can be activated in order to view:
 general alarms where cameras are off-line;
 recording;
 detecting movement (motion detect);
 CPU and RAM usage;
 hard disk temperatures and network traffic;
 the exporting of event logs in different formats;
 the exporting of database files for saving a configuration.
1.2.9.4. DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A. INTERNAL DRAINAGE SYSTEM DESIGN

The size of the ditches for the drainage system shall be defined considering the maximum flow rate, as found
in the hydrological study for a return period of 10 years and, in any case, the ditch area shall not be less than
0,3 m2.
The side slopes of the ditch/channel should not exceed the angle of repose of the soil comprising the ditch
line, and should generally be 3:1 or flatter. Where local conditions dictate the use of some type of rigid lining,
the use of steeper slopes (>2:1) may be more economical. Their typical geometry shall be either V-shaped
CODICE – CODE

204 of 287
or trapezoidal. Should the flow speed exceed the above listed limits, earth ditches shall be modified (by
reducing the distance between adjacent ditches, by modifying their size or slope). Alternatively, or when the
site morphology does not allow the proper reduction of the flow speed by modifying the earth ditches, ditches
shall be coated by using concrete, steel, stone tiles, rip-rap. The maximum velocities on coated ditches are
reported in the table below.
Coated ditches Type Vmax (m/s) Vmax (ft/s)
Concrete 4.50 15
Stone agglomerates 2.00 7
Stone tiles 3.00 10
Corrugated steel 3.00 10
Bituminous agglomerates 3.50 12
Velocity in ditches per type of surface finishing
The drainage system and all additional works designed shall not interfere with the internal roads, trenches,
electrical equipment, support structures and with their maintenance.
The Contractor shall design and build the drainage works considering the following points:
 obstructions to the natural flow of water inside and outside the plant areas shall be avoided,
 the soil shall be protected against erosion by using blankets, turf reinforced mats or stone protections
in correspondence to the final receptor of the drainage, where steep slopes are generally necessary,
 existing channels (necessary for the proper drainage of the plant areas or interfering with it), even if
external to the plant, shall be cleaned, repaired and improved when necessary.
B. HYDRAULIC INTERFERENCES
Interferences between internal and access roads and the designed drainage system / the existing water
streams shall be properly defined.
Low Water Crossings can be used only for peak flows lower than 3 m3/s (100 cfs); water depth lower than
25 cm (10 in) shall be ensured.
Cross culverts shall be located as close as possible to the natural drainage waterway, avoiding any changes
in flow direction. The maximum angle of bend at any point along a culvert horizontal or vertical alignment
should be 22,5º.
The minimum culvert diameter for any application shall never be less than 40 cm (18 in).
CODICE – CODE

205 of 287
1.2.9.5. TRENCHES AND WORKS ON CABLES
1.2.9.5.1. Trench
The layout of the trenches shall not be done crossing the tracker structures, in order to allow easy
access/opening of trenches. Unless otherwise indicated, the trenches with higher number of cables inside
(in the vicinity of the PCU) shall converge at the edge of the internal road network and/or pathways and stay
reasonably far from the foundations of the support structures.
1.2.9.5.1.1. Civil Execution
The path of cable trenches shall assure an adequate distance from any foundation (including perimeter fence
and access gate), as shown in the following figure.
Figure 19 – Minimum distances to electrical trenches
In the part of the plant where the passage of the vehicles is possible (roads and platforms) the pits shall avoid
water stagnation. Covers shall have a resistance certified for the following drive-over resistance:
 pits within the roadway or any platform: 400 kN (class D400 according to UNI EN 124, or any
equivalent local code).
 pits outside the roadway: 15 kN (class A15 according to UNI EN 124, or any equivalent local code).
1.2.9.5.1.2. Backfilling
The trenches shall be filled with a sand bed, screening with land type A3 – Thin sand [CNR-UNI 10006]. In
case the contractor find it appropriate the sand bed could be substituted by another material with same
granulometry.
Once the conductors are suitably placed, the excavation filling shall be done with screened land type A1,
land granulometry between 64-4mm.
CODICE – CODE

206 of 287
1.2.9.5.2. Cableway
The cables shall be segregated inside the same trench depending on the function and the voltage level (i.e.
power cables, aux power cables, communication cables, etc.).
Only MV and LV power cables shall be laid in different trenches.
The Contractor shall foresee dedicated and segregated cableways (different conduits inside of the same
trench) for:
 LV aux power cables,
 Signal and field sensors cables,
 Data network cables (fiber optic, serial communication cable, Ethernet cables, etc.).
In any case, all signals cables shall be separated (piping, ducts, manholes, etc.) from power cables, in order
to avoid any possible interference.
A typical drawing in inserted in the figure below, for clearer representation
1.2.9.5.2.1. Ducts
The following cables shall be inserted inside dedicated HDPE corrugated tubes, when such cables are laid
inside trenches:
 Cable conduit for solar cable (DC)
 Cable conduit for tracker power supply cable
 Cable conduit for tracker signal cable
 Single insulated grounding cable (yellow/green)
The internal diameter of the pipes shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum external diameter of the cable
bundle. If installed inside cable trays, such cables shall not occupy more than 50% of the space available in
CODICE – CODE

207 of 287
the channels. In any case, all signals cables shall be separated (piping, ducts, manholes, etc.) from power
cables, in order to avoid any possible interference.
In any case, the constructive characteristics and dimensions (depending on the overall diameter of the
cables) of the tubes shall be as requested by global/local norms and regulations (IEC 60364 and IEC 60502).
1.2.9.5.2.2. Change Direction & External-Grounded Cables Manholes
The installation of manholes for change of direction and grounding inspection pits shall follow all local and
international regulation requirements.
In any case, each 4km of MV cable it should be installed a manhole with partial discharge auxiliary equipment
installed, in order to perform the partial discharge tests onsite.
An inspection manhole shall be installed each time there is a cable joint.
1.2.9.5.2.3. Joint Inspection Manhole
All joints shall be segregated inside special dedicated boxes for protection and inspection during the
operation. Joints shall be fixed to box walls (see example figures below).
The Contractor shall consider at least 2 meters of extra cable for each side of the joint
CODICE – CODE

208 of 287
1.2.9.5.2.4. Cables Mechanical Protection
All underground cables shall be protected from a mechanical point of view. The mechanical protection shall
be designed in order to protect cables from static loads, vehicular traffic or manual excavation machines in
relation to depth of laying.
Cables designed/manufactured and fitted with proper mechanical protection (i.e. Airbag system), which shall
be certified by specific tests, can be buried without any additional external mechanical protection. Metallic
armored cables are not allowed.
Cables without internal mechanical protection shall be laid only with additional external mechanical
protection: stripes in plastic material, minimum thickness 2.5 mm, with monitoring text and installed
according to chapter 1.2.9.5.2.
In case of road crossing, all trenches shall be mechanically protected with tunnel in prefabricated reinforced
concrete, minimum concrete thickness 120 mm, according to chapter 1.2.9.5.2.
During tender phase (technical alignment phase) the Contractor could propose other technical solutions for
the mechanical protection to be evaluated by EGP.
1.2.9.5.2.5. Warning Tape
All underground cables trenches shall be properly marked in order to make their presence visible in case of
further excavations.
For this purpose, the following prescription should be adopted:
 Warning tapes laid in the ground approximately 40-50 cm above the cables,
 Surface marker signs at every 50 m and at each change of direction.
Underground warning tape shall be laid above the cables all along the entire trenches length and shall have
a 100m wide dimension. The specific requirements for the different buried cables are listed below:
 For MV lines: Red tape with the wording “WARNING MV ELECTRICAL CABLES XX kV”
 For LV lines: Green tape with the wording “WARNING ELECTRICAL CABLES”.
1.2.9.5.2.6. Underground Cable Laying
Direct buried cables shall be laid in a layer of sand. The installation works shall comply with the cable
manufacturer instructions to avoid any damage. The Contractor shall use suitable equipment for this purpose.
The pulley wheels shall have a wide slot and shall be coated to prevent any damage to the wire and its
insulation. It is strictly forbidden to drag the wires on the ground, walls, brackets etc. Extreme caution shall
be taken when laying the wires by avoiding any yanking or sudden stops and coordinating the laying pull of
the winch with the braking moment of the cable in order to prevent unwinding of the wire from the spool in
case the pulling stops.
Where the cables are in cable ducts, the pull forces shall be less than the allowed maximum pull forces
admissible by the cable manufacturer.
The Contractor shall use a swiveling rope to pull the cables. The Contractor shall always comply with the
existing regulations.
CODICE – CODE

209 of 287
The Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer requirements regarding pincers, presses and matrices.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements during the laying of cables:
 after pulling and laying activities the cables shall be visually checked to be sure they are in good
condition; any damage or unexpected condition shall be immediately notified/reported;
 the terminal section of the cables shall be protected immediately with heat shrinking caps right after
the cutting process;
 the Contractor is not allowed to use ferrous materials (nails, iron wire, bars) to secure the terminal
sections of the cables to the spool, any short-circuit could cause damages to the insulation layer will
be the responsibility of the Contractor;
 the Contractor shall reduce any wastage of cable by optimizing the design and the installation;
 the cables shall not be subjected to any sudden bending, denting, scratching or stretching of the
sheath;
 the temperature of the cables along the entire length and during the time they could be bent or
straightened shall never drop below the value indicated in the technical standards and manufacturer
requirements;
 the cables shall not be subjected to any bending with a radius lower than the indicated value in the
technical standards and manufacturer requirements;
 the connection shall be carried in accordance with best practices (e.g. by using heat shrinking
sheathing etc.).
1.2.9.5.2.7. Termination-Joints Execution
During the execution of cables terminations / joints the contractor shall follow the criteria below indicated:
 Manufacturer’s instructions,
 To consider an adequate extra quantity of cable due to the thermal expansion, ground movement
and/or joint replacement following a failure,
 All joints shall be segregated inside special dedicated chambers/boxes for protection and inspection
during the plant operation as indicated in chapter 1.2.9.5.2.3
1.2.9.5.3. Hanger Structures Cableway
In case of hanger structure cableways, the hanger support shall be suitable placed and dimensioned in order
to avoid any deformation due to excessive cable weight. Cables of different function and voltage level shall
be properly spaced in order to avoid any possible interference between them, so as to ensure the proper
functionality of each cable. All applicable international and local standards shall be strictly followed regarding
the allowed disposition of cables laid on air.
Hanger structure material/protection shall be suitable for the site ambient conditions specified in the General
Technical Specification in order to avoid corrosion and to guarantee the required life span.
CODICE – CODE

210 of 287
1.2.9.5.3.1. Requirements on Cables installed on air
All cables (solar, LVDC, MVAC, LVACaux) that will be installed on air (not underground), shall be provided with
the necessary UV protection and accomplished by the relevant test certification according to the applicable
Norms, in order to avoid any lack of insulation or possible damage of cables due to the direct exposure of
the sun irradiation (UV site irradiance < 60W/m2). In this case corrugated tubes installed to provide UV
protection shall be avoided.
In case of higher UV irradiance on site (> 60 W/m2) it will be necessary that such cables are laid inside
corrugated tubes with suitable UV protection according to the site conditions provided in the General
Technical Specification.
1.2.9.6. MV OVERHEAD LINE
Unless otherwise described in the GTS of the project the following condition will be considered:
Max ambient temperature 40ºC
Min ambient temperature -5ºC
Max average temperature over 35°C
a period of 24h
Max wind speed as stated by EN 50341-1
with return period of 50
years
Influence of solar radiation neglected
Altitude not exceeding 1000m
Pollution not significantly polluted
Ici load (radial thickness of ice) as stated by EN 50341-1
with
return period of 50 years
In addition to all applicable local standards, the overhead lines shall be designed, built and tested, according
to the following international standards. In case of discrepancies, local standards prevail.
Code Description
IEC 60826 Overhead transmission lines – Design criteria
IEC 60652 Loading tests on overhead line structures
Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded

IEC 61089
conductors
IEC 61773 Overhead lines – Testing of foundations for structures

Overhead lines – Meteorological data for assessing
IEC 61774
climatic loads
IEC 61284 Overhead lines – Requirements and tests for fittings
Insulators of ceramic material or glass for overhead

IEC 61211 lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1 000 V -
Impulse puncture testing in air
Insulators for overhead lines - Insulator strings and sets
IEC 61467 for lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1 000 V -
AC power arc tests
CODICE – CODE

211 of 287
Code Description
Aluminium-magnesium-silicon alloy wire for overhead
IEC 60104
line conductors
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage
above 1000 V – Ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c.
IEC 60305
systems – Characteristics of insulator units of the cap
and pin type
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above
IEC 60383
1000 V
IEC 60433 above 1 000 V – Ceramic insulators for a.c. systems –
Characteristics of insulator units of the long rod type
Residual strength of string insulator units of glass or
IEC TR 60797 ceramic material for overhead lines after mechanical
damage of the dielectric
Hard-drawn aluminium wire for overhead line

IEC 60889
conductors
Insulators for overhead lines – Composite suspension

and tension insulators for a.c. systems with a nominal
IEC 61109
voltage greater than 1 000 V – Definitions, test methods
and acceptance criteria
above 1000 V – Ceramic or glass insulator units for d.c.
IEC 61325
systems – Definitions, test methods and acceptance
criteria
Overhead lines – Requirements for greases for
IEC 61394
aluminium, aluminium alloy and steel bare conductors
Overhead electrical conductors – Creep test procedures
IEC 61395
for stranded conductors
Composite string insulator units for overhead lines with
IEC 61466
a nominal voltage greater than 1 000 V
Overhead electrical conductors – Calculation methods
IEC TR 61597
for stranded bare conductors
IEC 61854 Overhead lines – Requirements and tests for spacers
Overhead lines – Calculation of the electrical component
IEC 61865 of distance between live parts and obstacles – Method
of calculation
Overhead lines – Requirements and tests for
IEC 61897
Stockbridge type aeolian vibration dampers
Insulators for overhead lines – Composite line post
insulators for A.C. systems with a nominal voltage
IEC 61952
greater than 1 000 V – Definitions, test methods and
acceptance criteria
Thermal-resistant aluminium alloy wire for overhead line
IEC 62004
conductor
IEC 62219 Overhead electrical conductors – Formed wire,
CODICE – CODE

212 of 287
Code Description
concentric lay, stranded conductors
Live working – Guidelines for the installation and

IEC TR 62263 maintenance of optical fibre cables on overhead power
lines
Concentric lay stranded overhead electrical conductors
IEC 62420
containing one or more gap(s)
1.2.9.6.1. Mechanical Sizing
Generally, country laws regulates the mechanical sizing of conductors, of poles and of foundations.
Pole characteristics must take into account the following aspects:
- Conductor, overhead ground wire and optical cable tension loads;
- Conductor, overhead ground wire and optical cable wind loads;
- Conductor, overhead ground wire and optical cable weight loads;
- Construction loads.
(Wind loads and weight loads shall include the ice contribution where climatic condition requires it).
In lacking of defined specific rules, the main international standard (IEC and/or IEEE) shall be taken into
account.
1.2.9.6.1.1. Pole Foundation
Foundation pole for MV Overhead line shall be made of precast or cast in situ reinforced concrete, according
to the indicative scheme reported in the picture below; the gap between concrete foundation and pole should
be filled with sand and sealed. The foundations will be designed taking into account soil properties and
actions transmitted to the foundation by the pole.
Typical MV Overhead line pole foundation

Minimum dimensions for poles foundations shall be:
 60cmx60cmx100cm: for poles up to 4,0m
 100cmx100cmx100cm: for poles up to 10,0m
1.2.9.6.2. Electrical Sizing of Conductors
The main concepts for decision of conductor size to be taken into account are:
CODICE – CODE

213 of 287
- the right balance between initial costs and capitalization losses to be demonstrated during design
phase.
- thermal limit to guaranty the mechanical performances versus time.
- The max voltage drop included in EGP TS shall be respected.
1.2.9.6.3. Electromechanical Equipment
1.2.9.6.3.1. Conductors
A. LIST OF CONDUCTORS
The conductors shall be preferably chosen from the following tables (11, 12 and 13)
Table 11 - Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Coated-Steel Reinforced
Note 1: The conductors designated by abbreviations AL1/A20SA are concentric-lay-stranded aluminum

conductors, aluminum-coated-steel reinforced. However, the conductors designated by abbreviations
AL1/ST1A are concentric-lay-stranded aluminum conductors, zinc-coated-steel reinforced.
CODICE – CODE

214 of 287
Table 12 - Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum-Alloy Conductors
Table 13 - Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Medium-Hard Temper
However in areas with high saline pollution (coast) is more recommendable to use aluminium conductor or
alloy aluminium conductor.
B. RAW MATERIALS OF WIRES
B.1 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Core Wires
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Core Wires used for mechanical reinforcement in the manufacture of
aluminum conductors, must be manufactured with the applicable local/global requirements
B.2 Aluminum-Coated (Aluminized) Steel Core Wires
Aluminum-Coated (Aluminized) Steel Core Wires used for mechanical reinforcement in the manufacture of
aluminum conductors, must be manufactured with the requirements of the EN 61232. The wires shall be
“20SA” class and “A” type
B.3 Aluminum Wires
Aluminum wires used to assemble the bare conductors considered here shall be made of pure aluminum,
manufacture under the standards EN 60889 or IEC 60889, or aluminum 1350-H19, manufacture under the
standard ASTM B230 y ASTM B231.
B.4 Aluminum-Alloy Wires
Aluminum-alloy wires used to assemble the bare conductors considered here shall be made of 6201-T81
aluminum-alloy under the standard ASTM B398 or identified as AL3 under the standard Norma EN 50183.
CODICE – CODE

215 of 287
B.5 Copper Wires

Copper wires shall be uncoated, under the standards ASTM B2 or UNE 207015
C. CONSTRUCTION
The following sections provides the description of the conductors in function of the wires use to assemble
them. The Standards use to manufacture the conductors are indicated in the Common List and in the section
A.
C.1 Aluminum Conductors
Aluminum conductors shall be assembled with aluminum wires, as indicated in the section B.3
C.2 Aluminum Conductors, Zinc-Coated-Steel Reinforced
Aluminum conductors, coated-steel reinforced are assembled with aluminum wires (see B.3) in the external
layers and zinc-coated (galvanized) steel core wires in the internal layers (see B.1).
C.3 Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Coated-Steel Reinforced
Aluminum conductors, aluminum-coated-steel reinforced are assembled with aluminum wires (see B.3) in
the external layers and aluminum-coated (Aluminized) steel core wires in the internal layers (see B.2).
C.4 Alloy-aluminum conductors
The alloy-aluminum conductors shall be assembled with alloy-aluminum wires, as indicated in the section
B.4.
C.5 Copper conductors
The uncompressed copper conductors shall be assembled with copper wire, as indicated in the section B.5.
C.6 Greases
The Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Coated-Steel Reinforced and
Alloy-Aluminum Conductors could be provided with or without greases, applied to the both internal or external
layers (Figure 22), as indicated in the Common List (Section A).
The grease shall be chemically neutral with respect to aluminum, zinc and steel, free of impurities, uniform
throughout of length of the conductor, hot applied (type B). Its drop point shall be greater than 110ºC and the
stability under short-circuit must be tested with 250ºC for 1,5 seconds. It must have the characteristics
described in the standards EN 50326 or IEC 61394, as indicated in the Common List (Section A).
The conductors shall be provided with grease only when explicitly requested in the purchase order.
Figure 22 – Greased Conductors.
The volume of the grease shall be calculated with the following equation:
𝑉𝑔 = 0.25𝜋(𝐷𝑜2 − 𝑛𝑎 𝑑𝑎2 − 𝑛𝑠 𝑑𝑠2 )
Where:
𝑉𝑔 = Volume of grease per length
CODICE – CODE

216 of 287
𝐷𝑜 = outer diameter of the conductor

𝑑𝑎 = diameter of the aluminium wire
𝑑𝑠 = diameter of the steel wire
𝑛𝑎 = number of aluminium wires in the conductor
𝑛𝑠 = number of steel wires in the conductor
Consequently, with the density of the grease of 0,87 g/cm3 and with fill factor of 0,8, the mass of the grease
will be:
𝑀𝑔 = 0.8𝑉𝑔 𝛿
𝑀𝑔 = mass of grease per length
𝛿 = density of grease
D. SURFACE
The surface of the conductor shall be free from all imperfections visible to the unaided eye (normal corrective
lenses accepted), such as nicks, indentations, etc., not consistent with good commercial practice.
E. CONDUCTOR DIAMETER
The diameter of the conductor shall not vary from the nominal values more than the limits indicated in the
standards shown in the Common List (Section A).
F. STRADING
All wires of the conductor shall be concentrically stranded.
Adjacent wire layers shall be stranded with reverse lay directions. The directions of lay of the external layer
shall be “right-hand” to aluminum conductors. The direction of lay of the extern layer to copper conductor
shall be “right-hand” or “left-hand”, as indicated in the Local Section.
The wires in each layer shall be every and closely stranded around the underlying wire of wires.
G. JOINTS
Conductors with only one steel wire, shall not be made any joints after heat treatment of wires or rods. There
shall be no joints of any kind made in the zinc-coated or aluminum-coated steel core wire or wires during
stranding.
Before stranding, no more than one joint shall be accepted in the aluminum wires per length of conductor.
During stranding, no wire welds shall be made for the purpose of achieving the required conductor length.
Joints are permitted in aluminum or copper wires unavoidably broken during stranding, provided such breaks
are not associated with either inherently defective wire or with the use of short lengths of wires. Joints shall
conform to the geometry of original wire, i.e., joints shall be dressed smoothly with a diameter equal to that
of the parent wires and shall not be kinked. Joints shall not be made in the finished copper wires composing
conductors of seven wires or less.
Joints in wires shall not be closer than 15 m form a joint in the same wire or in any other wire of the completed
conductor. The quantity of joints per length shall not greater than values indicated in the standards shown in
the Common List (Section A).
Joints shall be made by electric butt welding, electric butt cold upset welding or cold pressure welding and
other approved methods. These joints shall be made in accordance with good commercial practice. The first
type of joints shall be electrically annealed for approximately 250 mm on both sides of the weld.
CODICE – CODE

217 of 287
H. MASS PER UNIT OF LENGTH

The mass per unit length of the conductor shall be calculated using densities, stranding increments and
cross-sectional areas of all kind of wires. The mass per unit length of the conductor without grease shall not
vary from its nominal value by more than ± 2 %.
I. RATED TENSILE STRENGTH
Rated tensile strength are result of sum of the tensile strength of all wires that compose the conductor, as
indicated in the standards shown in the Common List (Section A).
J. ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
The electrical DC resistance at 20ºC of a conductor, expressed in Ω / km and with three decimals, is
calculated using the value of the resistivity of the wires used.
1.2.9.6.3.2. Insulator
Either pin-cap type or post insulator type can be used.

Preferably, the insulators shall be composite type with polymeric external surface.
Unless otherwise prescribed in the country section to comply with particular local regulation, the insulators
shall be in agreement with the most common international standard as IEC; IEEE etc.
1.2.9.6.3.3. Poles
The poles can be metal or reinforced concrete type.

About the reinforcement concrete type, the steel reinforcement can be used as earthing connections.
To get such feature the steel reinforcement shall be welded and dedicated connection points will be arranged
at the top and at the bottom of the pole to allow the earth continuity from the steel support of insulator up to
the earthing rod.
Unless otherwise specified in the country section the poles shall be self-supporting type; in case of particularly
heavy efforts, latticed steel tower can be requested.
For metal poles the hot galvanized treatment is requested.
For any other prescriptions, see the country section.
1.2.9.6.3.4. Cross Bar and Steel Bracing
Crossbar and steel bracing shall be preferably metal type deep hot galvanized.
1.2.9.6.3.5. Clamps and Joints
On the crossing with railways, routes etc., the mid span joints should be preferably avoided.
Even if not mandatory in the country of the project, in these critical point a double fixed point (therefore double
insulator and double clamp) should be considered.
For detailed prescriptions and rules, see the country section.
1.2.9.6.3.6. Surge Arrester and Horn Gap
For end-of-cable connection, the surge arresters shall be installed at the junction between the overhead line
CODICE – CODE

218 of 287
and the cable. It will be not necessary to protect the other end of the cable as long as the length of the cable
will not exceed a value given by the overvoltage study that Contractor shall perform about to establish the
features of these devices.
Surge arresters shall be in compliance with IEC 60099-4. Surge arrester type at the junction between the MV
equipment and the cable shall be suitable to be connected to separable tee connectors.
1.2.9.6.3.7. Disconnectors
Where requested, disconnectors over the pole will be installed.

They must be three-pole simultaneous operating type.
The single pole operating type is not allowed.
1.2.9.6.3.8. Ground Rods and Conductor for Earthing
The accessories/devices for earthing system should be preferably the same used in the power plant and in
the substation.
The steel structure for supporting the insulator shall be earth connected locally.
Unless otherwise prescribed in the country of the project, the rod contact surface shall be 0.5sqm at least,
and the size of earthing conductor to earth shall be at least: 16 sqmm in case of copper; 50 sqmm for other
material.
Equipotential connections between all metallic parts shall be assured.
Anti-theft protection must be chosen.
1.2.9.6.3.9. Optical Cable for Signal
Unless differently specified in the detailed information of the project the optical cable shall have 24 fibers
available for signals connections.
Depending of the country/project the cable could be:
 hanged on supporting steel wire arranged below the power conductor
 All-Dielectric Self-Supporting (optical cable self-supported) type arranged below the power
conductors
 Optical ground wire (OPGW) type arranged over the power conductors
 direct buried non-metallic type FO cable (to be laid along the trench of MV cable)
In case of OPGW cable, splice box for transition shall be arranged at the first and at the last pole.
1.2.9.6.3.10. MV Cable for End of Line Connection
A. MV CABLES
The MV cable types are identical of those required for the underground MV cables of the plant, already
introduced in EGP TS.
B. ACCESSORIES
Indoor terminations – separable tee connectors – shall be installed on the cable ends at the side of MV cabin
CODICE – CODE

219 of 287
equipment. They shall be in compliance with IEC 60502-4. The type of these terminations will be specified
by the Manufacturer of the MV cabin. Contractor shall verify the compliance of these terminations with cable
features (rated voltages, currents, core conductor material and cross section, metallic screen material).
Outdoor terminations shall be installed on the cable ends at the side of overhead line. They shall be in
compliance with IEC 60502-4. The type of these terminations will be specified by MV cable Manufacturer
verifying the environment installation (outdoor) and the cable features (rated voltages, currents, core
conductor material and cross section, metallic screen material).
1.2.9.7. EARTHING SYSTEM
1.2.9.7.1. PV Park Network and Grid
A direct buried horizontal earthing conductor shall be appropriately sized according to the requirement
indicated in Chapter 1.3.1.2.1.
This earthing conductor shall be the only equipotential connection among all the metallic parts of the plants.
It shall collect all grounding cables coming from:
 Metallic tracker structures
o Between trackers
o Between tracker and ground bare copper rope
 SPDs from the parallel field boxes (detail inside chapter 1.2.9.7.6)
 Grounding equipotential plate of the PCUs (detail inside Chapter 1.2.3.6.1)
 Substation grounding network (detail inside Chapter 1.2.9.7.2)
The grounding layout shall be done in order to avoid dangerous touch and step voltage in any part of the
plant, and to ensure that such voltage are under the standard allowed limits. If this cannot be ensured, a new
CODICE – CODE

220 of 287
earthing layout shall be proposed by the contractor, until the proper safety parameters are achieved following
the standards.
Whenever possible, the plant earthing conductor shall be installed inside the LV and MV cables trenches
assuring distances according to local norms and laws. However, new trenches could be done in order to
satisfy a suitable earthing system study. If not explicitly necessary from the result of dangerous touch and
step voltages, a PV plant earthing perimetral ring is not required.
The Contractor shall carry out the proper grounding measures and prepare the grounding calculation report,
in compliance with local applicable laws and norms (in Italy, Decreto Legislativo 462/01 and modifications
and integrations), stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer (PE). The measures shall be carried out
taking into account the complete earthing system (earthing of the PV plant, earthing of fences, CCTVs, MV
cabins, and field parallel boxes).
The figure below and the attachment shows some applicable details:
Earth electrode of each area relevant to a large scale PV plant shall be equipped with at least two connection
points for each side of the area to link the next adjacent earth electrodes of the areas under construction.
The connection point shall consist of a provisional PVC earth pit to allow clamping of ground conductors
relevant to adjacent areas. The pit will be buried after completing the earth electrode connection of adjacent
areas.
CODICE – CODE

221 of 287
1.2.9.7.2. Interconnection with Substation System
In case of HV connection, the earthing grid of the HV/MV substation shall be interconnected with the earthing
grid of the PV plant. The HV/MV substation earthing grid will be supplied by a different Contractor. The two
earthing grids can be of different materials but the Contractor shall adopt all the necessary actions and
technical solutions in order to prevent the corrosion of materials due to galvanic effects. If the distance
between the HV/MV substation and the PV plant is higher than 6 times the diagonal of the HV/MV Substation
area, EGP may declare that the two earthing systems shall not be interconnected. In this case the following
prescriptions shall be respected:
 all MV, LV and communication cables shields shall be interrupted where the cables left/come out
from the earthing systems,
 all digital and analog signal cables between the two earthing systems shall be galvanically insulated,
 every electrical continuity between electrical mass/exposed-conductive-parts between the PV plant
and the HV/MV substation shall be forbidden.
1.2.9.7.3. Fence
In case of metallic type fence, the following prescriptions shall be respected:

 every 20 meters, the metallic fence shall be grounded using earthing rods;
 the metallic fence shall be locally grounded but not connected to the PV plant earthing grid;
 for the fence earthing, the earthing rod shall be sufficiently far from the PV plant earthing system in
order to avoid any induced touch or step voltages.
 The earthing of the fence could be connected to the earthing of the PV plant only for the cases in
which the touch & step voltages report shows presence of dangerous voltages.
 if an earthing conductor crosses the fence, then the fence shall be of insulated type for minimum 2
meters on both sides (for instance using insulated panels 2m left and 2m right from the earthing
conductor).
CODICE – CODE

222 of 287
The contractor shall guarantee at any time that no dangerous touch and step voltage can be present at the
fence. The fence earthing design shall incorporate simulation and onsite measurements in order to ensure
that the touch and step voltages are under the maximum levels required in applicable international and local
norms.
When different metals, which form galvanic effect, due to differential potential, that might cause galvanic
corrosion, have to be connected together, then joints shall be protected from the contact with electrolytes
along their surroundings. The earth electrodes shall be resistant to corrosion and should not be liable to
contribute to galvanic cells.
If the earthing on fences is not required this shall be clearly demonstrated by calculation and measurements
and approved by EGP.
1.2.9.7.4. Perimetrical CCTV System
Each metallic CCTV pole should be connected to the earthing system of the fence, through an independent
bare copper rope.
If the CTTV pole is sufficiently far from the fence and fro the PV field grounding (distance ≥ 4meters), in order
to avoid any induced voltages, the CTTV pole can be grounded by a self-designed earthing rod.
1.2.9.7.5. Cabin (External)
The earthing system shall include the following elements for each MV cabin type (conversion cabin,
transformation cabin, delivery cabin, or parallel cabin), according the sketch below:
 One direct buried earthing conductor along the perimeter of the cabin in a ring type configuration,
and appropriately sized according the maximum fault current of the system.
 Two diagonal direct buried earthing conductors connecting opposite corners of the rectangle.
 Four galvanized steel rods in the corners of the rectangle, in concrete manholes with a minimum size
of 50x50x5mm and minimum rod length of 2.5m.
 Two earthing conductors in opposite corners to connect the ring with the main earth collector inside
the cabin.
 Two earthing conductors (at least 50mm2 cross-section insulated conductor yellow/green) in order
to connect the earthing collector for each room of the cabin.
Electrical To cabin earth

Cabin collector
Earthing
rods
Grounding
Ring
Diagonal
earthing
conductor
To cabin earth
collector
The Contractor shall supply and install connection accessories, stainless steel bolts, lugs and crimp-joints
and all the components necessary to complete the work as per the latest technical state of art.
CODICE – CODE

223 of 287
1.2.9.7.6. Boxes/SPD
All Electrical equipment of the electrical boxes shall be protected against surges of II installing Surge
Protection Devices (SPD’s) and all the SPD shall be connected to the earthing system of the plant through a
dedicated insulated ground cable (gree/yellow) which shall be laid inside a corrugate tube (from the box, to
the grounding connection to the main copper rope of the plant earthing).
(Inside corrugated
tube)
Since the grounding of each SPD shall be connected to the main bare copper rope of the PV plant earthing
system, such bare copper rope shall pass near each electrical box, where all surge protection currents shall
be derived to ground.
1.2.9.7.7. Grounding Method MV Cables
Code Description
EN 50522 Earthing of power installations exceeding 1kV a.c.
CODICE – CODE

224 of 287
Code Description
IEEE 80 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
Power cable with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltage
IEC 60502-2 from 1kV (Um=1.2 kV) up to 30kV (Um= 36kV) Part 1: Cables for rated voltage
of 6kV (Um=7.2kV) up to 30kV (Um= 36kV)
Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-1: Current rating
IEC 60287-1-1
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses – General
A. INTRODUCTION
AC steady state or short circuit current flowing through the core conductor of a single core MV cable causes
an induced voltage on the screen.
B. FUNCTION OF THE SCREEN

Screen needs to connect to earth at least in one point along the route. The capacitive charging current and
induced circulating currents which are generated under normal operating conditions are drained away
through the screen if it is grounded at both ends. By this connection mode, the screen also drains the zero
sequence short circuit currents under fault conditions.
However, to avoid that this current flows only into the screen, a Ground Continuity Conductor (GCC) has laid
parallel to the cable. GCC has also provides a continuous metallic ground connection between the grounding
systems at the ends of the cable route and along the run, so it favors the decrease in the value of plant
ground impedance.
C. CABLE TYPE
Main Features
MV cable shall be single core or three core or three single core bundled cables, with aluminum conductor,
cross-linked polyethylene – XLPE - insulation, laminated aluminum foil (or copper wires) earth screen and
polyolefin / polyethylene outer sheath, without reaction to fire class.
Metallic screen features

It shall be aluminum tape in compliance with “GSC001” point 5.7
As alternative to aluminum tape, metallic screen can be copper wires and copper binder tape with 16 mm2
minimum cross-section.
The main function of metallic screen is to confine electric field inside the insulation and to nullify electric field
outside of the cable.
Both-ends bonding implies circulation of permanent current into the screen in steady state conditions and a
part of zero sequence current during single phase to ground faults.
D. INDUCED VOLTAGE CALCULATION

The induced voltage Ui within a MV cable system (three single-core cables laid in trefoil formation) has
calculated with the following formula:
Ui = X × I × L [V]
Where:
CODICE – CODE

225 of 287
X is mutual reactance between core conductor and metallic screen [Ω / m]

I is the current flowing in the single phase core conductor [A]
L is the cable length [m]
The mutual reactance X has calculated with the following formula provided by IEC 60287-1-1 STD:
X = 4ϖf × 10-7 × ln(2s/d) [Ω/m]
Where:
f is the electric system rated frequency [Hz]
s is the distance between core conductor axes in the electrical section being considered [mm]
d is the mean diameter of the screen [mm]
The figure showed hereinafter provides geometry of the system:
E. GROUNDING METHODS
E1. BOTH END BONDING
Both ends of screen have connected to the earth electrode. This practice can be mandatory in some
Countries.
By this method, no standing voltages occur at the cable ends in any condition (steady state or short circuit),
which makes it the most secure regarding safety aspects.
The figure showed hereinafter provides trend of induced voltage along the screen.
A permanent circulating current flows in each screen in steady state conditions.

Considering a symmetrical and balanced three phase system, no current flows between the two earthing
points i.e. through GCC.
CODICE – CODE

226 of 287
These circulating current on the screens reduces cable carrying capacity significantly making it the most
disadvantageous method regarding economic aspects.
Considering IEC 60287-1-1 STD, the energy balance (losses) is the following:
WTOT = Wc + W d + W s
Where:
Wc losses in conductor per unit length [W/m]
Wd dielectric losses per unit length per phase [W/m]
Ws losses dissipated in sheath per unit length [W/m]
Losses above listed can be calculated (per each phase) with the following formulas:
Wc = R× I2 [W/m]
Wd = 2ϖf × C × U02 tanδ [W/m]
Ws = X2 × I2 / Rs [W/m]
Where:
R is the AC resistance of core conductor per unit length at its maximum operating temperature [Ω/m].
C is the capacitance per unit length [F/m].
U0 is the voltage between core conductor and earth [F/m].
tanδ is the loss factor (see Table 3 of IEC 60287-1-1).
Rs is the AC resistance of screen per unit length at its maximum operating temperature.
Doing the following assumption:

WTOT = R× IT2 [W/m]
IT represents the “total equivalent thermal current” flowing in the core conductor that causes the same total
loss value W TOT.
It must be calculated and compared with I’ z that is the effective ampacity of the cable (see Annex B of IEC
60502-2) as follows:
IT < I’z
When it has not verified and it is as follows:
IT ≥ I’z
It is necessary to adopt a larger cross section i.e. the next one.
E2. SINGLE-END BONDING

Only one end of the screen is connected to earth. At the opposite end of the screen, a voltage appears
induced linearly along the cable length by the current flowing inside core conductor.
The figure showed below provides trend of induced voltage along the screen.
CODICE – CODE

227 of 287
To better understanding about the values of induced voltages on the screen, the following example can be
considered:
630mm2 core cross section aluminium cable connects HV substation with the first MV/LV CU cabin. 25kA is
the three-phase short circuit symmetrical current at main MB bus bars in HV substation.
Isc is the short circuit current at the first MV/LV cabin; it decreases as cable length increases.
L [km] I [A] Ui [V] Isc [A] Ui [V]

2 400 44 19492 2145
4 400 88 15850 3489
6 400 132 13309 4394
8 400 176 11451 5040
10 400 220 10038 5523
The following consideration have done about safety aspects as consequence of single-end bonding.
Touch Voltage risk

Cable terminals are not accessible with MV switchgear in operation. Access to cable cell requires removing
panel of cable compartment and this maintenance intervention can be carried out only if the MV switchgear
is off circuit (cut off from all the voltage sources and all incoming / outgoing lines are earthed). There is no
risk of touch voltage.
Discharge between screen and earth (over sheath perforation)

Cable over sheath is commonly “polyolefin” (type ST7 according to IEC 60502-2). Its thickness must be not
less than 1,4 mm in compliance with IEC 60502-2 STD section 14.3.
CODICE – CODE

228 of 287
Polyolefin dielectric strength is 20 kV/mm as minimum. It is sure there is no risk of discharge until to 70% of
transient overvoltage (TOV) due to a short circuit.
No surge arresters are required at the free terminal of the screen.
Screen earthing conductor arrangement

Screen earthing conductor included with terminal must be folded along the cable oversheat by a suitable
insulating tape leaving the eyelet unlocked but far from metallic part connected to earth. During maintenance,
eyelet must be connected to a portable power safety earthing device.
Screen earthing conductor eyelet must be available to perform tests too. The figure showed hereinafter
summarizes the above.
This bonding method does not imply additional losses on the cable due to current flowing along the screen
and does not imply circulation of zero sequence current during single phase to ground faults.
E3. CROSS BONDING

This grounding method has especially applied for HV cables having longer route lengths, cross section
greater than 630 mm2 where joints are required due to the limited cable delivery length.
Cross-bonding method consists of three equal sections with cyclic metallic screen crossing after each
section. The termination points have solidly bonded to earthing system.
Along each section, a standing voltage has induced. Three section lengths are equal in ideal cross-bonding
systems. In this way, no residual voltage occurs and thus no sheath current flows. The metallic screen losses
can be kept very low with this method without impairing the safety as in the two side metallic screen earthing.
CODICE – CODE

229 of 287
In large PV parks, sectionalized cross bonding with phase transposition has been adopted on long routes in
these last years, as per D.24.XX.X.00000.10.010 “MV CABLES TYPICAL CROSS BONDING”.
This cross-bonding method is similar to “Kirke-Searing” bonding. When the number of minor sections is
divisible exactly by three, the circuit can be arranged to consist of one or more major sections in series. At
the junction of two major sections and at the ends of the circuit, the shields are bonded together and
grounded, although the grounds at the junctions of major sections will generally be only local ground rods
and the ground continuity conductor if one is provided.
Considering voltage and current values before examined for both-ends and single-end bonding, this practice
it’s no convenient for the following reasons:
 The total length of the cable drum is not fully utilized (excessive scrap).
 Screen grounding along the path requires an excessive number of insulating joints.
 The ground conductor inserted in the joint can cause moisture and corrosion.
 The junction between a copper ground conductor and aluminium screen requires a special and
accurate processing that if not done causes a serious overheating of the junction (300 °C about) and
certainly joint destruction.
F. GROUNDING METHODS AND PLANT EARTH ELECTRODE

Grounding of concentric neutral must match with the arrangement of plant earth electrode.
The arrangement of earth electrode depends on the location of HV substation with respect to the “generating
field” (Conversion Units for PV plants).
F1. COMMON EARTHING SYSTEM

In PV parks, HV substation and generating field are located on a common area surrounded by a fence, so
earth electrode is common. GCC (usually is a bare stranded copper wire) has laid in parallel to the path of
MV cables.
Both-ends bonding typical connections

In that case both sides of the MV cable is connected to the earth of the plant, hereinafter an example scheme.
CODICE – CODE

230 of 287
Single-end bonding
The criterion to adopt on each MV switchgear (main and secondary) is:
OUTGOING → GROUNDED
INCOMING → UNGROUNDED
Hereinafter an example scheme.
All MV cable joints (cold shrink type only) along cable route shall ensure electrical continuity of the screen.
F2. NO COMMON EARTHING SYSTEM

In PV plants where the earth electrode is not common, if the distance between HV substation (measured
from the fence) and the first closest CU is greater than five times of the largest diagonal of the HV substation
area, HV substation earth electrode and generating field one are electrically unconnected.
Only for generating field, a ground continuity conductor (usually is a bare stranded copper wire) has laid in
parallel to the MV cables. The same “shielding” criterion has applied about its laying.
The cable route between HV substation and the first CU must be equipped with an insulated GCC instead of
bare conductor.
This to avoid transfer of dangerous voltages from HV substation earth electrode to generating field one.
Shrinkable tubes must insulate GCC junctions, including the free terminal close to HV substation fence. It
only has the “shielding” function.
Both-ends bonding
The scheme shown hereinafter provides all the information about groundings.
CODICE – CODE

231 of 287
Joint with screen separation shall be installed at a distance of 5 meters from HV substation fence.
Single-end bonding
The scheme shown hereinafter provides all the information about groundings.
The criterion to adopt on each MV secondary switchgear (WTG) is:

OUTGOING → UNGROUNDED
INCOMING → GROUNDED
Joint with screen separation and insulated GCC have adopted too.
MV connections of LV/MV and HV/MV transformers

Screen between LV/MV transformer and MV switchgear can be single-end bonding if this is allowed by laws,
regulations and standards of the Country:
TR SIDE → UNGROUNDED
SWG SIDE → GROUNDED
On the ungrounded end, the screen must remain inside the terminal (not extracted).
CODICE – CODE

232 of 287
G. DESIGN PRESCRIPTIONS
G1. BASIC DESIGN
Grounding of concentric neutral methods to apply are:
 both-ends bonding
 single-end bonding
Basic design shall well define:
 Grounding of MV power system (collector)
 Plant earthing system arrangement (common / no common)
 Grounding of concentric neutral (verifying any prescription of laws, regulations and standards of the
Country).
GTS shall specify all these prescriptions for Tenders.
G2. DETAIL DESIGN

General
Detail design shall consider all the aspects relevant to grounding of concentric neutral.
Both-ends bonding
Contractor shall size MV cables detecting the additional losses and then comparing IT (total equivalent
theoretical current) with I’z (effective ampacity) as described at previous section 3.1.
Single-end bonding
Contractor shall size MV cables detecting, per each branch, the induced voltage on the screen in steady
state and short circuit conditions as described at previous section 2.5 including the induced voltage at each
separation joint. About separation joints, they must be sized considering the applied voltage between
separate screens due to a single phase to ground fault current on HV system (total earth voltage).
A monitor plate shall be installed inside each cable cubicle by this writing: “WARNING. DON’T TOUCH
SCREEN EARTHING CONDUCTOR AND EYELET”
Further design activities

Contractor shall produce “MV cable list and laying plan” document by which shall provide the following
information for each branch.
 From – To
 Branch Length (m)
 Average depth of laying (m)
 Cable core conductor cross section (mm2)
 Cable screen type and cross section (mm2)
 Screen grounding side
 Number of joints along the branch (including separation ones if any) and coordinates (“From” and
“To” distance - m)
CODICE – CODE

233 of 287
Delivery of this document in the final version – as built - is mandatory.
1.2.10. WORKS
1.2.10.1. SITE PREPARATION
The list of activities generally included in the Contractor’s scope of work contains, but is not limited to, the
following:
 Clearing and Stripping
 Top soil removal
 Earth Works
Site Preparation Works
1.2.10.1.1. Cleaning
The site cleaning is composed by the following sub-activities:

 Disposal and transportation of rocks, boulders and all the waste materials (such as metal items,
glass, waste,) to authorized dumpsite;
 Cut the grass and remove it during the construction activities and at the end of activities. The grass
height shall not interfere with the construction activities and with the proper functionality of the panels
(under no circumstances the grass should be higher than 50 cm);
 Removal of any tree (including roots at any depth) obstructing the civil works (steel structure, roads,
storage areas, precast cabin platforms,). In case of permanent removal, it will be the obligation of
the contractor to properly dispose the removed material.
1.2.10.1.2. Topsoil Removal
Removal and disposal of the vegetal topsoil (at least 10 to 30 cm, depending on the site conditions) and of
CODICE – CODE

234 of 287
all the bushes only in the areas of roads, cabins and storage. In the area of the tracker/mounting system the
vegetal topsoil shall be removed only where earth moving is needed by tracker/mounting system
requirements
1.2.10.1.3. Heavy Earth Movement
Earthworks shall be properly designed taking into account the layout of the plant, the location of the
Conversion Units, the orography of the area and the requirements for the installation of the trackers/mounting
systems.
Earthworks are necessary only for roads and platforms.
In the tracker/mounting system area they are necessary only if the soil orography is not suitable for the
tracker/mounting system installation.
1.2.10.2. PV MODULES ACTIVITY
1.2.10.2.1. PV Modules Installation
The PV Modules installation shall follow the instruction reported in the Installation Manual, which will be
provided to the Installer.
Bolts, rivets, clamps or alternative fasteners can be proposed and designed by the Contractor, if previously
certified with IEC 61215 and approved by the module Supplier.
Washer shall be grover/lock type to prevent an excessive loss of torque.
In any case, whatever is the kind of fastening proposed by the Contractor, the electric continuity shall be
always guaranteed.
Final validation by ENEL is in any case required.
The Contractor shall issue the documentation necessary to define at least the following:
 The dimensions of the fastening;
 The material and the mechanical properties of the fastenings;
 The torque range values necessary for the module installation as result of the calculations,
considering, also, the loss of torque, The torque range shall be clearly reported on the drawings;
 A certification confirming the compatibility of the fastenings with the PV modules in accordance with
IEC 61215 (last version) (ASTM E784-89), issued by an accredited laboratory;
In addition, the Installer shall connect only PV Modules from the same Impp class that is clearly reported on
each module pallet.
1.2.10.2.2. PV Modules Cabling
This section describe the procedures to be followed for the electrical connection of the PV modules and
strings belonging to a tracker or fixed structure.
In order to arrange a PV string it is necessary to connect in series each PV module.
The schematic figure below shall be taken as example of PV module and strings connection.
CODICE – CODE

235 of 287
Cable laying shall be in compliance with sections 1.2.9.5.3.1 and 1.2.11.1.3.

The Contractor shall refer to the manufacturer installation manual and use the specified tools to install the
connectors. EGP requires to use the same connectors (type and brand) in a male-female connection. PV
connectors shall be certified according to IEC 62854.
During tender phase, the Contractor could propose as OPTION the pre-parallel of two or three PV strings
(usually strings of the same supporting structure), using pre-parallel boxes or “Y”/”X” connectors, in order to
optimize the technical and economical solutions. In the specific case of low power PV modules (thin-film or
amorphous silicon), pre-parallel boxes or “Y”/”X” connectors will be used in order to achieve the appropriate
input current for the string boxes.
1.2.10.2.3. PV Modules Cleaning
The Contractor shall execute two complete cleanings of all the PV modules, one before the PV power plant
First Electrification and another one before the Full Capacity day. In case of bifacial technology, the cleaning
also includes the PV module rear side. It's up to the Contractor to schedule the cleanings consistently with
these deadlines and to finish them not earlier than one week before the supposed First Electrification and
the Full Capacity day.
The possible alternatives are:
1) Traditional modules cleaning (manual system; to be adopted only in case of high water availability).
2) Low water consumption modules cleaning (automatic systems); for instance: low water consumption on
truck technology (average water consumption: 0,2 liters/m 2, which is 7 times less than traditional
systems).
3) Dry modules cleaning (manual or totally automatic systems; to be adopted in case of no water
availability); for instance: fully no water consumption technology (effective daily cleaning technology,
fully automated robot fleet, energy independent. Each robot can be assigned to a specific solar row and
includes its own electric engine, a set of two microfiber cleaning modules and a communication board.
The robot hybrid mechanism can generate electricity while descending, helping to minimize energy
consumption during the operation, providing both energy efficiency and a controlled descent).
1.2.10.2.4. Serial Number Database
Each PV module serial number shall be optically read and recorded during the arrangement of the PV string.
These serial numbers shall be used for the As Built PV modules arrangement document.
An ID plate will be nailed on the PV supporting structure through rivets in order to identify every single part
of the system, in accordance with the PV modules layout plan, the single line diagram and/or the block
diagram.
CODICE – CODE

236 of 287
1.2.10.3. CABINS ACTIVITY
1.2.10.3.1. Equipment Interconnection
The cabin shall be completely wired (signals and power) ready to work as a plug-play system. This section
will describe all necessary LV connections in order to ensure a complete operation of the different MV cabins
The size and the type of LV shall be design according to IEC 60364. LV cables used for interconnections will
be fire retardant, type FG7OR with minimum insulation 0,6/1 kV and shall be of suitable section, with the
following minimum sections:
 4 mm2 for the current transformers (T.A);
 2,5 mm2 for the control circuits;
 1.5 mm2 for the signal circuits and voltage transformers (T.V.);
 Power circuit (phase): Black;
 Power circuit (neutral): Light Blue;
 Ground circuit: Yellow/Green;
 Auxiliary circuit for internal utilities: Red;
 Auxiliary circuit for external utilities: Orange;
 Auxiliary circuit for settings: White;
Two wires may be allowed on the same terminal only on the internal side of the panel. The terminals shall
be a type for which the tightening pressure is obtained by means of a splint and not directly from the screw.
The wires shall be combined in bundles in channel runs or similar systems with a removable cover. These
systems shall allow for additional wires to be inserted, whose volume equals 25% of those already installed.
Adhesive fastening systems are not permitted.
A. CONVERSION CABIN (PCU)

In addition to the requirements already included inside Chapter 1.2.3.1.1, the contractor shall provide at least
the following power and control cabling in order to ensure complete operation of the cabin:
 LV aux power cabling from the inverter to the LV/LV aux transformer
 LV aux power cabling from the LV/LV aux transformer to the LV aux panel
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the UPS
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the inverters
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the MV SWGR
 LV control cabling between the LV aux panel and the MV/LV transformer
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and all the electrical auxiliary equipment
of the cabin (such as normal & emergency lighting, ventilation system, smoke detection, anti-
intrusion system, insulation monitoring system, power analyzer, etc.)
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the tracker supply main panel
(phase, neutral, ground, and communications)
CODICE – CODE

237 of 287
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and ICT equipment
 Cabling of external grounding systems with the equipotential system of the cabin:
o Grounding of the PV plant
o Grounding under the cabin foundation
o Grounding of the different cabins of the feeder
B. TRANSFORMATION CABIN (TC)

In addition to the requirements already included inside Chapter 1.2.3.1.2, the contractor shall provide at least
the following power and control cabling in order to ensure complete operation of the cabin:
 LV aux power cabling from the LV parallel cabin to the LV/LV aux transformer
 LV aux power cabling from the LV/LV aux transformer to the LV aux panel
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the inverters (if applicable)
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the LV parallel panel
 LV control cabling between the LV aux panel and the MV/LV transformer
 LV aux power and control cabling between the LV aux panel and the tracker supply main panel
(phase, neutral, ground, and communications)
C. DELIVERY/PARALLEL CABIN
In addition to the requirements already included inside Chapter 1.2.3.2.1 and 1.2.3.2.2, the contractor shall
provide at least the following power and control cabling in order to ensure complete operation of the cabin:
 MV aux power cabling from the MV SWGR to the MV/LV aux transformer
 LV aux power cabling from the MV/LV aux transformer to the LV aux panel
CODICE – CODE

238 of 287

1.2.11. OTHER ACTIVITIES
1.2.11.1. FINISHING
1.2.11.1.1. Cables and Equipment Labeling
Labels for all cables and all the equipment (AC pre-parallel boxes, LV AC Power Panels, MV switchgears,
MV cubicles, etc.) shall be UV-resistant, weatherproof and shall be printed on a hard support.
All tags shall be identified by using clear legible labels.
A. EQUIPMENT
All equipment has be identified by an identification label. All labels and signs shall be metallic and shall
be exposed in a visible place outside the component/equipment.
This metallic plate should also incorporate:

 Name of the Manufacturer;
 Identification code assigned to the box by the Manufacturer (according to Engineering
documentation);
 Year of manufacturing.
Each PV supporting structure shall have an ID plate, nailed on the structure through rivets, in order to identify
every single part of the system, in accordance with the PV modules layout plan, the single line diagram and/or
the block diagram.
B. CABLES
All cables of each electrical equipment shall be labeled according to the nomenclature shown on the
electrical diagrams (approved by EGP). Cables shall be identified by using clear readable labels arranged
before their entry into the panel connectors/terminal (inside the box). These labels shall shall guarantee
a duration for the plant lifetime as stated in the General Technical Specification.
All string cables shall be identified with the following coding:
 MV feeder (a);
 PCU (a.b): to identify the PCU b of MV feeder a;
 I (a.b.c): to identify the inverter c inside PCU a.b;
 SB (a.b.c.d): to identify string box d, connected to inverter a.b.c;
 S (a.b.c.d.e): to identify PV string e connected to string box a.b.c.d;
Only in case of pre-parallel boxes:
 PP (a.b.c.d.e): to identify pre-parallel box e connected to string box a.b.c.d;
CODICE – CODE

239 of 287
 S (a.b.c.d.e.f): to identify PV string f, connected to pre-parallel box a.b.c.d.e.

Letters a, b, c, d, e, f are to be intended as the numbers indicating each equipment.
The Contractor shall consider the figure below as examples of correct execution of cable labeling.
1.2.11.1.2. Equipment Sealing
All the cableways for the incoming and outgoing lines of the cabins/PCUs shall be sealed using suitable
rodent-resistant, fire and waterproof resin-based thermoplastics. The Contractor shall install pre-drilled and
re-sealable barriers inside the cableways in order to add further cables in case of future modifications and/or
expansions of the system
1.2.11.1.3. Solar Cable Fixing
The cables of PV modules shall be secured directly to the supporting structures by using UV-resistant nylon
ties suitable for external use.
Contractor shall install the string cables in one of the following way:
 Fixing the solar cables with nylon ties on the longitudinal tracker structure, or
 Longitudinally inside the torque tube of PV trackers, or
 Longitudinally inside heat galvanized cable trays properly sized (supply and installation of cable trays
by BOP contractor), or
 Longitudinally supported by PV hanger structure.
In any case the cable cannot be in contact with the metallic edges: all the cutting edges parts shall be
protected through plastic elements.
1.2.11.2. TRAINING
1.2.11.2.1. PCU
Aim of the trainings shall be the education of the personnel on how to perform in an effective and safe way
all the main activities regarding:
 scheduled maintenance;
 Troubleshooting to restore the proper functioning of the Conversion Unit;
 corrective maintenance, as defined below:
o 1st level: minor corrective actions which could require use of consumables and minor spare parts
(such as cooling fans, fuses, relays, contactors, switches, walls, rooftop, etc.); this shall include
all the MV maneuvering actions;
CODICE – CODE

240 of 287
o 2nd level: major corrective actions, with use of strategic Spare Parts and related calibration, such
as IGBT, PLC/RTU, datalogger, grounding kit, MPPT, converters, inverters, power suppliers,
circuit boards, etc.;
o 3rd level: corrective SW maintenance (as example upgrade firmware).
The supply shall also include 5 days of training course (2 days in the classroom and 3 day on-site). The
Contractor shall propose the contents of the training for EGP acceptance.
The training above should include, at minimum, the following topics:
 basic photovoltaic understanding;
 inverter and Conversion Unit technology;
 Detailed description of the inverters;
 Detailed description of all equipment (UPS, Smoke Alarm System, MV/LV transformers, etc.),
operational modes and assets;
 Conversion Unit maintenance (Scheduled, Corrective, Extraordinary);
 hands on Conversion Unit servicing and maintenance (including all the safety operations);
 Interlock sequence of operations over the Conversion Units equipment, particularly over the MV
switchboard;
 upgrading software and hardware of equipment;
 detailed review of all alarm codes and the cause of that;
 Troubleshooting activities.
The Supplier shall provide live instruction, all books and materials (in language of the country where the plant
is placed or at least English in hard copy and electronic format) needed for each employee that attends the
training; this material shall include, at least:
 General diagram of installations;
 SCADA complete architecture and description;
 General plan of equipment arrangement;
 Product technical sheets for materials supplied;
Eventually tutorial videos and operational instructions over the maintenance operations.
The Client shall provide a classroom location with electric power, whiteboard and any other items deemed
necessary to conduct proper training; this class can be located on plant or in any other EGP office (this will
be communicated by EGP). All the expenses (included travel cost, teacher cost, etc.) shall be hold by
supplier.
Upon completion of training, the Supplier shall issue a personal nominative certificate to the participants,
enabling them to operate and perform preventive and corrective maintenance, effectively on their own
equipment supply without any warranty violation.
The Client reserves the right to request:

CODICE – CODE

241 of 287
 customization on the training courses: the Client shall define the requirements, the specifications,
the location, the maximum number of participants per session (inclusive of the documentation and
of all the necessary provision for the trainings);
 Training of third parties personnel indicated by the Client, after signature of a no disclosure
agreement.
1.2.11.2.2. Auxiliary SCADA
Contractor shall plan and provide formal training both on site and at the Contractor’s facility for Client
personnel. The courses shall be specified in the Supplier construction and delivery program and submitted
to EGP for approval.
Each course will include both theoretical and practical lessons on parts of the system and on the fully
assembled system as well. The use of parts/ equipment of the supply for training purpose shall not affect the
schedule of the project nor the delivery time.
During the project, EGP will communicate where the course shall be held (e.g. EGP offices in one of the
different countries or in the relevant power plant).
The duration of each course shall be 5 days or 9 days depending on the typology (travel days not included),
two people training, maximum 15 people attending. The course shall be in Italian, Spanish or English based
on EGP request and depending on the country. The cost of training course shall include any trainer
accommodation and travel expenses.
Course Documentation
For each trainee who will attend a training course, a copy of the complete training course, notes, and
drawings shall be provided to Client eight weeks prior to the commencement of the training course. The
copies shall be retained by the trainees on completion of the training course and shall be the property of
Client.
In addition, five electronic and paper copies of the training course documentation shall be available on site
prior to the installation and commissioning for reference purposes.
Course Scope
The purpose of this course is to train Operation & Maintenance technicians for first line fault diagnosis, and
repair by replacement or other pertinent actions. At least the following information will be provided: analysis
of typical malfunctions, troubleshooting criteria, replacing components (workstation, RTU, power supply,..),
monitoring software, restoring any software malfunctions, back-up and restore procedure database state.
The course will be based on the Operation and Maintenance manual issued by the Supplier.
The Supplier shall provide two types of training courses:

 Course for Operation & Maintenance (5 days)
The purpose of this course is to train technicians for first line fault diagnosis, and repair by
replacement or other pertinent actions. At least the following information will be provided: analysis of
typical malfunctions, troubleshooting criteria, replacing components (workstation, RTU, power
CODICE – CODE

242 of 287
supply,..), monitoring software, restoring any software malfunctions, back-up and restore procedure
database state. The course will be based on the Operation and Maintenance manual issued by
the Supplier.
 Course for System Configuration and Customization (9 days)
The purpose of this course is to train technicians in the software development and management and
in the use of the engineering workstation for the creation and editing of video pages, acquisition of
new signals, management of the real time and the historical database, modifications of settings. The
course will be based on the Software Configuration manual issued by the Supplier. An Engineering
Workstation shall be available during the course.
1.3. PROCESSES
1.3.1. ENGINEERING
1.3.1.1. GENERAL
1.3.1.2. SPECIFIC STUDIES
1.3.1.2.1. Earthing System
The design of the earthing system of the PV plant shall take into account the contribution of the electrical grid
fault current, the contribution of the PV plant, the tripping time of the electrical protections (input data given
by EGP) and the soil electrical resistivity of the site, according to IEEE 80 (considering an Human Person of
50 kg), EN 50522 (“Earthing of power installations exceeding 1kV a.c.”) and any applicable Local Standards.
During the design phase, the Contractor shall carry out a specific study according to following:
 calculation of the estimated ground impedance;
 calculation of the admissible ground potential rise;
 layout of the earthing system including materials used, sections for laying, fences and components;
 drawings of typical connections of the components;
 layout of the earthing system including touch & step voltage calculations with graph (the calculation
shall consider all areas of the grounding system up to three meters outside the PV plant fence);
 the Contractor shall carry out measurements of electrical and thermal resistivity of the soil according
to EGP Elementary Part - Geotechnical Studies: PPP.PSS.ENG.03.002.00; the quantity of points of
measurement (both electrical and thermal resistivity) shall be minimum one for each 5 MWp and at
least 10 points of measurement for the PV plant;
 The Contractor shall strictly comply with the requirements set in the PV module installation manual
in order to guarantee the correct earthing of the PV modules.
The design of the earthing system of the PV plant shall take into account the contribution of the electrical grid
fault current (Ifg) plus the contribution of the PV plant (Iccpv), multiplied by 1.05: (Ifg + Iccpv) * 1.05.
In order to speed up the commissioning activities of a large scale PV plant, step by step, the design of
earthing system and the coordination plan of the electrical protection system shall consider the progressive
CODICE – CODE

243 of 287
erection and commissioning of the plant.

This means that Contractor shall issue the calculation report considering the progressive erection works of
earthing grid according to the erection sequence of work areas (subfield by subfield, both through finite
element analysis and test on site) upon to the final configuration.
The earthing system mesh shall be installed inside the fence area/perimeter of the PV plant; the earthing
system and/or any other metallic mass shall be at least 5 meters far from the fence perimeter.
The Contractor shall select the material to be used for the earthing system, especially the earth electrode,
on the basis of the soil corrosion agents according to the results of the geological report.
Based on the characteristic of the agents in the soil the material to be used for the earthing system shall be
the following:
 Copper for corrosive or high corrosive soil;
 Hot-dipped galvanized steel for slightly or non-corrosive soil
The Contractor shall refer to Annex C of EN 50522 below, regarding materials and minimum cross-sections.
CODICE – CODE

244 of 287
Table 14– Annex C extracted from the EN 50522 (2011-07)
1.3.1.2.2. Risk Assessment for Lightning Protection System
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed study to assess the risk of a lightning strike and the proper design
of the Lightning Protection System in order to protect the PV plant both during construction phase and
during operational lifetime as stated in the General Technical Specification (GTS) in full compliance with
Local Norms and Laws. Lightning Protection shall comply with the International Standard IEC/EN 62305
(“Protection against lightning”).
Lightning Protection (LP) will consist of a Lightning Protection System (LPS) and Surge Protective
Measures (SPM) in compliance with the requirements of IEC 62305-1 Standard.
LP analysis and design will require a “global approach” that means to consider all power electric and
CODICE – CODE

245 of 287
electronic systems inside the fence of the PV plant, that has to be intended as the entire structure to be
protected. The risk assessment shall be performed in compliance with IEC 62305-2 by considering the PV
plant (structure) divided in two main zones each one having homogeneous characteristics:
 Zone 1 HV substation area
 Zone 2 All the rest of the plant area (PV generating field)
The following risk types shall be considered:

 R1: risk of loss of a human life (including permanent injury)
 R4: risk of loss of economic value
The formula to calculate the risk is:

R=NxPxL
Where:
N is the number of dangerous events per year;
P is the probability of damage to the structure;
L is the consequent loss.
Risk assessment shall consider LPS and SPM already adopted in other equipment and systems of the
plant.
Regarding the loss of human life (including permanent injury), IEC 62305-2 Standard suggests as limit
value RT = 10-5. The assessment process of the risk assessment will require the correct evaluation of the
time per year for which the people are present in the area.
About economic loss, IEC 62305-2 does not provide a limit value but suggests to assess risk R4 by the
evaluation of the cost of the economic loss with and without the adoption of protection measures. A good
practice is to assess “frequency of damage” F defined as follows:
F=N*P=R/L
Frequency of damage is intended as “number of damages per year”. F value shall be compared with a
limit value FT. If F > FT then protective measures have to be adopted in order to obtain F ≤ FT. An
acceptable value of FT is “one damage during the lifetime expectancy of the plant”.
1.3.1.2.3. Cable Sizing
The cross-sections of MV and LV cables shall be designed in order to guarantee the required plant lifetime
as specified in the General Technical Specification (GTS).
The cables shall be sized according the maximum operating temperature as specified in the Table below
(please refer to EN 60702 for any modifications and integrations):
Max operating temperatures for insulation materials

Type of Insulation Max operating temperature [°C]
PVC/Thermoplastic Conductor: 70°C
XLPE and EPR/HEPR Conductor: 90°C
Mineral (in PVC sheath or bare and
Metallic sheath: 70°C
accessible)
CODICE – CODE

246 of 287
Max operating temperatures for insulation materials

Type of Insulation Max operating temperature [°C]
Mineral (bare and not accessible, not in
Metallic sheath: 105°C (Note 2)
contact with combustible materials)
Note 2: for cables with mineral insulation, higher operating temperatures are allowed
in respect of operating temperature for the cable and terminations, external
conditions and any other external influence that may affect the overall conditions of
the cable.
Table 15 – Max operating temperatures for insulation materials
The contractor shall perform the cable ampacity dimensioning as requested in the applicable local and
international standards. For other cable installation and dimensioning conditions different to the ones
explicitly considered in the normative, the contractor shall perform the cable dimensioning through the
CYMCAP software (or a similar finite element software with the same characteristics).
In addition to the cable ampacity, the cables shall meet with the short-circuit, power loss and voltage drop
requirements specified inside EGP Technical Specifications. In particular:
 the power losses and voltage drop calculation on the AC side shall be performed by load flow study
in Digsilent
 the short-circuit withstand capability of the AC cables shall be verified by a short-circuit study in
Digsilent”.
1.3.1.2.3.1. LV Cables
The admissible current rating (ampacity) of the LV cables at operating conditions shall be calculated in
accordance with the cable manufacturer tables and IEC 60364-5-52 standard, or other equivalent Local
Norms and Standards, by applying the correction factors (K) that depend on the ambient temperature and
the specific installation conditions. In particular, the Contractor shall calculate a correction factor (KTOT) as
product of the correction coefficients K1, K2, K3 and K4.
K1 is the correction factor to be applied when the ambient ground temperature is different from 20°C taken
as reference value, according to IEC 60364-5-52:2009 Table B.52.15 valid for cables in ducts in the ground
(T16); IEC 60364-5-52:2009 Table B.52.14 shall be considered for cables in the air.
Ambient Type of insulation

Ground
Temperature PVC XLPE and EPR
[°C]
10 1.10 1.07
15 1.05 1.04
20 1.00 1.00
25 0.95 0.96
30 0.89 0.93
35 0.84 0.89
CODICE – CODE

247 of 287
Ambient Type of insulation

Ground
Temperature PVC XLPE and EPR
[°C]
40 0.77 0.85
45 0.71 0.80
50 0.63 0.76
55 0.55 0.71
60 0.45 0.65
Table 16 – The correction factor K1 to be applied when the ambient ground temperature is different from 20°C (cables in
ducts in the ground)
K2 is the correction factor to be applied for groups of LV circuits installed in the same trench (considering all
levels of laying), according to IEC 60364-5-52:2009 Table B.52.18 for cables laid directly in the ground (Table
17), both single-core and multi-core; IEC 60364-5-52:2009 Tables B.52.19, B.52.20, B.52.21 shall be
considered for cables in ducts in the ground and cables in the air.
Single-core / Multi-core cables
Cable to cable clearance

Number of
circuits One
Cables
cable 12.5 cm 25 cm 50 cm
touching
diameter
2 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.90
3 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85
4 0.60 0.60 0.70 0.75 0.80
5 0.55 0.55 0.65 0.70 0.80
6 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.70 0.80
7 0.45 0.51 0.59 0.67 0.76
8 0.43 0.48 0.57 0.65 0.75
Table 17 – The correction factor K2 to be applied for groups of LV circuits (more than one) installed in the same trench
(direct buried cables)
K3 is the correction factor to be applied for burial depth different from the value used as a reference, equal
to 0.7 m (Table 18);
K3 Correction Factor
Burial depth [m] 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.5
Correction factor 1.02 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94
Table 18 – The correction factor K3 for depth of laying different from 0.7 m
K4 is the correction factor to be applied for soil thermal resistivity different from the value taken as a reference
equal to 2.5 K*m/W, according to IEC 60364-5-52:2009 Table B.52.16 for single-core and multi-core cables
CODICE – CODE

248 of 287
(see Table 19). The Contractor shall carry out measurements of electrical and thermal resistivity of the soil
according to EGP Elementary part: PPP.PSS.ENG.03.002.00 – Geotechnical studies; the quantity of points
of measurement (both electrical and thermal resistivity) shall be minimum one for each 5 MWp and at least
10 points of measurement for the PV plant.
Single-core / Multi-core cables

Soil thermal resistivity [K*m/W] 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Correction factor for cable in buried duct 1.28 1.20 1.18 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.96
Correction factor for direct buried cables 1.88 1.62 1.50 1.28 1.12 1.00 0.90
Table 19 – The correction factor K4 for soil thermal resistivity different from 2.5 K*m/W
The cross-section of the cables shall be designed in order to have

𝐼𝑏 < 𝐼𝑧 ′ = 𝐼𝑧 ∗ 𝐾𝑇𝑂𝑇 = 𝐼𝑧 ∗ (𝐾1 ∗ 𝐾2 ∗ 𝐾3 ∗ 𝐾4 ),
where:
- Ib is the operating current [A]; on the DC side, which will be provided by EGP inside the GTS in project
by project basis
- Iz is the admissible current rating (ampacity) [A] of the cables reported in the cable datasheet or in the
IEC 60364-5-52 tables.
In case IEC 60364-5-52 Standard, or other equivalent Local Norms and Standards, are not applicable
for the specific installation conditions, then the Contractor shall adopt for the ampacity calculation a
proper calculation software using FEM (Finite Element Method).
1.3.1.2.3.2. MV Cables
The admissible current rating (ampacity) of the MV cables at operating conditions shall be calculated in
accordance with the cable manufacturer tables and IEC 60502-2 Standard, or other equivalent Local Norms
and Standards, by applying the correction factors (K) that depend on the ambient temperature and the
specific installation conditions. In particular, the Contractor shall calculate a correction factor (KTOT) as
product of the correction coefficients K1, K2, K3 and K4.
K1 is the correction factor to be applied when the ambient air temperature is different from 30°C (reference
in case of air installation) or the ambient ground temperature is different from 20°C (reference in case of
ground installation), according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Tables B.10 and B.11 (Table 20)
Maximum conductor temperature 90 °C

Temperature [°C] Air Ground
10 1.07
15 1.04
20 1.08 1.00
25 1.04 0.96
30 1.00 0.93
CODICE – CODE

249 of 287
Maximum conductor temperature 90 °C

Temperature [°C] Air Ground
35 0.96 0.89
40 0.91 0.85
45 0.87 0.80
50 0.82 0.76
55 0.76
60 0.71
Table 20 – The correction factor K1 to be applied when the ambient air temperature is different from 30°C or the ambient
ground temperature is different from 20°C
K2 is the correction factor to be applied for groups of MV circuits installed in the same trench (considering all
levels of laying), according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Table B.19 for single-core direct buried cables (Table 21),
and according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Table B.21 for single-core cables in buried ducts (Table 22); IEC 60502-
2:2014 Tables B.18 and B.20 shall be considered for three-core cables
Single-core directly buried cables
Number of Distance among circuits

circuits
Touching 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm
2 0.73 0.83 0.88 0.90 0.92
3 0.60 0.73 0.79 0.83 0.86
4 0.54 0.68 0.75 0.80 0.84
5 0.49 0.63 0.72 0.78 0.82
6 0.46 0.61 0.70 0.76 0.81
7 0.43 0.58 0.68 0.75 0.80
8 0.41 0.57 0.67 0.74 -
Table 21 – The correction factor K2 to be applied for groups of MV circuits installed in the same trench (single-core direct
buried cables)
Single-core cables in buried ducts
Number of Distance among circuits

circuits
Touching 20 cm 40 cm 60 cm 80 cm
2 0.78 0.85 0.89 0.91 0.93
3 0.66 0.75 0.81 0.85 0.88
4 0.59 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.86
5 0.55 0.66 0.74 0.80 0.84
6 0.51 0.64 0.72 0.78 0.83
7 0.48 0.61 0.71 0.77 0.82
8 0.46 0.60 0.70 0.76 -
CODICE – CODE

250 of 287
Table 22 – The correction factor K2 to be applied for groups of MV circuits installed in the same trench (single-core cables in
buried ducts)
K3 is the correction factor to be applied for burial depth different from the value used as reference, equal to
0.8 m, according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Table B.12 for direct buried cables (see Table 23 below), and
according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Table B.13 for cables in buried ducts (see Table 24 below)
K3 for Direct buried cables

Depht of laying [m] 1.00 1.25 1.50
Correction factor
Single-core < 185 mm2 0.98 0.96 0.95
Single-core > 185 mm2 0.97 0.95 0.93
Three-core 0.98 0.96 0.95
Table 23 – The correction factor K3 to be applied for depth of laying different from 0.8 m (direct buried cables)
K3 for Cables in buried ducts

Depht of laying [m] 1.00 1.25 1.50
Correction factor
Single-core < 185 mm2 0.98 0.96 0.95
Single-core > 185 mm2 0.97 0.95 0.93
Three-core 0.99 0.97 0.96
Table 24 – The correction factor K3 to be applied for depth of laying different from 0.8 m (cables in buried ducts)
K4 is the correction factor to be applied for soil thermal resistivity different from the value taken as reference,
equal to 1.5 K*m/W, according to IEC 60502-2:2014 Table B.14 for direct buried single-core cables (Table
25), IEC 60502-2:2014 Tables B.16 and B.17 shall be considered for three-core cables; in case of cable
cross-sections over 400mm2, the manufacturer’s specific tables shall be considered for the admissible
current ratings. The Contractor shall carry out measurements of electrical and thermal resistivity of the soil
according to Geotechnical studies. The quantity of points of measurement (both electrical and thermal
resistivity) shall be minimum one for each 5 MW dc and at least 10 points of measurement for the PV plant.
Cable cross- Soil thermal resistivity

section (K*m/W)
(mm2)
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 2.0 2.5 3.0
16 1.29 1.24 1.19 1.15 0.89 0.82 0.75
25 1.30 1.25 1.20 1.16 0.89 0.81 0.75
35 1.30 1.25 1.21 1.16 0.89 0.81 0.75
50 1.32 1.26 1.21 1.16 0.89 0.81 0.74
70 1.33 1.27 1.22 1.17 0.89 0.81 0.74
95 1.34 1.28 1.22 1.18 0.89 0.80 0.74
CODICE – CODE

251 of 287
Cable cross- Soil thermal resistivity

section (K*m/W)
(mm2)
0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 2.0 2.5 3.0
120 1.34 1.28 1.22 1.18 0.88 0.80 0.74
150 1.35 1.28 1.23 1.18 0.88 0.80 0.74
185 1.35 1.29 1.23 1.18 0.88 0.80 0.74
240 1.36 1.29 1.23 1.18 0.88 0.80 0.73
300 1.36 1.30 1.24 1.19 0.88 0.80 0.73
400 1.37 1.30 1.24 1.19 0.88 0.79 0.73
Table 25 – The correction factor K4 to be applied for soil thermal resistivity different from 1.5 K*m/W (single-core direct
buried cables)
The cross-section of the cables shall be chosen in order to have:

𝐼𝑏 < 𝐼𝑧 ′ = 𝐼𝑧 ∗ 𝐾𝑇𝑂𝑇 = 𝐼𝑧 ∗ (𝐾1 ∗ 𝐾2 ∗ 𝐾3 ∗ 𝐾4 ),
Where:
- Ib is the operating current [A];
- Iz is the admissible current rating (ampacity) [A] of the cables reported in the cable datasheet or in
the IEC 60502-2 tables.
The MV cables shall be sized also to withstand the maximum short-circuit current by taking into account the
maximum temperature admissible for the cable during a short period of time (normally 250 °C). The maximum
short circuit current that a given cable can withstand can be calculated as:
𝐾∗𝑆
𝐼𝑐𝑐 = 2 (A)
√𝑡
Where:
- Icc is the maximum short-circuit current [A] admissible for the cable
- K is a factor of the conductor material
- S is the area of the conductor (mm2)
- t is the duration of the short-circuit (s)
The BoP Contractor shall ensure that the selected cables shall withstand the maximum possible short circuit
currents of the plant (corresponding to 3phase short circuit current on each bus for a 1s duration), calculated
from the plant short circuit studies.
In case IEC 60502-2 Standard, or other equivalent Local Norms and Standards, are not applicable for
the specific installation conditions, then the Contractor shall adopt for the ampacity calculation a
proper calculation software using FEM (Finite Element Method).
All MV cable lines (between Power Conversion Units and from Power Conversion Units to the Main MV
collector switchgear) shall have maximum one conductor per phase up to 630 mm2. Furthermore, the
CODICE – CODE

252 of 287
maximum apparent power [MVA] collected per single MV feeder shall be defined based on the MV level [kV]
according to the following Table 26.
Max Power per MV

MV level [kV]
feeder [MVA]
11.0 7
13.8 9
20.0 13
22.0 14
24.0 16
30.0 20
33.0 22
34.5 23
36.0 24
Table 26 – The maximum apparent power [MVA] per MV feeder, depending on MV level [kV]
The Contractor shall be aware that the maximum apparent power [MVA] values for MV feeder, in any case
could be higher or lower than the ones showed in Table 26 above (to be considered as reference), since this
power voltage/power references are calculated according to standard assumptions on ambient temperature
(factor K1), groups of MV circuits on the same trench (K2), laying depth (K3), soil thermal resistivity (K4), and
to comply with maximum AC voltage drop and losses specified in the following section 6.3.3.
In case of HV/MV Main Power Transformer with 3 windings (1 HV winding + 2 MV windings), the power
connected [MVA] shall be balanced on each MV winding:
AHV = 2 * AMV1 = 2 * AMV2  AMV1 = AMV2 [MVA]
In the event that the load cannot be balanced (A MV1 > AMV2), transformer will be sized adopting the
following rule:
AHV = 2 × AMV1 [MVA]
1.3.1.2.3.3. Voltage Drop & Power Losses
The LV and MV cables shall be sized to comply with the following:

 maximum admissible voltage drops, to be satisfied in each single circuit
 maximum admissible power losses, to be satisfied for the overall PV plant
The Contractor shall calculate the voltage drops and losses taking into account the cables resistance R [ohm]
at the temperature of the conductor as per the following:
1 + 𝛼(𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 ) 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 2
𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐵 = 𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐶 = ( )
𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 𝐼
𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐴 = 𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐵 · 𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐶
1 − 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 · 𝛼 + 𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐴 · 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏
𝑇=
𝑎𝑢𝑥𝐴 − 𝛼
CODICE – CODE

253 of 287
𝑅(𝑇) = 𝑅20º · (1 + 𝛼(𝑇 − 𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 ))

Where
𝐶𝑈 = 0.00392 Imax = corrected ampacity of the cable

𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 = 20º𝐶 𝛼=[
𝐴𝐿 = 0.00403 Imax =Iz·k1·k2·k3·k4
𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 90º𝐶 𝑅20º = cable resistance at 20ºC from datasheet
I = injected current through the cable
Calculations on AC side shall be executed considering max current Imax [A], nominal voltage Vn [V] and
the cables reactance X [ohm]:
𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝐷𝑟𝑜𝑝𝐴𝐶 [𝑉] = √3 ∗ (𝑅 ∗ cos 𝜑 + 𝑋 ∗ sin 𝜑) ∗ 𝐼max
2
𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠𝐴𝐶 [𝑊] = 3 ∗ (𝑅 ∗ cos 𝜑 + 𝑋 ∗ sin 𝜑) ∗ 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Calculations on DC side shall be executed considering STC conditions (current Imp [A] and voltage Vmp
[V]):
𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡𝐷𝑟𝑜𝑝𝐷𝐶 [𝑉] = 2 ∗ 𝑅 ∗ 𝐼𝑚𝑝
2
𝐿𝑜𝑠𝑠𝐷𝐶 [𝑊] = 2 ∗ 𝑅 ∗ 𝐼𝑚𝑝
The maximum admissible voltage drops [%], to be satisfied in each single circuit, are indicated in the table
below:
MAXIMUM ADMISSIBLE VOLTAGE DROP
Segment Centralized String

Segment between the HV/MV substation (or MV Point of Delivery) and
1.40%(1) 1.40%(1)
the MV Panel of any PCU (or Transformation Cabin)
Segment between the MV Panel of any PCU and the MV/LV transformer 0.00% 0.00%
Segment between the MV/LV transformer and the inverter output 0.10%(2) -
Segment between the MV/LV transformer and the AC Parallel Panel (of
- 0.10%(3)
String Inverters)
AC Side until Cabin (Conversion or Transformation) 1.50% 1.50%
Segment between the AC Parallel Panel and the String Inverter output
n.a. 0.75%
(including AC Pre-Parallel Box of String Inverters if applicable)
AC Side from Cabins until PV Fields n.a. 0.75%
AC side – Total Voltage Drop 1.50% 2.25%
Segment between the inverter input and the combiner boxes (if any) 0.10% -
Segment between the combiner boxes (if any) and the string boxes 0.65% -
Segment between the string boxes (or String Inverters) and the PV
1.25% 1.25%
strings (including pre-parallel boxes)
DC side – Total Voltage Drop 2.00%(4) 1.25%
(1) For each MV feeder, the sum of voltage drop in each MV line (between substation and PCUs or Transformation
Cabin) shall be max 1.40%
(2) The segment between the MV/LV transformer and the inverter output is under the responsibility of PCU supplier
(3) The segment between the MV/LV transformer and the AC Parallel Panel (of String Inverters) is under the
responsibility of Transformation Cabin supplier
(4) For each possible path from centralized inverter to PV string, the total DC voltage drop shall be max 2.00%
The maximum admissible power losses [%], to be satisfied for the overall PV plant, are indicated in the table
below:
CODICE – CODE

254 of 287
MAXIMUM ADMISSIBLE POWER LOSSES

Segment Centralized String
Segment between the HV/MV substation (or MV Point of Delivery) and
0.40%(1) 0.40%(1)
the MV Panel of any PCU
Segment between the MV Panel of any PCU and the MV/LV transformer 0.00% 0.00%
Segment between the MV/LV transformer and the inverter output 0.10%(3) -
Segment between the MV/LV transformer and the AC Parallel Panel (of
- 0.10%(3)
String Inverters)
AC Side until Cabin (Conversion or Transformation) 0.50% 0.50%
Segment between the AC Parallel Panel and the String Inverter output
n.a. 0.40%
(including AC Pre-Parallel Box of String Inverters if applicable)
AC Side from Cabins until PV Fields n.a. 0.40%
AC side – Total Voltage Drop 0.50% 0.90%
Segment between the inverter input and the combiner boxes (if any) 0.10% -
Segment between the combiner boxes (if any) and the string boxes 0.30% -
Segment between the string boxes and the PV strings (including pre-
0.60% 0.60%
parallel boxes)
DC side – Total Voltage Drop 1.00%(4) 0.60%
(1) Summing all the power losses [W] in each MV line and dividing by the total AC power [W] of the PV plant, the
result shall be max 0.40%
(2) The segment between the MV/LV transformer and the inverter output is under the responsibility of PCU supplier
(3) The segment between the MV/LV transformer and the AC Parallel Panel (of String Inverters) is under the
responsibility of Transformation Cabin supplier
(4) Summing all the power losses [W] in each DC line and dividing by the total DC power @ STC [Wp] of the PV
plant, the result shall be max 1.00%.
In case of large PV plants, during tender phase (technical alignment phase), the Contractor could propose
different configurations (i.e. with higher power losses but lower cost of cables) to be evaluated by EGP with
the aim to optimize the project.
For the cases in which the substation is located far away from the PV plant, it will be allowed to incur in a
further power loss, applicable to the MV cable installed from the delivery cabin up to the substation. The extra
power losses allowed are indicated as below.
DISTANCE BETWEEN THE SUBSTATION AND

THE DELIVERY/PARALLEL CABIN
Full Load Hours ≤ 1km >1km

(FLH)
≤ 2500 FLH 0% + 0.054%/km
2500 < FLH ≤ 3500 0% + 0.047%/km
> 3500 FLH 0% + 0.044%/km
CODICE – CODE

255 of 287
This extra power losses shall be calculated as follows
1.3.1.2.4. Fuses Sizing
All protection fuses shall be dimensioned and comply with the maximum temperature inside the box
enclosure (string box, DC switch box, pre-parallel box, etc.) under the most severe conditions (maximum
load and operating temperature).
All fuses selected shall be sized so as to guarantee the following condition
Ib < In’ < Iz’,

Where:
- Ib is the operating current [A] of the DC system protected by the fuse, which will be provided by EGP
inside the GTS in project by project basis. This Ib is calculated based on the maximum Isc conditions
(according to TMY), and the allowed Isc flash test deviations from PV module datasheets, and applicable
safety factors.
- In’ is the current ampacity of the fuse after applying all applicable derating factors
- Iz’ is the cable ampacity (solar cable between the string terminals and the DC field parallel box) after
applying all applicable derating factors, which the fuse is protecting. The cable ampacity is determined
as per Chapter 1.3.1.2.3.1 - LV Cables.
1.3.1.2.4.1. DC parallel boxes (pre-parallel box, string box, and DC switch box)
All DC field parallel box inputs shall have the fuses sized (In) to additionally satisfy the following conditions:
𝐼𝑏
In>
𝐾1𝑓 ·𝐾2𝑓
Where:
- K1f can be determined as follows
130 − (𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥−𝑎𝑚𝑏 + ∆𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑛 + ∆𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑔 )

𝐾1𝑓 = √
130 − 30
Tmax-amb is the maximum ambient temperature of the site as per EGP GTS
o If the box containing the fuse is under the shadow and there is no direct temperature influence
by neighboring fuses (no touching fuses and/or 3 fuses or less inside the box)
∆𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑛 + ∆𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 0
o If the box containing the fuse is under the sun, the contractor of the box shall characterize and
properly justify to EGP which is the temperature increase of the fuse from the direct incidence
CODICE – CODE

256 of 287
of the sun (∆𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑛 )

o If the fuses (or fuseholders) are installed touching one with each other, or if there are more than
10 fuses inside the box, the supplier of the box shall characterize and properly justify to EGP
which is the temperature increase of the fuse from the grouping effect (∆𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑔 )
Instead of the above formulation, the K1f derating coefficient can also be extracted directly from the
“derating curve vs temperature” found in the datasheet. In this case, the darating factor selected
shall correspond to the real temperature of the fuse (𝑇𝑎𝑚𝑏 + ∆𝑇𝑠𝑢𝑛 + ∆𝑇𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑝𝑖𝑛𝑔 )
- K2f corresponds to the load variability derating factor, which can be directly extracted from the datasheet.
1.3.1.2.4.2. QPP/inverter DC input panel
The inverters shall be protected from incorrect photovoltaic field polarity connection operations; e.g. with
appropriately positioned and differentiated connection terminals. All inverter inputs shall have the fuses sized
(In) to additionally satisfy the following conditions:
𝐼𝑏
In>
𝐾1𝑓
Where:
- K1f can be determined as follows
130 − (𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥−𝑎𝑚𝑏 )
𝐾1𝑓 = √
130 − 30
Tmax-amb is the maximum ambient temperature of the site as per EGP GTS
Instead of the above formulation, the K1f derating coefficient can also be extracted directly from the
“derating curve vs temperature” found in the datasheet. In this case, the darating factor selected shall
correspond to the real temperature of the fuse (𝑇𝑚𝑎𝑥−𝑎𝑚𝑏 )
1.3.1.2.4.3. String Inverter
All the string inverter inputs shall be properly protected by fuses, otherwise the entire system (PV modules,
solar cables and string inverter) shall be sized to withstand the maximum shortcircuit current, without
damaging of equipment.
If protection fuses are required, the contractor shall follow the dimensioning methodology introduced in
section 1.3.1.2.4.1.
1.3.1.2.4.4. AC Fuse Sizing
Required fuses for the protection for the string inverter lines shall be quick fuse type NH according to IEC
60269 and/or UL 2579.
Fuses shall be dimensioned and shall comply with the maximum temperature inside the box under the most
severe conditions (maximum load and operating temperature according to EGP GTS). All applicable derating
factors shall be considered during the fuses dimensioning methodology
CODICE – CODE

257 of 287
1.3.1.2.5. Hydrological, Hydraulic Studies and Erosion Control Plan
Principal aims can be summarized in the following points:

 Estimation of maximum flow rates expected at the outlet of each basin involved on plant area;
 Unsteady Flow Analysis (2-D) for flood risk evaluation “ante operam” (if not available) and analysis
of mitigation works. Results achieved shall be used to define the preliminary plant layout
configuration.
 Drainage system, road crossings and mitigational works design to avoid stagnation of water and to
reduce runoff velocity.
 Unsteady Flow Analysis (2-D) for flood risk evaluation “post operam”, including an impact analysis
on surrounding areas ofthe plant. The analysis shall be performed modeling: artificial and natural
ditches and streams, low water crossings, culverts, roads, cabins etc. and all the relvant items.
Results achieved shall be used to define the final plant layout configuration and to verify the absence
of flooded areas;
The ground digital elevation model (DEM) used for the analyses shall have the following minimum
characteristics:
 for the plant area: high precision, with vertical accuracy of 20 cm;
 for the catchment basin area: medium precision, with a maximum grid size of 3m x 3m.
The studies shall be in compliance both with the requirements shown in this document and local applicable
codes and regulations.
1.3.1.2.5.1. Hydrological Study
The Hydrological study shall be performed in order to define the maximum flow rates for different return
periods, as detailed below.
The hydrological study shall be based on the available rainfall data; based on them, the Contractor shall
define the DDF and IDF curves (rainfall depth and intensity respectively VS time). One of the following
sources, or a combination of them, may be used to get the necessary data:
 Probabilistic (classic) analysis: when a good set of existing rainfall data (at least for 20 years record)
is available;
 Spatial Interpolation: if available data are from scattered pluviometry stations and, thus, not
representative, spatial interpolation can be adopted in order to create more adherent data
distribution;
 Raw Data Processing: in case of missing rain gauge data either for the project site and the
surrounding area, precipitation data can be collected from on-line archives such as TRMM (Tropical
Rainfall Measurement Mission – NASA), NOAA or any other official source;
 Regional Methods: developed by Local Authorities (if any) based on spatial uniformity of data and
hydrological characteristics.
The statistical analysis of rain data shall be performed by using one of the traditionally applied approaches,
such as Gumbel, Gamma, GEV, Log Pearson, Log Normal, etc. The most adequate method shall be selected
CODICE – CODE

258 of 287
by performing a reliability test, e.g. Kolgomorov Smirnov.

Once the design rainfall has been defined, all the relevant basins and drainage areas shall be defined for the
evaluation of the expected flow rates, by using a DEM of adequate precision, as defined in this document.
Two acceptable methods of calculating runoff are listed below:
 Rational Method: acceptable for drainage areas less than 1 km 2 (250 acres) when only peak flow
rates are needed; however, ENEL reserves the right to require the use of other methods (i.e., Soil
Conservation Service [SCS] Methods, discussed below) for catchment areas less than 1 km 2 (250
acres), particularly in cases where land use in the watershed is non-homogeneous or storage areas
are included in watershed.
 SCS Method: acceptable for any size watersheds and mandatory for catchement areas greater than
1 km2 (250 acres).
In case the SCS Method is applied, a hydrologic modeling system software capable to simulate the
precipitation-runoff processes of dendritic basin like HEC-HMS (or similar) should be used. In any case,
concentration times shall be calculated as per traditionally applied equations, selecting the one that best suits
the morphology of the area.
The soil properties (as defined in the geological-geotechnical report and shown on the geological map) and
the land use of the relevant area shall be considered by the Contractor, and properly reported in the study,
both for the estimation of Runoff Coefficient (Rational Method) and SCS Curve Number.
1.3.1.2.5.2. Hydraulic Study
Based on the flow rates defined in the Hydrological study, the Contractor shall define, in the Hydraulic study,
the estimation of runoff for different return periods. The flood risk analysis has to be performed for the two
following scenarios, both considered for three different return periods (Tr=10 years, Tr=50 years, Tr=100
years):
 “Ante operam”: considering the area in its original conditions, before construction; the analysis aims
to evaluate the hydraulic risk of area, identifying the mitigations actions in order to reduce the risk or
define the areas to be excluded from the layout.
 “Post operam”: considering the plant area in its final configuration and evaluating the effects of the
plant on the surrounding area; the analysis has to be performed taking into account the final layout,
including roads, storage areas, platforms for conversion units, artificial and natural ditches and
streams, low water crossings, culverts, final ground elevations after earthworks, underground
networks and any other relevant item.
The ante operam analysis could be available from previous studies, in this case the Contractor shall verify
the results by performing its own calculations. Should the “ante operam” analysis demonstrate that the
requirements are not met, the Contractor shall define proper mitigation works or modify the plant layout
accordingly.
The Contractor shall carry out a review of the existing local and regional flood risks assessments (if any),
including maps.
CODICE – CODE

259 of 287
The Contractor shall design and execute all necessary mitigation works (such as earth works, perimeter
ditches, and vertical drains) in order to lower the water level to the defined limits. Flood areas and plant layout
shall be reported in adequate maps.
The Unsteady Flow Analysis (2-D) shall be performed using one of the following software is acceptable:
HEC-RAS 5.0, FLOW 2D, MIKE 21, IBER. Alternative software shall be authorized by ENEL.
EXTREME CONDITIONS – 100 YEARS RETURN PERIOD

As a general requirement, the flood risk analysis shall be used to verify that, with a return period of 100 years,
the plant layout is compliant with the following requirements:
 For the whole plant area the height of water shall not overcome 50 cm;
 The Cabins shall be placed in areas without any flooding risk (i.e. water level equal to zero), unless
specific remedial works will be defined to keep the base level of the Cabins higher than the water
depth on flooded area.
OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS – 10 & 50 YEARS RETURN PERIOD

The Contractor shall perform an Unsteady Flow Analysis (2-D) on plant area considering 10 years return
period and 50 years for the facility areas (such site camp area ad substation area, if included in the scope of
work). All the relevant works (internal roads, internal drainages, roadside drainages, electrical cabins),
existing rivers and natural or artificial existing ditches, and whatever interfering with the hydraulic analysis
shall be considered in the design.
The analysis shall demonstrate that the following requirements are met:
 stagnation of water lower than 20 cm,
 velocity in the plant area lower than the maximum allowable, defined for different kind of soils (Table
27),
 velocity on uncoated ditches lower than the maximum allowable, defined for different kind of soils
(Table 27).
Soil Type Vmax ( m/s) V max (ft/s)

Grass firmly planted 1.65 5.5
Clay 1.10 3.6
Silt 0.90 2.7
Fine gravel 0.65 2.1
Sand 0.35 1.2
Table 27 – Velocity allowable on surface and uncoated ditches per kind of soil
1.3.1.2.5.3. Erosion Control Plan
The Erosion Control Plan shall be based on the hydrological, hydraulic, geomorphological and geological
studies, with focus on post-󠄀operam conditions.
CODICE – CODE

260 of 287
The Erosion Prevention and Sediment Control Plan (EPSCP) shall be implemented to protect soils exposed
during construction and operation. It is important that the study show how to minimize the areas of disturbed
soils and the duration of exposure. It is also imperative to implement how the designed drainage system has
to control water at upslope site perimeters, control water on-󠄀site, control sediment on-󠄀site, and control
sediment at the downslope site perimeters and natural watersheds. It shall also prevent the offsite movement
of sediment and prevent pollution of waters.
The Erosion Prevention and Sediment Control Plan has to highlight how to minimize the extent of disturbance
by focusing on erosion control (minimizing disturbed areas, seeding, mulching, matting) by controlling the
amount of soil that can run off and by stabilizing exposed soil. Sediment control measures (i.e. stabilized
construction entrances) must then focus on any sediment not controllable by the erosion control measures.
Erosion prevention measures are far more effective than sediment control measures (such as silt fence) and
should be the primary focus of any EPSCP.
The EPSCP shall be a GIS-󠄀based modelling of soil erosion, sediment transport, and deposition by surface
water flow. The model has to prevent erosion of soil or stagnation of water in the plant area and in the lands
located upstream and surrounding the site area. Moreover, the model has to prevent obstructions to the
natural flow of water inside and outside the plant areas. Finally, the model shall study the effects downslope
of the plant area that may arise from the removal of water from the lands located upstream and in the site
area.
For assessing soil erosion risk, various approaches can be adopted (European Soil Bureau). At least one of
following two approaches have to be adopted:
 expert-󠄀based (an example is the CORINE soil erosion risk assessment of the Mediterranean region
(CORINE, 1992))
 model-󠄀based (an example is the empirical Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE))
If the geological and geotechnical on-󠄀site and laboratory tests, should not be sufficient, the contractor shall
carry out the adequate new tests in order to fulfil the requirements of the adopted methodology.
The erosion risk assessment shall proceed jointly with the hydraulic modelling in order to reach a common
satisfactory implementation of the drainage system and erosion preventing countermeasures.
1.3.1.2.6. Structural design requirements for supporting structures
A. MATERIALS
Main structures (including embedded piles or screws) shall be made of steel or aluminum. Steel shall be in
accordance with [EN 10025, EN 10268, EN 10149 Eurocode EN 1993 and ASTM A6, A36, A53]; steel shall
be at least S235-JR/ASTM A283C. For particular weather conditions, grade J0 A284C/D or J2/A36 may be
necessary.
Aluminum alloys shall be class AW 5xxx with durability rating A. Alloy class AW 6xxx with durability rating B
can be used provided the elements are anodized.
Materials other than steel and aluminum are not acceptable. Materials are different only for the following
components:
 Rotational head;
CODICE – CODE

261 of 287
 Motor and Mechanical actuator.
B. CROSS-SECTION DIMENSIONS
Following steel profiles shall be used for support structures:
 Hot rolled sections
 Cold formed sections: from steel plates (eventually welded).
Cross sections shall be classified in one of the four classes defined by Table 5.2 of EN 1993 1-1. In addition,
the width to thickness ratio shall not exceed the value reported in Table 5.1 of EN 1993 1-3. Both
classifications of the above tables shall be included in the report for each structural cross section.
For any cold formed profile and also for hot rolled profile in class 4, cross sections effective widths may be
used to make the necessary allowances for reductions in resistance due to the effects of local buckling. The
effective cross sectional properties of the cross sections shall be clearly calculated and indicated in the report
according to EN 1993 1-3 and EN 1993 1-5.
It is Contractor responsibility to assure, for all the steel members of the structure, the coherence between
profile thickness and protective treatment adopted. Coating thickness shall respect EN 10346.
Thickness of the column shall be chosen in order to meet not only the ultimate and serviceability checks, (EN
1993 1-1 and EN 1993 1-3) but also the following points to be achieved in the installation phase:
 Column head shall not reveal permanent distortion;

 Vertical misalignment of the column shall not exceed the structure tolerance;
 The structure installation tolerances shall be always met
Should the column profile not meet one of the points above, the Contractor shall change the column profile
at its own expense.
Aluminum sections shall be classified in accordance with EN-1999.
C. DESIGN
For steel support structures, the design shall be based on local applicable codes. Provisions reported in the
local codes shall be followed, considering an elastic global analysis.
For aluminum structures, the design shall be performed in accordance with EN-1999/AISC 303-16,
considering an elastic global behavior.
D. TRACKER STOW POSITION

The tracker manufacturer shall define the stow position and the stow procedure specific for the tracker for
the safe operation in all the design condition. At the selected stow position with the design wind speed, the
maximum allowable load on PV module shall comply with IEC 61215 (i.e. max design pressure =1600 Pa).
E. WIND SPEED
Based on the applicable local codes and regulations, fundamental basic wind speed may be defined as the
mean wind speed of 10 minute at a height of 10 m (33ft) above a reference terrain II (vb as per Eurocode) or
CODICE – CODE

262 of 287
as 3-second gust speed at a height of 10 m (33ft) above the ground in Exposure C (v p,0 as for example in
ASCE-7). The Contractor shall follow the local regulations for calculating the forces generated by wind.
In case the fundamental basic wind speed is not clearly defined for a specific plant location, ENEL will provide
the Contractor with a design value. If ENEL does not provide any value, the Contractor shall consider a basic
wind speed of vb,0=28 m/s (92ft/s) or vp,0=42m/s (138 ft/s), respectively for 10 minutes average wind speed
or 3-s gust wind speed, depending on the local regulation adopted. The reference terrain is indicated in
paragraph “Reference Terrain”..
Requirements, definitions and symbols applied in this section are reported below:
 The structures shall be considered as structures with low risk for human life or human occupation:
o in Countries where a risk category is defined, the Contractor shall consider a risk
category equal I as described in the Asce 7, or equivalent in accordance to the
applicable local code and requirements;
o in Countries (as Europe) where a design return period is defined, Tr, the design value
for the calculation of the wind speed, is equal to 50 years;
 vb,0 and vb: some codes (as Eurocode) provide vb,0 and vb as the fundamental and the basic wind
speed, defined as the 10 minutes mean wind speed, measured at height of 10 m (33ft) above the
ground in Exposure Category II (as per Eurocode). The wind speed corresponds to an annual
exceedance probability of 0.02 (T r = 50 years). Codes may provide the value of the basic wind speed
as a function of the fundamental wind speed (vb = cdir  cseas  vb,0); in this case both the directional
coefficient cdir and the seasonal coefficient cseas shall be considered equal to 1. Based on the
maximum height of the structure zs above the terrain, the peak velocity is calculated as:
1⁄
𝑉𝑝 (𝑧𝑠 ) = 𝑉𝑚 (𝑧𝑠 )[1 + 7𝐼𝑣 (𝑧𝑠 )] 2
where:
o vm(zS)= cr(zS) c0(zS) vb
o Iv(zS) is the turbulence factor given in the code
o c0(zS) is the topography factor to be considered equal to 1, unless different values are
proposed by the Contractor based on clear calculations for the specific site conditions;
it shall be agreed and validated by ENEL before performing the calculations.
o cr(zS) is the roughness factor calculated for the exposure category at least equal to II
(as per Eurocode) more stringent requirements may be defined by ENEL in particular
circumstances;
 vp,0: other codes, such as ASCE 7-0provide vp,0 as the basic wind speed, defined as the 3- seconds
wind speed measured at height of 10 m (33ft) above the ground in Exposure C.
Effects of the site conditions, of the highest point of the structure (zs) and all the other applicable factors shall
be calculated as per the local codes, taking into account the limits given in this technical specification.
 vwork is the tracker working wind speed and shall be considered as a 3 – seconds peak wind speed
at a height of 5 m above terrain.
CODICE – CODE

263 of 287
 vstow is the wind speed for stow position.
Wind speed limit
Working position speed for tracker structures

The tracker shall be designed to resist to a working wind speed vwork as defined in the GTS. In detail:
 When the highest point of the tracker zS exceeds 5 m (16.4ft), the working wind speed shall be
calculated for the highest point of the tracker according to the following equation:
1⁄
𝑉𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑘 (𝑧𝑠 ) = 𝑉𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑘,5𝑚 (𝑧𝑠 /5) 9.5
 When the highest point of the tracker zs is lower than 5 m (16.4ft), the working position speed is the
vwork,5m at 5 meters for the whole structure.
Stow position speed for trackers / wind speed for fixed and seasonal structures:
The value of the fundamental wind speed is provided by the local regulation and local map. In case the
fundamental basic wind speed is not clearly defined for a specific plant location, ENEL will provide the
Contractor with a design value. If ENEL does not provide any value, the Contractor shall consider a wind
speed of vb,0=28 m/s (92ft/s) or vp,0=42m/s (138ft/s), respectively for 10 minutes average wind speed or 3-s
gust wind speed, depending on the local regulation. The reference terrain is indicated in paragraph
“Reference Terrain”.
Reference Terrain
If the wind loads have been calculated through the codes, the reference terrain for the external rows shall
be, at least, equal to the Eurocode terrain category II or Asce exposure category C. The reference terrain
for the internal rows shall be equal, at least, to the Eurocode terrain category III or Asce exposure category
B.
F. DESIGN LOADS
Loads defined in this section have to be considered as minimum requirements to be satisfied for the design
instead of less stringent requirements found in local codes or where local codes are not present.
The support structures shall be designed for the following loads.
Tracker Loads
Loads defined by the tracker manufacturer shall be considered by the Contractor in addition to the loads
defined in the following sections. Due to the high torque applied by the tracker, the design of the support
structures and their foundations, especially for the support structures close to the tracker engine, shall be
adequately performed.
CODICE – CODE

264 of 287
Permanent (Dead) Loads

 Structural selfweight , including concrete rafts where applicable (G 1)
 Modules selfweight (G2) as shown in the technical datasheets
Wind Loads
Peak wind speed pressure, qp(zS) at height, zS, has to be calculated as:
𝑞(𝑧𝑆 ) = 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡1 𝑣𝑝2
and the load to be used in the global verification is
𝐹 = 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡2 × 𝑐𝑓 × 𝑞(𝑧𝑠 ) × 𝐴
Where the value of Const1 and Const2 is defined in the local codes:
 Const1 in Eurocode it is equal to ½ r, where r is the density of air equal to 1,25kg/m 3. Where sufficient
climatic data are available to justify the selection of a different value, the Contractor shall propose a
different value to be used in the calculation anyway only after Enel authorization. Similarly, site
elevation, pressure and temperature effects can be taken into account if defined in the applicable
local codes
 Const1 in ASCE 7 is defined as 0.613 Kz Kzt kd, where:
o Kd is the directionality effect to be taken as 1, unless a different value is specified
o Kzt is the topographic coefficient to be taken as 1, unless higher values are defined due to
particular site conditions
o Kz is the exposure coefficient to be calculate by considering the exposure coefficient (at least
exposure class C) of the site and the maximum height of the structure above the terrain
 Const2 for ASCE 7-05 is defined as the Gust effect G to be considered as G=0,85 (the structure is
to be considered rigid); for Eurocode is equal to 1.
 cf is the force coefficient, defined in the following
 A is the area of the panels supported by the structure
The force coefficient cf (as the net pressure coefficient) shall be calculated according to the local standards
reference to with monopitch canopies. In particular, the calculations shall be done, at least, for the following
angles: 0°, 5°, 10°, 20°, 30°, 40°, 45°,50° (if any) and 60° (if any).
Where the local code does not indicate any force coefficient value, the Contractor shall consider the values
(both case A and case B) indicated in ASCE 7 for the missing slopes.
For the angle of 60°, the force coefficient shall be equal to the values indicated below (without eccentricity).
CODICE – CODE

265 of 287
Force coefficient cf
a= 60° +/-󠄀2,4
Force coefficients value for 60°
For angles not defined in the codes and angles between 45° and 60°, a linear interpolation for force coefficient
and eccentricity shall be adopted.
The use of fluid-dynamic numerical models for the calculation of wind force is not allowed.
The use of wind tunnel tests is accepted only if the test is validated by ENEL
The wind force calculated in this way shall be applied to the first two rows of modules, exposed to wind
pressure. For internal modules the exposure terrain category to be applied shall refer to an area, uniformly
covered by grass or buildings or isolated obstacles within a distance of 20 times the building height or
obstacles. This is the category III in Eurocode (to be considered to define c r) and D in Asce 7 (to be
considered in the definition of Kz).
The exposure category reduction is not applicable for plants on slopes where all the rows may be considered
exposed to the wind pressure: the final decision in such cases will be taken by ENEL on a case by case
basis.
Following sketch shows in bold what is intended as “first rows”:
 2 external rows in the longitudinal direction of the structures

 1 row adjacent to the internal roads (one row at each side of the road) in the longitudinal direction of
the structures
 The first and last structure at each row
External rows
Snow Loads
Snow loads should be defined in accordance with the applicable local codes and requirements.
Thermal Loads
Thermal loads should be defined in accordance with the applicable local codes and in accordance with the
CODICE – CODE

266 of 287
environmental conditions of the site. The effects of the solar irradiance on the modules shall be considered.
As a minimum the following thermal load shall be considered T=±60°C.
Seismic Loads
The Contractor is responsible to verify if any provision in the local codes requires to perform such checks.
In the case in which the local codes do not cover all the aspects as for example the transversal eccentricity
of the load, the calculation shall be done according to the Eurocodes.
G. LOADS COMBINATIONS
Load combinations for Ultimate Limit State (ULS) and Serviceability Limit State (SLS) shall be defined in
accordance with the applicable local code.
Where local codes are not available or do not have the required level of detail on the choice of partial factors
for actions and materials, the combinations shall be defined according to Eurocode or Asce 7.
As a general rule, the Contractor shall consider all the load combinations related to Wind loads, Snow loads
and Thermal loads for both Ultimate Limit State (ULS) and Serviceability Limit State (SLS).
Snow loads and Thermal loads may not be considered simultaneously, if foreseen by the local code.
An additional load combination shall be considered where a triangular wind load distribution along the tracker
length is foreseen.
H. STRUCTURAL AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS

Deflection Analysis
Deflections (both vertical and horizontal ones) shall be verified in correspondence of the characteristic
combinations, where the characteristic value of structural self-weight, module self-weight, snow load, thermal
load and the wind load are opportunely combined to obtain the severest deflections. For structure containing
cold formed profiles and/or hot-rolled profiles in class 4, a numerical model with the effective cross sections
(evaluated for the characteristics combinations) shall be carried out to evaluate correctly the structure
deflections.
At least, the points highlighted in the following figures shall be verified.
The maximum vertical v displacement is:
𝐿⁄
150
where:
L is the element span and shall be verified at least for the points highlighted in the following figures.
CODICE – CODE

267 of 287
Displacements to be checked for fixed structures
Displacements to be checked for tracker structures
The maximum admissible horizontal displacement is:

𝐻⁄
150
where:
H is the height of the structure above ground.
Joint Checks
The design calculation shall report the connection checks (included bolts, rivets or welds and plates).
If the installation tolerances are recovered in the connections using slotted holes, the transmission of the
internal actions shall be transmitted by means of friction connections and the use of proper washers. The
torque values shall be adequately designed and shown in the structural reports and drawings.
I. FEM MODEL
The structure shall be calculated by a FEM modeling with the proper soil parameters based on the results
of site tests. The structure shall be designed in this way:
 Structure and foundation shall be pre-sized in order to evaluate the horizontal load acting at the
foundation level;
 Site tests on piles shall be performed and the Load vs Horizontal displacement diagrams shall
be defined;
CODICE – CODE

268 of 287
 Foundation-soil interaction will be modeled by using springs in accordance with site tests results;
 Final model of the complete structure will be used for the evaluation of:
o Highest period of vibration mode (dynamic analysis)
o Stresses and internal actions on the structure
o Max displacements
o Foundation reactions
The model shall include the foundation with Winkler distributed springs. The stiffness of the PV module
shall be zero in order to not interfere with the global stiffness of the steel structure. The soil springs shall
have (see Figure “Modelling of foundation”):
 A linear triangular shape (zero at ground level - maximum at the tip of the pile) for granular soil;
 A constant value for clay soil
Stiffness of the spring shall be set in order to obtain the same horizontal displacement measured during
the load test in correspondence of the same horizontal force Hd considered during the test. A dedicate FEM
where only the pile is modeled shall be performed and the Force-Displacement results shall be shown in
the calculation report; the pile shall have the same dimension and material properties of the piles, the Force
Hd shall be applied as per the load tests, the pile tip is restrained in order to prevent the vertical movements.
Modelling of foundation
1.3.1.2.7. Foundation design requirements for supporting structures
A. SHALLOW FOUNDATION
Foundation block shall be designed in order to satisfy the geotechnical and structural checks required by the
local codes for ultimate limit state and serviceability limit state.
In case the local standards do not have the required level of detail, the Contractor shall follow Eurocode or
Asce 7.
The contribution of backfill above the original grade, to the foundation bearing capacity, as well overturning
and sliding checks shall not be advisable. Only the soil below the original ground level shall be taken into
account for stability and bearing checks.
CODICE – CODE

269 of 287
Foundation block shall be sized in order to respect the limiting deflections provided by the structure Supplier.
Before starting the design of the shallow foundation, the limiting deflections (such as total settlement,
differential settlement between two consecutive columns and rotation) relative to the quasi permanent load
combination shall be declared by the structure Supplier.
B. PILED FOUNDATION
The Contractor shall design the foundation system considering the results of pull-out tests.
In climate zones where soil is susceptible to frosting, relevant additional loads shall be taken into account
during pile design.
C. PILE DESING RESISTANCE

The design pile resistance Rt,d is:
𝑅𝑡,𝑑 = 𝑅𝑡,𝑘 ⁄1,6
Where:
Rt,k is the minimum value recorded during the pile load tests for the same homogenous area. The
homogenous area shall be defined by the Contractor based on the data provided by ENEL and on the results
of the pile load tests.
1.3.1.3. ON-SITE ACTIVITIES
1.3.1.3.1. Topography
A. INTRODUCTION
This document describes the topographical surveys or DTM production requirements for civil works,
environmental studies or any other activities related to electrical power plants owned and operated by Enel
worldwide
1. ACRONYMS
UAV Unmanned Aerial Vehicles (drone)

DEM Digital Elevation Model
DSM Digital Surface Model
DTM Digital Terrain Model
GCP Ground Control Point
GSD Ground Sample Distance
AOI Area of Interest
RTK Real Time Kinematic
In blu dimensions in Imperial System. Always 1 hectare = 2,47 AC
2. ACTIVITIES OVERVIEW
 traditional topographic survey, celerimetric GNSS survey, Laser scanner or total station survey;
 DEM Lidar carried out by UAV or airplane;
 DEM Aero photogrammetry carried out by UAV or airplane;
CODICE – CODE

270 of 287
 Detection survey for non-accessible structures;

 Architectural survey of existing buildings (traditional survey or laser scanner);
 Direct or indirect bathymetric survey.
3. INCLUDED ACTIVITIES
If the area, aim of the survey, is bordering with another topographical map provided by ENEL, the Contractor
will take into account the provided data integrating and harmonising them in the final documentation
produced. In order to ensure the continuity and consistency of the processed and associated data sets, the
final map shall partially overlap to the map provided by ENEL.
4. CODES AND RULES

The contractor shall perform the works considering all the applicable rules, required by the local licensing
authorities, and regulations currently enforced at the effective date of works execution. Furthermore the
design and work activities shall comply with all the laws, codes, rules, regulations and statutes in accordance
with all international standard: in the event of conflicts, the more stringent requirements will prevail.
All the used instruments and equipment shall include the stamps, marks, labels and/or certification codes.
All equipment requiring permanent safety labelling shall comply with applicable industrial codes and
standards (e.g. High voltage, electrical panel warnings etc.).
The following codes and specifications shall be used:
Designation Regulatory Body, Administering Association, Society or Institution
ISO International Organization for Standardization
DIN German Institute for Standardization
 ISO 17123 - “Optics and optical instruments - Field procedures for testing geodetic and surveying
instruments”
 DIN 18723 - Field procedure for precision testing of surveying instruments; general information
 ISO 12857 - Optics and optical instruments -- Geodetic instruments -- Field procedures for
determining accuracy
 ISO 8322 - Building construction – Measuring instruments – Procedures for determining accuracy in
use
Equivalent local codes, recognized by ENEL, are accepted.
B. METHODOLOGICAL PREMISES
The accuracy is the degree of compliance or proximity of a measurement to the real value. A real value is
the one with the highest reliability. The degree of reliability is considered high, as it comes closer to the
existing benchmark on site (or the nearest site).
The error tolerance is the acceptable error value limits than the accuracy value given from benchmark.
If there is no telephone signal and the existing GNSS mast are very distant from the AOI (baseline >50 km),
the error propagation could be high. In this case a GNSS static method shall be used.
CODICE – CODE

271 of 287
All the topographical surveys should be deliver using the reference system WGS84 in UTM projection and,
if required, in local system coordinates. In case of, during on processing phase, a coordinate conversion was
necessary or required, should be deliver to ENEL also the conversion algorithm.
Always the elevation system required is ortometric (geoidal) and always the topographer should indicate the
algorithm conversion used to transform the ellipsoidical elevation surveyed on site to ortometric. In case the
algorithm conversion was believe unreliable, the topographical works should deliver in ellipsoidical elevation
coordinate.
1. BENCHMARK AND GROUND CONTROL POINTS (MARKERS)

BENCHMARK
The Benchmarks are topographic points of public coordinates, provided by the local government apparatus
through official monographs. The new benchmarks are all the additional permanent points and are set in
place as following described. An inspection of existing Benchmarks in the AOI (or in the proximity) should be
made before the beginning of any topographical activity. At least 3 existing benchmarks or 3 New
Benchmarks shall be identified in the AOI. The New benchmarks shall be arranged in a durable location. The
Benchmark cannot correspond in no case with an engineering design element included in the scope of work.
A monographic sheet, delivered to ENEL in a pdf document, shall describe each benchmark including:
 UTM WGS 84 coordinates, specifying if necessary, the local reference coordinates;
 identification number;
 2 oriented photos (an overview and a close-up), for an easy identification on the field;
 orthophoto or sketch identification.
STATIC METHOD
When the baseline are >50 km, the georeferentation process shall be performed through the GNSS in static
method. The benchmark positions shall be homogeneously identified spread in the AOI in a not aligned
position. The GNSS stations shall be defined according to the following procedure:
1. GPS measurement in static method of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd baseline with at least 6 hours holding
time in a day with clear sky, starting from a vertex of network of known coordinates,
2. GPS measurement repetition in static method of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd baseline with 4 hours holding
time in a day with different climatic conditions (i.e. a cloudy day) or at a different time of the day,
3. Contemporary Static GPS measurement of the 1st and 2nd baseline with holding time of 1 hour,
4. Contemporary Static GPS measurement of the 2nd and 3rd baseline with holding time of 1 hour,
5. Contemporary Static GPS measurement of the 1st and 3rd baseline with holding time of 1 hour,
6. Processing individual baseline and verifying the obtained results.
The Benchmark shall be permanently set in place and easily identified in the field using plastic or metallic
alloy landmark in which the central dot is pointed out; in case of existing buildings shall be set a spike into
the wall or specific concrete colored cube under the ground level. Another type of Benchmark can be a
concrete, steel or wood pole (length 60 cm) with a glued marker. The Contractor will be responsible to
conduct the works, estimate and settle any crop damages during the marking of these fix points.
CODICE – CODE

272 of 287
GROUND CONTROL POINT (GCP) and MARKER

The GCPs or Markers are all the surveyed and implemented points used for reference during an
aerophotogrammetrical and lidar survey. The Marker is a subcategory of GCP specifically manufactured for
the survey (see next pictures). ENEL requires at least 5 GCPs for each survey commissioned. Corners of
existing buildings might be considered as GCPs as well.
The GCPs shall be position homogeneously dispersed in the AOI and not in an aligned position. The GCP
quantities depend on the accuracy required and other local and technical factors: the quantities and the
relevant distribution has to be justified through a mission flight delivered to ENEL before the survey flight.
Figure 27 – Example of a marker for Figure 28 – Example of a marker for

aerophotogrammetrical survey conducted by UAV. aerophotogrammetrical survey conducted by airplane.
Minimum dimension 50x50 cm (20x20 in) Minimum dimension 100x100 cm (39x39 in)
2. CHECK POINT AND ACCURACY VERIFICATION

In case of indirect topographical survey (aerophotogrammetry, laser scanner, and lidar) is required to
measure on site with GPS a minimum 10 points per hectare. Check point shall be homogeneously spread
on field.
A final report shall contain the accuracy comparison between the check points and the 3D model.
3. CONTOUR LINE REPRESENTATION

There is a relationship between the survey point density, the error tolerance and the contour line
representation in the delivered drawings. The topographer has to consider the following parameters for the
contour line representation
POINTS DENSITY ERROR TOLERANCE CONTOUR LINE RANGE

>1 pt/m2(10ft2) +/- 5 cm (2 in) 20 cm (10 in)
>1 pt/m2(10ft2) +/- 5 cm (2 in) 50 cm (2 ft)
<1 pt/m2(10ft2) +/- 5 cm (2 in) 50 cm (2 ft)
<1 pt/m2(10ft2) +/- 5 cm (2 in) 100 cm (5 ft)
C. TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY TYPES

1. AREA SURVEY
The mapping should be normally carried out measuring points laid out according to a square grid pattern,
CODICE – CODE

273 of 287
whose size side should be proportional to the number of points required and other intermediate points added
in each section of the grid where there are noticeable discontinuities or objects/structures, or for the purpose
of a more detailed survey.
This mapping should be conducted only after identifying on the ground the design elements coordinates, if
supplied by ENEL, as design axis of new roads, transmission lines, vertical axes of machineries, area
perimeter, etc.
In case of adjoined and/or circumscribed areas, the entire area within the perimeter and a belt of an average
width of 10 m (32 ft) over the perimeter shall be mapped and assessed in relation to the area morphology
and survey purposes.
This mapping is required for the detailed technical design. The surveyor shall, therefore, consider this
requirement and ensure that the following features are always verified:
 presence of any ditches or channels , even dry ones, for planning the layout of water surfaces;
 waterways (measuring the surface water level, the top and the base of the embankments);
 presence of ducts, manholes and manhole covers for the collection and disposal of storm water,
irrespective of nature and size;
 underground utilities like electricity, telephone and other lines including the relative wells and works;
 presence of any existing fences or delimiting structures;
 presence of paved roads, dirt tracks or drover roads that intersect the mapped area;
 roads and paths, describing discontinuities along asphalt roads, banks, drainage ditches and steep
slopes;
 buildings and constructions, stating the heights, materials and state of preservation;
 presence of retaining walls or steep slopes/escarpments;
 presence of ground gaps due to landslides that may be of interest for the design of the works;
landslide areas (description of the base and top of these areas and of loose materials);
 land use of the surveyed area;
 tall trees of particular value, any deforested areas and related firebreaks;
 any building, in use or dismissed in the surveyed area up to 50 m (164 ft) over the perimeter of
interest;
 any geotechnical drilling carried out by ENEL.
2. ROADS SURVEY
Survey of the existing road network, when required, including paved roads, tracks, dirt roads, paths, etc.,.
Mapping operations are normally carried out measuring the points of the sections perpendicular to the axis
of the road, at a maximum distance of 25 m (82 ft) from the axis (section length 50 mt or 164 ft). Each section
shall be composed of appropriate points to describe the actual state; minimum requirement 15 points for
each section.
The measurements are usually performed in order to verify the suitability of existing roads for the
transportation of heavy machinery and, if necessary, to use the roads by expanding or re-profiling them, etc.
For this purposes, the following criteria shall be taken in consideration:
CODICE – CODE

274 of 287
 axis of the existing road or dirt track and all geometrical points that best represent its layout and
altimetry;
 roadsides and verges;
 retaining walls or escarpments;
 ducts, manholes and manhole covers for the collection and disposal of storm water;
 any underground utility lines;
 land use measuring a minimum of 50 m (164 ft) in width from the axis;
 tall trees of particular value, any deforested areas and related firebreaks;
 bridges or other structures for crossing streams or other infrastructures;
 all land alongside the roads or dirt tracks up to the maximum width required on each side;
 any buildings, stables or ruins (at least 3 sides of which are to be measured) on any side of the
country road or dirt track, if located at a distance up to 50 m (164 ft) from the axis of the same.
The measured points shall be accurately characterised, identifying and distinguishing at least the physical
elements listed above in order to provide an accurate report.
Concerning the existing roads or dirt tracks, the following should be reported: the state of the roadbed
degradation, any phenomena of instability and erosion encountered and the radius of curvature. The number
of measured points shall be sufficient to map the longitudinal profile of the road and to determine the gradients
of the various sections of the same road.
As for bridges and any other structures crossing ditches, the following data should be reported: type of
structure (masonry, concrete or other), the state of preservation, clearance of the bridge or structure and,
where indicated, the maximum load capacity.
3. TRANSMISSION LINE SURVEY

The survey of overhead transmission lines (existing or as shown in the design documentation) shall be
executed directly on site and contain the following features:
 DTM minimum width 50 meters (164 ft), centred on the transmission line axis;
 DTM width 100 meters (328 ft) in case of intersections with other existing power/communication
lines, centred on the transmission line axis;
 list of the detected points of cables catenary, reporting the ambient temperature at the time of the
data collection;
 identification of the owner of the line (power or communication) interfering with the surveyed line,
defining, if possible, the number of the poles and pylons.
SPECIAL DELIVERABLES
The Contractor has to provide longitudinal profiles using a V = 1/500 and H = 1/2000 scale of the land and
the power lines, showing the coordinates of all supports and the overhead cables trajectory. The delivered
drawings shall be in .dwg and .pdf format. The representation scale shall be appropriate to individuate all the
above listed details.
CODICE – CODE

275 of 287
4. ARCHITECTURAL SURVEY
An architectural survey includes the measurement and the graphical representation of buildings, parts of
buildings and their surroundings. The aim of an architectural survey is to acquire data for the design (sections,
profiles, calculation of volumes and superficies of civil works), basic data for the energy balance calculations,
tracings, executive plans, monitoring of subsidence, etc. The Architectural survey should be executed
manually and/or through celerimetric and/or laser scanner technology.
For an architectural survey the following deliverables are required:
 drawings of the plans, elevations and sections of the buildings in dwg and pdf format, if required;
 extensive photographic documentation and photos maps orientation;
 plan which includes all the geometrical elements as structure, visible foundation, exterior panels and
roofing when these are clear, readable and measurable;
 representation of architectural and structural details required by ENEL;
 description of the construction materials of the buildings surveyed and conservation status
5. SURVEY OF NOT ACCESIBLE STRUCTURES

A structural survey involves the graphical representation through stereo-images acquisition of buildings and
any other facility as bridges, dams, roofs, etc. through UAV vehicles. The aim of a structural survey is to
acquire data for design (sections, profiles, calculation of volume and superficies of civil works), basic data for
maintenance condition monitoring, etc. The survey could be integrated through standard methods: manual,
celerimetric and/or laser scanner to complete the work.
For a structural survey the following deliverable are required:
 drawings of the plan, elevations and sections of the buildings in dwg and pdf format, if required;
 extensive photographic documentation and photos maps orientation;
 plan which includes readable and measurable details of the structure (fissures, deterioration material,
etc.);
 representation of the architectural and structural details;
 technical report of the construction materials of the facilities surveyed and their conservation status.
D. TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY TECHNOLOGIES AND REQUIRED TOLERANCE

Below the summary of the permitted tolerance for each technology.
HORIZONTAL VERTICAL TOLERANCE

TECHNOLOGY DENSITY
TOLERANCE cm (in) cm (in)
CELIMETRIC, GNSS +/-3 (1.18) +/-5 (2) 300 points/he
AEROPHOTOGRAMMETRY
+/-3 (1.18) +/-5 (2) -
on GCP
AEROPHOTOGRAMMETRY
+/-20 (8) +/-20 (8) -
far from GCP
AEROPHOTOGRAMMETRY
far from GCP with dense +/-50 (20) +/-50 (20) -
vegetation
LIDAR +/-5 (2) +/-5 (2) -
CODICE – CODE

276 of 287
1. CELERIMETRIC AND GNSS

Celerimetric and GNSS technologies allow having great accuracy but low-density survey. The minimum
density required is an average of more than 300 measured points per hectare. These technologies could be
integrate with Laser Scanner.
The Contractor is required to have a total station at his disposal that meets the following minimum
requirements: standard deviation of +/- (3 + 2 ppm x D) mm, angular accuracy 5"/1,5 mgon;
GNSS receiver with 226 channels and a static accuracy of >25 mm; RTK receiver in double frequency;
Celerimetric and GNSS are used for all the survey methodologies to define Benchmarks and GCPs.
2. AEROPHOGRAMMETRY
ENEL requests surveys DEM aero photogrammetry, executed by an UAV or an airplane in order to reach
the required accuracy within the tolerance range permitted.
Before the execution of a survey an appropriate flight plan shall be prepared using a flight simulation software
in order to ensure frontal overlap images >75% and side overlap images >60% and to individuate the GCPs
quantity and position.
Benchmarks and GCP shall be defined by suitable GNSS or Total Station.
The delivered documentation shall include relevant filters to obtain a DTM surface avoiding vegetation
thickness.
Moreover, ENEL can require the surveyor to integrate the survey with a celerimetric methodology gaining at
least 100 points per hectare under dense vegetation to integrate the 3D model where it cannot guarantee
the accuracy required.
If the surveyor cannot perform the survey under the vegetation (due to density and/or steep slopes), the area
will be excluded from the task only upon ENEL authorization.
In case of vegetation it is recommended to use a manual stereoscopy for post processing.
A manual stereoscopy is also a useful methodology to correct the contours level automatically generated to
the real terrain slope.
The following list shows the minimum system requirements about the photographic machine:
 Resolution: 20 MP (for UAV vehicles)
 Lowest Focal Length: 16 mm (0.63 in) (for UAV vehicles)
AIR VEHICLES – SATELLITE COVER

Before the survey execution, an appropriate flight plan shall be prepared using simulation flight software in
order to ensure a good satellite coverage for the entire flight duration. The PDOP (Point of Dilution Of
Precision) shall not exceed 3 and, in any case, remain in line with the methods applied and with the levels of
precision required.
The stations provided, with double frequency of 1 Hertz GNSS receivers, shall be positioned in such a way
to ensure the simultaneous reception of the signal from at least ten satellites, the same ones connected to
the GNSS system in the airplane.
The contractor shall provide in advance the details of the permanent stations to be used and ensure that they
CODICE – CODE

277 of 287
are fully functional during the recording of the RTK air vehicle.
For verification and testing purposes, the Contractor shall provide the GNSS data of the stations used for the
survey: PDOP values and the number of satellites.
After acquiring the aerial data, the recorded air vehicle position data and the fix stations satellite data, the
geoidal elevation coordinates shall be ascertained.
AIR VEHICLES – CALIBRATION AREA

The Contractor shall prepare appropriate calibration areas such that their number and position will allow air
vehicle to fly over at least once during each flight. During the data acquisition, these areas will be used to
verify the stability of the instruments calibration and to eliminate or minimize possible systematic errors.
REQUIRED DOCUMENTS
 digital ortho-images obtained through ortho-rectification, pictures assembling, georeferencing and
shadow reduction;
 Raster DTM and DSM in geotiff at density 20x20cm
 If required, DTM Cloud of Points with density of 1 point/50cm (1,6 ft) (4 points m2) in the following 2
formats:
o List of points with the structure: number, X,Y,Z geodetic (file extension .txt) according to the
following example:
o Esri Grid or ASCII Format (file extension .grid or .ascii) with the structure according to the
following example:
CODICE – CODE

278 of 287
 If required, Cloud Points DSM and DTM in .las with Z geoidal;

 If required, landXML of DSM and DTM.
 If required, raw and GNSS data
Vector dwg files

 topographical maps with contour lines, including:
o n.1 layer named “vegetated data” to identify areas with vegetation that have justifiably resulted
not uniform or interpolated adaptation,
o n. 1 layer named “celerimetric integration area” to identify areas with dense vegetation (or
other elements) that have been integrated with celerimetric survey (>100 points/hectare),
o For each element described in the paragraph C should be used a dedicated layer,
o Breacklines 3D polyline for each element described in the paragraph C that are on the ground,
o georeferenced assembled ortho-images attached as external reference,
 TIN model in .dwg format generate from contour lines and breacklines with side triangles < 3 mt
(3,3 yd),
GIS files and Arc GIS compliant

 Contour line and relevant polylines breacklines in Z format type. (.shp, .dbf) ;
Mandatory PDF files

 benchmarks and GCPs monograph reports;
 technical report including: the entire documentation of the work carried out, the general description
of the various survey construction phases and all the auxiliary data used to achieve the result
signed by by a professional technician. The report shall also certify that:
o there were no technical problems during the data acquisition,
o there were no gaps and discontinuities or systematic errors,
o ratio of the flights (type of vehicle, graphics and flight path, altitude, airspeed, weather
conditions and lighting),
o report of the processes for georeferencing, ortho-rectification and reconstruction of the
stereoscopic model,
o used procedures for filtering data to eliminate incorrect points and the relevant areas where
the density of points has significantly decreased,
o delimitation of the areas where the range tolerance is out of ENEL's requirements. These shall
not exceed more than 5% of the total required area,
o report regarding the range tolerance verification comparing the indirect 3D model with the
check points.
PDF files, if required

 Map of complete survey,
CODICE – CODE

279 of 287
 1 or more draws with contour line and topographical description,

 1 or more draws of DTM contour line and topographical description with overlapped orto-photos.
Each pdf file should not exceed 100 MB.
3. LIDAR
The execution of a remote sensing survey done with LIDAR technology (Laser Imaging Detection and
Ranging) from an aircraft platform or from UAV is aimed to obtain a DTM processing the acquired raw data.
The equipment required shall be able to acquire ground data with the presence of trees and vegetation
(minimum 100.000 3-dimensional points/second) and collect at least 2 records to ensure maximum
vegetation penetration.
The DTM shall be obtained using instruments and procedures that will ensure the following error tolerance:
 Planimetry: 5 cm (2 in)
 Elevation: 5 cm (2 in)
 Before starting the survey activities, the operator shall:
 check the technical and analytical flight parameters and the instrument settings to ensure the
accuracy as described above;
 identify and locate the GNSS reference stations on the ground and benchmarks;
 verify the reception of the satellite signals.
During the Lidar flight, at least three receivers placed on the ground shall be active, having the same
characteristics as the GNSS receiver installed on board; alternatively at least three permanent stations
referred to the existing network (with 1 second sampling interval) may be used. The distances between the
receivers shall not be higher than 10 km (6.2 mi), while the distance between the airplane and the receivers
on the ground cannot exceed 30 km to the nearest receiver and 50 km (31 mi) to the farthest. The coordinates
of the three receivers shall be known and refer to the UTM WGS84 system;
Within the work area the company shall prepare appropriate calibration areas on which will run the sensor
calibration and the calibration stability for each mission.
Furthermore, in each mission the topographer shall acquire the check points as well verify the error tolerance.
If the errors exceed the set values, the Contractor shall repeat the flight survey.
The output from a Lidar scanning survey can contain several abnormal points (outliers), both below or above
the soil, due to multipath echoes, reflections on overhead cables of electrical lines, dense smoke, birds etc.
A first phase of data cleaning is carried out to remove these points using break lines and modelling constrain
of coastlines, lakes and rivers.
ENEL requires to put in place on the ground, or identify existing, minimum 3 benchmarks in the AOI. In a
post processing phase is required to filter and eliminate buildings or other interferences to deliver a DTM.
REQUIRED DOCUMENTS
 All documentations and files listed in 2,
 Digital ortho-images (minimum 20cm GSD) (0,6 ft) obtained from ortho-rectification and mosaicking
of pictures, georeferencing and ortho-rectification, shadow reduction.
CODICE – CODE

280 of 287
RAW and RASTER data extra files

 Point Cloud "Overground" in .LAS format and geoidal heights; Density output: 4 points/m² (4
points/3,28 ft),
 Point Cloud of the DTM in .LAS format and geoidal heights; Density output: 4 points/m² (4
points/3,28 ft).
Pdf technical report

 calibration of data used in the AOI, flight laser data, GNSS trajectory of the flight, calibration and
processing documentation for INS/GNSS data. The Contractor shall deliver a report describing
the method used for the survey and the comparative statistical analysis with the data obtained
from the LIDAR flight of the areas.
1.3.1.3.2. Geotechnical Studies
Geological and Geotechnical properties of the soil shall be investigated defining the properties of the layers
where the structures will be founded, the type of soil (i.e. cohesive or non-cohesive), the main physical and
mechanical characteristics, the water table level and the presence of boulders and all the other properties.
The Contractor is responsible to issue a Test Plan before starting the site and laboratory activities.
The Contractor shall perform in any case:
 Trial pits 2x2 m, 3 m deep;
 Penetrometric test up to 5 m
The site tests shall be done in the plant area considering the following maximum spacing among each other:
Spacing of site test [m] Plant Area [ha]
150 <50
200 <150
250 <350
300 <500
450 =>500
Table 29 – Site Test Frequency
In any case the final spacing shall be authorized by ENEL.

A minimum of 1 sample in each investigation points and a minimum of 20 samples for each lithological
change shall be sampled for the below laboratory tests.
The following laboratory tests shall be executed on soil samples:
GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL TEST Standard
ASTM D422, ASTM D421, ASTM D6913,

Particle size analysis
ASTM D7928, ASTM D1140
Water content ASTM D2216
CODICE – CODE

281 of 287
GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL TEST Standard
Atterberg limits ASTM D4318
Organic content, chloride, sulfates, Buffer

ASTM D2974, ASTM D512, C1580,
capacity, pH value, Sulphites, Neutral Salt in
D4972
aqueous extract (Cl- and SO42-)
Table 30 – Laboratory Tests
In case of shallow water level (within 3 m from ground level), ENEL can require the installation of piezometer.
Geophysical tests could be necessary in case local applicable regulation requires a detailed seismic design
of the structural elements. The details for these tests shall be agreed with ENEL before starting the activities.
Thermal and electrical resistivity tests of the plant, to be used for the electrical design, shall be performed,
with following minimum frequencies
Frequency Standard Perspective depth

IEEE 81-2012 (Shlumberger
Electrical resistivity test 100 m 0-10 m
method)
Thermal resistivity test 100 m IEEE Std 442-1981 0,3 and 1,5m
Table 31 – Thermal and electrical resistivity test
The existing subgrade of the access and internal roads shall be investigated with the following tests to allow
a design of road according with the following table:
TYPE OF TEST FREQUENCY

 CBR
 Granulometry 1 test each 250 m for access roads
SUBGRADE
 Atterberg limits 1 test each 500 m for internal roads
 Standard/modified Proctor density
Table 32 – Road Tests
1.3.1.3.3. Pull-Out Test
Load tests represent the validation of embedded pile length designed by the Supplier: the embedded depth
proposed by the Supplier according to its evaluations should satisfy the acceptance criteria defined in this
technical specification for the minimum test number defined in the table below.
Minimum N° of tests Plant Size [MWp]

20 <100
40 100 - 300
60 300 - 600
100 600 - 1000
CODICE – CODE

282 of 287
Minimum N° of tests Plant Size [MWp]

120 >1000
Table 33 - Minimum Number of pile load test required
The test screw/pile locations shall be shown in a clear plan view, using a coordinate system as per local
requirements.
The test shall be done with piles of the same embedded length, obtained with preliminary calculations
performed by the tracker supplier.
Test is also aimed to verify the pile installation procedure according to geometrical characteristics of the
section and geological properties of the site.
A. LOAD TEST REQUIREMENTS

In the following, the notation “upwind” or “downwind” indicates respectively if the wind is directed on the front
surface of the module or on the back surface of the module.
 The screw or piles used for the tests shall be the ones used in the project and installed with the same
procedure and using the same machinery of the construction. The test screw/pile shall be defined:
screw/pile dimensions (section, embedded length and length above ground), helix dimensions (in
case of screws), material, protection systems, etc.;
 The Contractor has to execute these tests both in tension (pullout tests) and in compression, in
particular:
 If the base reactions relative to the highest downwind combination are higher than the
reactions relative to the upwind combinations, only the 20% of the piles shall be tested in
tension, the other 80% shall be tested in compression.
 If the base reactions relative to the highest upwind combination are higher than the reactions
relative to the downwind combinations, only the 20% of the piles shall be tested in
compression the other 80% shall be tested in tension.
 Alternative percentages may be decided and agreed with ENEL before starting the tests.
 the description of the instruments for load and displacement measurements shall be reported along
with their calibration certificates.
B. LOAD TEST PROCEDURE

B1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT
The following equipment, materials and instruments shall be considered as a minimum requirement for the
Contractor to start the activity:
 Pile driving machine: the machine shall be the same used in the construction phase; it shall be able
to drive the pile to the depth required for design. The characteristics of the machinery shall be defined
during the tender phase authorized by ENEL;
 Steel piles: steel piles, shall be the same used for the project;
 Dial or digital transducers: the maximum recordable value shall be at least 30 mm (1-3/16in), having
a precision of 0.1 mm (0.004in) or lower;
CODICE – CODE

283 of 287
 Load cell: the load cell shall be suitable to reach the required load for the test;
 Drilling machine, water and pipes: the drilling machine shall be suitable to drill holes up to 5.0 m
(16.4ft); the auger diameter shall be between 100-300 mm (4-12in);
 Hydraulic jack, or alternative equipment, able to apply the required load for the test in horizontal
direction and in vertical direction with incremental steps of 0.5 (50 kg/112.4lb));
 Contrast structure as described in section B2.
Technical data sheet and calibration certificates, not older than 1 year, shall be provided to ENEL no later
than 1 week before mobilization.
B2. CONTRAST STRUCTURE

The design shall ensure the structure to be fully operational for the whole length of the tests; in case of failure
or any defect detected during the tests the Contractor will be responsible of the structure’s replacement at its
own cost.
The structure shall be designed to resist the test loads considering all the safety factors defined in the applied
codes.
The maximum allowed elastic deflection in load direction shall be lower than 1mm (0.04in).
The structure shall be able to allow the installation of a hydraulic jack, or any alternative equipment to be
used for the test execution (including horizontal and vertical loads as described).
Different types of contrast structures can be used after ENEL authorization.
The load system shall assure the absence of vibration, the steadiness of applied load in each step, and shall
allow the application of load step as required by the pull out test procedure.
B3. SET UP OF THE TEST PILES

The test piles location shall be found on site using a GPS and indicated in the test report.
Tests can start only if the piles have reached the required depth and if piles have a vertical misalignment in
each direction not greater than the structure installation tolerances. In case of misaligned pile, the Contractor
shall inform ENEL and proceed with one of the following solutions:
 Ram the pile in a closer position,
 Change installation procedure (no extra costs for ENEL).
Set-up activity also includes the displacement, assembly and installation of the contrast structure.
B4. WETTING IN CASE OF DRY SOILS

Piles resistance can be affected by water presence in the soil. In case the load tests would be executed in
dry condition and the hydraulic study of the site would detect areas with possible water-logging, ENEL may
require to repeat at least 20% of the load tests modifying the soil water content. The tests with modified water
content will be executed with the same load schedule applied in dry condition.
The Contractor is required to provide an adequate amount of water using water trucks up to a maximum of
10.000 liters (2.6 gallons) per test. The water will be applied on a circumference around the pile having
diameter at least double of the maximum dimension of the steel profile to be tested and maintaining a
constant height of 5 cm (2in) over the ground surface. The water will be applied from a tank with volume
CODICE – CODE

284 of 287
registration in order to check the exact volume applied.

Contractor will produce a diagram of the water absorption against time; at least 1 measure of water volume
and time each 5 minutes is required.
B5. TEST EXECUTION

Once the test pile has been installed according to the procedures listed above, the load test can start. For
each pile, vertical (both in compression and pull out) and horizontal loads shall be applied according to the
procedure describe below.
PHASE 1: HORIZONTAL LOAD CYCLE

The load is applied, with a hydraulic jack installed against the contrast structure, at least at 0.5 m from the
grade in direction of the maximum stiffness of the steel profile.
 A total test load up to 150 % of the horizontal wind load Hd will be applied and removed according to
the procedure resumed in Table 34 and Figure 29.
Hd is the horizontal wind force calculated for rare serviceability load combination, if the load will be
applied in the real height of application (e.g. rotor height for monopole trackers); if the test load is
applied at a lower height, Hd will be the wind force calculated for the rare serviceability load
combination factored by 1,5.
% of Hd Load duration (s)

0 …
20 30
40 30
20 30
0 30
40 30
60 45
80 60
40 30
0 30
40 30
80 30
100 60
120 60
60 30
0 30
40 30
80 30
120 30
CODICE – CODE

285 of 287
% of Hd Load duration (s)

130 60
140 60
150 180
140 30
120 30
80 30
40 30
0 …
Table 34 – Loading Schedule
Figure 29 – Loading Schedule
 At the end of each one of the 4 steps (percentage of load equal to 40%, 80%, 120% and 150%) and
after the removal of the load (percentage of load equal to 0%), the horizontal displacement at the
base of the pile shall be registered (through a Dial Indicator with end of scale 30 mm and graduation
1/100 mm, Figure 31).
 The results of the horizontal tests shall be put on a diagram (Force-Displacement) (Figure 30) and
on a diagram (Force-time, Figure 29) and the pictures of the dynamometer at each step shall be
provided;
 Failure is considered to be reached when the following limits for maximum (d2) and residual (d1)
displacements are reached:
d1(cm/in) d2(cm/in)
Monopole 1 (0.4in) 3 (1.2in)
Bipole 2 (0.8in) 5 (2in)
Table 35 – Limit of displacement for horizontal tests
Where d1 is the residual pile displacement after the last load cycle (150% of Hd) has been removed,
CODICE – CODE

286 of 287
while d2 is the maximum displacement when the maximum load (150% of Hd) is applied.
Figure 3020 – Diagram for horizontal test
Figure 31 – Base displacements measurement
PHASE 2: REVERSE HORIZONTAL LOAD CYCLE

Once the step 1 is finished, the horizontal load shall be applied, with the same procedure
described for phase 1, but in the opposite orientation. The same results shall be provided by
the Contractor. The same limits shown in Table 35T shall be applied also in phase 2.
PHASE 3: VERTICAL LOAD

 The vertical load (pull out or compression) shall be applied to the pile. Vertical loads can be applied
to the test pile only after the completion of the horizontal load cycles (Phase 1 and 2).
 The load is applied with a hydraulic jack and will range from 0 to the pile failure.
 The load is applied in steps of 3 kN (674lb), unless otherwise request by ENEL; for each step, the
load shall be applied for the time necessary to stabilize the displacements and not less than three
(3) minutes and the relevant displacement shall be recorded.
 Failure is considered to be reached when the vertical settlement or uplift reaches 1,5 cm (0.6in). If
the equipment will not reach such value, the maximum load applied to the pile will be considered as
CODICE – CODE

287 of 287
the failure value (and this value shall be considered when defining the minimum characteristic
resistance of the pile.
 At the end of the test, once the load has been removed, the residual vertical displacement shall be
recorded too.
 The results shall be shown as in the following Table 36.
Table 36 – Pull Out Table
The applied loads and the measured displacement as well as load-displacement charts shall be shown in
the test report.

GRE - EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02 TS-PV Power Plant

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRE - EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02 TS-PV Power Plant

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CODICE – CODE

PHOTOVOLTAIC POWER PLANT

M. Scarfogliero, O. Privitera, M. Basili, C. Borgonovi A. Sabene

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED VALIDATED

ISSUED BY COUNTRY TEC. PLANT SYSTEM SERIAL N. REV.

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.1.2. AC PARALLEL ......................................................................................27

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.3.5.2. LV/LV Transformer for auxiliary Services ................................................94

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.4.4.4. Tracker Power Supply ..................................................................... 120

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.6.2.5. Local SCADA (Server/HMI) .............................................................. 168

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.9.5.1.2. Backfilling ................................................................................ 205

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.2.10.1.3. Heavy Earth Movement ................................................................... 234

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.3.1.3.1. Topography ................................................................................. 269

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

0.1. APPLICABLE REGULATION

REFERENCE CODES AND CERTIFICATIONS

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.1.1.1. MAIN COMPONENTS

1.1.1.1.1. Solar Cells

Datasheet of the solar cells is mandatory.

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.1.1.1.2. Backsheet – Monofacial

Datasheet of the backsheet is mandatory.

1.1.1.1.3. Backsheet – Bifacial

Datasheet of the backsheet is mandatory.

The datasheet of the encapsulant is always mandatory.

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02

Engineering & Construction PAGINA - PAGE

1.1.1.1.5. Front Glass

The datasheet of the front glass is always mandatory.

the coefficient b0;

1.1.1.1.6. Back Glass – Bifacial

Datasheet of the back glass is mandatory

1.1.1.2. MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

The correct symbol to be used for equipotential bonding is

Grounding connection shall be through the clamps in case of frameless module.

1.1.1.3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

1.1.1.3.1. Junction Box

Junction box datasheet is mandatory.

Global Power Generation GRE.EEC.S.27.XX.A.00000.00.156.02